: Digitized by Microsoft® PA (ffowiell Utttowitg ptarg BOUGHT WITH THE INCOME : , "*FROM THE SAGE ENDOWMENT FUND THE GIFT OF Henrn W. Sage 1891 J\*..)U.$ \\ K3j.&\mi.. Digitized by Microsoft® PA 367.T4°7 ne " Un ' Versi,y Ubrary M^SX un^lun nff£... AtMc Gre ek / All books are subject to recall after two weeks Olin/Kroch Library DATE DUE iTnTR 8 "* '^wr ■~ ~ nyu -*- Mr ^** *« nl n 1 Digitizec £>y Microsoft® PRINTED IN U S.A This book was digitized by Microsoft Corporation in cooperation with Cornell University Libraries, 2007. You may use and print this copy in limited quantity for your personal purposes, but may not distribute or provide access to it (or modified or partial versions of it) for revenue-generating or other commercial purposes. Digitized by Microsoft® A SYNTAX OF ATTIC GREEK BY F. E. THOMPSON, M.A. LATE ASSISTANT MASTER AT MARLBOROUGH COLLEGE AUTHOR OF ' HOMERIC GRAMMAR ' ", ' ELEMENTARY GREEK SYNTAX,' ETC NEW IMPRESSION LONGMANS,- GREEN, AND CO. 39 PATERNOSTER ROW, LONDON NEW YORK AND BOMBAY 1898 Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS: ■ I-13. Introduction to the Simple and Compoumd Sentence, and Definitions of Terms. The Statement, Question, and Petition, Subject, Copula, and Predicate, page 1 — The Predicate and its Supplementary Adjuncts, or Sup- plementary Predicates, 2 — The Object, Direct and Remote, 5 — The Predicate, Attributive or Epithet, and Apposition, 5 — Simple and Compound Sentences, 5 — Principal and Subordinate Sentences, 6 — Co-ordinate Sentences, 7 — Classification of Subordinate Sen- tences into : A. Substantival. B. Adverbial. 0. Relative, 7 — Oratio Recta, 10 — Oratio Obliqua, 10 — Sub-direct and Sub-oblique, 11 — Virtually Oblique, 11. PAKT I. SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. CHAPTER I. § 14-34. Subject and Predicate — Attributive and Apposition. The Subject, page 12 — The Copula, 12 — Omission of the Copula, 12 — Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive in the Accusative, and in the Nominative, 13 — Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive in the Genitive and Dative, 13 — Omission of the Subject, 13 — The Predi- cate, 14 — Peculiarities in the Agreement of Subject and Predicate, 15— Neuter Plural and Verb Singular, 15— Neuter Plural and Verb Plural, 15 — Adjective-Predicate in Neuter Singular with Plural Subject, 15— Schema Pindaricum, 16— Agreement of Predi- cate with several subjects, 16 — Sde, oStos, iKeivos, as Subject and Predicate, 18— Peculiarities of Number, Singular, Dual, and Plural, Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS. 18— The Dual Number, 19— The Plural used for the Singular, 21 — The First Person Plural used of a Singular Subject, 22 — Peculiarities of Person, 22 — Supplementary Predicates, 22 — Peculiarities in the construction of the Attributive or Epithet, 23 — Peculiarities of Apposition, 24. CHAPTER II. § 35-66. The Article. Origin and Development of the Article, page 27 — Survivals of the older usages of 6, r), t6, and 8s, ij, 8 in Attic Greek, 28 — The Article in Attic Greek, 29 — The Article with Participles, 31 — The Article with Numerals, 31 — Fluctuating Use and Omission of the Article, 31 — With Objects of external nature, 32 — With material objects, 32 — With familiar places, things, and persons, 32 — With abstract and other words, 32 — With names of arts, trades, and sciences, 33 — The Article with proper names of persons and places, 33 — With geographical names, 33 — The noun-making power of the Article, 34 — The Article distinguishes the Subject from the Predi- cate, 36 — The Article with the Predicate, 37 — Position of the Article : A. The Predicative Position. B. The Attributive Position, 37 — Position when a Genitive follows, 39 — Predicative Position when used, 40 — Attributive Position when used, 41 — Words which vary their meaning according to the position of the Article, 41 Oblique or Dependent Predicates, 43 — Idiomatic Phrases with the Article, 46. CHAPTER III. § 67 _ 77- Pronouns. Personal Pronouns, page 47 — Possessive Pronouns, 48 — Reflexive Pro- nouns, 49 — Demonstrative Pronouns, 51 — The Pronoun airbs, 53 Interrogative Pronouns, 56 — Relative Pronouns and Attraction, 57 — Attraction, 58 — Miscellaneous instances of Attraction, 59— In- definite Pronouns, 61. Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS. CHAPTER IV. § 78-126. The Cases. Preliminary note on the cases, page S4r T —T!ie Nominative, 65 — The Vo- cative, 66 — The Accusative. Preliminary Note, 66 — 1. The Internal Accusative, 67 — 2. The External Accusative, 67 — Conspectus of the Internal Accusative, 67 — The Internal Accusative, 68, includ- ing: — [a.) Accusative of Respect, 69 — (5.) Accusative of Space and Time, 70 — (c.) Accusative of Motion, 71— [d.) Accusative of the Object and Predicate in agreement or in apposition with the Object, 71 — Double Accusative, 71 — The External Accusative, 74 — Verbs which take an External Accusative, 75 — The Genitive 78 — Preliminary Note on the Genitive, 78 — Possessive Genitive, 79 — Genitive of Material or Contents, 80 — Genitive of Amount, 81 — Genitive of Plenty or Want, 82 — The Partitive Genitive (so called), 83 — Genitive of Connection, 86 — Subjective and Objective Genitive, 90 — Genitive of Time and Place, 91 — Genitive of Value, 92 — Causal Genitive, 93 — Genitive with Verbs of Judicial Proceed- ings, 95— Genitive Absolute, 96 — Genitive with Comparatives, 97 — Genitive with Verbs containing a Comparative Notion, 97 — Genitive of Separation, 98 — Free and Miscellaneous Uses, 100 — Genitive with Compound Verbs, 100 — Double Genitive, 100 — The Epexegetical Genitive, 100— Genitive of the Agent (so called), 101 — Free use of the Genitive of Connection, 101 — The Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs, 102 — Free use of the Genitive with Substantives, 104 — Preliminary Note on the Dative Case, 104 — Dative of the Indirect or Remoter Object, 105 — Miscellaneous examples of the ' Dative of the Indirect or Remoter Object, 105 — Dative of Interest, 106— Free use of the Dative of Interest, 106— Dative of the Possessor, 108-^Ethic Dative, 108— Dative of Community or Contact, 108 — Dative of the Instrument or Means, Agent, Cause, Measure of Difference, 110 — Dative of Circum- stance, 113 — Dative of Time and Place, 114 — List of Verbs which take a Dative, 116 — List of Adjectives and Adverbs which take a Dative, 119. CHAPTER V. § 127. Comparative and Superlative. Page 120 Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS. CHAPTER VI. § 128-134. Voices and Moods. The Active Voice, page 124 — The Middle Voice, 125— The Passive Voice, 130— The Mood, 132 — Introductory Note on the Subjunctive and Optative, 132 — The Subjunctive in Independent Sentences, 134 — The Optative in Independent Sentences, 135 — The Imperative, 136. CHAPTER VII. § 135-143. The Tenses. Classifications of Greek Tenses, page 138 — Time how far observed throughout the Moods, 139 — The Kind of Act or State denoted by the Tenses, 140 — Ideal division of Tenses, 141 — The Present and Im- perfect Indicative, 142 — The Perfect and Pluperfect Indicative, 144 —The Aorist, 143— Note on the Aorist, 148— The Future, 149— Gnomic and Iterative Tenses, 151 — The Tenses in the Moods, 152. CHAPTER VIII. § 144-162. The Three Verbal Nouns. 1. The Infinitive (a Substantive), page 153 — 2. The Participle (an Adjec- tive), 153 — 3. The Verbal Adjectives in tos and Teos, 153 — Note on the Infinitive, 153 — The Infinitive, 153 — The Supplementary Infini- tive, 154 — The Subject before and the Predicate after the Infinitive (commonly called the Accusative with the Infinitive), 157 — The Infinitive as a Noun, 160 — The Participle, 162 — The Participle as an Attributive, 163 — The Genitive Absolute, 165 — The Genitive Absolute in Greek and Latin, 166 — The Accusative Absolute, 167 — Verbals in -reos, 168 — Their personal construction, 168 — Their impersonal construction, 169 — The Supplementary Participle, 169 — The Supplementary Participle in agreement with the subject of the Verb : A. With Verbs of Saying and of Perception, 169 — B. With Verbs of Emotion, 170—0. With Verbs of Beginning, Continuing, and Ending an Action, 170— D. With Verbs of making Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS. or becoming Manifest, and of escaping Notice, 170 — Note on Special Verbs which take this construction, e.g. &px.o/iai, tpddvoi, XavB&vu, etc., 171 — The Supplementary Participle in agreement with the Object of the Verb : A. With Verbs of making to cease, finding, detecting, overlooking, 174 — B. With Verbs of Perception, 175 — The Tenses of the Participle, and time in the Participles, 175— The Future Participle, 176. PAET II. SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. CHAPTER I. § 163-170. Substantival Sentences. 1 . The Indirect Statement, page 178 — 2. The Indirect Question, 178 — 3. The Indirect Petition, 178— The Indirect Statement, 178 : A. The Infinitive in the Indirect Statement, 178 — B. 8n and £is with the Indicative and Optative in the Indirect Statement, 181 — ft The Participle in the Indirect Statement, 186 — -The Indirect Question, 188 — Deliberative or Dubitative Indirect Questions, 190 — The Indirect Petition, 191. CHAPTER II. § 171-206. Conditional Sentences. The Particle &v, page 193 — Definite and Indefinite Sentences, 194 — Con- ditional Sentences, 195 — Distinction of Conditions, 196 — Division of Conditional Sentences, 197 — Ordinary Conditions, 197 — Ordinary Conditions in Greek and Latin, 200 — General or Frequentative Examples, 200— The Negatives in Conditional Sentences, 201 — Relative Conditional Sentences, 201 — Participles in the Protasis, 202— Position of «*, 203— Repetition of &v, 203— "Av with the Future Indicative, 204 — Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of the Verb, 205 — Ellipse of the Protasis, 205 — W and &v both in the Protasis, 206 — A(? in Apodosis, 207 — 'E<£» seemingly interrogative, 207 — "Av with the Participle seemingly in Protasis, 208 — Conditional Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS. .Particles and their Combinations, 208 — Examples of Conditional Sentences, el with Indicative in Protasis and Apodosis, 209 — (A.) Ordinary Present Conditions, 209. {B. ) Ordinary Past Conditions, 209. (G. ) Present and Past in Combination, 210 — Ordinary Future Conditions, Mv (fy) with Subjunctive, 210 — Less Vivid Future Conditions, el with Optative, 211 — Most Vivid Future Conditions, el with Future Indicative, 212 — Mixed examples illustrating the connection between and interchangeability of the Subjunctive, Optative, and Future Indicative in Conditional Sentences, 213 — The Optative and Indicative with &v without a Protasis, 214 — Unfulfilled Conditions, el with Historic Tenses of Indicative in ' Protasis, &v with the same in Apodosis, 215 — The omission of &v in Apodosis with the Indicative, 217 — 'E<£c {tfv) with the Subjunctive, and el with the Optative in General or Frequentative Suppositions, 220— Mixed Examples, 222— Examples of the Conditional Parti- ciple in a Protasis, 224 — Examples of a Conditional Relative Sentence, 225 — Relative Conditional Sentences expressing General Suppositions, 226 — Examples of Infinitive in Apodosis with &v, 226 — Examples of Participle in Apodosis with &v, 227 — Supple- mentary Note on i&p with the Subjunctive, and el with the Optative, 227. CHAPTER III. § 207-224. Temporal Sentences. "When" in Definite Time (Past), iirel, eireiSi) (tylKa, tire), page 233— "As soon as," "Directly," in Definite Time, tirel {iweiSii), T&xurra, s, etc., with &.v and Subj., without &v and Opt., 237 — "Until" in Definite Time, tips, la-re, jui*xpi &xph 238—" Until " in Indefinite Time, las, etc., with &v and Subj., without &v an Opt., 239 — The Conjunction irplv, 240 — Ttplv with the Infinitive, 241 — Uplv with the Indicative in Definite Time (Past), 242 — \iplv with the Subjunc- tive and Optative in Indefinite Time, 242 — Uplv with the Infinitive after Negative Sentences, and with the other Moods after Affirma- tive Sentences, 243— *-kv omitted with the Subjunctive, in Temporal and other Subordinate Sentences, 245— -Av retained with the Opta- tive, 246 — The Subjunctive instead of the Optative or co-ordinate with the Optative in Historic Sequence, 246 — The Participle as a Substitute for a Temporal Sentence, 247. Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS. ix CHAPTER IV. § 225-226. Concessive Sentences. Concessive Sentences, page 249— Note on d kcu, koX d, etc., 250. CHAPTER V. § 227-239. (1) Final Sentences, (2) oVus with the Future Indicative, and (3) Verbs of Fearing with py, etc. Final Sentences, page 253 — Final Particles with the Subjunctive and Optative, 253 — Final Sentences with Past Tenses of the Indicative, 257 — Final Sentences with the Future Participle, 258 — Relative Final Sentences, 258 — Final Sentences with the Infinitive, 259 — "Ottws, Situs /itf, modal with the Future Indicative, etc. : and Vari- ant Constructions, 259 — Elliptical use of Situs, &rws /«} with the Future Indicative, 262— : '07rus, Uttus /«/ with Verbs of Commanding and Forbidding, 262 — Verbs of Fearing with /»i) and jmj 01), 262 — Verbs of Fearing, etc., with the Indicative, 266 — Note on Dawes' Canon, 267. CHAPTER VI. § 240-244, Consecutive and Limitative Sentences. Qcrre with the Indicative and the Infinitive, page 270 — Consecutive Sen- tences in Greek and Latin, 273 — Relative Consecutive Sentences, 1273 — Limitative or Restrictive Sentences, 274. CHAPTER VII. § 245. Causal Sentences. (a.) Causal Particles and a Finite Mood, page 276 — [b.) Relative Sen tences, 278— (c.) Participles, 278 — (d.) Miscellaneous ways, 279. Digitized by Microsoft® CONTENTS. CHAPTER VIII. §246. Expressions of a Wish. Page 280 CHAPTER IX. § 247. Relative Sentences Page 284 PAET III. PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO OBLIQUA, AND FIGURES. CHAPTER I. § 248-252. Prepositions. Introductory Note on Prepositions, page 286 — The Prepositions and their meanings with the three eases, 289 — Collected Usages of Prepositions, 289 — Prepositions and the cases they go with, 291. /. — Prepositions with one Case only ; § 253"255- ( a With Accusative only. And, page 291— Eis or is, 292— is, 294. § 256-264. (i.) With Genitive only. dvrl, page 294— dirb, 295— Ik, it, 297— vpt>, 300— fixeu, 301— hem, heiccv, 301 — fern, 301 — x w P' s > 301 — Old Cases used as quasi-Prepositions with the Genitive, 302. § 265-268. (c.) With Dative only. iv, page 302 — aiv, 305 — Note on civ and fierd, 306 — &p.a, 8/j.ov, etc., 306. II. — Prepositions with two Cases. § 269-272. With Accusative and Genitive, hid, page 307 — Kwrd, 310 — iirip, 314 — /icrd, 316. Ill— Prepositions with all three Cases. § 273-278. &p., I am general. The Copula is frequently omitted, being contained in the verb, or understood — He/a^? fiacrtXevei, JEerxes is king; arfa6o$ 6 aw\p, The man is good. Logically expressed, these sentences would be — Hep£>79 eon f3al\a)v, | £5>o-a. I, most unhappy maid, am descending to the cavernous chambers of the dead, I forlorn of friends, | while living still. /cpvaraXKos Ice f) Svarfiopc; Compare two Latin instances — Corpora infinita Atoms lactantur. are tossed about I in unlimited quantity. Digitized by Microsoft® 4 SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. Subject. Predicate. Saxa paullatim | anima mollia | calu- erunt. Stones gradually waxed warm with the softness of life (ita ut mollia fierent, so as to become soft). Instances may be found on any page of a book in any language. The first point to notice is that the whole expression constitutes the Predicate. The second point to notice is that, on analysing such compound Predicates as the above, there is a word (generally a verb, but it may be a noun or participle), which by itself, if all the rest were away, might stand as a simple Predicate, and that this simple Predicate is further extended or qualified by an adjunct or adjuncts. Thus in the sentence, ol 'Adrjvaiot, anrrfkdov Tptraioi, atrrfkOov rpircuoi is the Predicate : airrikdov alone as a Predicate would, with its Subject, have made a complete sentence ; but airrfkOov is extended by stating the time of departure. There may be many supplementary adjuncts which swell out the Predicate. It is most important in Greek to notice them, and discover their special force, for they often convey the real pith and gist of the predication, denoting manner, degree cause, time, condition, purpose, the anticipated result, etc. etc. In Greek, adverbs, adjectives, and participles (some- times substantives) constantly occur as supplementary adjuncts, 1 or, as they will be called throughout this book, Supplementary Predicates. 1 Dr. Donaldson called these supplementary adjuncts secondary Predicates. Thus he would have said that atr^XBov was the primary Predicate, and rpmfi* %^o^p%i crosom) PREDICATE, EPITHET, AND APPOSITION. § 3. THE OBJECT, DIRECT AND REMOTE, The direct Object is that which is immediately acted on by a transitive verb. The remote, or remoter Object is that to -which the direct object is transferred, or that which is interested and concerned in the verbal action. Awato Beiea /iva Zi%a (Copula and Predicate). Nucta? (Subject) e&v, 6(? AeTupovs e\9a>v, ripero el Tt? etr) e/ioy Te/3os. Chaerephon, going to Delphi, asked if any one were wiser than I. Here we have three sentences compounded into one, of which Xaipev is the Subject, and the rest is the Predi- cate, with the Copula contained in rjpero. So far as thought goes, it amounts to saying, ChaerepJwn | asked a question on a certain occasion. § 6. PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. In every Compound Sentence there must be one on which the rest depend in construction. Such a sentence is called the Principal Sentence. Those which depend Digitized by Microsoft® CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. in construction on it are called Subordinate Sentences. Thus, in the first example above, Nucleus eTepos, and the temporal participial sentence, et? JeXcpovs e\6av, are the Subordinate Sentences. § 7. CO-ORDINATE SENTENCES. Co-ordinate Sentences are of the same rank, i.e. con- struction, as those to which they are joined. Thus, if a sentence is co-ordinate with a Principal Sentence, it is a second Principal Sentence : if with a Subordinate Sen- tence, it is Subordinate, and of the same nature (whether an Indirect Statement, Question, Petition, Adverbial or Eelative Sentence). (See below.) Seofiai, Kai irapiefxcu v/aup /mjt6 davfia^eiv firp-e Oopvpeiv. I beg, and entreat you, neither to wonder, nor to interrupt. Here icai vaplep,ai is co-ordinate with the Principal Sentence Beo/iai, and therefore is a second Principal Sentence : while pjfre 0opvBe2v is co-ordinate with the Subordinate Sentence Oav/idgeiv (an Indirect Petition), and therefore is Subordinate, and an Indirect Petition. § 8. CLASSIFICATION OF SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. Subordinate Sentences are classified according to the relation in which they stand to the Principal Sentence. Digitized by Microsoft® SIMPLE AND COMPOUND SENTENCES. Let the three following groups be taken. A. Peincipal. (a) 1. ov paSiop earl It is not easy 2. NuClCUS 6(f)T) Nihias said (jS) 1. a&ifkov ear iv It is uncertain 2. ovk olSa I do not know (7) 1. TrepirjiyyeKKero Orderswere being sent round 2. Beofiai aov I beg you Subordinate. B. 0. KctTeyvw/cas fiov You have condemned me KareyvcoKas fiov You have condemned me You will be fortunate aveXaBov ra iroirjfiara I took up the poems ravra fiadelv. to learn this. arTparriyeiv. that he was general. el ravra Jjvvitjs. whether you understand this. o0Tt9 eort. who he is. iravarparia Bor)6eiv. to march in full force. ravra fiaSeiv. to learn this. aSi/ccos. unjustly. Sloti 'xpverov e\a/3es. because you took a bribe. rjv Tavra 77-01770-175. if you do this. a eiroirjo-e So^okXij?. which Sophocles composed. In group A it will be seen that the Subordinate Sentence supplies (1.) the Subject, (2.) the Object of the Compound Sentence. Now the chief function of a Substantive is to express the Subject or the Object. Such Subordinate Sentences as those in group A are therefore called Sub- stantival Sentences. Digitized by Microsoft® CLASSIFICA TION OF SENTENCES. 9 In group B the Subordinate Sentence is a supple- mentary Predicate to the Principal Sentence (see above, § 2). Now an Adverb is the type of a Supplementary Predicate. Subordinate Sentences of this group are therefore called Adverbial. They are Conditional (the Protasis or Condition), Concessive, Final, Modal, Con- secutive, Limitative, Temporal, Comparative. In group C the Subordinate Sentence stands like an Attributive or Epithet to the noun (iroirnxaTa) in the Principal Sentence. That noun is the antecedent to the relative, and the relative sentence is used like an adjective used attributively. Subordinate Sentences of this groitp therefore are generally called Adjectival Sentences. This, however, as we shall soon see, is too narrow a use of the term, and too inadequate a name for Eelative Sen- tences. It would be better simply to call them Eelative Sentences. For with regard to Eelative Sentences a fundamental distinction must be noticed. Some are (1) Attributive, others again are (2) virtually Adverbial. (1) Attributive (or really Adjectival) : — dveKafiov to. troirifiara a eiroirjae 5o$OK\i5s. I took up the poems which Sophocles wrote (or the Sophoclean poems). (2) Virtually Adverbial: — Tt? ouTtos evr]8r]r) owcrew a eypi- He said he, would give what he had. Digitized by Microsoft® SUBDIRECT AND SUBOBLIQUE SENTENCES. 1 1 ripofj/qv avrov ti Xeyoi. I asked him what he meant. elnre rat iraiol KoyrTeiy tt\v Ovpav. He told the boy to knock at the door. § 12. SUBDIRECT AND SUBOBLIQUE. A Subordinate Sentence is Subdirect when it depends on a, Principal Sentence in the Recta. PEINCIPAL. SUBDIKECT, a/ " A if wcrco a e^co. It is Suboblique when it depends on a Principal Sentence which itself is Subordinate. PBINCIPAL. SUBDIKECT. SUBOBLIQUE. eevya>v, the defendant; to SeSios, fear ; ol vvv, the present generation. § 15. The Copula is a verb which merely serves as a link to join the Subject and Predicate, without containing in itself the predication. The commonest Copulas are elfii and ylyvojuu. Many others, however, serve as Copulas, vtrapj^w, iretpyxa, Ka9io-Ta/j,ai. Note. Other Copulas are ovop.d.^op.a.1, KaXov/tot, aivop,ai t Tvyx^vb), and KvpG) (even without a participle), kAtJu and oKcwft) (I am called, or, spoken, of), ireXio in poetry. el[ii, expressing existence, may be more than a copula ; it may be a predicative verb, e.g. Stem 0eos, there is a God. § l6. OMISSION OF THE COPULA. The Copula is often omitted in Greek, in fact, where- ever the distinction between Subject and Predicate is clearly marked without it : to fiavnKov yeVo? (pikapyvpov. SOPH. Antig. The tribe of seers is covetous. eydpwv aScopa 8a>pa kovk ovr\aiyM. SOPH. Antig. Giftless the gifts of foes, and profitless. 12 Digitized by Microsoft® SUBJECT AND PREDICA TE OF AN INFINITIVE. 13 And sometimes the Copula, in a freer way, is omitted in dependent clauses where we might have expected it to be expressed : eras eV kv ocrcjkaA.e?, v\d£aor6e. DEM. 19. 26. While you are still in safety, be on your guard. ecos sub. tore. Cf. Eur. Hipp. 659. Thuo. i. 91. 1. § 17. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE OF AN INFINITIVE. The Subject and the Predicate of an Infinitive are m the Accusative. But the Subject and Predicate of an Infinitive are in the Nominative when they refer to the Subject of the Principal Verb. The same two rules apply to the Subject and Predicate of a Participle. For further rules, and for examples, see Compound Sentence, Indirect Statement. § l8. The Subject and Predicate of the Infinitive (or Participle) may be in the Genitive or Dative, if the principal verb governs either of those cases. rjcrdofi-qv avrZv olojxivmv WTa,Tti>v uvai. PLAT. Ap. vi. I noticed that they fancied they were the wisest of mankind. The subject to etvai is omitted, croffxaTarav is the Predicate, jravri Xjooo-ij/cei ap^ovri povifi

ao-i, it is said; oiovrai, people think. Cf. Latin, ferunt, tradunt. Ti's, rtVes, avOpum-oi, in phrases like the last, may be expressed (like the French on) — e.g. fjv tis dSixy, if one commits injustice. (d) Ordinary impersonal verbs and expressions' — <£ ?x«> /tcAet, etc. Note. The Latin rule that only transitive verbs which are followed by an accusative in the active can be personal in the passive does not hold in Greek. Thus we may say KaTqyopiti 'EiOKparovs, I accuse Socrates; and Sftwcparijs KarqyopeiTai, Socrates is accused. Tna-Tevop-ev SaHcparei, we believe Socrates (Socrati credi- mus); and EtoK/Dcmjs 7rt,paivei, good deeds gladden the soul. § 22. A plural verb with neuter plural Subject occurs rarely (chiefly in Thucydides, Xenophon, and Plato). In such cases (often when persons are implied) the distributive character of the noun is brought out. Thus in Thuc. i. 58, there are two readings, — ret rkXir) otot-xeto and mrko-ypvTO. If inrco-xero, Thucydides is following ordinary usage : if wr&rxovro, he is thinking of the persons (the magistrates promised). evravda ^trav to. Suevi/etrios fituriXua. XeN. An. 1. 2. 23. There were the (several) palaces of Syennesis. Obs. The phrase 8of av ravra, When it had been thus resolved, which occurs as well as Sogavra ravra,, follows in the participle the construction of Sokci Tamo. § 23. An Adjective-Predicate in the neuter singular may be used with a plural Subject. The Predicate sums up collectively the character of thet Subject. KaXov rj akrjdeia xai fiovi/iov* PMT. Truth is noble and abiding. epcores ica/cov fieya. Eukip. Loves are a great curse. Digitized by Microsoft® ii i. t6 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. Note. Cf. Eur. El. 1035 ; Ar. Ecc. 236; Plat. Phaed. 242 (fiavriKov ti 17 4>vxq). The stock quotation is from Hom. II. U. 204, ouk ayaflov woXvKoipavorj, cts Kolpavos lo-no, No good thing the rule of the many, one ruler be there. Compare with this the use of the phrases, jravra thai, to be all in all (i.e. of prime importance) ; to. ir/xDra dvai, to be the head and front of; wavr' rjv 'A\e£av8pos, Alexander was every- thing, all in all. Dem. 23. 120. § 24. In the poets, and in Plato, a singular verb is occasionally found with a plural Subject. From the occur- rence of this construction in Pindar it is called the Schema Pmdaricum. io-ri yap epoiye f3(ap.o[. PLAT. Euthyd. 302. I have altars. The verb generally comes first in this construction. Cf. Pind. Frag. 344; Pyth. x. 7; Eurip. Ion, 1146; Helen. 1358; Absch. Pers. 49. Compare in French, "il est cent usages;" and Bacon, Advancement of Learning, n. ii. 7, " a portion of the time wherein there hath been the greatest varieties." Shakspere, Macbeth, v. iii. " Serv. There is ten, thousand — Mac. Geese, villain? Serv. Soldiers, sir." In some cases, however, the apparent singular in English is a real dialectic plural. § 25. Agreement of the Predicate when there are several Subjects. The Dual Subject is considered separately. (1) The first case is where the Subjects are persons. Here (a) with regard to number, the Predicate may be either correctly plural, or singular in agreement with one prominent subject ; (6) with regard to gender, the masculine is preferred to the feminine ; (c) with regard to person, the first is preferred to the second, the second to the third. kcu ij yvvfj Kai 6 dvfip ayadol elcnv. PLAT. Men. 73. Both the wife and the husband are good. utok dva/??jcreTcu ■I'lA.Hnros kcu 'Avnyevrj^ kcu 6 dvnypafavs. Dem. 22. 38. Perhaps there will appear Philip, and Antigenes, and the controller. Digitized by Microsoft® PECULIARITIES IN THE AGREEMENT. ij eitov veovs Kal vects opiXovvTas aXXr/Xous. PLAT. Leg. 835. I saw young men and women associating together. eya> Kal ol aXXoi Trpear/3eis irepiijXdop.ev. DEM. 129. 72. 1 and the other envoys went round, (rv te "EXXtjv et Kal -qfiets. XEN. Anab. ii. 1. 16. You and we are Greeks. You are Greek, and (so are) we. Observe the emphatic position of the verb when it is in the singular. (2) The second case is where the several Subjects are things. Here (a) with regard to number, we frequently find the Predicate in the singular, in agreement with one prominent Subject; frequently also in the plural ; (b) with regard to gender, the Predicate, when plural, is generally neuter, when singular it agrees with the prominent Subject. T(ov ko.ku>v r] crracrts icai 6 iroXe/ws cutios icrnv. DEM. Sedition and war are the cause of our troubles. Xrjdv) Kal SvcrKoXta Kal fiavia iroXXaKis els ttjv Sidvoiav ipy- ttuttoiio-iv. Xen. Ap. iii. 12. 6. Forgetfulness, and discontent, and madness often attack the mind. to vyiaiveiv Kal to voveiv dyaOa. av ei>j. Xen. Ap. iv. 2. 36. Health and sickness might be blessings. The singular Predicate is not unknown in English : Destruction and unhappiness is in their ways. Ps. xiv. 7. So great an affinity hath fiction and belief. Bacon, Advancement of Learning, i. 4. 8. (3) The third case is where, in the Subjects, there is a com- bination of persons and things. Here the person will generally in gender over-ride the thing; in number, as before, both singular and plural are used. kirvOiTO rbv ^Tpop,/3i)([Sr]V Kal rai vavs direXrjXvdora. Thuc. viii. 63. 1. Me heard that Strombichides and his fleet had sailed away. fj tvx>] Ka ' ^iXanro's ?yo"av tZv ipyiov Kvpioi. Aeschin. 12. 181, Fortune and Phi^w&rf ma^fers s g^£vrcumstances. 1 8 SUBJECT A ND PREDICA TE. Great variety is allowable where there is a plurality of Subjects. The leading principles only have been indicated in the above rules. With disjunctives, $—% ovre — ovre, the Predicate generally agrees with the nearest Subject. § 26. The demonstrative pronouns 6Se, oStos, tKetvos, when used as Subjects to a Predicate, or as Predicates to a Subject, either (1) are assimilated to the gender and number of their subject or predicate, or (2) are in the neuter singular or plural. (1) l/cetj/os karw e\.ey)(os peyianos. LYS. 16. 6. This is the strongest proof. oTpcu i/xr/v ravT-qv Trarpifta. eTvai. XEN. Anab. IV. 8. 4. I think that this is my country. Cf. Verg. Aen. vi. 129, hoc opus, hie labor est. (2) toCt' elo~lv ot \6yoi. DEM. 8. 7. The statements are these (come to this). ov Xoycov kojUttos raSe. ThUC. ii. 41. 1. This is no boastful talk. Cf. the use of raSe : ovk "Icoves Ta.Se e'uriv, THUC. vi. 77. 1. These are not Ionians, we have no lonians here. Cf. Exm. Androm. "168. Also cf. ri, on, (interrogative) : — S-qpoKpariav ourda rl so-tiv ; Do you know what democracy is ? 8ov\evop,ev deots S -n ttot' ela-iv ol dioi. Euk. Or. 418, we are slaves to gods, whatever these gods may be. So the phrase tovto dXrjdrj \eyeis, what you say is true. § 27. Peculiarities of Number — Singular, Dual, and Plural. (a) The singular is used for the plural (a) with collective nouns, (5)'with nouns of material, (c) with nouns denoting nationality, (d) in several military expressions, etc. (a) 6 i)(6p6s, the enemy ; b itkhas, one's neighbour. (b) i 6ea, paralw, dgiw occur with feminine nouns. (3) The strict dual agreement is shown in the following examples : rd) aSeA.c/>u> aurd) &7rep iyeveo-Orjv apcp® airatSe £TeXevrrjO-aT7jv. ISAEUS, 6. 6. The two brothers themselves who were born both died childless. Similarly when there are two Subjects : — rjSovr) Kal Awij kv rrj. ttoXu /3ao-iXevo-erov. PLAT. Mep. 607. Pleaswe and pain shall reign m the State. A good instance occurs in Soph. El. 977-985, where the effect is heightened by the dual form. Svo e£ li/os dyuvos yeyivi)o-0ov. ANTIPH. HEROD. 85. Two trials have been made out of one. (4) The following miscellaneous instances show the irregu- larity of agreement both in gender, and in number : — dfi(f>w rovTto to) fjixkpa. Xen. Gyr. i. 2. 11. Both these days. KonqyopTfcriV dp,otv toIv iroXeoiv. Is. xii. 9. 7. He accused both the states. TO) X e V e ™ s ° © £ os eiroayrev. XEN. Ap. ii. 3. 18. The hands which God made. T(av avTWV SIovtcu Kal fj yvvrj Kal o dvqp. PLAT. Men. 73. The wife and the husband need the same things. N.B.—Svo agrees with a dual or plural noun, or verb — dpotv, generally with the dual ; dpsfrorepos, more commonly with plural than dual. e/3oi5AeTO ol T&) 7rc»(5e dpcfiorepw irapdlvai. XEN. An. i. 1. 1. He wished both his sons to be present. direOavov ol orpaTrjyol dp.(f>6Tepoi. THUC. V. 7&. 2. Both the generals were slain. (5) A dual verb is found joined to a plural subject, or several subjects, when the subjects are arranged or contrasted Digitized by Microsoft® THE PLURAL USED FOR THE SINGULAR. 21 singly or in pairs. This construction occurs several times in Homer. (See Jelf, § 388. 1.) 8vvdp.ei$ dp^orepai ko~rov So£a kcu iirurTrjfLr). Pl. Rep. 478, b. Both are faculties, opinion and certain knowledge. So Aesch. Bum. 256, Xevo-a-erov, of the chorus divided into ■qp.i)(opia. § 29. The Plural for the Singular is used — (1) With proper names — ol 'HpcucAees re 66voi ovk lyyiyvovTat. Plat. Leg. 679. Self-controlled persons are not subject to rivalry and envy (or fits of rivalry, etc.). (3) Terms of weather and time — 6d\irq, 0epp.6Tr)Tts, heat; if/v£eis, cold; ■xa.Xafai, hail; o/iftpoi, rain; avxpoi, drought; Tra-xvai, frost ; epwt/3ai, mildew ; /tecrai vvktcs, midnight, vvktss, hours or watches of the night. (4) , Material Nouns — mipoi nal npidal, wheat and barley. But here a distinction is commonly made between singular and plural, e.g. Kpeas, apiece of meat, Kpka,meat; gvXov, a piece of wood, stick, cudgel, gvka, timber; rjXios, the sun, tjXioi, rays of the sun; dXs, salt, aA.es, salt-works; Xoyurpos, a reckoning, Xoyt.a-p.ol (also Aqytos, £ku>v, Ikowios, &ko>v (invitus) ; (b) adjectives of number, wp&rym, ^TQ^f^po^v^o,, glares, Sevrepaios 5 UPPLEMENTA R V PREDICA TES. 23- (on the second day), rpiTaioi (on the third day) ; (c) words refer- ring to time or place, opdpios, in the morning; xpowos, late; alvi8t.os, suddenly ; tTKoratos, o-Ktmatos, m the dark ; jroaraios, in how many days ? 6 'Acr(07ros 7roTa/ios ippvr) p.eyas. ThUC. ii. 5. 2. The river Asopus flowed with a strong stream. diKvovvTai ai(f>vlSioi. THUC. viii. 14. 1. They arrive suddenly. Ka/cos iKUiv ovScis. Plat. Tim. 86. No one is deliberately wicked. OTrovS&s Xvovcriv oi irporepoi oriiWes. THUC. i. 123. 3. The breakers of treaties are the first aggressors. Observe the following distinctions (Kriiger, p. 229) : — 7T/0UTOS ^K-qOvjuvQ Trpocrif3a\e. He was the first who attacked Methynme. TpwTYj ^li.'qOvp.V'g rrpo(re/3a\e. Methynme was the first place he attacked. TrpSrov Mrjdv/J,vg TrpocreftaXe. His first act was to attack Methymne. The Greek adjective is more freely used in this way than the Latin, but see Eoby, Lat. Gr., 1069. § 33- Peculiarities in the Construction of the Attributive or Epithet. A Substantive is sometimes used as an attributive to another Substantive — (1) Commonly with dvrjp, avOpunros, yvvq, e.g. dvr)p oirXirrjs, a heavy-armed soldier ; dvyp rupawos, a despot ; ypavs ywr), an old woman ; avOpwiro's 7roAtTijs, a citizen; dvrjp Sira/mariys, a Spartan citizen. So avSpes 'AB-qvaioi, avSpes SiKao-Tat, Athenians, jurymen. (2) Many miscellaneous Substantives are thus used as Adjectives, especially in the poets, but some in prose also : SXeOpos MaKeSdv (ypafijuarev^), Dem. 9. 31. 18. 127, a scoundrel of a Macedonian, or a pestilent Macedonian, a pestilent scribe; 07tA,itijs o-Tparos, Kocr/tos, EUK. Her. 699, 800. ; yepav 6 V ® avoiav. Plat. Phaedr. 93. 2. A Substantive (with adjuncts) either in the Nominative or Accusative may be in apposition to the verbal action. This is known as the Nominative or Accusative in Apposition to the Sentence. kuvto.1 7T£croi/T€S, Trixrrvs ov crpuKpa iroXu. EUR. Rhes. 415. (Some) have fallen and lie buried, no slight proof of loyalty to the realm. evSaipovoiijs, purObv ffiUntov \6yav. EUE. El. 231. Blest le thou, the reward of sweetest tidings. The stock example is — 'EAivijv KTavdXatov (denique, ad summam) to sum up . o-y\p,iiov 8e, reK^piov Se, as an inttance, in proof of this ; and many others. to Xeyofievov, k. PLAT. Gorg. 4:77. We are come too late for the feast, as the saying is. 'Adrjvaioi 7repl 86£t]S p,aXXov £v. toc/m//" " ^*" XPW aTa y°-P irXeurra virep (ftiXorijuai avrjXuxrav. DEM. 20. 10. The Athenians used to care more for reputation than money. As a proof of this assertion, they spent vast sums of money for a noble ambition. (4.) Sometimes a genitive is found in apposition to a genitive which is implied in a possessive pronoun or adjective : e.g. to. vpirepa avrutv for to. vp.(av avrSv, o ep,6s tov TaXanrwpov Bios the life of me, wretched one, tov raXanrdpov agreeing with an kp,ov implied in eptbs. S apurre dvSplov, 'Adrjvatos uiv, 7r6Xe(as t»}s p,eyio-Tris etc. (7roA.ecos in apposition to 'AOrjvwv implied in 'AO-qvalos). Plat. Ap. xviii. My excellent friend, you an Athenian, a citizen of the greatest city, etc. Cf. Aesch. Pers. 162, where a genitive and a possessive are combined Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTEE II. THE AETICLE. § 35- Origin and Development of the Article. '0, ij, to (as well as 6s, ij, o) was originally a demonstrative. Besides being a demonstrative it supplied the place of the third personal pronoun, the relative, and the definite article. The first point to bear in mind about 6, fj, to, is its essentially demonstrative character. In Homer 6, »), to is a demonstrative, both substantive and adjectmie : (a) Substantive : twv vvv /mv fivrp-aa-a, of those things now putting him in mind. (J) Adjective : 6lo-ei o-e to o-bv /uei/os, that thy courage will mar thee. It also takes the place of the third personal pronoun. rfjv 8' iyi) ov Xvot^os 5 AjroAA.eov, and Phoebus Apollo heard that one (him). It also does the work of the relative. avaKTi, tov ijwcojuos tc/ce Aijtu, to the king, whom fab- haired Leto bare. The following examples show the transition in Homer from the demonstrative to the definite article. 6 8' e)8pa}(e )(a\Keos "Aprjs. And he, brazen Ares, roared. Here the noun is in apposition to the demonstrative 6. avrap 6 toio~i yepuv 68bv ijyo/ioveuev. But he, the old man (or the old man), was leading the way dW ore Si) rr/v vtjo-ov diKeTO. But when now he came to that (the) island. TO T6 O-06VOS OjOMDJ'OS. And the might c^^ byMicmsom 28 THE ARTICLE. So ot aAAot, the rest; to t' eovTa ra t' eo-ouei>a, tffte present and the future. The last examples show that the use of 6, fj, to as the definite article is to be found as early as Homer. It must be borne in mind however that such a use of 6, fj, to in Homer is exceptional. According to old Greek (Homeric) use, nouns stand without the article as in Latin. Seivf] Se icXayyfj yiver 1 apyvpeoio yStoto. And terrible arose the twang of the silver bow. In Attic Greek prose fj Kkayy-q, tov /3ioto would be required. To sum up therefore — (a) os, fj, o, originally demonstrative, became the relative (with occasional traces in Attic of its older use). (b) o, fj, to, originally demonstrative, became the definite article (though instances occur in Attic of its use as a demon- strative and as a relative). (c) oBtos, oSe, Ikeivos took the place of 6, ij, to, as demon- stratives in Attic. The third personal pronoun was in Attic expressed by (d) the oblique cases of aw-os and (when necessary) in the nominative by the demonstratives. Obs. The origin and development of the definite article from the demonstrative may be illustrated by English, German, and French. Thus in English the relatives wlw, what, which were originally interrogatives only. The demonstrative still is constantly used by us as a relative, e.g. I know the person that you speak of. In German der is still demonstrative, definite article, and relative. In French the personal pronoun U and the definite article le both come from the demonstrative ille. § 36. Survivals of the older usages of 6, i\, to, and os, ■?), 6, in Attic Greek. I. o, fj, to as a demonstrative : With /iev and Se, 6, fj, to is freely used in all its cases, o jxkv — 6 Se, the one, the others ol /lev— oi Se, some, others; with Digitized by Microsoft® THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK. 29 tis, 6 fitv tis — 6 Se;' to (rol) ii.lv — to (to!) Se, to 8e ti, partly ; tq fx.lv — Ty Se, this way, that way ; to Se, whereas ; tov ko.1 tov, this one and that one ; to koX to, this and that. eSei yap to ko.1 to iroifj&ai Kal to //.fj irbi»}o-iXei. AESCH. Ag. 642. With the twofold scourge that Ares loves. IV. os, 17, o used as a personal pronoun with ko.L ouSeis dvTeXeye' koX os rjyeiTO. XEN. No one opposed, and so he acted as guide. It is rare, except in the common phrase ij" S' os. eori tis, €rjv kyu> ; Travu ye, ^ S' os. PLAT. Ap. iv. Is there any one 2 said I. Certainly, said he. THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK. § 37. Two points must be remembered : 1. The Article is essentially demonstrative. 2. The old usage was to omit the Article with .definite objects (see § 35). This old usage survived in many instances, and hence to a great extent the fluctuating use of the Article in Attic. The Article, corresponds generally to. the English definite article the: It marks off objects as known and definite whether (A) individuals or (B) classes. K Digitized by Microsoft® THE ARTICLE. (A) The Article denotes individual persons or things which are definite, because — (a) Already known ; (b) Already mentioned ; (c) Distinguished from other objects, often by some accompanying description ; (a) rav eVra o-o^xoTarot; r\v ~%6\xov. PLAT. Of the seven sages Solon was the wisest, (b) Sovkevofiev 6eoh o ti ttot etcrlv ol Oeou EURIP. We are slaves to gods, whate'er these gods may be. (c) o irpecr/3iiTepo<; aSe\ 'OpovTqv. XEN. They seised Orontes by the girdle. This last example shows how the Article is used where in English we employ a possessive pronoun. eicaaTO<} twv Srjfuovpycov ttjv re^vqv KaXw? e%eipya£ero. PLAT. Each one of the artisans (just mentioned) used to practise his art well. Obs. The English article the was so used for the possessive in old English. See Bacon's Advancement of Learning, ed. Wright; Glossary — The. (B) The Article denotes the whole of a class, with substantives or adjectives, in singular or plural. 6 pr\Twp, the (professional) speaker ; ol 'wireis, the knights ; ot, aofyoX av$pe$, wise men ; 6 povi/jLO<;, the prudent man; ol irovrjpoi, bad men. Digitized by Microsoft® THE ARTICLE WITH PARTICIPLES. 31 6 ttcupov£)V aXuTKerai. MEN. 714. Every one who does not think is exposed, § 39. The Article with Numerals. The article may be used with cardinal numerals either to mark a definite whole, or the definite parts of a whole, e.g. .ra Svo pepr), two-thirds (cf. Thtjc. i. 10 and iii. 15); apfa tous etKoo-t, about twenty in all. t<3i> iracrcuv Tpirjptav rag SiaKOtrias iq tto\ivvp.ov, Se£tov, left wing, right wing. Pao-bXevs is the (Persian) king; /Jao-iAcvs o /ueyas, ol xpoyovoi, ol (Sao-iXetos. So wpwdvevs, the Presidents of the Council. § 44. The Article with Abstract and other words. Here the use is very fluctuating. 17 dpirrj, virtue ; r) dvSpeia, courage ; 17 SiKaioo-vvrj, justice ; ij poXV> body, soul ; Oeos, God (no special divinity) ; avOpamos, man ; 7tcu8es ko.1 yui/cuKes, women arid children ; irarpls, father- land ; ttoXis, state or country. § 46. The Article with names of Arts, etc. Names of arts, trades, and sciences do not take the article : Hovo-iKr), yvfj.va.a-Ti.Krj, education, mental and physical; pr/TopiKrj, rhetoric; api9/j.r)TiKrj, \oyio-p.oi, arithmetic, numeration. Similarly, S6£a, vovs, Tex vr )> v6p.os, opinion, mind, art, law. § 47. The Article with Proper names of persons and places. Names of persons and towns do not require the article unless previously mentioned, or spoken of as well known. Sawcjoarqs, but 6 2a>KpaT»;s, either Socrates already men- tioned, or the well-known Socrates, Socrates ille. So 6rjf3au, ou QfjBai. 'AAe£av8os 6 Ma/ceSwv, J AAe£av8pos 6 QiXittttov, Alexander son of Philip. Also in short business-like notices, 2/a>aT»js 'Eaxppovio-Kov, Socrates, son of Sophroniscus. The same rule applies to names of nations, but 01 'EAAijves always when opposed to 01 Bdpfiapoi. When nationalities are opposed (as we say " French and English ") the article is not used e.g. ' kd-qvaioi, Aa/ccSou/joi/iot (so repeatedly in Thucydides). 01 Ariiwo-Oeveis, orators like Demosthenes (as we say, our Burkes, our Ohathams). s 48. The Article with Geographical names. With geographical names the use and position of the article are extremely fluctuating. The following collocations are generally given as the rule, and may safely be employed. o Euc6paTJ?s iroTap.6s, the river Euphrates ; to 2orJnov aKpov, the ■promontory ofSunium; ■g GeoTrpams yy, the land of Thresprotis ; AriAos vrja-os, the island of JDelos ; rj MivSr/ n-dAis, the city of Mendfl. Digitized by Microsoft® 34 THE ARTICLE But the following are given as a caution against dogmatism : o TTOTa/ios 6 Ev^pciTJjs, "AA/us TTOTap,6 fi/uv, what is in our power. (d) Genitive; to. t^s Tvyrii, the dispensations of fortune ; to. tt}? Digitized by Microsoft® NOUN-MAKING POWER OF ARTICLE. 35 ■n-oXetas (without TrpdyfiaTa), the affairs of the state, politics. to tov &e/j.io-TOKMovs, the words of Thenmstocles, Themis- toclis illud. (e) Infinitives; to [iicreiv, hatred ; to Tayy XaXelv, rapid talking (tov Tayy ~Ka\eiv, etc.). •So with a sentence, to e/ie tovto irpagai. (/) Adverbs; ol ev0aSe, the living ; 01 eicec, the dead ; 01 nrakai, the ancients, ol tote, ol vvv, ol oIkol = ol ev olkw tote. rj irapavTiKa TjSovrj, momentary pleasure; rj ayav kXtvdepia, excessive liberty. Note 1. So with a word or even a letter used materialiter, tu kyu>, the word I (similarly in French — le moi est haissahle) ; to aXfa (Plat. Crat. 405), the letter Alpha. •u/teis, 5 avSpes'Adyvaioi. — to S' vpeii orav efiroi r>)v iroXir Aeyw. DEM. 255. 4. You, Athenians, and whenever I say you, I mean the state. OTe/osy8ij to koI eav aX<£ <}>6vov. DEM. 23. 220. He omitted the words, " and if he be convicted of murder." to yvmOi trnvrbv iravraxov 'o-ti \prjo-ipov. Menandeb, Fr. 730. The adage, know thyself, is useful ever. Note 2. Instead of repeating a noun it is enough to repeat the Article. oi tu>v iroXvrSiv iralSes ko.1 ol tZv aXX(ov (sc. jraiSes). The children of the citizens and those of the others. Note 3. When two or more terms are joined so closely together as to form one notion, or when they may be brought under one head the article is put only once. oi o-Tparrjyol Kai Xo)(ayoi. The chief officers, namely generals and captains of companies., 6 tfXios Kal oreX-qvo koX wrrpa. The heavenly bodies, sun, moon, and stars. Digitized by Microsoft® 36 THE ARTICLE. § 50. THE ARTICLE DISTINGUISHES THE SUBJECT FROM THE PREDICATE. The Subject takes the Article, the Predicate is without the Article. 6 fiev 8t«oS 5T0TS 1J OLKpaTOS SlKaiOO-VVT] TTpb$ dSlKldV T7IV fi.Kpa.Tov e\ei. Pl. Hep. viii. 535. We must consider how pure justice is related to an injustice which is pure (sheer, unmixed). Note 3. A Predicate may occur inside an attributive phrase. al apia-'Tai SoKov&ai tlvai vcreis. XEN. Ap. 4. 1. 3. Those natures which appear to be the best, or which appear to be the best nati$$ tized by Microsom FORMS USED WITH GENITIVE. 39 So especially with 6 Xeyopevos, 6voiioi.£6p.evos, Ka.ko-6/i.evos. to KoTvX.aiov 6vofia(6/ievov opos. AESCHIN. 3. 86. The hill of Cotylaevm as it is called. Mons Gotylaeus qui dkitw. And regularly ol 'AOrjvaioi KaXov/itvoi, §53- WHEN' A GENITIVE FOLLOWS, SEVERAL FORMS ARE USED. L. r> tov Trarpos oucia. L, . „ , , ■, 1 „ , >■ Lhe commonest forms. I. r) oiKia tov 7rar/305. ) 4. tov TraTpos 17 oiKva. 1. 2. 3. r\ oucia r\ tov TraTpos. Less common. f This form is used when the Genitive has been used just before, or is empha- sised. In accordance with the last position, — tov \iapiov r) am-opia., ThUC. iv. 29 ; irepl tov purOov ttjs diroSocrews. THUG. viii. 85. Note. Where there are two or more Attributives, some one or other of the above arrangements is employed. (a) According to the first position — p.efJ.vrjo-de T)}s ev 2aA.a> tSj %et/3e, both hands. eir afj,oTepoi<; toi? Xofiecrt, off both harbours. Note. Where there is an Adjective also the usage varies. 17 0-7-evrj avrr) 086s, Xen. Anab. iv. 2. 6. This narrow way. But kKtlvq rj v^rjXordTfj TrXdravos. PLAT. Phaed. 229. That most lofty plane. (c) eKaaTos is variable. ev eKaa-TTj Ty iro\ei Kara ttjv rjp,e'pav eKdarrjv or ev e/caaTT) 7roXet. or ica& q/jue'pav iicd(TTr]v. In each state. Bay by day. Note. The Demonstratives, especially o8e, are often used in the poets without the Article. •ywaiKos rrja-Se. AESCH. Ag. 1438. £w Ty8i xv'. Soph. Antig. 43. And also in their deictic use. KjOiTWV KpiTofiovkov TovSe warrjp. PLAT. Apol. xxii Crito, father of Critobulus, here (in court). Digitized by Microsoft® THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION. 41 § 55- THE ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION IS USED BY (#) TOIOVTOS, TOlOfhe. ij Toiavrr) eirurrrj/Mj, such knowledge, ev tj; roiaSe avdyicr], in such a difficulty. Note. 6 toiowos, such a person; kv t toiovtq, m such a case. The Article is also so used with ttchos: t>}s ttoms pepiSos; Dem. 246, 10, of what division ? 6kX tov \6yov, dW els d^Lo^peuiv vp,lv tov XiyovTo, dvoi. PLAT. Apol. V. The words which I shall use are not mine: the speaker to whom I shall refer you is trustworthy. tKavbv irape)(op.ai tov pdpTvpa. PLAT. Apol. xviii. Competent is the witness whom I produce, ov yap /Javaucov ttjv tkyytpi eK-rqcrdp/qv. SOPH. Ai. 1121. Ay, for 'tis no mechanic art that I acquired. (Cf. Electra.) Tovpyov ov paKpdv Aiyeis, SOPH. Phil. 26. The task thou settest is not far to seek § OI. Very often, especially in the poets, 58e is the subject to an Oblique Predicate. The Predicate is often an interro- gative. We may often translate this demonstrative in English by "here," "herein." dnropo) ye T$8e £vpireir\eype9a £kvb>. EUR. Bacch. 800. Truly an unmanageable stranger this we have come across. (d-Tropif Predicate, T$8e Subject.) ■iroiaio-i roXpais TcusSe kou pevtav Opaxrei, ; SOPH. Ai. 42. With what hardihood herein, and boldness of soul ? (iroiaio-L the Predicate, TatsSe the Subject.) Cf. Ant. 1295, ToSe— Sewepov. So, like the last — ttoctov ayei to o-rpdrevpa ; How many battalions does he bring into the field? Tavrij dirokoyia xprjrai. DEM. 49. 63. He makes this a^gjggj.^ Microsofm WITH GENITIVE AND DATIVE. 45 Many excellent instances of the Oblique Predicate occur in. Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 10. 11, 1. a. 2, Herod. 1, 9, 11, 16, 18, 84, 93; Ant. 1178. § 62. Oblique Predicates are found in Latin, but they can be detected only by the emphatic or artificial position of a word. Omnem crede diem tibi dihrasse supremum. Hor. Ep. 1. iv. 13. Live every day as though thy last. Compare the example below, § 65, afoearav rty Sokov, with a line in Propertius — Fidaque suggesta castra coronat humo. Prop. v. 4. 8. He enrings a trusty camp by throwing up the soil. § 63. Oblique Predicates in the Genitive and Dative. fjyovfievoi. avTOv6fj.a>v to Trpwrov £vfi[idx<»v. THUC. i. 97. At the head of allies who at first were independent. rovTiov rurl v\a£iv ixprJTO. Some of these he was using as guards. Cf. Soph. Antig. 556. § 64. Free use of the Oblique Predicate. Sometimes it expresses a mere emphasis. [ieydXy rfj X^S ™ Jravra fioi irkirpaKrai. Dm 18. 298. With uprightness and integrity of heart I have done all {in the uprightness and integrity of my heart). aAiecrav rrjv Sokov x a ^ a P a ' s Ta ' s «^°" eo "'- THUC. ii. 76. They were lowering the beam by loosening the chains (with the chains loosene^. gjtjzed by Mjcrosofm 46 THE ARTICLE. §66. Idiomatic Phrases with the Article. iroXXoi, many. ol woXXoi, the many, the people. Populares. 7rX.eoves, more, ol irkeoves, the majority. Maior pars. oXlyoi, few. ol oXlyoi, the oligarchical party or faction. Opti- mates, optimus quisque (also ot dyadoi, etc.) cUAot, others. ol aXXoi, the others, the rest. Ceteri. to (t6(3os), momentary terror ; f) avpiov, the morrow. to /xeXXov, to hrena, the future ; 6 eireira /Stos (PLAT. ), the life to come. to Xourbv, to. Xonrd,for the future, for the rest. to Trpiv, to irdpos, to irpovBev, the past or former time (chiefly poetical phrases) ; to dp^aiov, to 7raXa,i6v, of old; Tct irapeXdovTa, to. irapeXrjXvdora, the past (in prose). to tote, ev t§ tots, at that time ; kv t<£> irpo tov, previously. to irpZrov, at first ; to reXtvTatov, at last (so to Sevrepov, TO T/OlTOv). to 7roXXd, for the most part (so to irXkov, to, irXdui) ■ to pkyuTTov, for the greatest part, or the chief point; to. p.dXio-Ta, in the highest degree ; <£>s «ri to ttoXv, for the most part ; to ttS,v, h to ttcLv, on the whole. to. tj}s Tu^iys, Fortune and her dealings (a periphrasis for to, tjjs TrdXetos, politics. 6 (ot) trdvv, the excellent, ot famous; ol irdw tSv o-TpaTia- rav, the pick of the troops; 6 irdw ILepiicXfjs, the admirable Pericles. iv tois TTpHsroi, first of all. Omnium primi. in tou Jn-t OaTepa, from the opposite direction; Ik tov «jt' dpio-Tepd, from the left. ol wept, ol d/j.^, ol diro, etc. See Prepositions, Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTEE III PEONOUNS. § 67. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 1st pers,, I, we. Iy<4, ^iwts. 2d pers., Thou, you. , «|i,eis. ( 1. eKetvos, oBtos, wAera emphatic. „, „ ■, .. ,, J 2. 6 uufv — 6 S£, ot uiv, — 01 8^, at 3d pers., i?e, sAe, %t, they. < beginning of sentence. \ 3. Oblique oases of afrnSs. The personal pronouns in the nominative are not generally used unless there is a contrast expressed or implied, or more or less of an emphasis. ewet 6avovTa e/ie fiifieurdai. XeN. Cyr. viii. 6. 13. i" beg you to imitate me. And as the subject of an Infinitive, with a reflexive object. Se? ij/tas «£cra CIUIVTOO, TJU.WV ODTIOV. ourselves. ) 2d pers. 0/ thyself, ) *■ > (TtOVTOV, (TOUTOV, VUUV O.VTMV. yourselves. ) 3d pers. 0/ Aim-, Aer-, , ( < "t ,a " °, 4 ™ v r _ . J . . ' > cavrov. afrroB < and tCCtVTOV, CtVToO ' ( iaxT&v. Reciprocal pronoun : dW^Xov, of one another. fiaXiara ttjv aavrov (ppovTjaiv aaicei. ISAEUS. Above all things cultivate self-knowledge. icaff iavrovi fiovXevad/j^voi to birKa irapehocrav icai vop.i^ei. DEM. He thinks you won't know what to do with him. (2) et^ 7 ] elvai avSpaTroSov ot eirl Aavpiif. ANDOK. de Myst. 38. He stated that he had a slave at Laurium. ot 'Adrjvaioi ovSev cra.(rav Trpoo-qKetv. THUC. The Athenians maintained that it was no concern of theirs. Thucydides and Xenophon are partial to this use of ot and Note 4. eavrov, eavrSv are sometimes used of the first and of the second person. rot avT(ov a/j.0. eKiropL^(op.eda. THUC. Let us at the same time furnish all our own resources. ouSe yap rijv eauTOu o~& ye xpvyriv o/Djis. XEN. Why you anyhow do not even see your own soul. Antiph. Herod. 11. Note 5. The reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal dAA.77A.wv. fiovXetrde Trepuovres avr&v irvvddveo-Oai ; DEM. Do you wish to be running about and inquiring one of another 1 Digitized by Microsoft® DEMONS TRA TIVE PRO NO UNS. 5 1 Cf. S. Luke xxiii. 12, "for before they were at enmity between themselves." Note. — mv avT 'Adrjvaioi irXeiv hrl o~$as avrovs. Thuc. viii. 86. The Athenians in Samos were bent on sailing against their own countrymen. So rjiiwv (v/iuv) avrfiv partitively. to TpCrov juepos 17/icov avrwv. Thuc. iii. 54. 3. A third of our own numbers. §70. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. I ( too-oBtos, This < gg™ s ' So great, so many } tantus, tot. |88 e> TocrosSe, _, So old, so young ( TijXficos. That tKttvos, , ,. { tiiXikoStos. (so great) { ti,Xik he spoke as follows, ~ > £«rwv, after eAefe roiaoe, J roiaura J ' ^ speaking thus, are common phrases in Thucydides. iVbfe 4. — ovtos (not 6'8e) and auTos (the latter especially in Plato) are the usual antecedents to the relative, like is in Latin. ovtos and 6K£tvos contrasted. Like hie and ille in Latin, sometimes, but not always, oStos means this nearer (i.e. the latter), l/ceivos, that distant (i.e. the former), in space or time. Note 5. — oStos and Jkeivos in the neuter, like hoe, illud in Latin, often draw attention to and point the coming word or phrase. See Peculiarities of Apposition 3. They also gather up and emphasise what has preceded. a. av tt'jrjjs e/x/teve tovtois. PLAT. Whatever you say, keep to that. Digitized by Microsoft® THE PRONOUN AirSs. 53 Note 6. — oStos, oSe, iKuvoi, compared with -Latin, oStos often denotes contempt like iste; eKetvos, praise (the famous or illustrious), like Me. oBtos is the opponent (plaintiff or defendant) =iste, hie being the client, oS™, the judges, the court, or the oStos, as antecedent to the relative = is (qui). ovTmf irk if no& 54 PRONOUNS. avros eyaye ererapayjiyv. PLAT. / myself was quite upset, avrov yap i\os tjv. Brasidas was friendly to the land of the Thessalians, and to (the Thessalians) themselves. Of. Xen. Anab. vii. 8. 22. ovjg owv re eanv a/j,e\rj avrov ovra aWovs iroielv ernfiekels. Xen. It is not possible that one who himself is careless should make others careful. "With a proper name the' article is not necessary. avros Ilevdr)? aveicpayev. XEN. Seuthes himself exclaimed. So avrot Bao-tXevs, the Great King himself. 2. 6 avroa>7ros, the ideal man ; avroayaO&v, the highest good, summum bonus^Yfifefr by Microsoft® 56 PRONOUNS. § 72. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Who, what (Direct), T fe, n ; (Indirect), So-tis, 8«. Whether of two (uter) irrfrepos ; omSTtpos. How much, how great ) , , . ' " . . J- ir<5oros ; oir&ros. How many (quantus). ) Of what sort (qualis) irotos ; oiroios. ' How old, how great irqXbcos ; oirtjXCKos. The pronouns in the second column are also relatives. The Direct pronouns are however constantly used instead of the Indirect {see Indirect Question). av el Tt? avhpav ; offTts eo/i eyco ; Mereov. AKIST. What man art thou ? {ask you) what man am I? Meton. See Ach. 106. 959. Note 1. — ttoios; is often used in a sarcastic repetition. ol Trpearfieis ol irapa ySacriAecus. iroiov j3acriXe(as ; The envoys from the King ! King quotha I {King indeed !) So ir66ev, Ar. Ran. 1455; Ach. 109; Nub. 366 (a good instance). Observe that in asking a question the article is generally used with irolos when there is no noun. oTfiai ere bpoXoyqcrtiv to rotovSe. to ttolov ; Plat. Rep. 475, e. I think you will make the following admission. What admission ? So to rt; Arist. Batr. 40. Cf. Ar. Ach. 418. Note 2. — Observe the idiomatic use of double interrogatives. tis Trodev [Lokuiv croi paprvp-qo-ti ; SOPH. Tr. 421. Who is he, whence comes he, who will bear thee record ? So ireus Tt tout" enres ; Plat. Soph. 261, c. Soph. Ant. 40' . Earely 09 is used like Sons in a question. eywS' os io-n, I know who he is, Ar. Ach. 118. The Greeks said oTSa (avrbv) os eori or 018a Tts (ocrris) CCTTt. Digitized by Microsoft® RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ATTRACTION. $7 § 73. RELATIVE PRONOUNS AND ATTRACTION. .„, , . N ( whosoever Who 8 S (qui) gems { , . s ( (qmcunque). /"(esp. poet.) ^«7,,.. /tv , I of such a Of What sort olos, oirolos (quails) Sore < , -., ^ \i / \ c i asSi often \^ like 8 , ix So-irep, -< one, exactly how many ( quotquot) 1 J7 , * ) \theonewho. What number in a series oir<5o-ros (quotus). ffow oW or 1 ... owoTepos, which- Aow 6aX(io<;, o? ra iravff opa. MENANDEK. There is an eye of justice which sees all things. oo-tk is indefinite. dveXevOepos ?ras Sort? ei? So^av /6\e7ret. Cleanthes, the Stoic. Slavish the man whoever looks to fame. For other usages of oo-rt? see Index. aairep is particularly definite (irep adds this force to other pronouns and adverbs, e.g. (oa-irep, elirep, €7ret8?j- trep, etc.). ravTOV eyovaiv a/iapTr)fj,a oirep Kai ot iroiTjTai. Plat. They are making exactly the same mistake which the poettsfly/fega by Mlcrosom 5 8 PRONOUNS. XvaiTeXel fioi cocnrep e%eo e%eiv. Plat. It is good for me to be just as I am. So frn-ep Ar. Aeh. 364. 474. Note. — oSi/ (&}, Sij7roT£, SrjTroTovv), added to relative pronouns, alters them from relatives, and makes them indefinite, do-no-ovv, any whosoever; ovS' otiovv, not even anything whatsoever, ne tantillum quidem; mroo-oo-ow, how great soever, quantuscun- que; oiroioo-ovv, qualiscunque ; onwTocrovv, quotuscunque ; oi oirotoiSrjTrore ixai, /3i/37u'ot? oh e%w. / use the books which I have. For a exp). to?? ar/adols 01? e^pfiev /crmfieda icat Ta? a\\a?. ISAEUS. By means of the advantages which we possess we gain our other advantages also. The Antecedent is often attracted into the clause of the Eelative. Xpa/juai ots e^o) j8i/3\tot9 for ^pSifiai )8tjS\tot9 a e^m. a/iadecTTaToi ecrre i\ovo-i.v airodv-qo-Kti veos. MEN. 128 (He) whom the gods love dies yoimg. The demonstrative subject, oStos, is omitted. So TroXXol dvaXlo-Kovo-iv ovk ets ovk direKpivcTO. PlAT. Men. 70. Gorgias was replying to every single questioner. In Soph. Ai. 725, oiVts lo-ff 6s ov. (b) Bavpao-rbs ocros, vTrep^vr/s 6'0-os are similarly declined, and their adverbs davp,ao-rZs, virepj>vS>s. &U,oX6yrjo~e ravra /jetoi ISpwros 0a,vp.mnov oo~ov. Plat. Sep. He made these admissions with an astonishing amount of perspiration. virep'pvZ's (09 \aip(a. PLAT. I am surprisingly glad. 6p PRONOUNS. (c) otos, and aAAos 6'o-os, «t ns. 4'A.eye ttjOos avSpas roXprjpovs otbus Kat ' K.6yjvaiovs. Thuc. viL 21. j?e was speaking to bold men like the Athenians. For oioi e'uri Kal ' K6i]valoi. dvicrrr] 'Aypiavas /cat aAAa 6'cra etfvij IlaioviKa. Thuc. ii. 96. He was raising the Agrianes and all the other Paeonian eyyvu>p.eda ^/tets, eyaJ, opp.itnv, aWov el Ttva fiovXerai. DEM. 20. 100. Let us promise, I, Phormio, any one he likes. For aAAos xts el riva aAAov fiovkerai. otos re for toioStos otds re in the sense of " able," like Swards, is exceedingly common. o?os re elp,l ravra 7rot£tv. I am able to do this. ovx otdv te ecrriv. It is not possible ; it cannot be. In the same way, by the omission of the Antecedent, are formed many indefinite pronouns and verbs. eo-nv ot, commoner than cio-tv ot (sunt qui). evioi (evi, there are . . . ot, those who) ; eviore, sometimes. eo-nv ov, somewnere; emiv ft, m some way ; eoriv oVcos, somehow. The Eelative preceding the Demonstrative throws great emphasis on the Demonstrative (as in Latin). a jrotetv aicrxpov, ravra vopu£e p.rjSe Aeyetv etVat /caAov. ISAE. 1. 15. Quae factu turpia sunt ea ne dictu quidem honesta habe. Observe the phrases : 6 Aeyw, as I say, or as I was oirep, or 8 apri eXeyov, oirep efirov. Digitized by Microsoft® INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 6t § 77. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Some, any, ) none, nothing, o*8e£s, oi&lv (o^n.i)poet. A kind or S-ti S , n s , ., |j.T)oeCs, |iT|oev. sort of, J hme (wit emphasis) Any what Some (with ( 'ij rnv 8 * none (emphatic) ( „68* sts. emphasis), \ eio-lv oi (less common). \ l"l SJ « ts - Sstis oSv. ever, Some . . . others, i JuJJ^_S\Xo"i. ottos, ita.% tis, iro T a S) awas (stronger than was) ', all, J Other, another, ' I &\\os (alius) ol axXoi, £Ae ra£, ceteri. Owe cffaco 1 _ / ,. v. neither one \ otoerepos. (different), ) ' T€p ° S ^ e ^' wor otfier J |«1&™P°s- JVofe 1. 7roT£pos, and its indirect form, ottotc/xjs, = uter, whether, or which of two ? But they may also = alteruter,_one, or either of two. In this latter sense 7roTepds is sometimes written oxytone. ttoios, of some sort; sroo-os, of some size or number (observe the accents). ere/Dos should perhaps be classed among Demonstratives, but it is put here in contrast to a\Xos. Note 2. Idiomatic uses of rts. (a) T19 means sometimes many a one. auTii tis eKeivov, 5 avSpes 'AOr/vaioi, Kal SeSiev. DEM. There are those (there are many) who hate him and fear ^M^Wcrosom 62 PRONOUNS. (b) It means, like aliquis, some great, some important person, or thing. r)V)(ei'S Tts etVat, TOto"t xprjp.a.(ri (rdevaiv. EUR. El. 939. Thou wast boasting thyself to be some great one, trusting to thy riches. Cf. S. Paul, ad Gal. ii. 6. So Spav ti, to do some great thing. Soph. El. 305. Si vis esse aliquis. Txrv. i. 74. (c) It is constantly joined to adjectives, numerals, and pronouns, sometimes to strengthen, sometimes to weaken the expression, in a way for which, in English, we have frequently no equivalent : — /xcyas tis, tSs tis, tKao-Tos Tts. ovSeis Tts, dAt'yoi Ttvls. fipaxy Tt, ovSev Tt, v to-ios Tts "qv Trovrjpos. Lys. 30. 13. Note 3. aAAos must often be rendered adverbially, besides, moreover, as well, adding as well as opposing. This is very common in Attic. Tre/xiTTos TTOTa/j.bs aAAos. HDT. V. 54. Yet a fifth river. Cf. Soph. El. 707; Aesch. Sept. 481. ou yap ?jv xfyTos ovSe ctAAo SevSpov oi5SeV. XEN. An. i. 5. 5. There was no grass, no, nor any tree at all. Digitized by Microsoft® INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 63 Cf. Plaustra iumentaque alia. Liv. iv. 41. Wagons and beasts of burden also. And there were also two other malefactors led with him to be put to death. S. Luke, xxiii. 32. All these {vices) are portable, with other graces weighed. Shakspeke, Macbeth, iv. iii. 90. 6 oiAAog may often be rendered in general or usual. ■n-apa tuv S.X.X.OV rpoirov. ANTIPH. Tetr. B. B. 1. Contrary to my general disposition. Note 4. wav like quidvis, quidlibet, may mean anything, no matter what. ovSeva Sel jirj^avadOai 6V(us v da.va.-rov. Plat. Ap. No man should endeavour to avoid death by every means. ToiavTa. a.X.X.a, cf. alter idem. Soph. El. 337. Obs. to n-oio'/, quality ; to jtoo-oV, Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTEE IV. THE CASES. § 78. Preliminary Note on the Cases. Greek is developed from a language which had eight cases, or nine, if we regard the separate meanings of the last as belonging to two distinct cases. Of these eight or nine Greek retained only five, although comparative philology shows that traces of the others survived. The work of the lost cases was carried on by the remaining five, as the following table will explain, Indo-European. Greek. Nominative Nominative Vocative Vocative Accusative Accusative Genitive Ablative Dative Locative Instrumental Comitative or Sociative The Greek Genitive and Dative have been called mixed cases because they have assumed the functions of the lost cases. 1 Genitive Dative 1 The following declension of an Indo-European noun, taken from Schleicher, will show the cases. Stem Vak (voice, Foir(s), voc(s) i.e. vox.) Singular Nom. Vak-s the voice Voc. Vak- O voice, the voice, of the voice, from the voice, for the voice, at or by the voice. with the voice. Ace. VAK-am Gen. VAK-as Abl. VAK-at Dat. VAK-ai Loc. VAK-i Inst. VAK-bhi (and Com.) VAK-a !• Digitized by Microsoft® THE NOMINATIVE. 65 The Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative form one group, the Genitive and Ablative a second group, the Dative, Loca- tive, Instrumental, and Comitative (the latter being perhaps another aspect or shade of the Instrumental) a third group. The Nominative is the case of the subject. The Vocative is the case of the person or thing addressed. The Accusative is the case of the object. The Genitive is the case of the class (-ycvos, genus) to which a thing belongs. The Ablative is the case of that from which another thing is separated, the case of separation. The Dative is the case of the person or thing remotely connected with an action (the remoter object), for whom or which anything is done. The Locative is the case of the place where an action takes place. The Instrumental is the case of the instrument by which an action is performed. The Comitative (or Sociative) is the case of the accompanying circumstances. The details of each case will show that the five Greek cases retain their original meanings, while the mixed cases (Genitive and Dative) acquire in addition the'meanings of the lost ones. But nearly all the cases, especially the mixed ones, have assumed other shades of meaning and other uses, from analogies which we cannot safely trace now. In treating of any case therefore we may distinguish between (1) its primary and distinct use, (2) its freer, looser use. Attempts to explain and classify the freer uses must necessarily be more or less arbitrary. § 79. THE NOMINATIVE. The Nominative is the case of the Subject, and of the Predicate or Apposition in agreement with the Subject. $iknnro makes the address curt, tart, or businesslike, as d/coveis Alo-%ivr) ; d'ye hear, Aeschines? THE ACCUSATIVE. § 8l. Preliminary Note on the Accusative. The Accusative, unlike the Genitive and Dative, is formed with no suffix which in itself gives the case a special applica- tion. But it came to denote the object of the sentence, as the Nominative denotes the subject. In speaking of the ob- ject, however, we must very carefully distinguish between two distinct significations of the Accusative. Thus Antiphon writes, rvinti tov avSpa TrAijyas, he strikes the man Mows. Here 7rAijya5, Wows, is already contained in the meaning of the verb Tim-rei. This Accusative has been called the Internal Accusative. On the other hand, tov 'avSpa, the man, is not contained in the meaning of tott-ci. This is called the External Accusative. The Internal Accusative is of much freer and wider application than the External, varying from the Cognate Accusative, pd-xv v p<^x°l J ' a h I fight a fight, to any word which is substituted for the Cognate Accusative, such as, cnrovSas TroiovpAx.i, I make a treaty ; ejrtcrroArjv ypdcjuo, I write a command ; Digitized by Microsoft® THE ACCUSATIVE. 67 7rA.«o QaXasTuav, I sail the sea ; /ieya\a. a-dXXop,ai, I am greatly disappointed. The External Accusative is a natural extension, not of the meaning, but of the direction of the verb. The Accusative is naturally associated with a verb, and, when it is not an External Accusative, qualifies the verb almost as an adverb. Thus iraiacriv, x < *P lv > "7>°' Ka , etc., and the wide use of neuter adjectives used adverbially, noWd, irvKvd, to konrov, etc. UpQrov, irpoTepov, again are Accusative forms. Indeed we may say that all Accusatives fall under two heads, either — (1) the Internal Accusative, or (2) the External Accusative. § 82. Conspectus of the Internal Accusative. The Internal Accusative denotes either the state or the operation of the verb (the state of neuter and passive verbs, the operation of active verbs). It is either A. A word kindred in stem or meaning to the verb (the Cognate Accusative), e.g. /j.dxr]V p.d)(erT6ai. £fjv filov. B. A word substituted for the Cognate Accusative, and limiting or defining the verbal notion. \pr)$urp.a vwav, to win, i.e. carry, a measure. Accusatives of this class denote (a) That with respect to which the state or operation occurs, often the part affected (Accusative of Respect). 0cu;/xao-Tos tlvai to KaAAos, to be remarkable in respect of beauty, foxr/v vocreiv, to be ill in mind; (b) The extent of the state or operation in degree, space, or time. ovre p.kya oiVe (TfiiKpov vye fayr/v, he shared the flight, Pl. Ap. v. ; ttovovpavev, Aesch. Pers. 715, he made a foolish attempt; riyyeiv SaKpva, Pind. Nem. x. 141, he wetted (ie. shed wet) tears. In Soph. Ant. 973 the passive of this construction occurs. 4'A.kos Tv\(i>dev, a blinded wound, i.e. wound inflicted which caused blindness ; the active form would be rv(j>\ovv 2A.kos, to inflict a blinding wound. §84. ACCUSATIVE OF RESPECT. An Accusative is constantly joined to a verb, adjective, noun, or even a sentence, to denote that in respect to which the state or operation of the verb, etc., takes place. Very often the Accusative denotes the part affected, e.g. Ka^vm or aKyw ryv ice$a\rp> (to, ofifiara, tous iroSas, row SaKTvKovsi). I have a vai®^My h fifh&J f eet > Mff^rs). 70 THE CASES. fSiknov ecrri crco/jLa y r) yjrv^Tjv voaeiv. MENAND. Better to ail in body than in mind. tvavfjvai, to appear on a road, Soph. El. 1274; tt)v &pav tov eVovs, Dem. Phil. i. 8, during the season of the year. Note. An Accusative with ordinal numbers means how long since or ago. ££rj\do/j.ev Tpirov eVos tovti. DEM. 54. 3. We came out three years ago Cf Plat. Protag. 309. Digitized by Microsoft® ACCUSATIVE OF MOTION. 71 § 86. ACCUSATIVE OF MOTION. The Accusative denotes motion to a place, without a preposition in , Poetry ; but in Prose a preposition is required. oiijro) vei/do-nj/c' oTkov. Eue. I. T. 534. Not yet hath he returned home. Cf. Soph. Ant. 152, Phil. 244; Euk. Bacch. 1, 5. Cf. Julius Caesar — Ere we could arrive the point proposed. Very seldom motion to a person. Eur. Bacch. 847, 1353, al vfjes afyiKvovvTai, erri IIvXov. Thuo. The ships arrive against Pylos. evrevOev e^eXavvei ei? K.o\oa, *U- Trpa(T, i/3pi£, KwXvia, dvajKafto. ov tovto ae epcoTw. AEISTOPH. That's not the question I'm asking you. iroKKoL /Me avrov avTovo-i, iroWoi Be cfiana. Xen. Many are asking me for food, many for clothes. aXkavs TavTa TavTa BiBao-Kto. PLAT. 1 teach others these self-same subjects. ovBev ae fcpvijrco. SOPH. Naught will I hide from thee. iBov £" 'AiroXkwv avTO<; eicBvcov efie ^pTjarTfjpiav eaQrrra. AESCH. And lo ! Apollo's self divesting me Of garb oracular. aXkrjkov^ Ta eaj(aTa Xeyovcnv. Xen. They say the most atrocious things of one another. 01 fiev irovTjpoi icaicov n epya&VTai tows avOpwrrovs, oi 8 ayaOol ayadov. PlAT. Bad men do harm to others, good men good. Digitized by Microsoft® DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 73 Note 1. The construction of the Double Accusative is much commoner in Greek than in Latin. Almost any Greek transi- tive verb can take an Accusative of the External Object, and some one of the many varieties of the Internal Object. The Internal Accusative is often a neuter pronoun, or an adjective agreeing with a suppressed substantive. McAtjtos p.e eypdiparo Tqv ypa^v TavTrjv. PLAT. Meletus brought this indictment against me. In the Passive — Tv£ipos ovSeh aOavdriov. Soph. Antig. 789. And none of the immortals is able to escape thee. voXepos airopa iropipoi. AESCH. P. V. 904. to 7rav ptfx a P "■"/"'OS Zeus. AESCH. Supp. 594. Perhaps we may add e^apvoi to. &[ioXoyrjpiva, Isaeus v. 26 ; eiruTTtjpoves toL irpoa-qKOVTa, XEN. Cyr. 3. 3, 9 ; Sto/cpaTijs to, pereapa ^/oovtktt^s, Pl. Apol. II. ; unless we regard the accu- satives here as accusatives of respect. The construction is not unknown to Latin — Quid tibi hanc digito tactio est. Plaut. Poen. v. 5. 29. Reditum domum in patriam. Liv. xxx. 32. On this construction see Peile, Primer of Philology, ch. vii. 5, Note 2. An Accusative stands in apposition not to the object of the verb, but to the state or act jointly denoted by the verb and its object. Very often this Accusative in Apposition has a proleptic force. See Peculiarities of Apposi- tion. alal, KaKUv v\pwra Srj kXvo) tcioV, a '°"X'? Te n^P°" at S Kal Xiyia KOitvpara. AESCH. Pers. 331. Woe 1 woe ! the top of sorrow hear I now, Shame to the Persians, and shrill lamentations. Other instances occur, Aesch. Ag. 225, Oho. 200, Eur. Bacch. 29, 250. Cf. Verg. Aen. xi. 381, Proinde tona eloquium, solitum tibi. Digitized by Microsoft® THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE. 75 § 90. VERBS WHICH TAKE AN EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE. The following classes of Verbs should be noticed as taking an Accusative of the External Object. 1. Many Verbs of Emotion : alSovfiai, I revere. I/otAijo-o-o/ku, ) lam alarmed aUrxivofiai, I feel awe or shame KarairX-qa-a-opai, \ at. in the presence of. (frpio-o-w, I shudder at. Soph. OappZ, I feel confidence m. Ant. 997. aur\vvopai tov TroXvvpvov deov. ElTR. Ion, 1074. I am abashed in the presence of the god renowned in song. to toiovtov o-ayia oi k^Qpoi Oappovcriv. PL. Phaed. 239. The enemy feel confidence in such a body. p,fj Svvap.iv t£v ' A6r]vai0)v KaTaTrXayrjre. ThUC. vi. 76. Do not be dismayed at the power of the Athenians. 2. Many Verbs of Motion compounded with Prepositions, such verbs taking the meaning of their kindred transitives. StaySou'va), ) j piretpi, ) I pursue, go in Siep\opai, \ ' p,eTep\opai, ) quest of. SiairXtto, I sail across. kufSaivw, I exceed. irepiep)(opai, I go about. Igto-rnpu, I avoid. irepiwke, ) j r vL(TTap.ai, ) / undertake (sus- aTroSiSpdo-Kio, \ ^ ' mroZvopai, \ cipio). vTrocfievyto, I avoid, shirk. ra cirmjSeta «k Sijcttod juenovTes. XEN. Hell. ii. 1. 25. Going m search of provisions from Sestos. inrepe/BaXov ra oprj. XEN. An. iv. 4. 23. They crossed the mountains. orav ol avSpes l/c/3avT(0 (tlvo), I calumniate, or accuse falsely. Xojottoiw (o-vfiopds), I make up tales (of troubles). KaTavavp,ax, I overpower in naval warfare. KaTaTroXe/jio), I overpower in war. 4. Special Verbs. yeXZ, I ridicule (nvd); SaKpva, I weep for (c££Aous, friends), Eur. Frag. (j>9dv]\vXd£ao-6ai rjp.i 8etv rjp.ds ; Dem. de Pace iv. What do I maintain we must guard against ? 6 KA.ea>v virefavye tov irXovv . . . ixpio-rarai tov ttAow. Thug. iv. 28. Clem was trying to back out of the expedition : he undertakes the expedition. Digitized by Microsoft® THE EXTERNAL ACCUSATIVE. 77 5. "Op,wpu and expressions of swearing, pd, ov pd, vac pd, v-fj. pa. Aia, nay, by Zeus. vf/ or vat tov Aia, yea, by Zeus. ov tov Aia, ov pa tov Aia, nay, by Zeus. d/ia>/xoKai9 toijs deovs, having sworn by the gods, Dem. 301. 1. ov pa tov At', ov (in answers), No, by Zeus, not, etc. ov pa. tov At', ov ph 8ij, No, by Zeus, not so indeed. Note 1. The poets use great freedom in making Verbs transitive. toiis yap evcre/itis deol dvrjcrKOVTas ov yaipovo-t. At a good man's death The gods rejoice not. See Peile, Primer of Philology,^. 131. So #£ev x*/° a > Soph. Ai. 44 (J ebb's note); xopei5a> 0e6V, I cele- brate the god m the dance, Pind. lsth. L 7, Soph. Ant. 1152; \opeveiv ydpovs, EUR. /. A. 1047. So /Satvetv (Trpo/3aiveiv) irdSa. Note 2. An Accusative is found after a compound expres- sion which, is equivalent to a Verb. Many accusatives in the poets may be thus explained. KaJ 7raVwxot Si) SimrAoov Kadio-racrav vaaiv avaKTes 7rdvTa vairrtKov \ex«=T/500-e<£t6veis, Jebb). Soph. El. 556. If thou hadst been ever accosting me thus. Cf. Aesch. Ag. 788 ; Soph. O.O. 583. See Schneidewin on Soph. Ant. 212. Cf. Terence, Hauton, Prol. 41, Mea causa causam hanc iustam esse animumAmdudde. Digitized by Microsoft® 78 THE CASES. Note 3. Poetical and comic use of the Accusative with verbs of looking (an Internal Accusative). There are many Horusric phrases. irvp 6(j>9a\[ioipa.KTOV fiXeireis. , Arist. Ach. 95. 'fore heaven, fellow, thou looh'st an ironclad. So fiXerrtiv volttv (mustard), o/i<£aKas (sour grapes). Cf. "to look black," "look daggers," and Hamlet, "I will speak daggers." " He speaks holiday, he smells April and May," Merry Wives, iii. 2. § 91. THE GENITIVE. Preliminary note on the Genitive. The Greek Genitive is the case of Connexion and its op posite, dis-Connexion or Separation. The Genitive propei denotes the class (yevos) to which a thing belongs. Thus v6p.io-p.a dpyvpiov, a coin of silver/ the coin belongs to the class silver. Both in etymology and signification the Genitive is akin to an adjective. (See Max MtJller, Lectures on the Science of Language, i. 105; second edition.) The Ablative, on the other hand, denotes that from which a thing is re- moved. The signification of the lost Ablative has passed into the Genitive. But in the Greek Genitive we can never, perhaps, be sure where we have a strictly Ablative meaning, for as the Genitive -denotes Connexion, by a natural law of association, it also denotes the opposite, dis-Connexion, i.e. Separation. Further, Connexion (or Kelation) is so elastic a conception, that the usages of the Genitive have, by a series of loose analogies, been almost indefinitely extended. This is what we should expect when we consider the popular and unscientific growth of Syntax. It is not possible to tabulate all the usages of the Genitive, or to avoid cross-divisions. Digitized by Microsoft® POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. 79 The Partitive Genitive so-called is a misnomer, due to a confusion of thought. The Genitive denotes the whole, that on which it depends denotes the part. Lastly, as the Accu- sative essentially depends on a Verb or Verbal notion, *o the Genitive essentially depends on a Substantive or Substantival notion. § 92. POSSESSIVE GENITIVE. The Genitive denotes the Possessor, that to which a thing belongs ; with A. Nouns and Adjectives, oikeios, iSios {own, peculiar, or belonging to); lep6s, consecrated to; and their opposite, dAAo- t/kos. These also (Upos very rarely) take a Dative. Nouns, etc. fj tov Trarpos oitcia or 77 oiKia tov ircnpo?. The father's house. ■f) TTokiv ttoXitwv koivt) eariv. ANDOK. The city is common to all the citizens. lobs yap ovrof twv Kara. ^6ovov. EUB. Consecrated is that one to the nether gods. B. Verbs. ol Ueppovlo-Kov, NiKia.s 6 NiKTjpdrov, BovKiiSlSr/'s 6 'OXopov. More briefly, M.iX- TidSrjs Ki/iuvos. Poet. , Aids "A/>Te/us, Artemis daughter of Zeus ; 'Oikrjos Taxvs Atas, Aias swift son of Oileus. Hom. Obs. — This is sometimes called the Genitive of Origin, or Descent, or Source. It is a genitive of the possessor, or of the class, for, as Max Muller points out, it is equally correct to say o vlbs tov irarpos, as to say 6 iraTrjp toC vlov. jraTpos Aiyerai Kvpos yevkudai K.ap,f3vcrov. Xen. Cyr. 1. 2. 1. It is said that Gyrus was the son of Cambyses. So in poetry, vvai, f3\ao~TUv, Tpar\vai twos. § 93. GENITIVE OF MATERIAL OR CONTENTS. The Genitive denotes the Material of which a thing consists, or the Contents of a thing. With Nouns, etc. : — vofuafia apyvpiov ( = voflio-fia apyvpovv). A coin of silver (Old Eng. adj. a silvern coin). op&ai acopov; crirov, Ijvktov, XtOmv. Xen. Hell. iv. 4. 1 2. They see piles of grain, timber, stones. or voXis, the city of Athens (con- trast with "urbs Eoma"); T/aofys irroXkOpov, the city of Troy, are poetical. § 94- GENITIVE OF AMOUNT. Another aspect of the Genitive of Material is where it denotes the Amount of Space, Time, Money. oktco arahimv re^os. THUC. A wall of eight stades. rptcov rjfiepav 6Sd£vyu>. DEM. 55. 25. I am defendant in a suit involving a thousand drachmae. 1 1 With the Genitive of Amount may be connected the Genitive of Value. Digitized by Microsoft® 82 THE CASES. § 95- GENITIVE OF PLENTY OR WANT, With the Genitive of Material may be associated the Genitive after words of Plenty or Want. A. Adjectives and Adverbs : pea-ros, n-A^s, e/ra-Aewsi irXovo-ios, ei/Sojs, wevi/js, Kev6s, eprj/xos, yvp,vos, Kadapos, aAts. Trora/io? irXrjprj^ i^dvasp. XEN. A river full of fishes. to rfj<; Arjdt]'; irehiov Kevov eari hivhpmv. Plat. The plain of Lethe is bare of trees. Tupa.wo'S 7roXX(av <£d/3povTi8os kolI fBovXfjs Selrai. The present occasion requires much thought and counsel ov Trovmv Kexprmeda. EUR. Med. 334. We have no lack of troubles. Obs. XeKTpa m/nrXwrai SaKpvfmcnv. AeSOH. Pers. 100. Their couches are filled (watered) with tears. Sere the dative of Instrument is used. Digitized by Microsoft® THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 83 Note. The constructions of Set, Sea : — ov 7roAAov irovov p.e Set, I have no need of much trouble, iroias /mh Set povTi8os ; Soph. Elect. 612. What care need Ii iroXXov Seat l/wvrov ye dSt/ojaeiv. PLAT. Apol. 17. lam far from intending to wrong myself. Common phrases with Set are ttoXXov Set, far from it ; or, ttoXXov Seto (personally used), nothing of the sort; 6Xiyov Set, there wants Utile, all but ; oXlyov, (alone) almost ; oXCyov kfiavrov eTreXadofir/v, Plat. Apol. i., I wellnigh forgot myself (who I was). So [UKpov, within a little, almost, 6kt(o dnroSeoires T/otaKoo-iot = 292. THUC. iv. 38. Svolv Seovres TreVTr'jKovra^ 48. § 96. THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE (SO CALLED). The Partitive Genitive so called (the Genitive is the whole, the word on which it depends is the part) is used : — A. With any part of speech denoting participation. ttoXXoi t&v ABrjvaifov. Many of the Athenians. rot Bvo /J,ept] rfjs ot/jotmw. Two-thirds of the army. 'A6r)valav 6 /3ov\o/ji,evo<;. Any one of the Athenians who wishes. twv TTokefiioov ol fiev wrrmXovro, 01 Be e(pvyi p. Of the enemy some fell, while others escaped. T, pereo-ri (poi), fieraXafifiavto, I have, or take, a share; perawoiovpai, I claim a share ; peraSiS(opi (tlvi), Koivcovco (rlvt), I give a share (to a person, Tin), Trpocnj/cet poi, I have a con cern in. avdpwrrov ^v^r) tov 8elov /x€Te%et. PLAT. The soul of man partakes of divinity. ov p,eTaBwcrov0i Tjfup rjjs poves iyiyvovro. XEN All who ate of ^jw^^spon^came- mad. THE PARTITIVE GENITIVE. 85 The partitive ™ may be inserted, cf. wirokaveiv tI twos, to enjoy some advantage from some source. Note 1. Many of these verbs are used transitively and take an Accusative (denoting " an object completely overpowered," J. Grimm), irivm oTvov, Aay^avw rt, I attain something, Tivds, a share of something ; so ttXslo-tov pipos tivos perix uv i to have the greatest part of something (where p.ipos is a whole). Note 2. Instead of a neuter singular with a partitive Geni- tive the adjective of certain words (rj/uo-vs, -iroXvs, 7rAeioros, Aowrds) often agrees in gender with the genitive : 6 rjpio-vs, or 6 Aomtos, toC XP° V0V ; tov \povov 6 irXeurTos, iroWr] tt)s x&pas (XEN. Gyr. iii. 2. 2). Cf. THUC. i. 2, tt}s yrjs ij apurrq. Note 3. Many Adverbs of place are joined with a partitive Genitive : ttov yijs ; ubi terrarum 1 7ra.vTa.x0v yrjs, ovSafiov yrjr aAAot dAAg tjjs TrdAews, THUC. ii. 4 ; TrrjviKa ttjs ij/*e/3as ; at what time of day 1 Tr6ppv wktw, 6^e tijs (Spas. Many such phrases occur in the poets : — 7rov yvwp.rjs ttot' ; Soph. Elect. 1174. What words shall I utter ? yaiai opvgas evOa, k.t. A. SOPH. Aiax 659. Hiding it m the earth where, etc. 01 p.' aTiplas ayets ; Soph. Elect. 1035. To what infamy art thou leading me ? Note 4. The neuter of a pronoun or adjective, or adverb, is not unknown to Greek, but not so common as in Latin (paullum sapientiae, parum sapientiae, aliquid diyitiarum, quicquid deorum, etc.). t» oTao-iaer/joC, Thuc. iv. 130; ap.r)X aV0V evSaipwca.'S, PLAT. Apol. ; ctrojra -rijs o-/«K/)oAoyais, Plat. Thaeaet. 175; eVi pAya. Swdpews x Thuc. i. 118; Irrl jrAeicrrov dvdpwrbiv, THUC. i. 1 ; ev iravTl ko.kov, PLAT. Bep. 579; & tQ fy Mfefei) 229 - 86 THE CASES. Note 5. The word on which a partitive Genitive depends has often to be supplied : — ep,e dh t5)v irexewpivuv. PLAT. Rep. 424. Set me down as one of those who are convinced. 26XiKvovfiau, hit, secure, obtain, attain; dXXo/xa.i, I am disappointed, balked of. (N.B. Ki^avu generally takes an Accusative.) B. Catch hold of, touch, cling to (be separated from, see Gen. of separation). Xap.f3dvop.ai (and compounds with «ri, dim), avropai, l<£a7TTO/*ai, diyydvo), I catch hold of touch, grasp; exopai, I clmg to, etc. (see examples), avr^xopai, / cling to, uphold. C. Make trial of, begin, have experience in. irapS, Treipw/icu, / try, attempt ; apxw, apxopuu, I begin, ; ep- irdpws e'xo), I am experienced i/n. D. Verbs of the senses : hear, smell, taste, touch (see B.), enjoy. (But verbs of seeing take an Accusative.) aKovu), I hear; aKpowpai, listen to, attend lectures; 6o-povUi ; Soph. Elect. 141. Why art thou aiming at the insupportable ? , to come across, fall in with one, take a Dative. B. Examples : — N.B. — XapPdvw, Kparm take an Accusative of the per - son or thing seized, and a Genitive of the thing seized. TOV \VKOV TCOV COTCOV •KpaTCi). I get hold of the wolf by the ears. So ayeiv %et/3o?, to lead by the hand. eXafiov t>)9 ((avij'S tov 'Opovrr/v. XEN. An. L 6. 10. They seized OronfysJ^^dfo^ 88 THE CASES. C. Examples : — Kvpos ?ipx e r °v ^oyov «Se. Xen. Cyrus began the conversation as follows (i.e. was the first to speak). %evov rov Xoyov rfp^ero wSe. XEN. Xenophon began his speech as follows. N.B. — apyeiv \6ytov, to be the first to speak ; ap^eadai \6yeov, to begin one's speech. airoTreipwfievo*; rj/j,av eypayjrco rrjv ypacprjv ravrr]v. Plat. You were making trial of me when you brought this indictment. D. Examples : — ftpovTr)? atcovcra<; fir)Sa/ji,5>t; iroppm paive rtvos (I enjoy, literally and figuratively). 6(u>, I smell of. a^rai /*ej> ofavar' dfi/3po}s ra>v iroWwv So^jj? fie\et ; PLAT. What care we for the opinion of the world ? weida v/ias fiTjre croDfiaTiov eirifieXeladai p/iyre %pi]fjt,a- toov. Plat. I try to persuade you to care neither far the body nor for money. n-etvu xpripaTtoV, eiralvov, XEN. dyaOiav, PLAT. I hunger after (i.e. long for) money, praise, good things. So Su/su, Plat. Bep. 562 c. tov Qavwrov koI KivSvvov ceiXpycoprjcre. Plat. He disregarded death and danger. Note 1. p*Xu and /i«Ta/«A.ei take a genitive of thing, and dative of person. fieXei [lot rovrov. I care for this, hoc mihi curae est. uerafieXei p.01 tovtov. I r&pent of this ; huius rei me poenitet. * Digitized by Microsoft® 9Q THE CASES. Note 2. Adjectives with these significations are found with the Genitive : — eSpav Travrbs evayrj (rrparov. AESCH. Pers. 465. A throne in full view of all the armada. kirrjjioXo's pev(Hv. Soph. Antig. 492. Possessed of reason (compos mentis). Note 3. In the following examples observe the various meanings of 1-xpp.a.i : — t5>v 'Evvea 68£>v eKparrjarav. They ohtained possession of the Nine Roads. Thuc Trjs /xev yviAfj.rj'S, & ' ' A.6r)vatoi, del Trjs avnjs i\op.ai. THUC. / hold, Athenians, to the same unchanged opinion ever. en-ovrau Jxo/ievoi t&v dp/tartov. XEN. They follow, coming next to the chariots. 6 TrAijyets del t?js Trkrjyrjs e'xefou. DEM. Phil. 1. 10. The boxer who has been struck ever follows the blow. iravTts koivq tjjs o-oiT-qpias e'xeo-0e. XEN. Anab. vi. 3. 17. All together provide for your safety. With 'iypp.a,i compare the parallel meanings of ei/u. t^9 avTrji yv<&p.r)s avai, THUC. v. 46. twv avrtov Xoyoji/ eTvai, PLAT. Gorg. 489 (to keep to the same tale). § 98. SUBJECTIVE AND OBJECTIVE GENITIVE. 6 o/3o<; T&V TroXefuwv. The fear of the enemy. This Genitive of Connexion is naturally ambiguous. It may mean either (1) the fear which the enemy feels. Here twv irdXefiicov is Subjective, being equivalent to the subject of the verb, and the sentence = ol woXe/juoi o- fiovvTai (■hpai) : or (2) the fear (which we feel) of or for the enemy. Here tc3z> iroXe/ilmv is Objective, being equi- valent to the object of a transitive verb, ^ets cpo(3oviJ,e9a tovs vaiXefiiovi. Digitized by Microsoft® GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 91 ot avdptairoi Sia rb dxrrZv (Subjective Gen.) Slog tov davti- tov KaTaif/evSovrai, PLAT. Phaed. 85 ( = avrol StSiores tov ddvarov). Men, by reason of their fear of death, tell lies. Sia rr)v rov dvep,ov (Subjective) aTruxriv ru>v vavayttav (Ob- jective). Thuc. vii. 34. In consequence of the wind driving the wrecks into the open sea. The Objective Genitive represents usually an object in the Accusative or Genitive after a verb, more rarely a Dative. Ace. Slot Havcraviov /xikros, THUC. i. 96. irdflos rov airo- OavovTOs. Gen. hriOv/iia xpr)p.a,Tti)v, eirifieXiia. twv irpayp.d,Tio-p.a, Thuc. i. 140, decree against the Megarians (where the preposition irepi would have been more usual.) § 99. GENITIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. The Genitive denotes the time within which anything takes place. The Genitive is the whole, the time is either indefinite, or recurring, vvktoi, by night; tt}? $fie'pavo<;. Xen. Socrates wore the same mantle summer and winter. Spaxfiyv eXcififiave TJ79 ^fiepas (or t^? q/j,epa airy depei (Thuc. iv. 133) ; tov Xonrov or to Aomtov, /or the future. So aAAijs rj/iepas, Soph. El. 690, o« another day: ov fiaKpov Xpovov, Soph. El. 478, within no long while : tov Xonrov xpovov, Soph. El. 817, for the future: a«pas wktos, Soph. ^i. 285, at dead midnight: t»}s TrdpoiOev ei5<£/>6Vijs, Aesch. Pers. 182, during the past night. Note 2. The Genitive also denotes the space within which anything takes place (a very rare and poetical, chiefly an Epic, usage). fjIxepiiovTa.'s ^kvovs p,a.Kpavyrjs, THUC. iv. 33. § IOO. GENITIVE OF VALUE. The Genitive of Value goes with Verbs of Estimating, Buying, and ^^^^feo^mount). GENITIVE OF VALUE. 93 Value or Estimate : a£«3, judge worthy; rao-o-io, rate or value/ ti/*(3, value, assess (ri/*(3pii). Buy : irplajxai, I buy ; dtvovfxai, I buy. Sell : 7r(oA5, 1 offer for sale; diroSCSop.ai, I sell. Sot;a XprjfiaTmv ovk mvrjTrj. ISAEUS. Reputation is not to be purchased with money. ovk av airehofirjv iroXKov ras e\.mSas. Plat. / would not have sold my hopes for much. Tifiarat /moi 6 avr\p davarov. PLAT. My accuser proposes death as my penalty. XpvcrS, xa\icei, I wonder at or admire; ev8aip.ovi£v>, I congratu- late; oiKTeipo), I pity ; opytfofmi., I am angry; 0ovZ, I envy or grudge ; fijA.5, 1 envy (in good sense) or praise ; fiaKapifa, I felicitate ; ayapat, I wonder at, admire. £r)\a> ere tov vox), Trj<; Be Bei\laev, tjjs dvoias &s o-' iiroiKTtlpa> 7rdXai. SOPH. El. 920. Fie 1 how I have been pitying thee this long while for thy folly. (-rijs avoids may go with <£eu.) 6pdo-ovs tovS' ovk dXv£eis. SOPH. El. 627. For this daring thou shalt not escape. eiirep ti nXdeis t<3j> 'O/oecrreicov KaKtav. SOPH. El. 1117. If thou hast a tear for the woes of Orestes. Note 1. A similar Genitive is used in exclamations : — ev tov dvSpos, woe for, or, fie on the man ! & Zev [lao-iXev rijs Aejttotijtos tuv pevwv, Ar. Nub. 153, Royal Zeus! what subtlety of wit I o'ipoi rijs TVX"t)S, & piandpiov Trjs vo-uos, etc., o-xerXta ToX[ir]S, EUE. Al. 741. <5 TaXaiv' kyit o-edev, SOPH. El. 1210, ah, woe is me on thy account. o5/«h yeXwTos, Soph. Ai. 367, ah me for the mockery. Curtius compares des Leides. Note 2. Tov, with the Infinitive, denoting the Aim or Purpose of an action (Final), seems to be a Causal Genitive. Mtvws to Xyo-TiKov ck ttjs daXdo-crrjs tov ras Trpoo-oSovs /jaAAov ikvai air(p. ThUC. i. 4. Minos used to sweep piracy from the sea for the sake of his revenues coming in to him. Cf. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 40; Soph. Phil. 197. This construction occurs frequently in late Greek (LXX. and N. T.) Digitized by Microsoft® GENITIVE WITH JUDICIAL VERBS. 95 § 102. GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF JUDICIAL PROCEEDINGS.^ The Genitive is used with Verbs (and words) meaning : A. To accuse : alriSfiai, Smokm, KaTTjyopZ, (fjtvyo) (/ am pro- secuted) ; 6 evymv, the defendant ; 6 Shokwv, the prosecutor. So also irpoKaXovjuu, ari^eiju, B. To acquit : at-qp.i, I acquit ; aTofavyw, I am acquitted. t/. To condemn : alpS, I convict; KaraKpivat, Karayiyviia-Kd), Karaipirjifrifaixai (by vote), I condemn ; aX.'urKop.ai, I am convicted; 6, I am cast in or lose my smt. 8ia>/ea> fiev KaTrjiyopias, k6vov. But with some verbs it is the reverse : Kariqyopw tl two?, Karayiyvu>o-Ku> (Ka.Ta.Kpivu>) 6vov a-ov. Other verbs take a dative of the per- son, firicTKiJjrro/jcu o~oi <£6Vou, ly/caAai 6vov euyoei8(o\ias Karedero /xttro? Si7rA,aepco, Siacpepovrms eyw (excel, differ from), viKWfiai, jJttgj/mm (am conquered by, inferior to). 1 The Genitive used with Comparatives may be an Ablative use (cf. Latin} or it may denote a general connexion, "greater in regard to." ' Digitized by Microsoft® THE CASES. Verbs of ruling :—$yov[A,ai (also with dative), ap%ui, rvpavvevco, Tvpavvw, errpaT7j'ya>. Many others : — irXeoveicTa), /leioveKTa, varepS), varep- itp>, ekarrS), eXarrodfiab, Xei-irofiat. Many take a dative (nvi) in respect of which the superiority or inferiority is shown. N.B. — SicMpepo/jLai, I quarrel with, takes a dative. epwv i8iv irepieivai. Xen. A commander should in endurance surpass private men. § 106. GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. 1 A Genitive denoting that from which anything is separated is used with many verbs expressing removal, distance, separation, loosing, delivering, and the like. * The Genitive here is the representative of the Ablative. It is im- possible to group the usages of the Genitive under two distinct headings (1) Genitive or Connexion, (2) Ablative or Separation. Many Ablative or Separative uses have already been noticed (e. g. Partitive d/j£roxos, Connexion Afrnprdvu). Any attempt at too rigid symmetry would violently put asunder usages which are closely connected. See Intro- ductory Note. Digitized by Microsoft® GENITIVE OF SEPARATION. 99 Such verbs are — Sie^w, / am distant; yiopifa, I separate; (X<»P>,(oimu), eipyco, I exclude ; (ex<°), I withhold ; o-repi- cricopai, I am deprived of; ZXevOepQ, I set free ; ^iXa, I strip ; dtjiia-rqp.1 (with its intransitive tenses), I cause to revolt; nava, I make to cease (from) ; Tra.vop.ai, Aijyw, I cease ; dira\\do-o-, I deliver from; dwaXXdo-o-opai, I escape ; eiVcoi, Trapax, I yield ; 4>ei8o/j,au, I spare. r\ vrjaos ov -ttoXv Ste^et ttj? rjiretpov. THUC. The island is not far distant from the mainland. EWrjviKov TrokepLOv ecr^ov ol 'Adrjvaloi. The Athenians desisted from the Greek war. tyjTeiTe avrobv vvvi a7raXkayr)vai. PLAT. You are seeking now to he set free from them. /teroL ravra £vvej3i) Qacriovs tZv ' AOijvaiiov diroo-Tfjvai. Thuc. i. 100. After this it happened that the Thasians revolted from the Athenians. ©rjcrtus Tols 'Adrjva's Seivov irpoo-Tdyp.a.TO's -qXivdepuxrev. ISAE. 10. 28. Theseus delivered Athens from a terrible tax. eiTrov T<3 Uavcravia rov KTjpvKos pr/ Xeiirccrdat. THUC. i. 131. They told Pausanias not to leave the herald (see Soph. El. 479). Similarly with nouns, wavo-rqp rwvBe (ttovihv), Soph. El. 384; AvTijjOia 6vov, El. 447. Many Adjectives may he brought under this head, as yvfivos, ^rtXo9, icadapos, opcpavos, eXevOepo? : and all words compounded with a privative, dpLvrifiav, dfieX^, a/Aoipot;, ayevo-Tos. Most of these have already been brought under other rules. rj eTTiOvpua apwt\p,mv twv kivSvvcov. ANTIPIL Desire is forgetful of dangers. evvfj<; SiKalas ovk avrjKOO, l^ioTTTj/it, TrpoKeifjtai, irpo- TiBivai, Trporifiui, virepopZ (also with Accus.), virepaXySi, Kara- yeXZ, Ka.Ta.v oIk€i(ov wpoTrrjXaKitreis tov yrjpais. PLAT. Rep. 329. The insults by relations on old dge. Slo. to avroiv 8eo9 tov 8a.vd.TOV. PLAT. Phaed. 85 A. In consequence of their fear of death. avTwv Subjective, 6o.v6.tov Objective. to kXclvov 'EAA.a8os ■Kpoo-xqp-' aywvos. Soph. El. 682. The glorious pageant of Greece, consisting in a contest. Here the Genitives are freer ; 'EAAaSos is possessive, ayZvos epexegetical. § 109. The Epexegetical Genitive. What is called the Epexegetical (i.e. explanatory) Genitive is a free application of the Genitive of Material. dp.a$la avTTj fj iirovelSio-TOS fj tov oteo~da,L dSevai a ovk oK5e. Plat. Apol. xvii This culpable ignorance of (which consists in) thinking on* knows what one does not know. 1 Some freer and miscellaneous uses of the Genitive are added. They have been brought together at the end of this Section in order not to lengthen previous ^ad^^gjjh^no^g^go^gs common constructions. GENITIVE OF THE AGENT. o 8e lyKe<£aA.ds eariv, 6 rots a«r0ijo-eis irapkyvyv to{! aKoveiv (cat ojogiv Kai 6o-paiveo-9a.i. Pl. Phaed. xlv. 22 «s iXmv, news of friends; cf. Antig. 633, 1182, 0. C. 317. a Se [/.eyicrr' e/3AacrT£ vofiifxa., raivSe epop.evav apio-Ta. Soph. El. 1095. But as to the mightiest of ordinances that exist, in respect of these, prospering right nobly. Trjs /irjT/oos r/Ka> tijs epiijs (frpdtrwv ev ots vvv etrriv. Soph. Tr. 1122. I am here to tell thee of my mother, what her present plight. ouSajuaJs efiavrfjs oScr' aSeipavTOS lXoi. AiSSCH. Pers. 164. Being by no means without fear for (concerning) myself, my The a privative in dSelfiavros does not here take a genitive of want or separation (like TreTrXiav a/iot/aos, without a share of robes). But by a loose analogy common in all language, it may help to account for the use of the genitive. § 112. The Genitive with Adjectives and Adverbs. Partitive, juo-oyos, dfieroxos : Ifrop.oipo's, apoipos, aKXrjpos, ayevaTos. Perception, (aKovoi) : /carqKoos, wdjkoos, IthJ/coos, o-vvrJKoos, dvijKOOs : inrrjicoov Se? eu/at tgSv yovkmv. Plat. Rep. 463. These are also found with the Dative. rrj noXei KcmjKooi eyevovTO. PLAT. Rep. 499. They became obedient to the state. Digitized by Microsoft® GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND AD VERBS. 103 remembering, forgetting,etc, Experienced in, Aiming at, Plenty, Caring for, \ , , - , • • . > . , • emp.eA.rjS, a/teAijs: fivrip,(ov, afivrjfKiiv, eTTiXrj(rp.ikofiadr)s, fond of learning; d^ipiflijs, late in learning (serus studiorum). epyireipos, Saretpos : eTrunr)p.u>v, rplj3u>v (versed in). Swepus (perdite amans), love-sick for ; onJ/JoAos (compos), possessed of, or having succeeded in gaining. fieo-rds, jrAecus, irAij/Oijs : ttXovo-ios, a.irXrfrro'i. irevqi, kevos, evSeqs, JjrioViys, eXXtirrjs, yv/xvos, ^■tAds, Kadapos. eprjp.os, 6pav6s, eXevdepos, ayvos (pure from), cj>ei8\6s (sparing of). ri/uos, a£ios, (Ivijtos (pv/rchaseable) : &paios, ripe for (Xen. Cyr. iv. 6. 9). ZyKpaTrjs, aK/oanjs, aKparup : Kvpws, avroKpdrmp. aAAos, dAAoibs, erepos, 8id\bs (tov [i€XXovtos, blind with regard to the future) ; o-vyyvwpatv (ap.a.pTr)p.a.Tb>v, forgiving of wrongs); KaKovpyos (eawov), inflicting wrongs on; faXoSaipos (fond of giving). Ending in -kos, irpaKTiKos, Trapaa-KeuacmKds, SiSaa-KaXiKos, n-opto-- tikos, k(iiXvtik6s (rijs dperijs). Separation, Value, Comparative notion : — Better, stronger than, and the reverse, Different from,. Connexion generally, some diratfijs, d'Scopos, dvr/Koos, aQkaTOS, ayvfivao-ros, ao-Ktvos (wnfurnished) ; dreX-js (immunis) ; art/ios, etc. etc. Others have been given under previous Rules. Digitized by Microsoft® All words com- pounded with a 104 THE CASES. § 113. Free use of the Genitive with Substantives. A few instances are given to show how the Genitive lends itself to the loosest connexion. Some may be regarded as free Objective Genitives, some as Genitives of Separation, others can only be regarded as Genitives of Connexion. irposjSoAij StKeXtas, Thuc. iv. 1, means of approaching Sicily, road to Sicily ; SIkcu ttoWuv raXavrwv, a lawsuit involving many talents (cf. Genitive of amount) ; /cpai-os tw Spu>p.ev(ov, Soph. El. 85, victory in our enterprise; Trarpbs Xovrpd, Soph. El. 84, libations in memory of a father ; ap>;£ts Tvqp,a.Tu>v, Soph. El. 875, help in or against troubles (cf. eiriKovpos) ; irarpos ti/jw/dos, Soph. El. 811, an avenger whom a father has (Subjective), an avenger of a father (Objective) ; at rav kokui' o-wovo-iai, intercourse with bad men (freely Objective) ; /?ta ttoXltZv, in spite of citizens (freely Objective) ; aVoorao-ts t5v 'Adijvadav, revolt from the Athenians (separation) ; Xvcris 6a.va.rov, deliverance from death (separation); iJ0v, etc.); r\o-vyia lyQpwv, rest from enemies (freely Separative) ; dtpopfirj epyoiv, Xen. Mem. ii. 7. 11, means of setting about, or stimulus to, deeds. THE DATIVE CASE. Preliminary Note on the Dative. § 114- The Dative denotes generally the person or thing more remotely connected with the action than is the Accusa- tive. It thus denotes that to which the direct object is made over or transferred (Dative of the Remoter Object) after verbs and adjectives which seem necessarily to require such a case in order to complete the information they have to give {e.g. 8iSu>p.i p.urdbv — t£ a-TpaTLiory. By a natural extension the Dative also denotes the person or thing, affected beneficially or injuriously, interested in the action (Dative of Interest), and can be added at pleasure to any verb whose meaning does not necessarily demand it (e.g. oi Kaipol irpoeivrai rrj n-dAa, our opportunities have been let slip, to the injury of the state). The Dative of Interest includes the Dative of the Possessor, and the Ethic Dative. Next to the Dative of Interest, as akin to it in sense, although probably the use of the case has beeD Digitized by Microsoft® DATIVE OF COMMUNITY. 105 transferred from the old Instrumental, may be placed the Dative expressing Contact with or Community, one of the most important and extensive rules belonging to the case. Further, the Dative has inherited the meanings of two lost cases, first the Instrumental, including not only the Instrument and Means, but also the Agent, Cause, Measure of Difference, and the accompanying Circumstances ; secondly, the Locative in its double reference to Place and Time. The Dative of Place, however, is used as a rule only in Poetry ; in Prose, to express motion to, not the Dative, but a preposition with the Accusa- tive, is required. § 115. THE DATIVE OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT TO WHOM ANYTHING IS SAID, DONE, OR GIVEN. rj ficopia BiBcoatv avOpanroii icana. MENANDER. Folly bringeth troubles on men. rj yeyevrjfievT] pa^r) too fiaaiXel ayyeWerai. XEN. The battle which had taken place is reported to the king. SiSmcn fucrdov rm ffTparevfian. Xen. He gives pay to the army. With a substantive — fir) egafidprriTe Trepl tt)v tov Qeov 860-iv vjj.iv. PL. Apol. xviii. Lest you commit some great error m regard to the gift of the god to you. § Il6. Miscellaneous examples showing certain verbs which in Greek take a Dative of the Kemoter Object. oAtyapyta tcjv klvSvviov rots 7roAAots fieTaoiowcri. Thuc. vi. 39. Oligarchy gives a share of its dangers to the many. Siave/xiu )(pr)fj.aTa Tots TroAtrais. I distribute money among the citizens. SiaXXda-a-ei ILepBiKKav rots ' kd-qvawis. Cf. THUC. ii. 95. He reconciles Perdiccas with (to) the Athenians. Digitized by Microsoft® io6 THE CASES. Aayxavto SiKtjv (eyK\r][m) Ar/pAxrOevei. I bring a lawsuit (accusation) against Demosthenes. Demostheni litem intendo. Axipovri, wfifavo-w. Soph. Ai. 816. / shall mairry Acheron. (Cf . nuio in Latin.) irovel. SOPH. Every man labours for himself. [uaa> aofaoTriv oaTt? ov% avra> cro^os. MeNANDEE. I hate a wise man who is not wise for himself. Kaupol wpoeivrai rrj irokei. DEM. 19. 8. Opportunities have been sacrificed, to the injury of the state. Good instances occur in Soph. Meet. 66 (!xfy>ofs), 496 (ijA"v), 979 (!x0/°°w), Antig. 618 («8d™), Dem. 18. 205 (t$ warpC). § Il8. Free Use of the Dative of Interest. Kairot o" eycu 'rip/qva Tots (ppovovcriv cS. Soph. Ant. 904 (cf. 25). And yet I did honour thee in the judgment of the right-minded. crxeSov n pdpw [MOptav o<£A«TKava>. SOPH. Ant. 470. Belike I incur ^^g^Jr^he eyes of a fool. DATIVE OF INTEREST. 107 cr(pv fxev evToXrj Aios «X«' "Aos Srj. AESCH. P. V. 12. For you (i.e. so far as you are concerned) the hest of Zeus hath ending here. ovftiv tlfiL kou tWvtix' v/juv irdXat. SOPH. Phil. 1030. Naught am I, dead to you long since. (i.e. you thought me dead.) v7roXaft,/3dveiv Set tQ toiovtq oti ei!i}6tys «rrt. PLAT. We must assume in the case of such a person that he is simple. kayxdvei tou KXrjpov rrj yvvaiKi. ISAEUS, 3. 32. Ee claims the inheritance m behalf of the woman. The usual construction would be virep tjJs ywoMtos. avovcr6ai t$ 6e. XEN. Ages. ii. 15. To he crowned in honour of the god. So Ktipea-OaC ijv t(ov 'A6rjval(av ' d^io-Tao-^ai. THUC. ii. 3. The Plataean democracy did not wish to revolt from the Athenians. Cf TAC. Agr. 18, quibus volentibus bellum erat. fiiiepai u,d\uTTa fjcrav rfj M.iTvX-qvr) eaXiDKViq. ore, K.r.X. Thxjc. iii. 29. Seven days had passed since the capture of Mitylene when, etc. See Temporal Sentences, § 211. rep plv e£o>dev cwtto/mixj) [ia owe ayav Oepphv fjv. Thtjc. ii. 49. To the outward touch the body was not very hot. 'EjrtSa/tivos cart ttoAis ev Se£t£ eo-TrXeovn rbv 'loviov koXttov. Thuc. i. 24. Epidamnus is a town on your right as you enter the Ionic Gulf. So (TvveXovri (o-wtejuvovti) threw, or simply o-weXovTi, to speak shortly, concisely, in brief, in short Digitized by Microsoft® io8 THE CASES. § 119. THE DATIVE OF THE POSSESSOR. Especially with elfil, ylryvofiai, inrdpxp). wye? ovk eiaiv tj/miv. We have no ships. aXXois [lev yp^aTa eart TroXKa, r]fuv Se ^vfifiaypi dyaOoi. THUC. Some have plenty of money, hut we have good allies. oiiSev lp.01 kcu <&t,\nnr How are you ? eyr) ra epya to?s Xoyois 6/*oA.oy£ii'. THU.C. V. 55. He said that their deeds did not correspond with their words. ovk alo~xfi6v Ictti rots irovrjpois Si-acfrepeo-dat. Xen. Mem. ii. 9. 8. It is not wrong to quarrel with (differ from) bad men. Contrast the use of 8iaepo> with a Genitive. ervxov irpoa-eXdutv KaAAip. PLAT. Ap. iv. (cf. xviii., Iv- rvyyavui). I chanced to meet Callias. So irpocrrv\ya.v(o, iVTvy\avia, diravTto, irpoo-icpovaj, tlvi. Tip 'AXKifiidSr} Ttves €S Xoyovs ^XBov. THUC. viii. 48. Certain persons had a conference with Alcibiades. So SiaX.eyojj.ai tivi. /3ov\ear8(o eueXms o/iocre ytopTJo-at. tois Ivairtois. THUC. iv. 10. Let him with good heart resolve to close with the foe. Cf. p.d)(op,a.t, t iro\ep.(o tivi. Xpfj eirecr&ai T vojMi). THUC. ii. 35. One must follow the custom. B. With Adjectives. 6 dya6opovS) Arj/jioo-deveb (really = ois povel A.) Dem. 18. 30. I hold the same opinions as Demosthenes. b. ravTa 5rao"^ets airep Kal £yu>. You experience the same as I do. This is a very common construction of 6 avros in Demosthenes. el tii 8iur)(yp[£oiTO TO) avT(£ \6y<$ Sxrirep crv. Plat. Phaedr. xxxvi. If any one were to affirm positively (with) the same statement as you (that you make). C. BovSTvoi 81 ov rrj airy yA.coo-0-17 xpeiovxcu Kal TeXiovoL Hekod. iv. 109. The Budini do not use the same speech as the Geloni. Cf. idem atgue (ac) in Latin. This is not so common a con- struction in Attic. Brachylogy is very frequent in the construction of 6 ciutos. (oVav) elcrbSb) 8' ccr&j/iaTa opovvr' CKetvft) ram ( = S.Trep Kal IkeEvos cepe). Soph. Elect. 269. Whene'er I behold hkn wearing the self-same robes as my dead father (as those of my father). Note 2. i'cros, irapaTrX-quio'i, 6/totos have the same construc- tions as o aTJTOS. ov Kal crv tvttth ras i'cras irX-qya^ ep.01; An. Ban. 636. Shan't you be beaten with the same number of blows as I? § 122. DATIVE OF THE INSTRUMENT, INCLUDING MEANS, AGENT, CAUSE, MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE. The Dative in expressing these meanings has inherited the work of the lost instrumental case. A. Instrument or Means. Xprjo-ros irovr]pol<; ov TiTpacrKeTcu \dy015. MENAND, A good man is not wounded by bad words. Digitized by Microsoft® DATIVE OF THE AGENT. efiaWov avTovf Tu0oi<; re k). ficro-ao-dat, vucao-Oal nvi, to be beaten by any one, are used as well as rjcrcracrdai, viKOdOai twos, or vtto tivos. Verbals in -reos regularly take a Dative of the Agent (see Participles). Digitized by Microsoft® 112 THE CASES. C. Cause. (This may, in some cases, be a Dative of Circumstance.) evrrpayiat,*; ovk e%v/3pi£o[iev. ThUO. We do not break out into insolence in consequence of prosperity. ovk elfil Tots ireirpaypivoii hvo-Ovfio's. Soph. El. 549. I am not despondent because of what has happened. Cf. Thuo. i. 95, 2x0«- So (piXti}, through friendship ; evvola,, through goodwill (volun- tate) ; ayvoia,, through ignorance ; t&> pio-eTv, through hatred (Dem. 45. 30) ; and 4>va-ei, naturally. avdpunto's vcreL itoXitikov £(oov. ARIST. Eth. Man is by nature a creature adapted to social life. The Dative of Cause is joined to many verbs express- ing Emotion (axdopai, / am vexed; xa-^aLvco, I am vexed; ddvpw, I am despondent; r/Sopai, 1 am pleased; ayaAAojuai, 1 emit; In-aipo/wu, I am elated; aio-xvvopai, I am ashamed (also with Accus.), o-repyia, ayaTrw, I am content). Cf. kirl with the Dative after such verbs. o Oeos epyois Tots Sucaiois ^Berat. Philemon. God is pleased with righteous deeds. AviravSpos ^apecof ejtepe tt) drifila. Xen. , Lysander was offended at the affront. rots crots a^eo-i KaOvfipifav. SOPH. Ai. 153. Mocking at thy woes. lira.ip6p.evos 7} ttXovtu) ■>) ictxvi 17 a\\ t£ toiovtu). Plat. Rep. iv. 434. Elated either by wealth or strength, or some other such ad So xaWus epeiv. Both phrases also take the Accus. (Eur Med. 1018). v Digitized by Microsoft® DATIVE OF CIRCUMSTANCE. 113 D. Measwre of Difference, especially with Comparatives. erepo? irepov K6(pa\rj pLeifyov eari. PLAT. One man is taller than another by a head (i.e. is a head taller). SeKa ervri irpo ttjs ev ^aXaptvi vavpaxlas, etc. Plat. Leg. 698. Ten years before the sea-fight at Salamis (before by ten years). TCHTOVTtp rfiiov f5 ocra) paXXov KeKTrjpai. XEN. Cyr. viii. 3. 40. I live the more pleasantly the more I possess, i.e. by so much the more pleasantly. So 7roAAo/3ovvTO fir) (iei£oiu irapao-Kevrj eirikQcaaiv. ThuO. They were afraid that they would come against them with a greater force. oi 'A6r)vaioi dreXei ry vikt) avea-rrjcrav. Tnuo. The Athenians retired with the victory incomplete, KaKOuriv oorts pr]8ev e^aXXdcrcreTai. SOPH. Ai. 474. Whoso Jcnoweth no change m respect of ills. cktos e£ AiTaXlas ^avQatvi irdXois. Soph. El. 705 (see 1343). A sixth out of Aetolia with bright bay mares. Cf. Soph. Antig. 589 (irvoais). Digitized by Microsoft® U4 THE CASES. Note 1. The preposition which would be used in such a construction, and which is sometimes used, is o-vv. e.g. (TrXeov £vv iravrl tw (TTparevfiaTi. ThTJC. VI. 62. Note 2. Many adverbial Datives are thus used: Spofiy, at full speed ; kvk\, in this way, thus ; S^oo-i'p, publicly ; 181.$, privately ; 7re£ij, on foot ; toot), thus ; y, in which way ; t<£ ovti, in reality. perd with Genitive, a-vv with Dative, or adverbs proper, are synonymous expressions : e.g. o-w oIk-q, /xera Siktjs, Si/caiajs (for the Dative of Circumstance). In Soph. Ai. 767, 6eolpa.Ki ko.\ rfj kottlSl. Xen. Gyr. ii. 2. 9. He was following the captain with breastplate and with bill. So afia, Soph. Antig. 115. § 124. DATIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. The Dative, as representing the defunct Locative, denotes Time when and Place where. A. Time. The Dative denotes a definite point of time when something occurs, in certain phrases without the Preposition ev. It is used chiefly of day, night, month, year, and festivals. T^Se T7) rjfiepa = a-^fiepov, rrifiepov, on this day, to-day. Trjhe TJJ wart, cnreOavev, he died to-night. Digitized by Microsoft® DATIVE OF TIME AND PLACE. 115 rrj Trporepaia, the day before. (So ri) vurepaiq, irporepq, Sevrepq.) 01 ev Idcofir) TeTapT

oplois, rots 'EmviKiois, Aiovucrtots, Ilava- dr/vaiois, etc. So in reckonings of the month : 'ivy kcu vegi, on the last day of the month (see Lexicon) ; Bo^Spo/uGvos p-qvos Terdpry unapevov, on the fourth day of the first decade of Boedromion. A prose instance of this Dative of Time occurs in Isocr. Evag. 66. Ttva evprjaropev rZv Tots TpauKots xpovois yevopeviov • Whom shall we find of those who were born in the Trojan age 1 A poetical one in Soph. El. 193. oiKTpa. pev vocttois aiSd. A voice of woe on the return. Note. As a rule ev is added with other expressions, though sometimes it is omitted. Sometimes ev is found with the above expressions, except in names of festivals. 'Ev is more likely to be omitted when an adjective is used, e.g. kv wkti, but ply. wkti. In Thucydides ev is sometimes omitted where we should have expected it, e.g. ene'ivy rfj eo-fioXy, Thuc. ii. 20, in this invasion. So ry irpoTepp irapovalq., Thuc. i. 128, during his first stay ; iy irporepg. (IkkAijo-^), Thuc. i. 44, at the former meeting of the assembly. « Xpowp, in time, or at last; Kcup$, in season, = es Kaipov, (Iv KaipS is extremely rare) ; x el f 1 ® vo ' s <"W without ev ; 01 ev wpp, men in the prime of life. B. Place. This use of the Dative without the Pre- position ev is poetical. en peyas ovpavQ Zeis. SOPH. El. 174. Still is Zeus gretfA^epgerfa^^ n6 THE CASES. Prose writers, however, use this case with names of towns. MapadSvi kou 'ZaXap.ivi Kal IIAaTaiais. PLAT. At Marathon, and Salamis, and Plataeae. N.B.—M.apa6(ovi and 'ZaXap.lvi are real Locatives. So ' A.drjvqu-1, Qrjf3rjo-i, 'OXv/XTriacri, IIXaTaiao-t. Veritable Locatives are o«coi, at home (domi) ; x a l m 'h on ^ ground (humi) ; aypouri, in the country (ruri) ; 6vpa.Wh say- vapaivS, ^ ) gMse Xkyu>, tell. , j dyyeXXoi, report. {nroj3dXX, serve iOeois). a,irei8!i>, disobey. Obs. ireidov p.01, be persuaded by me, hearken to me ; iridov fioi, obey me. 3. Verbs of helping and hindering. aixvvta (in Act.), ) virrjpeTw, serve, apr/yo) (poet.), \help. xapi£op.ai, gratify. twiKovpa, help. efiirobwv tivai, j Tip.o>pu> (in Act.), avenge. Por dfivvo/j.a.1 and tttnopoCuai see Middle Voice. Digitized by Microsoft® WORDS WHICH TAKE A DATIVE. 117 or 4. Verbs of being angry with, blaming, threatening. dyava.KTopAj.i, blame. 4>dov5>, envy. fia.pea>ipu, fero), I am indignant, annoyed, vexed. N.B. — AoiSopu Act. takes the Accus. pApxpopal tivi, or rt tivi {rlva or rtVos), / com/plain of a person or thing. fiurw, hate, takes the Accus. 5. The Impersonal Verbs. Sonet pot., mihi videtur. (8oku> poi, mihi videor.) ov pot Sokw, I think not. irpiirei pot, me decet. irpoa-rjKti pot, it concerns me. ovSev pot wpoa-rjKn., nihil ad me Xva-ireXei pot, it is profitable for me. pereo-Tt pot tovt(0v, I have a share of this. peXet pot dptrrjs, I care for virtue. peTapeXet pot tovtuv, I repent of this, poenitet me huius rei. Set pot tivos, opus mihi est ali- qua re, but Set pe eXOetv. 6. Likeness or unUkeness. eoiKa, (impers. eotKe), am like. laS>, make equal. 0/xoi.l), make like. 7. Agreement, disagreement. dfiio-/3r]T, dispute. aTre^ddvopat, am odious to, hated by. eva.VTiovp.ai, oppose. eirtTtdepat, attack. eplfa, quarrel with. opoXoyZ, agree with. pd)(opat, fight. Like iroXepZ, 81a, iroXepov levai tivi, to be at war with one; Is x e 'P as eXdelv, or 6p6o-e ^lopetv ,tivi, to come to blows, close quarters, with one. dpst>io-fSi)T(av£). arvvaSo), agree with (opp. SlJlSw). to to n8 THE CASES. 8. Meeting, following. aKoXovdw, I follow. eVo/tat, / follow (also (rvv tivi, and perd TLViov). d-n-avTui, meet with, come across, ivrvyxavu, iiwd with, come across. TrposTvyxdvia, meet with, come across. ■n-poo-Kpovo), knock wp against. SiaXeyo/mi, converse with. ofiiXZ, associate with. 7rp6o-ei/M, approach. crvveip.1, associate with. kwkp\op,a.i, advance against. TrapardtrcropMi, stand beside in battle. 9. Many verbs compounded with Prepositions, especially with hri, irpos, uT/3r]T(0, dispute with. Sta/cei/mi <£iAik<3s TtVl (or irpos riva) or &La.Ti8ef>,a<, or Trposepop,at, ep,/3d\\w, throw in. ip.p,iv(j>, abide by. Jproiai, introduce, produce, iirdyta, lead in. emo-Tpa,T, make war on. £7riTciTT(o, impose, tirifyipu, bring up or against irpos^dXXm, put, apply to. j.' t apply to. irpos, set beside, compare (also Tt irapd, or w/ods ti). irapa.TdTTop.ai, stand beside in battle. TrepidirTia, fasten round. ■n-epij3d\\op.ai, throw round, cir- cumfundere, circumdare, e.g. t§ vrjo-tp ret^os, or vfjopos (and Gen.), different. 6/*/m>vos, abiding by. efupvros, im/planted. en-iTrjSews, suitable. exfyjos, hostile. eiivovs, well-disposed. Sva-vovs, ill-disposed. t'Sios (and Gen.), private, per- ib-os, equal, avuros, unequal. la-oppoTTos (and Gen.), equally matched. ike, near, and their contraries. koivos (and Gen.), common. 6'/iotos, like. dvo/toios, unlike. 6/ttoviyjos (and Gen.), called by the same name. TrapairX.rjO'ios, similar. 71-iowos, relying on, fretus. ottuttos, not to be trusted, or not trusting. TrposiX.rjs, beloved. TroAiyiuos, hostile, o-vp.jji.axo'i, in alliance, friendly. opoepov, ao~6p.)o-Tds, 1 Xpriepew Bvvao-8ai £vp,f$rj. Xen. Ap. iii. 5. 17. I fear that some evil, too great for us to be able to bear, may happen. See Eur. Bacch. 840. The Positive is sometimes so used with <3ore. to vSevyeiv. Xen, Cyr. iii. 3. 51. It is more desirable to die than to run away. BUi t6 xXebv fj <£tAtp. Thuc. iii 12. Through fear more than friendship. So with a Positive. rnvrtrri 'AdnvaiZv rj Swa/us uaXXov ii ooKeta. Thuc. L 121. 2. The power ofthe^hggfic^^^jh^sed rather than their own. 122 COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. Note 4. Two adjectives or adverbs compared with each other may both be in Comparative. Ttjv elprjvrjv avayKaioripav r] KaXXiw inre\dfj.{3a.vov eivai. Aesohin. iii. 69. They were regarding the peace as inevitable rather than honourable. So o-vvTOjidnepov rf o-aeo-repov, cwrtly rather than clearly. Is. 6. 24. ii) o-rpaT-qyol TrXeioves rj fSeXrioves. ArIST. Ach. 1078. Ho ! Generals, more numerous than brave. Cf. Latin — Paulli Aemilii contio fuit verior quam gratior populo. Liv. xxii. 38. The speech of Paullus Aemilius was more true than acceptable to the people. Note 5. Both the Comparative and Superlative may be used with a reflexive pronoun to denote a comparative or superlative degree reached by the person himself within his own experience. iroAA.

v dvdptoirwv. Antiph. Herod. 17. I was thrown into prison in a far more unconstitutional way than ever man was. Note 7. The Superlative is strengthened by 8ij, m>A.A$, iroXv : p,kyujTo, I show, „ I show myself, am manifest (sc. efiavrov). reXevTw, I end, „ I die (sc. fiiov). So in English i" turn, I join, I move, I change, etc. Both transitive and intransitive tenses are found in the same verb. E.g. tarrifii, I set (up) ; eorrjKa, I stand. So $va>, fiaivco, and others. (3.) Some simple verbs become intransitive when com- pounded with a preposition. ( fjLeTa/3aX\a>, 1 change. /3aX\w, I throw. ) eafiaWm, 1 I rush in, attack, or ( ififidWei, j (of rivers) flow in. kottto), I cut. irpoKovTto, I make progress. , , T , c , / ( I differ from, am su- Aepco, 1 bear. biad>epa>, -J' . * r r (. P enor t°- , T , f eWeiirm, 1 I fail : \ewra>, Heave. \ , , ' \ •> ' . \ 6/c\et7rft>, J 1 die, faint. 124 Digitized by Microsoft® THE MIDDLE VOICE. 125 (4.) The Active is sometimes Causative, i.e. it means " I get, or allow, a thing to be done," not " I do it myself." o Kvpos Kareuavcre to, ftao-iXeia. Cyrus had the palace burnt down. So in Latin — Verxes ad palum alligavit piratas. Verres had the pirates bound to a post.. Cic. Ver. iv. 29. § 129. THE MIDDLE VOICE. In the Middle Voice the action of the verb refers in some way or other to self. In some verbs, however, the notion of self is so much lost that the Middle differs from the Active only in giving a different meaning to the verb. The chief uses of the Middle Voice are — ATlJ1 . f (1.) Directly. A - Eeflexive '{ (2.) Indirectly. B. Causative. C. Eeciprocal. D. The notion of self is so blurred or lost that the Middle must be regarded as giving a new and different meaning to the Active ; in some cases there is no Active. Note. The Aorist Middle is never passive. The Future Middle is— (1) sometimes apparently passive, but really middle, e.g. \d\p- o/Acu, I will not leave (trov) ; Xei6^crofiai, I shall be left; tj dp xtf Ka/raXvo-erai, will fall to pieces ; KaraXvO^a-erai, be (2) really passive with certain verbs : Tt/t^cro/tat, I shall be honoured ; a-rvyi/ja-ojj.ai, I shall be hated ; Si8a£o/tekrjcr6fi, I show. ■{ 1. Directly Reflexive. 2. Indirectly Reflexive. (1.) The Directly Reflexive Middle. Self is the direct object or accusative. \ovofiai, I wash myself. Tpeiro/juai, I turn (intrans.), i.e. / turn myself. SrjXovficu, I show myself. The Middle is very rarely used in this way. It is more usual to employ the Active with a Reflexive Pro- noun : — E.g., / hire out myself, [uaQS) e/xavrop, not fiurOovfuu, which means / hire for myself : so aireKTeivev iavjov, not aire/CTeipaTo : €TraiveL<; aeavTov, not eiraivel. (2.) The Indirectly Reflexive Middle. Self is the Dative of the Indirect Object, or of Interest. Tropica, I provide. Tropl^opai (pifKa), I provide for myself. aTTort,dr)/j,i, I put off or airoTidefiai (jov vo/j,ov),Iput away away. Xoua, I wash. Trape^m, I offer or pre sent. from myself, i.e. disregard. awoTi0efiai, paQvjuav, I put away from myself, i.e. / overcome, lazy habits. airoTi&efiat Tporjv, I put away for myself, i.e. hoard or store food. Xovofiat, ra Ifiaria, I wash my own clothes (i.e. for myself my clothes). irape^ofiai (Bcnravrjv), I furnish my own expenses, from my own resources; fidprv pa, I bring for- ward a witness for myself my own witness, in my support. Digitized by Microsoft® THE MIDDLE VOICE. 127 The chief notions are — (1.) for self. (2.) from, self. (3.) what belongs to self. But the notion of for self pervades and easily explains all the uses. B. The Causative Middle. As the Active means I cause or allow others to do, so the Middle means I cause or allow others to do something for myself or on myself. 6 -rraTrjp SiSacrKerai tov viov. The father has Ms son taught, ypdcpco, I write; ypd, I bring, lead. ayofiat yvvaixa, I marry a wife, alpw, I take. alpovpai, I choose. a<\>a.ipw, I take away. dcj>aipovfiai''nva ti, I deprive a person of something (for my own sake). Digitized by Microsoft® 128 VOICES AND MOODS. aipa>, I take up. dfitifiw, I change (trans.), cni-exa), i" keep off, deter. d7roSiSa)/ji, I give back. (inirpdcrKto, I sell), afivvta (see Tip.pQ>). d.TraX.Xd(T(Tia, I set free. apxo) (iroXep-ov), I am the first of two parties to make (war) ; so with Xoyov. but o.p\(a, I rule. ffovXevto, I advise. yapM, I marry (duco). yew, i" give a taste of. ypd, I decide. iirdy(D,Iurgeon,hasten(tTms.). eTTiridrifii, I put or place upon. «X<», I have (neuter, I am ox I am able). itfayyeXXw, I proclaim. eTri\pr)tf>[^co, I put to the vote (of the President). aipo/iai, I take on myself, un- dertake (suscipio), begin, gain, ^ (Ace.) dfielfieo-Oai, to do by turns, answer, requite. 6.Trk-)(pp.a,l twos, refrain from, hold aloof from. dire.86p.rjv, I sold. diraWdo-o-opMi, I escape, I de- part from, I leave off. apypimi (ffoAe/iov) , i" begin war- like operations. apxo/mi (Passive), / am ruled povXevopai, I deliberate, cm<,- yap,ovpcu, (1) I marry (nubo) ; (2) I give in marriage, betroth. yevopai, I taste. ypdofiai, I get written down, I indict. Savei(op.ai, I borrow at interest (so xprjcrao-Oai). SiSdo-Kopcu tov vlov, I get my son taught. SlSdlTKOpML VTTO TWOS, I am taught by a person. 8iKd£ofj,a.L (SIkttjv crot), / go to law with you, conduct a case : especially of the prosecutor, opposed to favyew. Iwdyopai, 1 hasten (intrans.). eKniQuxai, I attack, twL. e'xo/iot, I cling to, I come next to, lam eager for (with Gen.). eKo.yykXXop.a.1, 1 promise, I pro- fess, I denounce. €m\p7j(f)^opM,i, I vote, decree by vote (of the Assembly). Digitized by Microsoft® THE MIDDLE VOICE. 129 6-ifo (of the priest), I sacrifice. 177/tj, I send. KaTao-Tpecpto, I overturn. K01/J.Q, I lull to sleep. ko[i[£o>, I transport. Xap./3dv, I make to cease, I stop (trans.). irddio, I persuade. Troiui, I do or ' iroiZ Xoyov, I compose a speech. 68bv Ti'otw. / make a road. irpoviroih), I hand over (trado). ■n-ovrjpevta, I am uiicked. irokiTtvut, I am a citizen. o-kottZ, I look at, examine. o-ocj>[£ia, I make wise, I teach. cnrlvSco, I pour out a libation. t16t)ojj.ai, I subdue. Koip.Zp.aL, I sleep. Kop.l^op.a.1, I recover, get back what was lost. Xap.fidvopai' tivos, Hay hold of. Xav66.vop.ai, linX.avOdvop.ai, I ripoypZ two. tivi, I punish A for B's satisfaction. And so — Tipi(opai,, I act tlie sophist, 1 quibble, contrive. o-rrevSopai, I make a truce. riderai vopov 6 Sijyiios, the people makes laws for itself. 6 Oepevos, the mortgagee (also the depositor in a bank, etc.). Tipiapovpai rivd tivi, I revenge myself on A for wronging B. Similarly — dpvvm ri tivi, I keep off some- thing from B. Digitized by Microsoft® ance on or punish thee. (1) dpvvopat n, I defend my- self against a thing. 130 VOICES AND MOODS. Hence — (1) apvvut TroXefjtov, I keep off (2) d/j,vvop.at riva, I requite or war. pumshaperson, — rots o/jo«hs, (2) a/xvvia ' hd-qvalois, I help with retaliation, wept, or wrip the Athenians. Tiros, for a certain thing, rtva SUtjv, poenas do, pendo,luo, tlvo/jml SUrjv, poenas swmo, I I pay a penalty. exact a penalty or vengeance. aivio, I show (trans.). faivopai, I appear, am seen. Xpw, (1) I give an oracle. xP™l J - al > I ff 6 ^ an oracle given. (2) I furnish, lend. xp^f tal > I use - Note. An examination of the above list will bring out two points. 1. The Active is often transitive, while the Middle is neuter. 2. The Middle is often used of mental rather than of bodily actions. § 130. THE PASSIVE VOICE. The Syntax of the Passive Voice is much freer in Greek than in Latin. Thus, besides the constructions noticed in the Notes below, Verbs which take a Genitive or a Dative can be used personally in the Passive, unlike the Latin. E.g. KarcKppovS) avTov, I despise Mm. KaTaqipoveiTai vir e/xov, he is despised by me. •marevovai t&3 fiacriXel, they trust the king. o ftaatkevs iriareverai vir clvtwv, the king is trusted by them. 7ro)5 av eTTifiovXevaaifii avra>, ec fir) teal eVe/3ou- \evdr]v vir avrov ; ANTIPH. How could I plot against him, unless also 1 had been plotted against by Mm ? Note 1. Neuter verbs can form passive participles. apX *! I rule > apx°p.evos, ruled over. This is chiefly the case with neuter participles. to rjo-e/3yp.ha aureus (vw' avT&v), impious acts committed by them. Digitized by Microsoft® THE PASSIVE VOICE. I 3l To. KivSvvevdevTa, risks run. Toi fnw.pTqfi.kva, errors committed. to. o-Tparevofieva, warlike measures. to. croi TT£Tro\iTeviJ.eva, your political acts. Or with impersonal passives. Trapeo-KevavTai, preparation has been made. afiapTaverai, error is being committed. ovdev dcre^Sen-at, no impiety is being committed. Cf. Lat. ventv/m est, erat; factum est, etc. Note 2. Deponent Verbs are those which have no Active Form, e.g. Seconal, I receive; oT/xai, I think. Passive Deponents arc those whose Aorist has a Passive (not a Middle form), e.g. [3ovX.op.ai, I wish, i/3ov\r)dr)v. The exclusively Passive forms of Deponents are sometimes Passive not Middle in sense, e.g. fiiafapai, I force ; ef3ido-6r)v, I was forced. Even the Middle form of a Deponent may be Passive in meaning, e.g. /Stafopxt I am forced, or suffer violence. In such cases there was an original Active form, e.g. /3iafa>. See further, Jelf, § 368. Note 3. It will be remembered that the Aorists in -»)i> and -6i\v, with their corresponding futures in -■qo-op.ai, -d-qo-opai, are the only Passive forms of a Greek verb. The Middle forms, except the Aorists, and as a rule the Futures, are of course Passive as well as Middle in meaning. Note 4. The direct object of the Active becomes the sub- ject of the Passive, and the subject of the Active, the agent, is expressed by vwo and the Genitive. 6 (pi\.6croos SiSacr/cei tov 7rai8a. o 7ro»s Si8acrK£Taj iirb tov ov. The Agent is also expressed, but much less commonly — (a.) By the Dative. See Dative of Agent. (6.) By the Prepositions diro, e£, irapa, Trpos. See these Prepositions. The object of the Active may however remain the object of the Passive, and the dative of the Active become the subject of the Passive. This is an extension of § 130. oi eTTiTtTpappevoi. rrjv v\aKrjV, THUC. i. 126, cf. V. 37, ravra CT-orraA/xEvot, and Eur. Bhes. 5. So in English, I leavt him a fortune, He has been left a fortune. Digitized by Microsoft® 132 VOICES AND MOODS. § 13I. THE MOODS. Introductory Note on the Subjunctive and Optative. The Indicative is sharply contrasted with the Subjunc- tive and Optative. The Indicative simply and directly makes a state- ment or asks a question without any qualification. 6 fiaaiKevs TeOvrjicev The king is dead. irodev f]Kei<; ; Where do you come from ? It is commonly said that the Indicative states facts, but the statement need not express a fact actually true ; e.g. 00 Ilepaai, evt/crjo-av tou? 'AOijvaiowi MapaOmvt, the Persians defeated the .Athenians at Marathon. The Subjunctive and Optative, on the other hand, make assertions, not as real, but as conceptions present to the speaker's mind. The Subjunctive and Optative are two aspects of one Mood. In the oldest Greek they represented originally the Willing or Wishing Mood, the Subjunctive being the more peremptory, Will ; the Optative, the fainter and more remote, Wish. This was soon modified into a second use, the Subjunctive express- ing a more vivid, the Optative a fainter, remoter Expectation or Possibility. Hence they soon came to be used in Sub- ordinate Sentences, expressing Purpose, Condition, Indefinite Frequency, etc. And though in Subordinate Sentences the general rule is for the Subjunctive to follow Primary, the Optative Historic tenses, yet there is no such fundamental distinction between the two Moods as to prevent the Subjunc- tive being used for the Optative, the two Moods sometimes alternating in the tame paragraph. Digitized by Microsoft® THE MOODS. 133 One or two instances from Homer will illustrate the difference between the Subjunctive and Optative : — Mr) ere Ki%eia>, 11. i. 26, let me not find thee. Mr] firjv a.K\et,a><} dnoXoi^v, II. xxii. 304, let me not fall ingloriously. ovk ea6 ovtoi avrjp, ovtf eaaerai, ovBe yevijTai. Hom. Od. xvi. 437. Lives not that man, nor e'er will live, nor e'er is like to be (born). Here the Subjunctive differs from the Future Indicative in stating what ia thought likely to occur, not positively what will occur. peia deos 7 e6e\epe Br/ eoirco irpo<; ifia<;. Dem. Come now, let me speak before you. aXX' Wi, ito/iev. Come then, let us go (suppose we go). In Soph. Phil. 300 the 2d Person (/*<£%). B. In Prohibitions (with firj). (a) First person plural (singular very rare, cf . Eur. Hipp. 567, Herael. 559). (6) Second and third person with aorist subjunctive, (a) fir) oj3fieda, let us not be afraid. fir\ areXr] rov \oyov KaraXiTrafiev. PLAT. Let us not leave our argument incomplete. (b) fir) ravTa Trotrjcrrj^. Do not do this. Ne haec feceris. fiw&evi avfMpopav overlays. ISOOR. Taunt no one with a misfortune. 0. In Questions of doubt (Deliberative Questions) with the First Person. (3ov\ei, fdovXeaOe (0e\ei<;, 6e\ere in poetry) are often added. enrwfiev, rj <7t,y£>/iev, rj n Bpdtrofiev ; EUR. Are we to (should we, must we) speak, or keep silence, or what shall we do ? Digitized by Microsoft® OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES. 135 tl fiovKeade Bpa&co ; Quid vultis faciam ? What would you have me do ? oijioi ri Spdcrta; ttoi $vya> pTjTpog xepas; EUR. Med. 1271. Ah me, what must I do? whither escape a mother's hands ? Note 1. — The third person, however, occurs pretty often, especially in Plato and Demosthenes. TTorepov ere rts ttjs 7rdA.eci)s eydphv 17 ipov etvat ; Soph. Ai. 403. Here this tis refers to the first person. Note 2. — The Subjunctive, expressing a future possi- bility, common in Homer, is not wholly unknown, though rare in Attic. ovt' f(TTiv ovre trore yivqrai Kpeirrov. PLAT. Leg. 942. It is not, nor is it ever likely to get better. § 133. THE OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES. The Independent Optative is used : — A. To denote a Wish (without av). m/wal yevoio iraTpof evyevearepos. SOPH. Boy, may'st thou prove more fortunate than thy father. In the first person a wish often conveys an exhortation. See Subjunctive in Exhortations. /«; % crKekti 6eve rr)v irerpav. Ar. Av. 54 Do you know what to do 1 Kick the rock with your leg. oTcrOd vvv a pot yeveo-Ow; Seapa rots ^evoicri irpoo-Oes. Eur. /. T. 1203. Knowest tlwu what must be done for me ? put chains on the strangers. Logically it would be 7] ravra iroietv — iroirjtrai — -Koirpruv. He said that he was doing, did or had done, would do this. TToiilv =7tom3 in Eecta, and therefore is relatively present ; ■xoirjcrai = eiroi-qva. „ „ relatively past ; 7roi7](reiv=7roi-qa-6f3os enj. He asked if his fear was groundless. In Eecta xevds io-ri; yjcrdovTO tow TroXe/XLovs Trpoo-TrXiovras, They discovered that the enemy were advancing. Eecta, ol iroAijutpi Trpoo-TrXiovaiv. (b) The Aorist Participle denotes an action past relatively to the "principal verb. BoiiUTOt oi e£ "A/opijs dvacrravTes rijv Boliotlclv wK-qo-av. Tiiuc. Boeotians who had been driven out of Arne settled in Boeotia. See further however under the Aorist Participle, which in itself does not denote time. (c) With regard to the Future in the Moods it seems always express future time, for (1.) The Future Optative is only used to represent in the Obliqua a Future In^gJjg^f^r^^Discourse. Ho THE TENSES. (2.) The Futwre Infinitive is most commonly used after verbs of saying and thinking, and therefore like the Optative, repre- sents a Future Indicative of the Recta. Whenever the Future Infinitive is used after other verbs, instead of the usual Present or Aorist Infinitive, the idea of futurity still seems to be emphasised, e.g.: — He delays to do his duty, peXXei iroatv or ■n-oi'qa-ai t« Seovra. /jiAXXei iroirjs aTTOKrevlav. He seizes Cyrus with the intention of hilling him. B. THE KIND OF ACT OR STATE. With regard to the Kind of Act denoted Tenses are divided into 1. Continued (Present, Imperfect). 2. Finished (Perfect, Pluperfect). 3. Indefinite or Single (Aorist Strong and Weak). 1. A continued Tense mentions an act as still going on, or in progress, whether in past, present, or future, an act in which the agent is still engaged, i" was writing, I am writing, I. shall be vjriting (the letter). 2. A finished Tense mentions an act as one which is perfect, complete, in a finished state, I have written, I had written, I shall have written (the letter). 3. An indefinite Tense mentions the mere act itself, a single act, without any such limitation of its con- tinuance or completion, I wrote, T write, I shall tvrite (the letter). Hence the Stoic grammarians called such a Tense an Aorist (i.e. adpia-rov or unlimited). Digitized by Microsoft® IDEAL DIVISION OF TENSES. 141 The distinction between the Kinds of Act is observed throughout all the Moods, and is therefore a more univer- sal and abiding distinction than that of Time. Note. The kind of act is denoted in Greek by the Tense- stem, AY-, AYC-, AYCA-, AEAY-. The Present Tense-stem (Present and Imperfect Tenses) denotes a continued act. The Perfect {i.e. reduplicated) Tense-stem (Perfect, Plu- perfect, and Future Perfect Tenses) denotes a finished act. The Aorist Tense-stems (Strong and Weak Aorist tenses) denote an indefinite or single act. The Future is ambiguous, denoting either a continued or an indefinite act. § 137. Ideal division of Tenses. An ideal twofold division of Tenses may be thus con- structed, to be read horizontally and vertically. Continued. Finished. Indefinite. Present 1 am writing ypdcJMo, strictly used, scribo I have written yiypaa scripsi I write ypdcfxa scribo Past / was writing eypaov scribebam I had written eyeypd(j>tr] or -eiv scripseram I wrote eypaipa scripsi Future I shall be writing ypdif/ta scribam I shall have written Periphrasis in Active yeypa- ui'S ecropxu scripsero / shall write ypdipio scribam Digitized by Microsoft® 142 THE TENSES. Note. ,A very rare poetical periphrasis occurs with Aorist Participle, o-tftMnjeras eao[J,ai ) \v7rr]dets ecrojucu, SOPH. 0. T. 1146,0. C. 816. This scheme, however, is purely ideal, and does not corre- spond to the Greek tenses, however well it corresponds with our analytic English tenses. In Greek the kind of act, as has been observed already, is denoted by the Present, the Perfect, and the Aorist Tense- stems : the Future Tense-stem has to be left out. The most important distinction is that between a Continued and an Indefinite act. § I38. THE PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. A. The Present Indicative denotes : — 1. An act in which a person is engaged in present time ; a>, I am writing now. 2. An act which is habitual or repeated, or a general truth, without being limited to the present moment. pcofiT] a^aQ'ns 7roX.Xa«t? Ti/crei /3\a/3rjv. Euk. Frag. Strength untrained oft brings forth harm. Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. Horace. Note 1. The Present has also certain idiomatic uses of which the following are the commonest : — (a) The Historic present denotes a past event. In Compound Sentences it reckons as an historic tense. This historic pre- sent seems sometimes equivalent to an aorist (narrative), sometimes to an imperfect (descriptive). a-vkXapfiavu KSpov (is dwoKTCvC} v. XEN. He seizes (seized) Cyrus with the intention of hilling him. (b) The Present, as it denotes an unfinished act, often denotes an attempted act. tow AaKeScUiiioviovs avaipei, tow Se <3?a)K6as <7<6fa. DEM. He is trying to destroy the Lacedaemonians, and to save the Phocians. Digitized by Microsoft® PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. 143 This is especially the case with SiSio/iL, I offer, i.e. try to give, and 7ra'6> (kXvio, poet.), rrw- Oavoimi, alo-Odvo/xai, p.av6dv(a. dpn is often used with these verbs. Qe/xuTTOKXea ovk aKoveis avSpa dyadbv yeyovora ; PliAT. Have you not heard that Themistocles proved himself a patriot ? (d) The Present Infinitive and the Present Participle may represent the Imperfect Indicative in English. oi o-vfnrpeo-ptvovTes Kal Trapovres Kcnajj-aprvprjo-ova-i. Dem. de F. L. 381. 5. Those who were his fellow-colleagues in the embassy, and who were present, will bear witness. B. The Imperfect is the past of the Present. It describes a past action as (a) still going on, or (6) as going on along with other actions, or (c) as frequently recurring. For (a) and (6) see Aorist. c. SaKpaTi]? caaTrep eyiyvaiaicev, ovtco ^eAov, ewcos );c, like the Latin debebam, oportebat, decebat, denote what ought to have been done, but what was not done. ovSev aWo 4'Sct \eyeiv. DEM. He need have said nothing else. Nihil aliud dicere oportebat. ovk £ikos rjv ovrous kav. Soph. 0. T. 255. It would not have been right to leave it alone. Non decebat praeterire. On these constructions see Conditional Sentences. § 139. THE PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. A. The Perfect denotes an act which is in a finished state. The act must have been begun in the past, but it stands finished in the present. The Perfect therefore is reckoned as a Primary tense. yi^/pa^a, J } iam written, my writing is in a finished state ; SiSerai, he is in a state of imprisonment. Digitized by Microsoft® PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE. 145 Not only in the Subjunctive and Optative, but also in the [ndicative, a periphrasis with dp.1 is used for the Perfect. The abiding nature of the result is then emphasized. eis oSe p.ovoyevqs ovpavbs yeyovtus Itrri re kgu It' Itrrat. Plat. Tim. 31. This one sole-created heaven hath been created, and shall still endv/re. Cf . e'x' w i^ Aorist Participle. The Perfect of many verbs is equivalent to a Present: redvrjKev, he is dead; KiKX-qfxai, I am called; ykyova, I am be- come, i.e. I am; /tEjuv^juai, I remember; olSa (o-vvoiSa.), I know, novi. The Pluperfect is then an Imperfect, kredvrjKu, he was dead, etc. The Perfect Imperative of such verbs is a simple Perfect. Note. A great number of Perfects in Homer describe present acts or states : avcoya, /3£j3pi8a, KtKevda, pk/xrjka, p.ip,ova, eppiya, etc. etc. B. The Pluperfect is the Perfect carried back to past time. eyeiypaxjiT], T had written, my writing was in a finished state in the past. For the Future Perfect, see Future. The Perfect Imperative (3d singular Middle and Passive) issues a decisive command which is to be executed at once, and there an end. piyfii TodSe wpicrdto vp.Zv f] /3paSvrrj?. ThUC. i. 71. At this point let yov/r slowness find a limit (come to an end). Hactenus progressa (terminata) esto (finem habeat) vestra tarditas. Poppo. § 140. THE AORIST. 1. The Aorist denotes the mere occurrence of an act in past time. Apart from difference of time the Aorist is always distinguished from the Imperfect (and in the Oblique Moods from the Present) by noticing the mere doing of the act, and not describing the act as in pro- gress. The Aorist has been likened to a point, the Im- perfect (and Preseirb^f/teea/lji'ii®crosoft® THE TENSES. Note. As the Aorist notices the mere act or state itself, three aspects of this are observable. 1. The commencement of the act, the beginning, not the con- tinuance. This has been called the Ingressive or Inceptive Aorist. eftao-iXevcre, he came to the throne (ifiaalXevev, he was king). iirXovrrjaev, he became rich (en-XovTa, he was a rich man). Ivoo-ijo-e, he fell ill (evoo-ei, he was ill). 2. The act as done and over, not as doing. AYCIII1IOC EnOIHCE denotes the simple fact that Lysippus was the maker of the statue. AYCinilOC EnOIEI denotes the labour spent on the making. eSeiirvrjcrav, they supped, i.e. ended supper. ZSeiTTvow, they were at supper. vv^ iyevero, night came on, i.e. it was night. vv\ kyiyvero, night was coming cm, i.e. it was twilight. 3. The act as instantaneous and momentary, not as occupying a long time. eyui Se r)\9ov, eTSov, eviKrjcra. " Caesar's brag of ' came, and saw, and overcame.' " Shak. 2. The Aorist is narrative, the Imperfect is descriptive; i.e. the Aorist is used when we merely mention a past act as having occurred, while the Imperfect is used when we wish to describe or paint (so to speak) past acts as still going on. oi pev airrj\6ov. K\eavSpo<; Be edvero, ical avvfjv Uevo(pa>vTi (f>i\,iKa><;, kcu %eviav o-vvefiaXovTo. Xe.N. So they went away. Meanwhile Oleander was en- gaged in sacrificing, and in friendly intercourse with Xenophon, and they formed a friendship. Note 1. Other uses of the Aorist : — The Aorist is also distinguished from the Imperfect by the mere mention of an act without reference to other acts, while the Imperfect often describes an act as going on side by side with another act. Digitized by Microsoft® THE AORIST. 147 Havcravtas e« AaKeSalfiovos (TTparrjybs vtto tmv 'EAA.iji/o)v e£e- 7refj.(ji9ri pera eiKocri veZv otto HeXoTrovvq&ov, £vviir\eov Se Kal 'A.6r)vaioi rpiaKOvra vavo-l, Kal ecrTpdrtvarav Is Kwt/jov, Kal chjtijs ra iroAAa KaTco-Tpe^avro. Pauscmias was sent out from Lacedaemon by the Greeks as admiral with twenty ships from Pehpormese. The Athenians also accompanied him with thirty ships, and they proceeded to Cyprus, and subdued the greater part of it. Note 2. The Aorist is used (esp. in Tragedy) where we use a Present. The moment of past time is but an instant before. Something an instant ago has evoked the act. eTrrjveevyet,v, to run away. vyeiv, to escape. f3eio-8a.i, to be in fear. 4>oj3rj9rjva.i, Seco-ai, to take fright, ■trp&jviiv, to be busy about, irpd^ai, to accomplish. ■' yeXSv, to be laughing. yeXao-ai, to burst out laughing, apxeiv, to rule. apgai, to obtain dominion or office. io™xveiv, to be strong. Kr^wrai, id become strong, o-iyav, to be silent. o-iyrjo-au, to become silent. e'xav, to have. °"X e ' v i t° obtain. aLveav, ypdipeiv (rarely ypdipai). I am going to write, I mean or intend to write. p,iXXo) vp.as clyav £ts 'Acrtav. I am going to lead you (am on the point of leading you) into Asia. In Asiam vos ducturus sum. SerjcreL tou toiovtov el peXXei fj iroXiTua £co-6a.i. Plat. Hep. 412. There will he need, of such a ruler if the constitution is to be e/ieXXov in the same way is used — epeXXov cr' apa Kivryruv ky&. AE. Nub. 1301. Aha ! I thought I should tickle you. evTavQa epeXXov KaraXvcrctv. XEN. There they were intending to rest. Ibi deversuri erant. Sometimes peXXo>, epeXXov, means I am doomed, destined, irm ov fjLeXXu, tC ov peXXw ; mean Wlvy should I not ? 2. The Future Perfect denotes a finished act or state in the Future : — r) irokneia TeXew; tceKoafirjaeTai. Plat. Ov/r state shall have been perfectly constituted. Note. The Future Perfect, like the Perfect, sometimes de- notes what will take place instantly. Compare KO.V TOVTO VlKUip.£V TtdvB' f)piv TTiTTOL-qTai. XEN. An. L 8. 12. If we secure this victory we have done everything. with 4>pd£e ko.1 TreTrpagerai. AR. Plut. 1027. Speak, and it shall be done instanter. A periphrastic future perfect active is formed with dpi — ra Seovra icropeOa eyvtaKOTts, k.t.X. DEM. Phil. i. 54, We shall haverjj^gffiBf4viierSkbmr duty. GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 151 § 142. Gnomic and Iterative Tenses. Almost any tense in Greek, as in English, can express a customary or a repeated act, or a general truth. 1. The Present — ptapyq dfiadrjs iroXXdius tiktu (3\a(3r)v. EUK. (See above.) Strength without science often causeth harm. Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. 2. The Perfect— iroWoi 81a 86£av Kai ttoAitkJjv 8vvafj.iv KaKaireirovdacriv. ., Xen. Many have come to trouble (and do come to troulle) m conse- quence of reputation and political power. (This perfect alternates with presents in the text.) 3. The Aorist called Gnomic, as expressing a yvdiir], sentiment or general truth — dOviiovvTes avSpes oviru rpoiralov e&Tiqcrav. PLAT. Half-hearted men never yet set up a trophy. So in English — " Faint heart never won fair lady." Seij/ftV t' arjfia Trve.vp.dTWV kKoljuare (rrevovTa ttovtov. Soph. Ai. 674. And the breath of dreadful wimds husheth ever the moaning deep. The present and perfect, the present and aorist, the perfect and aorist, often alternate in the same paragraph. 4. The Imperfect and Aorist with av denote a repeated act. dva\ap.j3dvo>v ov~v avTwv To/3ov, Don't be timid : jj.rjSev <$>oj3-qdfjpvxtf, ecus fi.lv ev t$ dvyrai cr(o[iari, y, (rj, orav 8e tovtov diraXXayy, reBvrjKev. Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 19. He never believed that the soul, so long as it exists in this mortal body, Jives, but that as soon as it is separated from it, it dies (fj denoting continuance, aTraXXayfj the instant act of death). Infinitive — - ov povXevea-dai en &pa dXXa j3ef3ov\evcr8ai. PLAT. Grit. It is no longer file moment to be making up one's mind, but to have it made up. XaXeiruv to Troielv to Se KeXevo-ai paSiov. It is difficult to do (to be engaged in doing), but easy to com- mand (to say ' do this '). So with the other Moods. Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTER VIII. THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. 1. The Infinitive (a Substantive). 2. The Participle (an Adjective). 3. The Verbal Adjectives in -tos and -reos. § 144. Note on the Infinitive. The Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Substantive in the Dative case. Though subsequently its uses diverged so widely from this limited signification, yet its origin gives us a clue to its different meanings. Thus— &pa airiivai would mean time for going away. oWai-ds yeveo-Oat, able for becoming. /jLavOdvctv t/ko/«v, we are come for learning. irapex<0 epavrbv rijxvuv koX KaUiv, I offer myself for cutting and burning. 6av[ia ISeo-dai, a wonder for the viewing. For full information consult Professor Max Miiller's Inaugural Oxford Lecture. § I45. THE INFINITIVE. The Infinitive is a Verbal Substantive denoting action. Compare to ttoiclv with r) ttoitqo-li. It has therefore points in common both with (1) the Verb, (2) with the Noun. 1. Like the Verb (a) It has tenses and voices — Xveiv, Xvo-ew, Xva-ai, etc., Xvcrai, Xvcracrdai, XvtiTJvat,. (b) It takes a subject before and a predicate after it Digitized by Microsoft® 153 1 54 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. (c) It governs the same case as its verb. (d) It is qualified, like a verb, by adverbs, and not like a substantive by adjectives. (e) It forms subordinate sentences, the indirect statement, a temporal sentence (with irplv), a final sentence, a consecutive sentence, with &a-re and (is, and in connexion with av it is a substitute for the in- dicative and optative moods with av. This last use gives it a sort of right to be called a mood. 2. Like a Substantive (a) It stands as the subject to a verb. (b) It is declined with the article as a nominative, accusa- tive, genitive, or dative. (c) It is connected with Prepositions. § I46. THE SUPPLEMENTARY^ INFINITIVE. 1. The Infinitive supplements the meanings of verba and nouns (especially of verbs) which in themselves are incomplete. hfiaOov tovto 77-0M70YU. They learned to do this. ov "7revice SovXeveiv. He is not bom to be a slave. 6rjfjLivv d/j?7xavos. SOPH. Ant. 78. I am by nature incapable of acting in defiance of my fellow- citizens. Of. Track 545, 0. C. 442, Aesch. P. V. 865. 1 Also called the Complementary, or the Prolate, Infinitive. The term Supplementary ■egpg^^njjjjgy^nteUigible. THE SUPPLEMENTARY INFINITIVE. 155 The article marks the Infinitive more distinctly as an object. The Infinitive is not always the Supplementary Infinitive, see Soph. Ant. 265. Note 2. It is impossible to give a complete list of all such verbs. They are fairly the same as in English and in Latin, though this Infinitive is much more extensively used in Greek than in Latin. The chief verbs perhaps are those expressing — (a) Wish and desire (as in Latin), /3ov\o/j,ai, 6eXu>, kin6vfi.!o. (b) Caution, fear, shame, iiXafSov/xai, 6kvZ, 6ki>os eari, oj3ov/jt,ai t SiSoiKa, ala-)(vvofj,ai. For Verbs of Fearing see also Index. (c) Intention, determination, 4 r n ^C°t lal {I vote), ZSoge, SeSoKTai, Siavoov/j.ai, kv v e'x aviiyut) imi, 6(j>uXm. So in Latin, except that oportet and necesse est in certain senses take a subjunctive. (/) Custom, habit, chance, ei!u>da, vofios e ep,avrov rat iarpa> re/Aveiv km iccueiv. PLAT. / offer myself to the physician to cut and burn (me). Note 1. Even where the construction is already complete this explanatory Infinitive is sometimes added. KdKov o'iopai 7tol£lv a oStos iroieX, avSpa dSlKtoS eTTl^eipeiV ajroKTivvvvai. Plat. Apol. xviii. It is an evil, I think, to be doing what my opponent is now doing, trying, that is, unjustly to put a man to death. ttJs arrjs ovk epui Tiprji rv^eiv. SOPH. HI. 364. I am not in love with thy honours — to obtain them. wore with this infinitive and adjectives helps out this ex- planatory force. ipvxpov to vSoip &ctt£ Xova-ao-dat. Xen. Mem. iii. 13. 3. The water is cold \ Obs. This use should be compared with that of the English gerundive (or to with the dative of the infinitive), a house to let, a letter to write, etc. Both in Latin and Greek the passive infinitive is very unusual, and probably incorrect. Note 2. The comparative with rj, or wne rj, and infinitive. to voo-qpa jtieifov r/ epeiv. SOPH. 0. T. 1293. The plague is too great to bear. Pestis maior quam quae (ut) tolerari possit. pei^ov -i) wore i, oSs ye, with the infinitive limit the application. S.oirX.01 d>s £k x c 'P°S pd)(ear]v. So in Latin, memini me dicere means / remember I was saying (also accepimus, scribit). See Zumpt, § 589, note. Madvig first pointed out this, § 171. 6, Rem. 1. It is fully discussed in Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, p. 15. § I48. THE INFINITIVE AS A NOVA. 1. The Infinitive, like a Substantive, may stand either as the Subject or the Predicate of a sentence. Digitized by Microsoft® THE INFINITIVE AS A NOUN. 161 Subject. Predicate. Predicate, to oiktjv StBovat irorepov nrdo-^eiv tL iariv 97 iroielv ; To pay a penalty \ is it ( to suffer or ( to do something ? Paying a penalty J \ suffering \ doing. Plato. , So in English " to see is to believe," seeing is believing. Karely but sometimes without the article, o-oxppovciv xaXov, Soph. Ai., discretion is a virtue. 2. The Infinitive with the Article is declined throughout like a Substantive. Its cases then follow the construc- tions of the Nominative, Accusative, Genitive, and Dative. Its oblique cases are connected with Prepositions. Unlike ordinary Substantives, however, it (1) can govern the same case as its verb, and (2) can be qualified by an adverb. It corresponds to the Latin Infinitive and Gerund. Nom. to Ka\w<; tp\v, a noble life, honeste vivere. Ace. to KaXaq %r\v, a noble life, honeste vivere (with preposition), honeste vivendum. Gen. tov /ra\w? tfjv, of a nolle life, honeste vivendi. Dat. to3 KaXais £rjv, for or by a noble life, honeste vivendo. So Sia to KaXwf £rjv, ev (77730?) t» *aXaJs Zjrfv, avTl (epeica) tov icaXax; tftv. Note, (a) Infinitive Nominative : It is used like the Latin quod with Indicative (the fact or circumstance that). to ILeXoTTOwrja-iovs avrots p) {SoTjdrjo-ai irapicrxev vp.iv Sa/Mtov KoWtv. THUO. i. 41. The circumstance that the Peloponnesians did not help them enabled you to chastise the Samians. lb) The Dative is often a Dative of means, cause, or circum- stance, instrument, like the Gerund in -do. KeKpdrrjKe QiXMnros 7i\oa>v. I leave off philosophising. (&.) The Participle agrees with, and is the Predicate to, the Object. Travco ere tyikoaafyovvTa. I make you leave off philosophising. § ISO. THE PARTICIPLE AS AN ATTRIBUTIVE. A. 1. The Participle when joined to a Substantive cor- responds to an Adjective, or more frequently to a Eelative sentence. al AioKov vrjeroc KaXov/ievai. Thuc. The so-called islands of Aeolus (or, the islands of Aeolus, as they are called). 6 Ka,TeiXr]a)<; kivSvvos tt/v iroXiv. DEM. The danger which has overtaken the state. 2. The Participle with the Article, when the Substan- tive is omitted, becomes itself a Substantive. ol Xe'yovres, the speakers. ol hpdaavTes, the doers. 6 rtrjjw, the first-comer. /3ov\6jj,evos, any one who will (see Article). 01 irpoo-qKovTes, relations, propinqui. Note 1. The Future Participle with the Article signifies, in a sort of final sense, one who is ready, prepared or witting, to do so and so. n Ywpa dyadn fiv /ecu evrjaav ol epyaaofievot. Xen. An. ii. 4. 22. The soil was rich and there were people to till it. Digitized by Microsoft® 164 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. Note 2. Many neuter Participles are Substantival. to o-v/jifapov, expediency, utile, utilitas With an Adjective in agreement, ts, Dem. The small interests of the state. ra Seovrci, duties or duty, officia. Thucydides and the poets use a neuter present participle as a Substantive, where an Infinitive would be more usual. iv tw pr] peXerZvTi,, by want of training ( = !v T<£ prj pekerav). to ScSids, fear=TO SeSievai, to #apo"OW = To dapcreiv=To Odpcros. THUC. TO VOO-OW=TO VOO-£lV:=17 V0V0S. SOPH. PMl. 674. In the poets ol t£kovt6s, parents; 6 reKwv, the father; r) riKovo-a, the mother (17 TiKrovo-a also, Soph.). <5 l/ceivoi- TCKuv, his father, to tttotjOcv cry faxfi: ^ le wild fluttering in thy heart, Eur. Bacch. 1269. B. The Participle qualifies the Principal Verb like a Supplementary Predicate or an Adverbial Sentence, (Conditional, Temporal, Causal, etc.). These usages of the Participle are very common in Greek, and are most important to notice. The particles which bring out the special significance of the Participle in each case should be carefully noticed. The different usages are given under the heads of the different sentences in the Compound Sentence. (See Index) Note 3. The Participle in a Sentence expresses circumstance or manner generally. The particles ovtioi, totc, eTra, /cpra (/cat eira), eVetra are put before the Principal Verb. The sense hovers between that of time and of circumstance. To this head belong the phrases (as old as Homer), ri paOdv ; tI iradwv ; in the obliqua 6Vi paOwv, iradmv. rl paOovres epapTvpeire v/tefs ; DEM. 45. 38. What induced you to give evidence ? ' t'i Tradovo-au dvrjrah ei£acri ywai^i; Ar. Nub. 341. What has happened to (the clouds) that they look like mortal women? So ti €xa)i/ ; ti ySouAduevos ; Plat. Phaed. 236, E. Digitized by Microsoft® THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 165 All these phrases are periphrases for why? wherefore? tI fiaOwv ; learning what, on what inducement ? denotes an internal motive ; rl irad&v ; ailing or experiencing what ? denotes an external cause (on what compulsion ?). Note 4. Under this head comes also the peculiar use of e'xuf in colloquialisms. irola vwoi-qfiaTa. (f>\vapeZs c'^cov ; PLAT. What sort of shoes do you keep on chattering about ? ti Xrjpeis ex lov > lit. ^ a ^ nonsense in so behaving. Why do you incessantly trifle ? to KVTTTa^us ex (0V Tepl rrjv dvpav ; ARISTOPH. Why do you keep on poking about at the door ? Note 5. The Participle in a Comparative sense with the Subjective particles d>s and &mrep, as if, as though, as thinking. SeStacri tov Q6.vo.tov (is eS 6i8ot« oti p.iyi(TTOV rwv ko,kuv Io-ti. Plat. Apol. xvii. Men fear death as though they knew for certain that it is the greatest of evils. § 151. THE GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. The Genitive Absolute {i.e. a Participle agreeing with a Genitive which is not in the main construction of the sentence) is equivalent to an Adverbial sentence, either Conditional, Temporal, Causal, Concessive, or expressing Circumstances generally. The same particles which accompany the simple Par- ticiple {e.g. /juera^v, a>?, etc.) go with the Genitive Absolute. ravTa errpaj^Or) Kovavos (TTpaTrj'yovvTO's. ISOCfi. These operations were carried out when K. was general. ovu av tfkdov Sevpo vpjov jii) KeXevovTUV. I should not have come here if you had not ordered me. us 58' e)(6vT(av tuv8' iirbo-Taa-dai (re XPV- SOPH. Ai. On the understanding {as knowing) that this is so, thou must form thy J^9^zic<% t k?rofM> lcnm that U is evm So) - 1 66 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. Note. The Participle alone, without the Genitive being expressed, occurs (see Genitive Case, Genitive Absolute) — (a.) Where the Genitive is easily supplied from context — ol Se TroX.efii.ioi, 7rpoo~i6vTu>v (sc. twv 'EAAiji/coi/ men- tioned just before), tews plv rio-v\a^ov. Xen. An. v. 4. 16. The enemy, as they were approaching, for a while were remaining quiet. Cf. iv. 8. 5, ZpwTrjo-avTos (sc. avTov). (b.) In certain impersonal expressions — outios e)(6vTa>v. Xen. An. v. 4. 16. Such being the case, quae quum ita sint. io-ay ye Xdevrwv on at vrjes irXeovo-i. THUC. i. 116. On the news arriving that the ships were sailing. vovtos ttoXXQ (sc. Atos). Xen. Hell. i. 1. 16 (cf. An. Vesp. 774). Cf. Thuc. i. 74 (S}?A(o06j/tos), Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 18 (o-r/^oi/- Oivrtov). Compare the Latin Ablative Past Participle Passive (cognito, edicto, etc.) agreeing with the whole sentence. The Participle is very rarely omitted. cos tpov /xovijs 7reAas (sc. oi'crijs). SOPH. 0. C. 83. Since I alone am at thy side. § 152. The Genitive Absolute in Greek and the Ablative Absolute in Latin. Great care must be taken not always to use one where we should use the other. The Greek has a perfect series of active participles, the Latin has no past participle active except in the case of Deponents. Therefore in Latin we may write — His verbis editis egressi sunt So saying they went out. But in Greek this would be — and not TovTtav Xe\6evTU)v eAietrctv, Digitked by MicWsoft® ' THE A CCUS A TIVE ABSOL UTE. 1 67 which would mean when this had been said (by others) they went out. Nor, on the other hand, would Latin tolerate such an apparently slovenly structure as the following : — 8iaj8e/3ijK0T0S ^8tj ILepixXeovs, rjyyeXdr] avTt\ovs. Some men neglect their brothers under the impression that they do not become friends. Xen. Mem. ii. 3. 3 (quotation shortened). Cf. Mem. i. 2. 20. But Xen. Hell. iii. 2. 19 (Sd£avTa ravra kcu irepavOkvra), THUC. iv. 125 (nvpviOlv ovSev). § 154. VERBALS IN -Teo■ eari aoi Tim apeTwv. acrKTjTea, ) ' €7ri9vu,t]Teop,l , v „ > „ / „ , „ -p., > n ' C effTt TO 49 aVOOCOTTOlS TWS UOSTm. DEM. emOvfirjrea, ) ' ' Men must covet virtue. Note. The agent, however, in Attic, is fairly often in the Accusative, instead of the Dative. ovSevl rpoirtp (jia/itv e/cdvras dSiK-qreov elvai. PLAT. Grit. We maintain that m no way must we deliberately commit in- justice. And the Dative and Accusative are both found together. Eur. Phoen. 710, 712. § 157. C. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. The Supplementary Participle is used, much like the Supplementary Infinitive, to complete the meaning of many verbs and verbal phrases. It agrees either (1) with the Subject, or (2) with the Object of the verb. § 158. THE SUPPLEMENTAR Y PARTICIPLE IN AGREEMENT WITH THE SUBJECT OF THE VERB. The Participle is used with the following classes of Verbs : — * Verbs marked thus have peculiar usages which are ex- plained in the notes. A. Verls of Feeling and Perceiving (see Indirect Statement). These verbs differ from the following because they can equally take a finite mood with on or &>?, thus showing the substantival character of the con- struction which &t%JBt^mosam 170 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. B. Verbs of Mental Emotion. ■)(a.ip(n, tfSofmt, dx&opai, dyava.KTv avBpwrrwv. Plat. They like to hear people cross-questioned. XpTj/J'O.TUiv ovk alcrxyvei kiupeXovpevo'S ; PLAT. Are you not ashamed to be devoting yourself to numey-makmg ? paSliai <£epeis ■fjp.as diroXelirtov. PLAT. You don't mind leaving us behind (you make light of doing so). C. Verbs of beginning, continuing, and ending an action (including persevering and growing weary). *dp\opai, *vTrap)(w, (f>8dv(a, SiareXw, 8idya>, Siayiyvopmi (I continue), ■xavop.ai, aTrelp-qKa, and Kap.v(o (I grow tired). top \onrov @iov KaOevZovres Zunekolr av. PLAT. You would go on sleeping for the rest of your lives. ov fjut) tTavcTcofiai a.ivopai, SeiK- vvp.i, Xavddvia, dXlo-Kop-ai (the active form is alpa). 897X0? el tcaTav. PLAT. It is clear that you despise me. Sei^co avrov afjiov bvra. Dem. 7 will prove that he is worthy. ehei^av eToip,oi ovtgs. Thuc. They showed that they were ready. (fiavepOL eifftv aya)vt,%op,evoi iravTei}. Xen. It is evident that they all are contending. Digitizeaby Microsoft® NOTE ON SPECIAL VERBS. 171 JliyXew? yap a^ia warpo? t A%ik\ea)<; en, tovto irpaTTWV, airoOavel. PLAT. If you are caught again m this pursuit, you shall die (if you are convicted of following it any longer). So SijAtS, Soph. 0. G. 556, and Ji. 472, Ant. 20 (in nomina- tive attraction). SeiKw/xi (see third example above) may be intransitive, Euk. I. A. 436, Thug. 72. The above verbs, however, have several other constructions, for which see below. § 159. Note on Special Verbs. 1. apxaficu takes both the Infinitive and Participle, more usually the Infinitive. The Participle seems to denote, more than the Infinitive, that the act is going on. rjp£avTO olKoSofieiv. They began to build (of the intention). rjp^avro otKoSojUoiWes. They began the building (the act going on). See Thuc. i. 107. 2. wrapx®. idv Tts >7/Jas eS ttoiZv VTrdp^r/. XbN. If any one first confers a kindness on us. Otherwise inrdpx<» is used almost like Tvyxdvw. vwdpxei. ex^/Oos &>v. DEM. He is an enemy (to begin with). 3. 6dvo>. (a) ecf>6acre (ecfiOr]) drputop.evo'S. He was beforehand in arriving. ovk av <}>6dvois Xiyiov (gen. of 2d person). Make haste, speak— or, quick, quick speak (Lit. you could not anticipate (^ wish, or your duty) m speaking.) 172 THE THREE VERBAL NOUNS. The phrase forms an urgent command. Cf. Eur. Or. 936, Ale. 662, Arist. PI. 1133. Cf. Aeye cfiOdcras, speak quickly. Quin statim loquere ! In the last example 9dv(a is in the Participle. So dv6ft)£as /*e 9do-as. ARIST. You opened the door before me {got the start of me). Cf. Thuc. iv. 8. 4. dvvTU) (I achieve) is used like ddv(o. avvuov v7ro8vcrdjj.evos. ARIST. Look sharp and put your shoes on. avvvas dvoiye. Look alive and open the door. 5. aicr\vvo[i.ai. o.ur)(yvo[x.ai Xkyiov. I am ashamed of saying {while I do say). aicr-^yvofiai Aeyctv. I am ashamed to say (and generally, / refrain from saying). 6. dirondfjivu). dirOKd/JLVIl) TOVTO TTOMV. I am weary of doing this. WTtOKdjlVlO tovto Troieiv, I leave off doing this through weariness. 7. SrjXos eljM. Several constructions. {a) The personal construction with participle. SrJAos jJi/ oi6jJ.evos. XEN. It was evident that he thought. The personal construction with u>s and participle. S'iJA.os io-TW (JS ti Spacrelwv kixkov. SOPH. Ai. It is plain that he is craving to do some ill {Spao-dui, de- siderative). Cf. Soph. Ant. 242 ; SjjXois (verb) m. (5) The personal and the impersonal construction with on and finite mood. SrjXoi elo~iv oti IjriKeiVoVTat. XEN. It is clear that ^g^^^Mom NOTE ON SPECIAL VERBS. 173 SfjXnv icrTLV 077. Trmxrofxai. PLAT. It is evident that I shall give over. 8. avepos ei/xi, and a.vepov eort : dpKW (I suffice), dpKti, it is sufficient (Soph. Ant. 547) : hcavos ei/u, Ikmov eort, are simi- larly constructed either with the participle (personally) or with on and a finite mood. 9. (paivo/xai takes the Participle and the Infinitive. (£aii/£Tou dvrjp dyadbs tTvai. He seems to be (is considered) a brave man. Videtur esse fortis. The appearance or opinion may be groundless. <£cuveTcu dvfjp dyadbs &v. He shows himself (proves himself, manifestly is) a brave man. Cf. appareo in Latin. Apparebat certamen fore. Lrv. It was evident there would be a struggle. Apparebat utilis. Suet. So ^euSijs faiverai (&v omitted). ar/pteia (jiatvets (=<£aii/ei) ycyeos. SOPH. El. 24. You show proofs that you are. 10. Xavddvo). XeXrjda efiavrov etSws. XEN. I know without myself being aware of it. Horace (Od. hi. 16. 32) and Propertius (i. 4 5) imitate this Greek construction. e.g. Hor. Fallit sorte beatior=Xav6dvei 6X/3tavep6s el/j,i, Xav6a.vio are also con- structed with oVt and finite mood. For Xavddvu on see Plat. Crito, xii. 14. The Poets use this Supplementary Participle with a great many verbs, e.g. verbs implying superiority and inferiority (vikZ, ■qrroipai, lXXe.Lirop.ai) ■. doing right or wrong (d8iKCo, dfiaprdvio, eS or KaAfis ttoiS>). § l60. THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE IN AGREEMENT WITH THE OBJECT. The Participle is the Predicate to the Object. The Verbs which take this Participle are mostly the active forms of those in the previous rule, but the cor- respondence is not complete. A. Verbs of stopping (making to cease), finding and detecting, overlooking (i.e. allowing to be done). iravo) (I make to cease, cf. iravopai), irepwpS and efopw, 1 overlook (TrepieiSov, en-etSov), but not l<3, 8uKvvp.i (I point out), Ko.Ta\ap,f3dvo), alpZ (see aXto-Kopat, in previous rule), top£>, I detect, catch, convict. VTa<; e%6pov<; iravaopiev. SOPH. We will check the merriment of our foes. pvr) irepuScofiev vfipiadeicrav Trp> AaKehaifiova. ISAEUS. Let us not look on and see Lacedaemon outraged. ov )(aiprqs is often added to the Future Participles (as to o^% g ^^j^) bso ^ denotes the presumed THE FUTURE PARTICIPLE. 177 intention (as though) ; or the motive calculated (as thmkmg, on the assumption that). £v\\a.p.[3dvei Kvpov (us diroKrevSv. XEN. He seizes Cyras with the intention of putting him to death. jxurObv aiTovtrw v=6 jue\Xw 0-rparqyqo-a.v. o-uS' 6 K(o\vo-? with the Indicative or the Optative, never with the Subjunctive. C. By the Participle. § 165. A. THE INFINITIVE IN THE INDIRECT STATEMENT. 1. The Infinitive follows expressions of saying and thinking. The Subject before the Infinitive and the 178 Digitized by Microsoft® INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT STATEMENT. 179 Predicate after it are in the Accusative (but see next rule). The usual negative is ov (see second example). N.B. 1. tjytjfii and c/xxovcu regularly take the Infinitive. 2. Xkyw (active) generally takes on or s, Xkyerai (it is said) takes either the Infinitive, or on, r)fii. PLAT. i" assert that the just man is happy. ovSe'va ol/icu Sai/Aovav elvai ica/cov. EUKIP. J think that none of the deities is evil. 2. But if the Subject of the Infinitive is the same as the Subject of the Principal Verb, it is usually not expressed at all. The Predicate is in the Nominative. This is called the Infinitive Attraction. (prjal ?. You fancy that you are prudent. (fipovLpas the Predicate. 6 ' A\ei;av&po<; ecpacricev Aios uto? elvai. Alexander used to pretend that he was the son of Zeus. Alos vlos the Predicate. Abler) elvai, 7j avro<; aXK eicelvov crrpaTrjyelv. THUC. Cleon declared that it was not himself but Nihias who was general. Digitized by Microsoft® 180 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. vo/Mi^ere ovv clvtoi elvai povifioi. You fancy, then, that it is you who are prudent (that you yourselves are prudent). The Subject however, o,vt6<;, must never be expressed unless it is necessary to distinguish it from a Subject in the Accusative, or to throw a special emphasis on it. In nine cases out of ten the presence of a Predicate in the Nominative is sufficient. Note 1. Instead of a-ui-ds the personal pronouns eyw, cn5 occur (Dem. 52. 12, 9. 74,, Lys. 25. 18), and the reflexive cruets (Plat. Rep. 518). Sometimes the accusative is used instead of the nominative (ep.e, fie, ere, e/mvrov, o-eavrov, eavTOv). This construction, more emphatically than the Infinitive Attraction, marks the Sub- ject of the Infinitive as the Object of the main verb. (j>7]fu Seiv Iksivovs ojiro\k(rdo.i, epe Se crd^ecrdai. ANDOK. i. 30. I hold that they ought to be condemned to death, and I be acquitted. For other instances see Plat. Gorg. 474, Xen. Cyr. v. 1. 21 (epavrov), Herod, i. 34 and ii. 2 (eiavrov). Note 2. Verbs of hoping and promising (expecting, under- taking, swearing). They usually take the Future Infinitive (like the Latin). ij\iri£ev pd^rjv e(recr0o.i. He was expecting that there would be a battle. vnr&T^ov ravTa fijTijcretv. You promised to search into this. But with little or no change of meaning they also take a Present, or an Aorist Infinitive sometimes, the future time being expressed not by the Infinitive, but the principal verb. e\iri£ei Swarbs eTvai S,p\uv. PLAT. He hopes to be able to rule. vn-eaxero /xoi BovXeicraxrOai. XEN. He undertook toadvise me. Digitized by Microsoft® Sn AND &>s WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 181 Also an Aorist Infinitive with av. ovk TJA-TTifov lK7recre?i/ av TlepiKXea. ThUO. They were not anticipating that Pericles would be banished. iKTreaeiv av is an Oblique Apodosis, representing linricrot, av in the Recta. See Note 3. The sort of verbs that come under this head are : — IA.jrtfa>. ^ ^ ^ vTTUTXvoviiai. o/joA.oy<3, \ j & eA.5rt§a (lAn-iSag) c^co. S/wv/ii. avvridifiai, j " Sokw, \ j . viroSexo/JLai (J etc., etc. Trpoo-SoKm, j P ' undertake). Note 3. The Infinitive with av. If the Indicative of the Recta had an dV, the Infinitive will retain it in Indirect Discourse, but not otherwise. oijxai yap av ovk d^apio-Taig p.01 «X etv - DEM. I think it would not be a thankless task. In Recta, ovk av e^oi. Note 4. The Tenses of the Infinitive, in Indirect Dis- course, represent the corresponding Tenses of the Indicative or Optative in the Recta, and therefore denote the same time. See § 147, Note 6. § 166. B. on AND w S WITH THE INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. ore or a>? with-< '(1) The Indicative (in Primary or Historic Sequence). (2) The Optative (in strict Historic Sequence). N.B. Never the Subjunctive as in Latin. The Negative is ov. To understand this construction it is well to see first what the Direct Statement is. avToi fidpTvpe's e? < ; n ( ><./'/> /T ... ,. N I (2) avroi fiaprvpei eicriv (Indicative) ; i.e. either the Optative is used, and this is the really Indirect Statement, or no change is made in the mood in consequence of the Historic Sequence, the Indicative being used. This retention of the mood and tense of Direct Discourse is a well-known practice, pervading all Greek syntax. Again, a Direct Statement is, icparqa-opev t5>v ' Adrfvaimv, we shall beat the Athenians. The Indirect Statement is — (1) Primary, Xeyovaiv on KpaTiqaovcn tojv AOrjvaiwv, They say that they will teat the Athenians. (2) Historic, ekeyov on ( 1. KpaTriaoiev rwv'AdTjvaicov. They said -l they would beat the Athenians, that \ 2. KpaTTjaovai ra>v 'Adrjvaiwv. The two constructions, the Optative and the Indicative, are often found alternating in the same paragraph. The rules therefore in passing from the Direct to the Indirect Statement are : — 1. The Person is always changed. 2. The Tense is never changed. 3. The Mood may be changed from the Indicative to the Optative when the Sequence is Historic, but constantly the Indicative remains un- changed^n Y Hi^or^c cr a| o ^ Primary Sequence. on AND i>s WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 183 In case of a difficulty as to tense and mood, the learner should practise turning back the Indirect to the original Direct Statement. Thus in the sentence eroXfia Xe'yetv &>? TrdvTw; tov<; exOpov? eviKTjirev, he made bold to say that he had conquered all his enemies, the original Direct was TrdvTas tow? eftOpovs iviKTjara, I conquered all my enemies. The tense and mood of the Direct Statement are retained. Again, ^/ee o ayyeXXmv Tt? to? 'EXareia KaTetXrjTTTai, there came a messenger announcing that Elateia had been captured. The messenger said in the Direct, 'EXareia KaTelXrjTTTai, Elateia has been captured. In the Indirect therefore the original tense and, in this case, the mood are retained. It might have been KaTetXrjfifie'vr] e'lrj. \erjfir]<;. AESCHIN. He says that there is nothing more unjust than rumour. Eecta : ovb~ep eari k.t.X. Xoyicrdo-dw tovto otc aypiiev vdre IluSvav. DEM. Let him reflect that we once possessed Pydna. Eecta : etj(pP' ev /C - T -^" (ftavepax; elirev oti rj 7roXis T6Tei%iffTai rjSrj. ThuC. He told them openly that the city had already been fortified. Eecta : TeTet%io-T<« k.t.X. d,7reKpivdfir)p on fioi XvaVTeXoloicnrep s^we^eti'. PLAT. I answered that it was good for me to be exactly as I am. Eecta : XvatreXel k.t.X. Kvpos. s being a subjective particle, i.e. ex- pressing what is in a person's mind, is used, more than on, of opinions, of pretexts, sometimes of untrue statements, and with negative expressions, ov Aiyco a> s. s is used rather than oti after verbs of thinking. Tio-o-acfiepvrj's Sia/JaAAet tov Kvpov tt/oos tov d8eA<£ov a>s hrifiovXevoi (ivtQ. Xen. An. i. 3. Tissaphernes accused. Cyrus to his brother, alleging that he was plotting against him. e'Aeyov a>s \P1 fy*"? ei3A.aj3«o-0ai. PLAT. Apol. 1. They were telling you that you ought to be on your guard (against me). vo/ii'f ovcriv Ik€i us "H<£aio-Tos x a ^ K< ^"- Thuc. iii. 88. The local belief is that Hephaestus is working at his forge. In Soph. Elect. 43 6Vi is used of an untrue statement. Digitized by Microsoft® ort AND &>s WITH INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 185 Note 2. Instead of on and <5s other particles are used in poetry, e.g. ovvcko. (Soph. El. 1476), odovvtKa (Soph. El. 1308), 6W (Soph, ^mt 685, PM. 169). ov yap alcrddvet irdXai falvTas davovtrw ovvck' dvTavSq.s icra ; SOPH. El. 1476. And hast thou not marked long since that thou hast been accosting the living as the dead ? kX.V£IS odovveK 1 Aiyurdos pkv ov Kara, crreyas. SOPH. El. 1308. Thou hearest That Aegisthus is not beneath his roof. offw9 also is used. ava£, ip(o p,lv ov\ O7rtos rd)(ovs vrro Svo-ttvovs iKavo). Soph. Ant. 223. My liege, I will not say that by reason of speed I come scant of breath. Cf. Soph Ant. 685, Phil. 169. As the Watchman is a clown we might be tempted to translate, " I won't say as how." We use " how " just in the same way. So ut is often used in Latin poetry : Quid referam ut volitet crebras intacta per urbes Alba Palaestino sancta columba Syro : Ut que, etc. Tibull. I. vii. 17, and the poets passim. Note 3. dv with the Optative. If aV is found with the Optative in the Indirect Statement it is because it was there in the Eecta. In such cases the Optative with av in the Indirect is the Apodosis of a Conditional Sentence which in the Eecta was in the Optative with dv. eAegav ojs iravr av toot. They said that he would see everything. Direct : irdvi 3 dv K5oi (sc. el eXOot). e'Ae£av , I hear. kirio-Tdp.a.i, I know for certain. irw6a.vop.ai, I learn by in- p.epvijpai, I remember. quiry. eTri.Xav8dvop.ai, I forget, pavddvd), I learn. yiyvdio-KU), I get to know. ob E\\r]ve<; ovk tfSeo-av Kvpov redvrjKOTa. Xen. TJie Greeks did not know that Gyrus was dead. jjSew? a/cova IjWp arou? BiaXeyo/xevov. PLAT. T love to hear Socrates conversing. Digitized by Microsofmr THE PARTICIPLE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 187 e/jtaVTif fwijSeti' ovBev «rio-Tot/4ev(j). PLAT. Apol. viii. I was conscious that I knew nothing for certain. ovre fikya, ovre crfiiKpov £vvoi8a ifiavraj cro^os &v. Plat. Apol. vi. I am conscious that in no degree, great or small, am I wise. The rales about the Subject and the Predicate of the Infinitive equally apply to the Participle. ewpcov ov tcaTopOovvres. THUC. They saw that they were not succeeding. atTe?. Plat. We perceive that we are ridiculous. Note 1. The Indicative (and Optative) with 6Vt and Tepos. PlAT'. He asked if there was anybody wiser than I. Eecta : eari, t«s ; ■fjtropovv ti, 7TOT6 \eyei 6 0eo?. PLAT. T was at a loss to understand what the god meant. Eecta : ti irore Xeyet ; e/3ov\evovTo nva KaTakevtyovaiv. DEM. They were considering whom they should leave behind. Eecta : ti va KaTaXetifrofiev ; rjpanwv avTov et, avaifKevcreiev. DEM. i" was asking him if he had set sail. Eecta : ai/eVXevcra? ; did you set sail ? Observe in examples 6 and 7 that the Historic Sequence is disregarded. Good examples will be found in Soph. El. 32, 679, 974, 1348, Ai. 557, Ant. 239, 1190. If the Direct uses the Imperfect Indicative, e.g. n's fy o p.v9os ; what was the tale ? the Indicative will be retained in Indirect Historic for reasons explained on p. 182. It would become eTirov Sorts rjv 6 fivdos. itirov Sorts sir) 6 fiv0os would represent a Direct tis kttiv 6 /ivOos ; See a good instance in Soph. Ant. 239. Digitized by Microsoft® , 190 SUBSTANTIVAL SENTENCES. § 169. DELIBERATIVE OR DUBITATIVE INDIRECT QUESTIONS. These questions, when Indirect, are in the Subjunctive (Primary or Historic Time), or the Optative (Historic Time). The Subjunctive is retained in the Indirect because it was the mood of the Direct. Direct ': tI a> ; What am I to say? Indirect Primary : ovk e^co o,ti (rt) (f>a. I know not what 1 am to say. Non habeo quid dicam. Indirect Historic : ovk elyov \ ' „' T ;'/,„' /V ( 2. 0,TI (Tl) p(U. I knew not what I was to say. Eon habebam quid dicerem. ovk e%a>, 07j-<»? aoi eeirw a vow. PLAT. / don't know how I am to tell you my thoughts. Direct : 7r<»s croi eiirca ; rjiropeb b ti %prjcrai,To t&> Trpayfiart. Xen. He was at a loss to know how to deal with the question. Direct : ti xp7]o-co/x,ai ; ejrr\povTO et KopivBioK irapaholev tt\v ttoKlv. ThuC. They asked whether they were to deliver over the city to the Corinthians. Direct : -rrapaSaifiev ; rjiropwaav birr] KaOopfiicrcovTai. THUC. They were at a loss where to come to anchor. Direct : irrj Kadopuiawueda ; Qigitized by Microsoft® THE INDIRECT PETITION. 191 to, Se eKirw/tara ovk 018' ei toi5t^> 85. XEN. Cyr. viii. 4. 16. / aW£ foww whether I am to #we the cups to this man. Obs. el with Subjunctive, and see Note. eA.eyes on ow av e^oii e£e\.0iav o,ti x/)$o o r <*vr$. Plat. Oil iv. Pom were saying that if you escaped you would not know what to do with yourself. !/3ovA.£iWto e'ire ko.to.ko.v(tu><71v etre Tt aAAo xprj&mvTai. Thuc. ii. 4, 6. TAey were deliberating whether they should burn the men to death, or do something else to them. Observe the eire — eiVe with the Subjunctive again. § 170. THE INDIRECT PETITION. The Indirect Petition (a command, a request, or a prayer) follows verbs of commanding, requesting, praying, advising, and the like. efarav, I bade or ordered ayyeKkm, I bid. (irpoel-irov). Trapaicak5>, I exhort. iceXevco, I order. dljia>, I request, call upon, SiaKe\evofx,ai, I order, ex- expect. port, direct. irapaivco, I advise. TrapccyiyeWco, I order, in- cnrayopeva), I forbid. struct. All these take the Infinitive, which is the common Greek construction for the Indirect Petition. The Nega- tive is firj. The difference between the Greek and Latin construc- tions here should be carefully noted. elirov tc3 Uavaavia rov Kr\pvico<; /mtj XenrecrOai. Thuc. They ordered Pausanias not to leave the herald. 1 d is interrogative as well as conditional, and so goes with the Sub- junctive as well as with the Optative. 'Edit (fy) is not interrogative where it appears to be so, as in a few phrases with v avyyvafirjv /jloi e%eiv. PLAT. I beg you to pardon me. irapatvovftev croi iretOecrOai rot? j3eXTt,o o-e aki]dri Xeyeiv. ANTIPHON. I call upon (require) you to tell the truth. The Subject or Predicate will be in the Nominative if necessary, as in the Indirect Statement : — IIpo//,r]0ea irapaiTelTai Ewi/ATjOevs avro^ veifiai. Plat. Epimetheus begs Prometheus that he himself may distribute. ("Let me distribute/' says Epimetheus.) For verbs of forbidding see Index. Note 1. Some of these verbs take ottws (Situs pvq) with the Future Indicative and Optative. iia.KeXevop.ai, irapaKaXS, I exhort ; dyyeXXw, irapayyeXXia, I tell, order ; airayopevw, I for- bid ; irpoetirov, I proclaimed, ordained; d£ipr)9 p.r) toSto aTTOKpivoip/qv. Plat. Rep. i. 339, a. You told me not to give this answer. O7rcos /xijSei' l/oa after past tense in Rep. i. 337, E. For the Construction of ojtos, oirms /tij, see Final Sentences, etc. Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTEK II. § 171. THE PAKTICLE "Kv. "Av (and the Epic kcv, kI, Doric «<£) were originally Demon- strative Adverbs meaning there, then, so, in that case, perchance, possibly, contingently. They were Adverbs qualifying the Posi- tive Statement of the Verb. This part of the subject belongs to Philology rather than Syntax. "Av in Attic Greek may be regarded as having practi- cally two distinct uses. 1. It is joined to Verbs, the Indicative (Historic Tenses), Optative, Infinitive, and Participle. It denotes a Con- dition on which the fulfilment of the verbal action depends. 2. It is joined to Pronouns and Particles with the Subjunctive Mood. Such are 0?, oo-rt? (6? av, octtk; av) : ore, eirei, eirettxr], irpiv, ews, etc. (prav, eirav, eireibav, irpw av, e&>? av) : the Conditional el {lav, r)v) : sometimes the Pinal &>?, 07T(»9, ocfipa (ta? av, etc.). In this use av (but not in Final Sentences) makes the meaning of the Pronoun and Particle indefinite, who-sp-ever, when-so-ever, if ever (in one very common use of lav), though this meaning cannot always be expressed. When Historic Sequence requires a change from the Subjunctive to the Optative av must be dropped, e.g. 6? av Bovkmrat but 6? Bovkono. rr * Digitized by Microsoft® r 194 THE PARTICLE &v. § 172. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE SENTENCES. Before dealing with Eelative, Conditional, and Temporal Sentences it is most important to understand the difference between a Definite and an Indefinite Sentence. In the Sentence ravra a fiovKovrat, e^ovai, tlwy have those things which they want, the antecedent rama is definite {those particular and known things), and the Eelative Sentence which follows refers to a definite act. But in the Sentence a av fiovXavrai e%ovaiv, the Ante- cedent is indefinite and the act is virtually Conditional : they have whatsoever things they want, anything they want, anything if they want it. This second sentence in Historic Sequence becomes a /3ov\oivto el%ov. Similarly in the sentence e7retS?7 Se o\t,yap%ia eyevero ol rpiaKovra fiere- •jre/ityavrd fie, when an oligarchy was established the Thirty Tyrants sent for me, Socrates is speaking of a definite time (b.c. 404) and of a definite act. But eire&dv oTuy- apyla yivi)-rai, whenever, or as often as, an oligarchy shall he established, or is established, an indefinite time and act is spoken of. The sentence is virtually conditional again, if ever, or if at any time, etc., and might be expressed thus, idv irore yevijrai. In Historic Sequence the sen- tence would be 67T6iSrj yevoiro. It will be seen therefore that when the Antecedent is definite the Indicative is used ; where indefinite, the Subjunctive with dv, or the Optative without av : e.g. o\k elSev eirr)veae, those whom he saw he praised. ob? av iSr) eiraivel, whomsoever he sees he praises. 01/9 tSot stto vet,, whomsoever he saw he used to praise. ' Digitized by Microsoft® CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 195 Note. Further instances of — 1. Definite sentences. Kvpov /MTCure/ttreTCii otto ttjs apx*)S> ^s avrbv o-aTpdirrjv 67TOirjO-£. XEN. He sends for Cyrus from the province of which he had made Mm governor. «?wv. PLAT. So long as I breathe I will never give up philosophy. KaTecrrrjcra &e kTriptXtirrdai citi Scot T x°PV ^avocrTparov. Antiph. I appointed Phanostratus to provide whatever the chorus required. § 173. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. A Compound Conditional Clause consists of two Correlative sentences, one of which contains the Con- dition, and is called the Protasis ;* the other contains the 1 Protasis (irpdraais) means Premiss. Apodosis (iiridocris) means Consequence. The Apodosis is tile Principal, the Protasis the Sub- ordinate Sentence. Whether originally a clause with el was a Sub- ordinate Sentence, is a point which need not be discussed in Attic Syntax. How far the Apodosis, as being the Principal Sentence, influences the construction of the Protasis-, is an interesting question, which is alluded to under the Oratio Obliqua. Professor Goodwin (Journhl of Philology, viii. 15, p. 33) strongly maintains the assimi- lating force exerted by the principal verb on the subordinate verb, 6 Digitfced by Microsoft® ig6 THE PARTICLE S». Consequence, and is called the Apodosis. Sucn a clause reduced to its simplest form may be thus expressed : If A is B, C is D, or C is I), if A is B ; i.e. the fulfilment or truth of the Consequence depends on the fulfilment or truth of the Condition. This depen- dence of the Consequence (the Apodosis) on the Condi- tion (the Protasis) is the essential point of a conditional clause. § 174. DISTINCTION OF CONDITIONS. I. The most obvious distinction of Conditions is that of Time. Some refer to the present, others to the past, others to the future. This distinction is universally present in all Conditions. II. A second distinction concerns the opinion implied as to the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the Condition. In two forms, and two forms only, the expression in itself conveys information on this point. 1 III. A third distinction is that between Particular and General Conditions. A Particular Condition refers to a definite act or set of acts : e.g. " If the windows up-stairs are 1 There is, as Professor Goodwin tells us, no special form implying that the condition is or was fulfilled. That is to be decided by the context. This is true, though of course a fact may be clearly implied, and in some cases narrated. Such is the case chiefly in past General Suppositions, e.g. et tis Avreliroi, eiBtis ireBrficei, Thuc. viii. 66, which is the same as saying, "Every one who spoke against them was at once got rid of." A General Supposition may also be expressed in an Ordinary Past form. Thus, d ti fiXXo linidvSwov tytveTo avivrwu liertaxopev, Thug, iii. 54, which is only a way of saying, "We took part in every danger as it arose." Indeed a fact is narrated here under a, conditional form, though not by virtue of the form itself, which need only denote a connexion between Condition and Conse- qnence. With regard to General Suppositions in present time, they may refer to facts, but usually are generalisations from observed facts or habits. Digitized by Microsoft® DIVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 197 open, the rain is coming in;" "If you receive a telegram send it on to me;" " If he had a five-pound note he would lend it me." A General Condition refers to any act which may occur or have occurred any number of times : "If ever a candidate is convicted of bribery he loses his seat;" "If (ever) he were left to himself he used to waste his time;" " If (ever) he had a shilling in his pocket he gave it to the first beggar he met. " § 175. DIVISION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. Conditional Sentences accordingly may be divided into : — I. Ordinary Conditions ; II. General or Frequentative Condi- tions. Ordinary Conditions again may be subdivided into A., those with regard to which no opinion is expressed whether the Condition is fulfilled or unfulfilled, probable 01 improbable, true or false ; B., those in which the form oi expression implies that the Condition is unfulfilled. There is no form to express an opinion that the Condition is fulfilled. The context alone could suggest this. In General Conditions again no opinion is expressed concerning the fulfilment or non-fulfilment of the Condition. Thus in Ordinary Conditions of the second class alone is any such opinion expressed. § I76. ORDINARY CONDITIONS. For Real Examples see further on. A. All that is stated is that a Consequence did, does, or will follow from a Condition. The expression in itself does not tell us whether the condition was, is, or will be fulfilled. That is beside the question : the stress is wholly on the if. The sole difference between the three forms (1, 2, 3) is / > ?. / ^ 67TOM7t7as rjdiK7]cra<;. ( were doing this you were doing wrong. ^ y \ did this you did wrong (aorist, a single act). 3. Future. To express a Condition in future time there are three forms, differing, but differing only, in distinctness of ex- pression. (a) The ordinary future form. eav ynv) ravra < , > aot/cncret?. ^ iroii].r)v, if I had been set free (m a state of liberty). Tr&\a.i av diroAtoAr;, I should long ago have been a dead mm ' Digitized by Microsoft® THE PARTICLE &v. § 177. Ordinary Conditions in Greek and Latin. A. Protasis. 1. Present. 2. Past. « TOLVTO, TTOIUS Si haec facis el ravra 7r«rot7jKas. Si haec fecisti. , „ f CTT0(£1S et raura < . / [ 67ro«jo-as a- 1 \ faciebas St haec j J ^,-„ IA 3. Future, (a) e&v (fiv) ravra { ™fr I /Si haecfeceris (int. perf.) ,,> , - ( iroioins (0) a rawa < , ' N ' I 7roiij<7eias S« haec facias (c) a raCiTa irotijcreis #1 Aaec fades B. 1. PRESENT (or el ravra eiroieis Continued Past). Si haec faceres 2. PAST. el ravra eiroiijcras Si haec fecisses Apodosis. d8lK£?S. iniuste facis. 1 rj&bKeis. rjSlicqo-as. iniuste faciebas. iniuste fecisti. dSi/ojcras. iniuste fades. aSutoii)? av. d8iK7jcreta9 av. iniuste facias. d.8iKr]6s eirj ; XEN. How could a man be wise in matters of which he knew nothing certainly ? ttoXXy] av T6S eiSaipovia euy Trepl toi>s vkovs. Plat. Apol. xii. Great would be the good fortune in the case of the young, ap oSv av jj.e. oi&rde TotraSe cttj Siayevecrdai. Plat. Apol. xxl Think you then that I should have lived all these years ? av belongs to Siayevecrdat. kirieiKr) av fioi SokQ irpbs tovtov Aeyeiv. PLAT. Apol. xxiii. / think I should be adopting a conciliatory tone towards him. av belongs to Aiyeiv and emphasises «rieiKrj. As in the last two examples av when separated from its verb often comes near oiofiai, Sokw, 4>t}/xl, oTSa, so much so as to look as if it belonged to them. But we must be careful to connect the av with its proper verb, ovk 018a av el, or ovk av otSa el for ovk otSa el — av should be especially noticed, e.g. ovk olS' av el jrei'crai/u (Eur. Med.), I know not whether I should persuade him, where av belongs to Trelo-aifii. § 182. Repetition of av. "Av is often used more than once in the same sentence. For this repetition there may be two reasons. Digitized by Microsoft® 204 THE PARTICLE &v. 1. In a long paragraph, which is complicated by interrupt- ing clauses, av occurs at the beginning. It thus strikes the keynote of the whole so to speak, and gives warning that the whole coming statement is conditional. It occurs again later on near the verb. 2. It may be repeated, more than once, even in a short sentence, if any special word is to be emphasised. Examples. I. In long paragraphs — vjxus 8' «t(us Tax' av dyOofievoi, Sxrirep ol vwTafovTEs eyeipopevoi, Kpovvavrvs av p.e, ire.iQd[x.e.voi 'Kvirif, paSicus av dTTOKTelvaire. PLAT. Apol. xviii. But you very possibly in annoyance, just like people when they are being roused from a nap, might listen to Anytus, and, with a tap, put me to death, and think nothing more of it. N.B. — Tax"., perhaps, often attaches an av to itself. In Plat. Apol. xxxii., a good instance. The sentence begins with eyw yap av otp.ai — then seven lines later on ot/mi av recurs, followed by av evpetv, (all the av's belonging to evpeiv). II. For emphasis — ovk av cwroSooyv oij8' av o/3oA.ov ovSevi. ARIST. Nub. 118. I'll not give — no not a copper to any man. ti Srjr' av (is Ik twvS' av ti^icAot/tt ere ; SOPH. Ai. 536. How then, knowing what has happened, could I assist thee 1 ovt' av KeXevcrai/i' out' av, el OeXois en TrpacrcreLV, ep,ov y av ijSews Sp(pr)s fj.era. SOPH. Ant. 69. I would not urge thee, no I nor shouldst thou now Desire to help me, would I have thy help. Good instances occur in Soph. Ant. 466, 680, 884; Aesch. Persae, 431. § 183- ¥ Av with Future Indicative. "Av with the Future Indicative, Infinitive, and Participle. Many critics have maintained that this construction does not occur in Attic Greek. Many instances have been removed by revision of texts. Mr. Riddell {Apology, p. "7, and Digest, p. 139) regards the construction as abundancly established, and cites, seven imitancesfrom Plato, e.g. Rep. ELLIPSE OF THE APODOSIS, ETC. 205 615 d, ovx r/K«, ovS' av r/£a Sevpo. Other cases are Apol. xvii., ,Leg- 719 E, Symp. 222 A, etc. Also Xen. An. ii. 5. 13, av KoXatrecrde. In Phaedr. 227 B, ovk av o'iu [i(. iroirprtvOai. In Onto. XV., ovk oiei av (fraveicrOai., av with the future infinitive occurs, av occurs with the future parti- ciple in Plat. Apol. xvii. (end of chapter), ovk b\v Trot^aovros. Madvig denies, Kriiger defends, the existence of this last construction. § 184. Ellipse of the Apodosis, and Ellipse of the Verb. "Av of an Apodosis is sometimes found without its verb. The verb however (an Indicative or an Optative) may be easily supplied from the context. oi 8' oiKiTai peyKovcriv dA/V ovk av irpb tov. Ar. Nub. 5. The domestics are snorting, but they wouldn't (have been doing so) once, ovk av (sc. eppeyKov). Where two verbs are connected or opposed, it is enough to use of once only, with the first, unless some lengthy com- plication of clause renders it necessary for the sake of clear- ness to repeat it, or unless some word is to be emphasised. ovSets av rjv 0-01 6s i/J-ov KaTe/x,apTvpi)o-ev (sc. av). Antiph. Her. 15. You would have found no one who would liave given evidence against me. ti eiroirjo-ev av ; yj 8r)\.ov oti &p.oaev (sc. av) ; DEM. 31. 9. What would he have done i Is it not clear that he would have taken an oath ? § 185. Ellipse of the Protasis. Sometimes the Protasis, as in all languages, is wholly omitted. It can be easily supplied from the context. ovSei/ yap av ifiXafS-qv (sc. ei €Tt/f)jo-ajinjr, from what has preceded). Pl. Apol. xxviii. I should liave received no harm (had I done so and so). irav yap av Kareipydcrw. SOPH. El. 1022. • So had-A thou compassed all (sc. el toioSc fjo-9a), supplied from a preceding wish. Digitized by Microsoft® 206 THE PARTICLE S.v. § 186. Ei and av both in the Protasis. In several instances el and av are both found in the Pro- tasis (nearly always an Optative). One of the best-known instances is from Plat. Protag. 329 B., koX eyta, eiirep aAAo) to> dvdp&Trwv Treidoipvqv dv, /ecu croi Treldop.ai, for myself, if I would trust any other man, I trust you. Here it is considered that av belongs to the verb ireidoifi-qv, which does double duty, both as a Protasis with el, and also as an Apodosis with av to another unexpressed Protasis, thus : el irei6obp,T]v, if I ivould trust (i.e. 7ra6otiJ.rjv av, I would trust, el tiotiv S0117, if he should give me his word). This is an established Attic idiom, e.g. Dem. Phil. i. 18, ovtoi 7ravTeA.a>s, ovS 1 el prj ■KOirjcran' av tovto, ei'KaTa(j>povr]- tov €o~n, it is not lightly to be despised, even if you should not do so (do so — if the occasion should arise). Isoc. Archid. 120, el &e jj,r]Sels av vjxZv d^iwreie ffiv diroo'Tepovp.evos iraTplSos, TrpocnjKei k.t.A., if none of you should care to live — if deprived of his country, it behoves you, etc. In this last example the Second Protasis is given in the participle aTroo-Tepovp.evos, as it is also in Dem. Meid. 582, el oStoi xprjp.aTa ey^ovTes pvn Trpooivr av, if these men would not spend money — if they liad it. Other instances occur (perhaps) in Aesch. Ag. 930, and Sept. 513. See also Eur.' Hel. 825, Dem. Meid. 1206, de Fals. Leg. § 190 (with Shilleto's note), Antiphon, 6. 29, Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 35 (davp.a£oip! av — el av dxf>eX.rjo-eie). An essential point to notice is that in all these instances (except Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 35) the Apodosis is in the Indicative, generally in the Present, sometimes the Future. The Opta- tive with el and av, therefore, does not denote a remote future supposition except so far as it refers to the unexpressed Protasis. Hence in their notes to Aesch. Ag. 930 (reading el irpdrra-oip.' dv) both Mr. Paley and Mr. Sidgwick consider el irpdcrcroip.' dv a variant not for el wpa\ro-oi.p.i, but for el irpd^ut, translating not, if I should prosper, but, if I have a chance of prospering. Jelf (§ 860) and Professor Goodwin (Moods and Tenses, 107) compare the Homeric el icev with the Optative. But in all the Homeric instances an Apodosis with the Optative and Kev is joined, e.g. II. v. 273, el tovto) xe \d/3oip.ev dpoifieBd Ke kXcoi eardXov, if, in the case given, we should lake them, we should, win goodly renown. In Dem. Timoth. 1 2 1 . 1 9 , ei ov occurs with a Past Indicative : Digitized by Microsoft® At IN AP0D0S1S. ao7 d roivvv touto l(T\vpov tfv av tovt(s> rtKp/qpiov, Kajxoi yevktrdm TeKixqpiov. Observe the Apodosis in the Imperative : if this would have been strong evidence for him (i.e. if he had been able to adduce it), let it be evidence for me too. Here, as Professor Goodwin ex- plains (p. 101), the Protasis means : if it is true that tMs would have been, so that reference is really to the present, and only to the past so far as the unexpressed Protasis requires. Dem. de Cor. 260. 2, is another instance if d emxdp-qo-' av is read ; only the Apodosis which follows is ti's ovk av airkKreivt ; Note. There is no difficulty in connecting an Apodosis with more than one Protasis referring to different times, e.g. Dem. de Cor. 274. 28, tirev^o/iat Tracrt tovtois, d dkrjdrj irpbs v/ias cwroi/n kgu eiWov, I pray to all these, if I should speak, and did speak the truth before you. § 187. Ae in Apodosis. 8k sometimes introduces an Apodosis as if it were co- ordinate with, or followed, the Protasis. This is instructive as showing that the logical importance of the subordinate sentence (Protasis) may assert itself over the grammatical importance of the Principal Sentence (the Apodosis), Such cases, however, are very rare in Attic. el oSv kyio yiyvwo-KO) pyfjTe ra ocria jJ^re to. StKaia, ii^ets Se - 8i8a£aTe p.€. Xen. Hell. iv. 1. 33. If therefore I know neither what is holy nor what is just, do you then teach me. Cf. Soph. 0. T. 1267 ; Suva S' fjv. § 188. idv seemingly Interrogative. d is interrogative as well as conditional, but kkv is only conditional, and must not be used in Indirect Questions. Where it appears to be interrogative, as in two places cited by Liddell and Scott, it comes after osjre/D ttoXX' av c'xot/u). av emphasises 7roXXd. o~v8ds r' av ovk av aXyvvais irXiov. SOPH. 0. T. 446. If thou speed hence thou wouldst not vex me more. Here €t ifiovXTjO'i], 'OXvvOiovs 7rapeSu>K€v. DEM. 23. 107. P. after taking Potidaea, and though he might, if he had wished, have kept it himself, yet handed it over to the Olynthians. 8wr)dels av is the Apodosis (rfivvqdr) av — d IfiovXijOrf), the participle having a concessive force. § 190. Conditional Particles and their combinations. 1. d Se fx-q, if not, sin minus, sin aliter, has become so stereotyped a phrase, that it is used where idv Se prj would be more correct. eaj' <£aiv)}T0U Si/caiov, Trnpil>p.t6a. d Se p,-q kS>p.ev. Plat. Crito ix. If it appears right, let us make the attempt; but if not, let us abandon it. 2. lav, d, meaning " if haply " (" in case," " in the event of," " in hope that," " thinking that "). It contains sometimes a virtual oratio obliqua (i.e. the thought of the subject). Cf. si forte in Latin. 'diiova-ov Kal ipov, kdv croi, Tavra Sonrj. PLAT. Rep. 358. Hear me too, in case you may agree. jrpos T^v iroXiv, d i7Tif$OT)0oiev, «x(upow. Thuc. vi. 100. They were marching on the city, on the chance of the citizens advancing against them (thinking that they might, etc.). Digitized by Microsoft® EXAMPLES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 209 (. 3. &o~irep av el : also written ito-irepavit. The phrase is compressed from &o-irep dv (Apodosis) — el (Protasis), e.g. &a~irep av el euroi (Plat. Apol. ix.), just as if he were to say, SxjTrep dv ttoiolto el eisiroi. 4. ?raJs yap dv ; (sc. ei-q), with a Protasis (el with Optative) omitted. How would it be, if it were so ? Hpw is it possible 1 How so? 5. Kav el : vvv p.01 80/cet kw dtrefleiav el Karayiyvdo-Koi tis MeiStov to, irpoo-rJKOVTa iroieiv. DEM. 21. 51 = /cat av iroielv — £i KaTayiyvwTKoi. But Kav el comes to be used for the simple koX el, even if. 6. Kav=KaJ lav. § 191. Examples of Conditional Sentences. (1) Ordinary Present Conditions. (2) Ordinary Past Con- ditions. (3) Present and Past in combination. See § 177 A, 1 and 2. Observe that the condition may be general as well as particular. 1. Present : — ei Tt xf/evSofiai e£ecrriv e£e\ey£ai fie. ANTIPH. de Cher. 14. If I am making any false statements, you may confute me. el Oeol ri Spwaiv altrxpov, ovk elo-lv Qeol. Eurip. Bell. Frag. 294. If the gods do aught immoral they are no gods. el oSv toiovtov 6 ddvaros etni, nepSos eyiaye Xeya. Plat. Apol. xxxiii. If therefore death is such a state as this, I for my part count it gain. 2. Past:— el d-Troo-Trjvai 'Adr/vaCwv ovk rjOeX^rrafiev, ovk rjSiKov/iev. Thuc. iii. 55. If we refused to desert the Athenians, we were doing no wrong. ovk because ovk l0eAa>=no!o. Digitized by Microsoft® THE PARTICLE Sv. el /J.ev 'AvKXrpribs deov rjv, ovk tfv alo-)(p0Kep8r)s, el 8' alo-xpoKepSrjS, °'" K V v Geov. PLAT. Rep. iii. 408 C. If Asclepius toas the son of a god, he was not covetous ; if he was covetous, he was not the son of a god. el ti aXXo eyevero evriKivSwov, TravTUHv irapb. Svvap.iv lx.eTia-xojJ.ev. ThUC. iii. 54. If any other danger arose, we took our share in all beyond ow strength. (3.) pa£eTe ofiv aAAijAois el TrdmoTe ti -qKoixre tis. Plat. Apol. iii. Explain then one to another, if at any time any one heard anything. et irov Tt eirpa^a toiovtos cfravoup.ai. PLAT. Apol. xxi. If ever I engaged in any business, I shall be found to be such as I have described myself. el Se Suo e£ Ivos dytovos yeyevrjO-Oov ovk eyio dtnos. Antiph. de caed. Herod. 84. If two trials have been made out of one (or instead of one), it is not my fault. § 192. Ordinary Future Conditions. See § 177 A, 3 (a). Protasis edv (fjv, av) with the Subjunctive. rjv dva.Treielcreo-8e p.ov. PLAT. Apol. xviii. If you are (will be) persuaded, by me, you will spare me. eav ep.e aTroKTeivrjTe, ovk ep.e p.et£o) /jAd^ere rj vp.as avrovs. , Plat. Apol. If you put me to death, you will inflict no greater injury on me than on yourselves. kou ira.18', edvTiep Sevp' ep.ov irpoo-dev p-oXr/, imprjyopeiTe. AeSCH. Pers. 529. And for my son, if he return before me, Comfort ye him. Digitized by Microsoft® ORDINARY FUTURE CONDITIONS. 211 SiSaitr" Ikuv K-rtivciv eavrbv, rpi rdSe ipevcrOy keytav. Soph. Phil. 1342. Freely he offers himself To the death if, speaking thus, he lie. SiSoyari, he offers, practically means, he says that he mil, is ready, and thus implies a future. irapa tov dyadov deov, av Beos WeXy, avriKa Ire'ov. PLAT. / must go at once, to the good God, if God mil. 10. kovk av ye Xi^aip! eir' dyaOouri erots KaKa. Ar. fjv psf) ye evya)v ii«pvyr)S 7rpbs aldepa. Eur. Phoen. 1215. Yea, and I would not speak of ill close on thy happiness. Yea, but thou shall, unless thou escape m thy flight to the firmament. Cf. Eur. Orest. 1593. N.B. — A physical impossibility is here spoken of. Observe that it follows an Apodosis with Optative and av : fp/ with the Subjunctive realises vividly the impossibility of the situation. Tt abv, av euxuKTiv 01 vop.01 k.t.X. PLAT. Grit. xii. What then, if the laws say to us, etc. A physical impossibility again is brought home as a vivid argumentum ad hominem. § !93' Less Vivid Future Conditions. See § 177, A 3 (b). In English we render el with the Optative in a variety of ways : el Tronjcrai/u, if I should do, if 1 were to do, should I do, were I to do, if I did, supposing I were to do. etc. ov iroXXfj av dXoyia eirj el (pofioiTO tov ddvarov 6 toiovtos. Plat. Phaed. 68. Would it not be the height of inconsistency if such a man were to fear death ? ei p.e «ri tovtois dfaone, eirroip,' av vp.iv. PLAT. Apdl. xvii. If you should dismiss me on these conditions I would reply to you, etc. ' ' Digitized by Microsoft® 212 THE PARTICLE Sv. oikos 8' av avrb'S, el 9oyyrjV A.a/8oi, (3a\ets. ElTE. Phoen. 1621. Thou wilt slay me, if thou wilt thrust me from the land, ei jj,t) KaBe^eis yXtDcrcrav, eo-rai croi KaKa. Eurip. Aeg. Fr. 5 If thou wilt not curb thy tongue there will be ills for thee. rjv edeXwftev dTrodvrjcrKtiv — el Se cpo/3rja-6fieda kivSvvovs. Isocr. Archid. p. 138, A. § 107. If we are ready to die — but if ive shall fear dangers. Observe the co-ordination of the two forms. el tovto ;roi)j o-oi- 1 Mr. Monro (Homeric Grammar, p. 239) considers that el with the Future (in Homer) generally expresses suppositions of an obvious or familiar kind. Digitized by Microsoft® MIXED EXAMPLES. 213 alpe TrXrJKTpov, el /ta^e'. ArIST. Av. 761. Up with your spur if you mean fighting. Cf. Akist. Ach. 316. ij vw eytt) ju.ei> oijk dv-qp, afo-Jj 8' dVry/), ei ravr' dvarl rfjSe KEicrerat KpaTq. SOPH. Ant. 484. £0, yo«4 now ! I am wo man, hut she is $g man, if with impunity these my commands are to count as naught in her eyes. Si iacebit imperium nostrum, cf. 461. The periphrasis with /ilAAto and Infinitive (Present or Future) is commoner in prose. There is a life about the expres sion which recommends this d with the Future to poetry. § 195* Mixed examples illustrating the connection between and interchangeability of the Sub- junctive, Optative, and Future Indicative in Conditional Sentences. N.B. — This section is supplementary to § 102 — § 194. Trois oSv av 6p6o)s SiKacraiTe irefil avTarj[il paiv6p,r]v. PfflLEM. 159. If I Iwd not been toiling then, I should not be rejoicing now. The force of the Imperfect Indicative (referring to both kinds-of time) is well shown in the above example. eyib odv (KaWvvoprjv Kal fjppvvoprjv av, el rjTrio-Ta.fj.rjv TavTa. ctAA' ov yap en-10-Tap.ai. PLAT. Apol. iv. / anyhow should plume and pride myself if I possessed this knowledge. But — you see, I don't possess it (or, I should have been pluming, etc.) The time is present, or it may refer to a habit in the past. SijAov oSv on ovk av TrpoeXeyev et p.rj Zirlo-Tevev d\rjdevo-£iv. Xen. Mem. i. 1. 5. It is plain accordingly that Socrates would not have publicly made these statements had he not felt confident that he should speak the truth. The Imperfect here expresses customary or habitual acts in the past. Similarly in Latin the Imperfect is used, and not the Pluperfect. The poets are fond of it as a descriptive past. Several instances, not much noticed, occur in Horace. Ille non inclusus equo Minervae, etc. ; falleret aulam, etc. ; sed, etc. ; ureret flammis ; He would not have been deceiving, but burning. Thou hadst not seen Achilles deceiving, but burning. Non ego hoc ferrem calidus iuventa consule Planco. Iliad not brooked this in the heat of youth when Plancus was consul. Sometimes av with the Aorist Indicative in Apodosis is joined to d with the Imperfect Indicative, not to denote a past unfulfilled condition, but a single act, e.g. Plat. Euthyph. 12 D, ei phi oSv av p.e ijpcoTas ti, eurov av, if you were asking me any question I sJwuld instantly say. Here e«rov av really refers to the present, and denotes the instantaneousness of the single act in a wa y ^hich^e Jm^erf^t could not express. OMISSION OF S.v. 217 2. Ei with the Aorist or Pluperfect Indicative. The time is past, denoting a single act (Aorist), or a state (Pluperfect). dweOavov av el p.rj i\ t5>v Tpidnovra dp\rj KareXvdiq. Plat. Apol. xx. I slwuld have been put to death if the government of the Thirty had not been overthrown. el p.fj dve/3r] "Avvtos k&v &\e xiAtas 8paxp-ds. Plat. Apol. xxv. If Anytus had not come into cowrt he would evei\ have incurred afme of 1000 drachmae. el [irj vfieis rjkOere eTropevop.eda av eirl fiatriXia. Xen. An. ii. 1. 4. If you had not come (fast) we should now be marching against the King (or have been now marching). Protasis a single act in Past ; Apodosis a continued act in the Present. el Tore efiorjOrjcrapiev ovk av ijvcuxAsi vvv 6 6/3ov trapeo-j(ev ov /tarws 6'Se ktvttos. EUR. Hec. 1111. (for Trapeo")(ev av). Had we not known That Phrygia's towers had fallen 'neath the spear Of Hellas, no slight fear this din had caused. Cf. Nee veni nisi fata locum sedemque dedissent. Verg. A en. xi. 112. The Imperfect by itself almost bears this meaning without requiring an av. Indeed the intrinsic meaning of the Im- perfect (e.g. in the following example, " I was not by way of sending,") is closely allied to a conditioned statement. e.g. KaiTOL ov Srprov ye ko.t' ep.avrov p-qvvrijv hrepvirov elSds. Antiph. de Coed. Herod. 24. And yet I surely was not sending an informer against myself with my eyes open (I should not have been sending). See especially a paragraph too long for quotation in Andokides de Myst. 58. 59. Of. also Eur. Bacch. 1312. The construction is commoner in Latin (cf. Liv. xxxiv. 29, Difficilior facta erat oppugnatio ni T. Quinctius supervenisset. Tac. Ann. iii. 14, Effigies Pisonis traxerant ac divellebant ni iussu principis repositae forent. Hor. Od. II. xvii., Me truncus illapsus cerebro sustulerat nisi Faunus ictum dextra levasset. Verg. Georg. ii. 132, Et, si non alium late iactaret odorem, laurus erat. 2. This omission of av is almost the rule with the Im- perfect of verbs denoting necessity, duty, possibility, propriety, etc. : XPV V or ^XPfyi <^ £t > *£fy, * v fy, «»<°s tfv, irpoo-rJKev, fjv or imrjpyev (it was possible), KaXbv fjv, alo-\pbv ?jv, KaXZs eivev, &eXov, ep.eXXes, e/3ov\6p.r)v. Also with verbals in -reos, e.g. irpoaipereov fjv (satius erat). All these phrases denote an un- fulfilled condition (present or continued past). This construction is parallel with the Latin — debebam, de- cebat, oportebat, poteram, gerundive with eram, par, satis, aequum erat, etc. See Madvig, L. G. § 348 E., and Obs. 1. KaXbv fjv TOtcrSe, et kcu rjp.apTa.vop.ev, el^ai tyj rjperepa opyrj. THUC. i. 38. ' It would have been well for them, even if we had been wronging ihet®i$jgi@6j$DMyctesem> anger. OMISSION OF &.v. 219 e/3ov\6tn]v fiev ovk ipifav ivOdSe. ARIST. Ban. 866. / could have wished I was not wrangling here. io-ov i)v jwi pvq iXdeiv (as apodosis to ei p,rj8ev 8ie<£epe). Antiph. Herod. 13. It would have been all the same to me not to have come. For wtpeXov, e/3ouAd J uiji', see Wishes. 3. Observe similar constructions of e'Sei and IxPW (XPV V )- Xpijv (e'Set) ere raura 7roteiv. You ought to be doing, or, to have been doing (but you are not, or were not, doing the act). Compare eVoteis a, v. Xpijv (eSet) o~e ravra iroifjo~at. You ought to have done (but you did not do) the act. Compare eiroirjcras av. Oportebat and oportuit facere. For XPV V > w i tn Present Infinitive and Aorist Infinitive, see Plat. Apol. xxii., Arist. Ach. 562. ISei, Dem. 112. 6. But Xpr) ere iroieiv (ti-omjo-cu), you ought to do this (of what can still be done), oportet te facere. ovk eSei ere toujto. iroieiv. You ought not to be doing (what you are doing). Xpijv, «Set, etc. , however may take an av. ei pXv r)ino-Tap,eda, crac/>5s, «n3c>ev av eSet &v /xeAAio Aeyeii/. Xen. Anah. v. 1. 10. If we had all known for certain, there would be no need for me to say what I am going to say. So in Latin possem may be used and not poteram, oporteret and not oportebat. 4. KivSvvevu), fieXXoi. r) 776X11 eKivSvvevo-e ircura. Siacfidaprjvai, et ctve/ios eVeyeVero. Thuc. iii. 74. The city was in danger of being entirely destroyed if a wind had not arisen (we might say, but a wind arose), a periphrasis for ZieaXwcrtv, eirk-qpaxrav rr)v %peiav. THUC. i. 70. If ever by chance tliey fail, they always make good the loss. enXripwrav, Gnomic Aorist. Cf. PLAT. Apol. ix. ; av Ttva oi'tu/iat. Ibid. xxi. • cav Tts fiovXrjTai. Examples of II. et. Se T6S Kal dvTeiiroi ev9vs eTeOvqKti. THUC. viii. 66. If (as often as, whenever) any one did speak against them^ he was promptly put to death. dXX' et ti pr) epoipev, wrpvvev <$>epeiv. EUR. Ale. 755. But if ever we did not fetch him a thing, he would order (i.e. kept ordering) vs to fetch it. Digitized by Microsoft® 222 THE PARTICLE dv. ti rives iSoiev wr/ tow o-faripovs hriKparovvra? dveddpo-qo-av dv. THuc/vii. 71. If any of them saw their own side winning in any part of the battle, they would pluck up courage. dvcddpcrrjo-av av, iterative. For the iterative (or indefinite) use of dv with the Imperfect and Aorist Indicative, see §^142. This use must be carefully distinguished from that of dv in unfulfilled conditions. The iterative use of . Digitized by Microsoft® CONDITIONAL RELA TIVE SENTENCES. 225 Set yap Ivos 06 pfj Tv\i>v an-oXioXa. Arist. Ach. 466. One thing I need which, if I fail to get, Tm a lost man. oS /irj rv)(xels. PL. Apol. xxix. A man might escape death if he were to fling away his arms. aeis=:ei dvkd^apei. Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 19. What one does not expect, it is not even possible to guard against. An instructive instance ; wpoo-eSoicrjo-ev is a Gnomic Aorist, and so this is a General Supposition in Present time. The Aorist, however, may here simply imply priority of time., ktijv ye Svvap.iv e^ei 6'0-rts re av rfj x el P^ diroKTeivy dSiKtos Kal 6'0-Tts rfj ^i7<£- Antiph. de Caed. Herod. 92. The effect is the same whether a man takes life with' his hand, or with his vote. A General Supposition again in Present time. Digitized by Microsoft® 226 THE PARTICLE Sv. § 203. Relative Conditional Sentences expressing General Suppositions. (See also the last two examples in the previous section.) I. Present Time. o-v/jt/ia^elv tovtois ideXovo-iv airavTes, oijs &v oprno-i Traps o-Ktvaa/xevovs. DEM. Phil. i. 42. 1. All men are ready to be m alliance with those whom ever they see prepared. = edv rivas=OTav, ojrprav Ttvas. II. Past Time. ot Se, Ka.10fj.ivov dWov, eiriftaXovTes ov cpepouv, dirqeo-av. Tmrc/ii. 52. Continually, while one body was burning, they kept throwing on (the funeral pile) any one they were bearing, and then going away. = £i Tiva=ei irore Tivd=oTr6Te tlvou § 204. Examples of Infinitive in Apodosis with dv. el Teyed o-^tcri Trpoo-ykvoiTO, ivopifav aVao-av dv eyetv Il6Xo7rdvvij(rov. ThTJC. V. 32. They thought that, if they could get in addition Tegea, they would possess the whole Peloponnese. dv 6)(£iv=E^oiev dv. But in the recta they would say : Zdv fip.lv Trpoo-yevrjTai . . . e^oixev. ouSels dvreiire Sid to /*ij dvao-\eo-6ai. dv t»ji> tK/cAiyo-iav. Xen. An. i. 4. -20. No one contradicted, because the assembly would not have permitted it. el avreiire — ovk dv T)veo-)(€TO fj eKK\r)o~ia. dXX' ei ireTravTcu, Kapr' dv eirv^eiv Sokcu SOPH. Ai. 263. Nay, if he hath ceased, methinks all may be well. evTUYoin ay an Optatiye of inference. A r Digitized by Microsoft® SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE ON "Riv AND El. 227 § 205. Examples of Participle in Apodosis with dv. cute? £ei>ovs ifal purdov u>s ovTots irepiytv6p.evo<} dv T(OV avTUTTaa-iwrlov. , XEN. An. i. 10. He asked for mercenaries and pay, representing that thus he would get the better of his opponents. ovto) TrepiyevoiTo dv, but as it is in Historical (Virtual) obliqua the original recta would be edv 8e£0ev. Tguc. vii. 42. Seeing that the cross-wall, if any one carried the heights, would easily be captured. =pa8ia>s av A,ij<£0«ij. Note the Participle after optiv, a verb of Perception. <5 Trdvra roA/itSv, nairo iravros ay (fiepiav Xoyou SiKaiov p7ii)(a.vr)[ia iroiKikov. SOPH. 0. G. 761. Bold wretch, who out of every cause wouldst bring Shifty device of righteous argument. ipo>v = os epois av (el Kaipbv Xd/iots). § 206. Supplementary Note on idv with the Sub- junctive, and et with the Optative. 'Edv with the Subjunctive is the ordinary form for stating a supposition in future time. By the term ordinary it is not meant that this form occurs oftener than et with the Optative, but that if, for instance, we had to say, " If it is fine to-morrow, we will go for a walk," we should naturally translate this by edv with the Subjunctive. That is to say, edv rawa yevqrai means if this shall happen. Modern English renders it difficult for us to grasp this very simple explanation, because we equally render vyrj fj.e ctBtos, prj yevoiro. 3. The speaker may be treating an improbable and ridi- culous supposition with scorn. Plat. Bep. x. 610 A, of bodily depravity causing mental depravity (lav fiij I/mtoiij — tovto ye oijSets ttotc 8ei£ei) : Plat. Gorg. 470 c, of Polus con- victing Sokrates of talking nonsense (lav fie eXeygys). There may be other reasons besides the above. Sometimes lav with the Subjunctive seems to single out a supposition for special emphasis : sometimes an unfamiliar conception has been introduced by el with the Optative, which, when we have become familiarised with it, is expressed by lav with the Sub- junctive. Or qSP*d^JjffyM&Bg/l& ^ orth further atten " 230 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTM tion perhaps, different writers, from temperament or style, have a habit of using one expression rather than another. Thus Aeschylus very rarely uses kav with the Subjunctive in an ordinary future supposition. He oftener uses d with the Future Indicative ; thrice he uses d with the Subjunctive. But his partiality for the Optative is remarkable. Thucy- DIDES again often uses d with the Future Indicative. In all the above cases (1) the time is future, (2) the picture is designedly conceived and drawn in a lively graphic manner. (3) In many cases such as the above edv with the Subjunctive alternates with el and the Optative. Thus in the example from Dem. Aphdb. the same condition is alluded to later on (ii. § 18, p. 841) by the words d ifafoaaurde, then three lines further on by Zav 6'<£Aa>/iev, and yet again (§ 21, p. 842) by d yvtia-ecrde. Similarly in Plat. Bep. 517 A, where Sokrates is referring to himself, the Optative is used. The inferences from the above premises are inevitable. (1) kav with the Subjunctive, and d with the Optative, both refer to future time. (2) They are interchangeable, differing only in greater or less clearness of conception and vividness of expression. (3) As expressions they can in themselves imply no opinion of the writer that the fact denoted by the condition is more or less likely to occur, the one and only thing stated being the dependence of the consequence upon the condition. The interchangeability of the Subjunctive and Optative is one of the regular and most characteristic features of Greek Syntax. "We find it constantly in Indirect Statements and Questions, and throughout the Oratio Obligua, in Temporal, Final Sentences, in Sentences with oVcos. In all these cases we do not hesitate to accept the explanation that one expression is more or less direct and vivid than the other, and that the two varieties are interchangeable. Conditional Sentences do not stand apart by themselves : they follow the principles which rule Greek Syntax. Two points may be added : 1. If it is asked whether the writer may not hold an opinion that the fact denoted is more or less probable, we may reply that of course he may, and that holding such an opinion he may cho^s^on^fojm^oyxpression rather than ON 'Edu AND Ei. 231 another. But this covers only some instances and not all. Probability cannot be made the basis of a division, since the fact denoted varies from what is in itself natural and probable to what is physically impossible. (2) The notion of future time is sometimes very indistinctly marked by et with the Optative, the faintness of the con- ception being the chief effect intended in such cases. Still el ravra oiVtos u-q cannot (as sometimes in Homer) be past, if this had been so ; it cannot be translated, if it were now so ; it can only be rendered, if this were to be so, were so, should be so. The Apodosis also must always be examined in connexion with the Protasis. Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTEE III. § 207. TEMPOEAL SENTENCES. Temporal Sentences are constantly expressed in Greek by Participles in agreement with the Subject, by the Genitive Absolute, and by the Accusative Absolute. When the time of the Temporal Sentence is definite the Indicative is used ; when indefinite the Subjunctive and Optative. 1 This is the one clew to the use of the moods in Temporal Sentences. See § 172, Definite and Indefinite Sentences. Time is indefinite in three ways : — 1. Indefinite Futurity, i.e. when the action will occur in the indefinite future. 2. Indefinite Frequency, i.e. when the action may recur an indefinite number of times. 3. Indefinite Duration, i.e. when the action may continue for an indefinite period. All Temporal Sentences in the Subjunctive and Opta- tive will fall under one of the above three heads, the first, 1 This principle of Indefinite Time may be most usefully applied to the Latin Subjunctive as opposed to the Indicative, e.g. — Donee labantes consilio j>&tres firmwet (Hoe.). Indefinite Futurity. Opperire quoad scire possis quod tibi agendum sit. Indefinite Futurity. Dum Priami Paridisque busto insultet armentum. Indefinite Duration. It is usual to explain many such sentences in Latin (and in Greek) by saying that they express a purpose. So they do, but this is not con- tained in the Temporal Particle and its Sentence, but in the nature of the principal verb combined with the indefiniteness of time in view. So probably with Temporal Sentences which are described as Conditional (dum). Indefinite Frequency is so differently treated by Latin writers that it is not touched on here,. ... , , ... „_ „,„ Digitized by Microsoft® " WHEN" IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST). 233 Indefinite Futurity, being the commonest, and the third, Indefinite Duration, being the rarest. More than one kind of Indefiniteness may be denoted by the same expression. The Subjunctive is used in Primary, the Optative in Historic sequence, though, as in other Sentences, the Sub- junctive occurs in Historic sequence, and sometimes is co-ordinate with the Optative. A Temporal Particle with the Subjunctive takes av (jrpiv av, «B? av, eweiBav, orav, etc. etc.). Thus ews av yevrjTat. A Temporal Particle with the Optative drops the av (irplv, ews, 67T€t§7j, ore, etc. etc.). e&>? yevoiTO. For the omission of av in Subjunctive clauses see § 221. For the retention of av with the Optative see § 222. § 208. " WHEN" IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST). I. enet, ewet&j (r)vUa less common), when, after, with Indicative Aorist (an action prior to principal sentence), Indicative Imperfect (contemporary with principal sentence). Latin : cum, with Pluperfect and Imperfect Subjunc- tive, postquam with Indicative. eireiSr) Se oXiyapftia eyevero, 01 rpiaicovTa fj,eT6Tre'/j,- TJravro /Lie. Plat. When an oligarchy had been established, the Thirty sent for me. Cum vero paucorum dominatio constituta esset, Triginta ifcw«»t. 234 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. eirei r/aOevei Aapelos, efiovkero ol tw iralBe afiorepa) irapelvai. Xen. An. WJien Darius was ill, he wished both his sons to appear before him. Dariu,s, cum moreretur, filios ambo ad se venire volebat. For ijvuca see Plat. Apol. xxxi, Soph. El. 32, 423, At. 272. Note, ore, "when," cannot introduce a clause in Attic Greek like CTet, eTreiSrj. Being a relative it must be connected with some sort of antecedent, though, like all relative sentences, the clause in which it stands may come first, rare is its strict antecedent. V)v irore )(povos, ore Oeol fiev ^crav, dvrjra, Se yevr) ovk rjo-av. Plat. Prot. There was a time once when the gods were in existence, but when the races of mortal creatures were not. ore fie ol ap^ovres erarrov, Tore ov eKeivoi erarrov e/jtevov. Plat. Apol. When the rulers were assigning me a post, then I remained at the post, which they assigned me. §209. "AS SOON AS," "DIRECTLY," IN DE- FINITE TIME. E-rrel, 67retS?j take rayiara when they mean directly, immediately, as soon as, no sooner- — than. &>? (Latin ut) has the same meaning even without rayio-Ta,, but more markedly with rayio-ra. [Latin : ubi, ubiprimum; ut, ut primum ; simul, simul ae (atque) ; postquam ; with the perfect indicative.] ro? Ta%t.o~Ta ep.ai, a Seofiai, r]l~(o. Xen. An. When I have (shall have) accomplished my object I will return. (Indefinite Futurity.) Cum vero confecero quod in animo est, redibo. ovkovv, brav Brj p,rj (T0eva>, ireiravo-opiai. SOPH. Ant. 91. So, when my power shall fail, I will give o'er. (Indefinite Futurity.) avTt) rj (fxavr), brav p,eda. PHILEMON. We are madmen all, whenever we are angry. (IndefiniteJ^encj^^ 236 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. Note. For 6W (Indefinite Futurity) Soph. El. 386, 1038, (Indefinite Frequency) Plat. Apol. xvi., xxiii., Soph. El. 267, 293, Aesch. Pers. 602. omW (Indefinite Futurity) Soph. Phil. 146. All these part'icles may often be rendered, as soon as, when once, but the time is still indefinite in the Future. o7roVav (Indefinite Frequency) Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 26, al. ottov av) : ZireiSdv (Frequency) Plat. Apol. xxxii. For eSre av, poetical, Soph. El. 627. With the Subjunctive expressing Indefinite Frequency com- pare idy (rjv) with Subjunctive in General Suppositions. B. With Optative in Historic Sequence, evei, eVetS?), oiroTe (ore very rarely). ol ovoi, €7ret rt? oicokoi, irpoopajxovre'i av evaTrjKeaav. Xen. The asses, whenever any one chased them, would gallop ahead and then halt. (Indefinite Frequency.) ottot ev irpao-aroi 7roXt? ej(aipe, Xvirpas B' e(pepev, ei ti hvarvj^ol. Eur. Supp. 897. Whene'er the state fared well, He would rejoice, and mourn if aught it suffered. 071-oTe is = d 7tot£, as much conditional as temporal. See PLAT. Apol. xxxii., ojtote evrvxotfu IlaAa/MjSet. In Thuc. i. 99 a good instance. Note, eird, lirei&rj, ojtot£ with the Optative appear always to denote Frequency rather than Futurity, except when they represent an ejnjv, tTreiSdv, ott6to.v, ordv turned from Primary to Historic sequence. Compare d with Optative in General Suppositions. §211. " SINCE" IN DEFINITE TIME. e% ov (ex quo with Indicative), since, ever since, in Definite Time witl^Indica^v^^^ " WHILST" IN INDEFINITE TIME. 237 e£ ov to, £eviKa arpareverai, row; $1X01/9 vtKa. DEM. Ever since mercenaries have been serving, he has been conquering his friends. e£ oSt6 Aesch. Pers. 761, for i>s (like ut in Latin) TfflJC. iv. 90 (Poppo), e£ Sv, acf> oC are also used. For ut in Latin cf. Ov. Trist. v. 10. 1, ut sumus in Ponto, etc. This may be expressed participially in the Dative, see § 118, note. § 212. " WHILST" IN DEFINITE TIME. ' JEo)?, ears, ev a>, ev bam, baov ypovov, r\viKa (rarely fteftpt), whilst, denoting Definite Duration with Indicative. [Latin : dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad with Indicative.] 6(»s en, veos ei/il, ti\v -tyvyvjv ryv/Mva^co. While I am still young, I train my mind. paSiw; to eiriTriSeia kfjofiev, baov yjpovov ev 777 "TroXefiia ecroiieOa. We shall easily find supplies so long as {during all the time that) we are in the enemies' country. dvrjp e/celvos, tjvik t\v ev rfj voa(p, avTO? /lev tfSero. Soph. Ai. 271. Ton chief, so long as he was set i' the plague, Himself was happy. Donee morbo versabatur. lore with past tense, Xen. An. iii. 1. 19. «09!£e &XP 1, ov )> un ^> denot- ing Definite Time with Indicative. evre poetical, fie%ptfi, a%pts before a vowel in later writers. [Latin : donee, quoad, with past Indicative.] ravra eiroiovv, ^XP L ctkotos eyevero. XeN. This they were doing until darkness came on. quoad or donee nox oppressit. Cf. Thuc. i. 109, iv. 4, /xexpt ov and fie'xpi. iraiovai rov SwrripiSriv, ecrre rfvar/Kaaav iropeveo-Oai. Xen. They beat Soterides till they compelled him to move on. quoad progredi coegerunt. Cf. Soph. Ant. 415. i^iapovv Sid twv 26K€A5i/, etas acjiiKovro Is KaTavTiv. Thuc. vi. 62. 3. They marched through the country of the Sicels, till they came to Gatane. „. . ± . , , „„. ,^ Digitized by Microsoft® " UNTIL " IN INDEFINITE TIME. 239 7rcuowri, KpeoKOTrovcri Svo-rrjvmv /*eAij, ecus diravTtov e^mrk^Oeipav j3iov. AeSCH. Pers. 466. They hack, hew mincemeat the poor wretches' limbs, Till they had crushed outright the limes of all. eirw)(ii)V av, ecus ol irXeiarroi rrj- vavro, k.t.X., r)(rv){iav av rjyov. DEM. Phil. i. 1. I should have waited, until most of the regular speakers had expressed their views, and have been keeping quiet. In this example the Indicative denotes Indefinite Futurity thrown hack into the past, and consequently now Indefinite only to the original thought of the chief subject. This is parallel with a Final Sentence in the Indicative (see Index). §215. " UNTIL" IN INDEFINITE TIME. The same Particles, denoting Indefinite Futurity, take A. Subjunctive in Primary Sequence. /ie'^jOt S' av 670a r\KG>, at, tnrovSal fievovTcav. XEN. Until I return, let the armistice continue. 67Ticr^es ear av icai ra Xonra •Kpo^fiaQvp. AESCH. Pause till thou further learn what yet remains. avdyKHj rauTa del Tape^eiv, ecos av \dpav XdfSrj. Xen. Cyr. iv. 5. 37. It is necessary to furnish continually the same things until he {shall) take the country. eSt' av Aesch. Pers. 366. B. Optative in Historic Sequence. Trepie/j&vofiev eKaarore, ea>s avoiyQeiri to Bea/icorripiov. Plat. We used to wait about on each occasion, until the prison was (should be) opened. Trepiep.evop.ev is Frequentative, but ?? avrayyekdeii) ra Xey^Oevra. Xen. They made an armistice (to last) till the terms were (should he) announced. Here again the thought of the chief subject is clearly seen. Their original words would be cnrovSas Troiovp,eda ecus &v aTrayyeXdrj. The moods in the two last examples are thus due to Oratio Obliqua. Note. It may be generally laid down that 4'us, etc., with the Subjunctive and Optative after Affirmative Sentences corre- spond to irpiv with the same moods after Negative Sentences. €(os, etc., do occur, but very exceptionally, after Negative Sentences. ovk dvap,evop.ev, eo>s av rj r)p,erepa X ( "P a KOKGrai, Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 18. We do not remain until owr country is being ravaged. When Trpiv is used with any finite mood the action of its verb will not begin until the action of trpiv with the principal verb has occurred. The difference here consists in the mean- ing of the verb dvapAvto, to continue. § 2l6. THE CONJUNCTION TLpiv. TUplv with the Indicative, Subjunctive and Optative is used after Negative Sentences where !»?, iore, pixpi, etc., are used after Affirmative Sentences. JIplv r) is used like Trpiv. -rrpoTepov, irpdadev, Trdpos, another irpiv (used as an adverb), frequently are used in the Principal Sentence as forerunners of -Trpiv. JJpiv differs from other Temporal Particles only in being joined to an Infinitive as well as to other moods. The following table will show the ordinary Attic usage. Exceptions are given subsequently. A. After Affirmative Prin- \ -rrplv with the Infinitive, cipal Sentences. J Digitized by Microsoft® B. After Negative Principal Upiv WITH THE INFINITIVE. 241 (\. When the Time is De- finite, irplv with the Indicative. 2. When the Time is Inde- Sentences. ^ finite (Indefinite Fu- turity), irplv with the Subjunctive and Op- tative. The order in time of the Principal and Subordinate Sentences in irplv clauses should be noticed. (1) When irplv is used with the Infinitive, the action of the Prin- cipal Sentence takes place before that of the Subordinate Sentence (the irplv clause). (2) When irplv is used with a Finite Mood (Indicative, Subjunctive, Optative) the action of the Principal Sentence had to wait (in the past), or has to wait (in the future) for the decisive occurrence of the irplv clause. § 217. Uplv WITH THE INFINITIVE. A. The Principal action takes place before the Sub- ordinate action with irplv. Uplv with Infinitive always means before. The Infinitive in itself denotes the mere verbal notion rather than a distinct fact, like the English gerundive in -ing (before coming, going, speaking). But the fact is often implied. Cf. mare with Infinitive. irpiv fiev iretvrjv e. Isoc. Archid. 26. We conquered Messene before the Persians took the kingdom. 6V Tfc) Trpiv yevecrdai ijjttas y^povti). PLAT. Phaed. 88. In the days before we were born. § 2l8. lipiv WITH THE INDICATIVE IN DEFINITE TIME {PAST). B 1. JJplv with Aorist Indicative. (The Historic present occurs in Thuc. i. 132, irplv rytyveTcu.) TJplv may equally be rendered before, until. 01 AaiceBaifiovioi ov irporepov eiravaavto irpiv Mea- a-rjviov; efe/3a\oi> etc t^s ^wpa<;. ISAETJS 12. The Lacedaemonians did not leave off until (he/ore) they had expelled the Messenians (and then they did leave off). oiJ Trpocrdev i£tveyi Siicrjv. Xen. An. v. 7. 5. I must not depart before I suffer punishment. Digitized by Microsoft® nptV WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 243 Cf. also Aesch. P. V. 165, Eur. Heracl. 179. ovk airoicpivovfiat irpoTepov irplv av irv0a>/uu. PLAT. / will not answer before {until) I hear. ■trpiv alone with Optative may be described as irplv av with Subjunctive converted into Historic Sequence by Oratio Obliqua, actual or virtual. aTrriyopeve /irjSeva fiaXKeiv, irplv Kvpos ep,irXrjcrdecrj dijpwv. Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 14. He forbade every one to shoot until Gyms liad had {should have had) his fill of the chase. The recta would be prjdeh /3a\\eTio irplv av epirXrjcrdy. eireiytipovv exarrTOv ireiOeiv pr) irporepov Ttov lavrov prjSevbs iTTipeXel&Oai, irplv tavrov eirL[jt,e\r)deir), Plat. Apol. xxvi. I used to try to persuade each one not to care for any of the things belonging to himself before caring for himself. Uplv is also used after another Optative (see Oratio Obliqua, Assimilation of Optatives). o\oio p,r\ira> irplv p,a6oip! ei icai iraXiv yvcopuriv fieTotpwv vkoi t Jpi, irplv to. irpa.yp.aT 1 Iyyij0ev (tkottiLv IsefSov, k. t. X. EUR. I. A. 489. where d^>pu>vz=ovK ep.cf>po)V. Similarly in Thuc. i. 118. 2, oiire enc&Xvov, dk\' fja-vxa(ov irplv Si) fj Svvafus twv 'AOrjvalmv ypero, where, besides the true negative oiVe IkcoXuov, rjcrvx^ov means, they did not bestir them- selves. See also Thuc. iii. 29, Xavdavowi irplv -. viii. 105, elpyov irplv. But in Thuc. vii. 71. 4, irplv with the Indica- tive occurs after a principal sentence truly affirmative : irapairk-qa ta iiraa-yov, irplv ye Srj ol Supa/cdcriot irpetpav tovs 'Adrjvalovs, they were in the same state of excitement, until at last the Syracusans routed the Athenians (eWe Sij might have been expected). With the Subjunctive and Optative irplv is very rarely found even after quasi-negative sentences : — Til av Siktjv Kpiveiev r) yvolrj \6yov, irplv av trap' dp,oiv pvudov eKp,adrj cratjficos ; EUR. Herac. 179. Tt's av, however, is almost a real negative. ' ' Digitized by Microsoft® "A* OMITTED WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 245 ai(T)(pbv ijyoij/iat irporepov TTavo-ao-Qai irpiv av vy*eis, oti av fHovXrjo-de, \fnjXavpov os veos ireayj. SOPH. 0. C. 595. arixutpiOv ov r)p.iv ov pev ^pa^iivXdtrcruv pexP 1 °® Tl ^/j/Jcucrt. Thuc. iv. 41. They decided to heep them in prison till some arrangement was come to. Observe that av is omitted with the Subjunctive, for pexp 1 °$ ti ^vp/Saicv. Cf. i. 91, irplv av Subjunctive after Historic time. Digitized by Microsoft® THE PARTICIPLE AS A TEMPORAL SENTENCE. 247 ■jraprqyytiXav IttciSij Seiirvrjcreiav iravTas ava-rravtcrdai, kcu hr&rOai ijvuc' av Tts wapayyeWfl, XEN. An. iii. 5. 18. They issued orders for all to rest as soon as they had dined, and then to follow whenever any one issued orders. This principle of the return to the Primary Sequence is so common in Greek that it requires no further explanation here. § 224. The Participle as a Substitute for a Temporal Sentence. The Participle is a regular substitute for a sentence ex- pressed by liret, ZireiSrj, rjv'iKa with Imperfect and Aorist Indicative, but is used still more freely, for it is joined to Present and Future Time, whereas these Particles go with a past Principal Verb. 1. The Present Participle denotes an action contem- porary with that of the Principal Verb. afia and fieragv with the Participle bring out more clearly the contemporary time. aTT7]VT7](ra $i\nnrq> airiovrt. I met Philip as he was going away. afj,a TTpoiaiv evecrKOTreiTO. Xen. As he was going forward he was considering. to rov 6eov eumstance, not Time. Digitized by Microsoft® 248 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. tote, Tore r/Brj, elra, eirei,Ta, T7]viKavTa, ovtws often accompany the Principal Verb, evdvs with the Participle is like Ta^ta-ra with a Conjunction. Tvpavvevcra, prjSe raX-qdi] kXvoiv. EUR. Hipp. Fr. 443. Hearken to a woman, even if thou hearest not the truth. 250 CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. ovS' d, oiS' kdv, fi,rj8' d, /«j8' kdv are used in Negative Con- cessive sentences (ne — quidem). [tfj flop'u/JjjoTjTe, ftr/S' kdv 86£u> ti vjj.Iv fiiya Aeyeiv. Plat. Apol. v. Do mo< interrupt, even if you shall think that I am speaking presumptuously. ovft d, Apol. xvii. 29. kyi> plkv oSv ovk dv jtot 1 , oijS' €? juoi Ta p' k' oiixi vw ^AiSas, tovtois vireiKaOoi/JU. SOPH. El. 360. Ne'er then would I, not e'en if one were like To bring me those thy gifts, wherein thou now Art glorying, submit to these. Note 2. koX ravra, and that too, is also used with a participle, and also, but very seldom, ko.Itoi. For Kai raxra, Plat. Bep. 404 b, Xen. Cyr. ii. 2. 16. For naCm, Plat. Prot. 339 o. ky£> ovSev rovrtav iroirjcna, ko.1 ravra KivSvvtvwv. Plat. Apol. xxiii I will do none of these things, and that too though I am run- ning a risk. Note 3. The Relative occasionally is used in a concessive sense. For 6'o-Tis, Soph. Ai. 434, orov TruT-qp : and Arist. Ach. 57, 6'o-Tis r/0eA£ : os e£e/fyv, Antiph. Caed. Herod. 25. Note 4. drrep, kdvrrep, bear a sort of concessive force, or perhaps rather a particularising force, that is to say, cf. if really, Eur. Her. Fur. 1345, Lys. 12. 48; kdvwep, Plat. Apol. xii. (a General Supposition). § 226. Note on ei Kai, Kai el, etc. Kai added to the Conditional particles el, kdv, r\v gives the Conditional Sentence a concessive meaning. Kai is thus added to any form of Conditional Sentence, which will there- fore follow the rules of Conditional Sentences. A distinction is generally made between d Kai and koX d. Et ko.1 is said (by Hermann and Kiihner) to concede a fact, although, ko.1, d a supposition, even if (a supposition). It is impossible to sup- port this theory. As /cat with d and kdv occur with every form of conditional sentence (Indicative, Subjunctive, Opta- tive) with ordinary and general. suppositions, Kai cannot give NOTE ON el Kai, Kai el, ETC. 251 the el or lav the power of turning any and every form of supposition into statement of a fact. Hermann's dictum at the most could hold good only of ei Kai and ;v epq.i). Ay, if thou wilt be able. 3 Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTEK V. §227. FINAL SENTENCES, 6W WITH THE FUTUKE INDICATIVE, AND VERBS OF FEAEING WITH rf, etc. Introductory Note. Three more or less closely connected constructions are here brought into juxtaposition. They are — A. Final Sentences. B. Modal Sentences with 6Vu>s and the Future Indicative. C. Verbs of Fearing with pj, fir] ov. These three constructions sometimes run into one another, at other times they widely diverge. Verbs of Fearing with pf) deprecate a result. Negative, Modal, and Final Sentences consider or adopt means to avert a result. The connecting links, therefore, are /*iy and oVcos. The resemblance is strongest in three such types as the following : A ravra 7roi<3 6Vu>9 /mj dwodavo), I do this that I may not die. B. €7ri/jeA.oC/jofiov[mi oVcos pj aTrodavovfjuja, or airodavta. On the other hand the divergence is greatest between A. ravra. 7roi<3 6'mos ftij mrodavw (a true Final Sentence), and C. 4>o/3ovimii &$ cm-opijo-as, I fear that you will be at a loss, 1 The term Object Sentence is often applied to the second and third forms of these Sentences. If by an Object Sentence is meant one which stands as an Object to the Principal Sentence, then the term appears too comprehensive to be of practical value. It would include Indirect Statements, Indirect Questions, Indirect Commands, the Infinitive after such verbs as j3oti\o/mt (e.g. {Soi\o/iai iXdcTv), besides Sentences with Situs, etc. More would be lost than gained by grouping together con- structions so different as oUa a/mfyniv, (3oi}\o/«i eXfleie, and ckSttci Situs Tavra yev/ia-erat. Further, if we use the term Object Sentence, why not also Subject Sentence? Syntax must be content sometimes to sacrifice logical system ^0^^mtrosoft® FINAL SENTENCES. 253 where ws airoprjo-eis is practically a Substantival Sentence of Indirect Statement, or o/3ovp.ai dwodaveiv (to an-oOavttv), which is the same as o/3ov/j.ai 66.vo.tov. It is not easy to give the right name to sentences of class B. They correspond with the Latin construction euro, enitor, efficio, with ut and the Subjunctive, which Dr. Kennedy assigns to the Indirect Petition. By an extension of the usage of ottus, verbs of commanding and of requesting (which introduce a true Indirect Petition) may take 6Vpd£op,a.i, p.eppvr)pl{tn, e.g. cf>pd£eo-6cu oTrirtos k£ p.vi]o-T7Jpa,s KTtivgs (Od. i. 295) take counsel how thou shalt slay the wooers. The connection between this and a Final Sentence is obvious, e.g. Trepi(j>pa,£u>p,€6a 7ravTes voo-tov, ojtids eXdyo-i (Od. i. 77), let us all take good counsel touching his return how (so that) he shall reach home. The Future Indicative is used much in. the same way as the Subjunctive, e.g. pdfev oirias d\e£rjo-eLs icaKov ijp.ap (II. ix. 251), take counsel how thou wilt avert the evil day. §228. FINAL SENTENCES. Final Sentences denote an end, purpose, or intention to achieve or avert a result. They are expressed in a variety of ways, chiefly by (1) Final Particles with the Subjunc- tive and Optative ; (2) by the Future Participle ; (3) by Eelative Sentences ; (4) in certain cases by the Infinitive. § 229. FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. The Final Particles are 'iva, &>?, and oirmi (oeppa is Epic and Lyric only). In Negative Sentences 'iva firj, &>? prj, oTrm m> and sometimes /«j only. In Primary Sequence the Subjunctive is used, in Historic Sequence the Opta- Digitized by Microsoft® 254 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. tive, but the strict Sequence is often disregarded, and the Subjunctive used instead of the Optative. tov kclkov Bel KoXa^eiv \v dfielvcov f/. PLAT. It is necessary to punish the criminal in order that he may be reformed. 'ueeTevcre tovs Sucao-rd? fiera ttoWwv oaicpvwv tva eKerjOelt). PLAT, He entreated the jury with many tears in order that he might be pitied. irapaicaXels ULrpovs owo)? fit] airodavr/^. Xen. You call in physicians in order that you may not die. Iva ol aXKot, Tv^coan tcov Sitcaicov, ra vfierep avrcov dvt]XlcrK€Te. DEM. In order that the rest might obtain their rights, yon used to spend your own resources. For to? see Eue. Tro. 714. For p,r\ only Xen. Gyr. i. 4. 25 (Xeyerai enrelv on cnrievai fiovkoiro, fir) o Trcm)p ti axOoiro). Mrj truly final is however rare. Note 1. The Subjunctive and Optative are sometimes found alternating in Historic Sequence. to ukoWvvo.1 av6pb>7rovs ^vppd-^ov^ ttoAAous Scipov e<£cuveTo eTvai, pr) Tiva Sia/3oAr)v o-^olcv kcu ol o-TpariSnai Svcrvoi &pvKrovs jroAAovs, 6Vvyoi.etv. THUC. ill. 22. They were hoisting many beacons, in order that the enemies' signals might be unintelligible to them, and that they might not bring aid before their own men escaped (slwuld escape). Dr. Arnold in his well-known note on this passage explains that the Subjunctive expresses. the immediate, and the Optative the remote, consequence (? purpose), the second (Optative) being a consequence upon the first (Subjunctive). Such an explana- H L Digitized bj> Microsoft® ' r FINAL PARTICLES WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 255 tion, however, clearly cannot apply, as Dr. Arnold thought, to all cases, e.g. to passages where the Optative precedes the Sub- junctive (see Xen. Hell. ii. 1. 2, above, and Thuc. vi. 96). This interchange of moods, of the graphic Subjunctive and the remoter Optative, is allowable in every variety of Greek sub- ordinate construction. For other instances cf. Hdt. i. 185 ; viii. 76 ; ix. 51 ; THUC. vii. 17. 4; vii. 70. 1. Note 2. &v is sometimes joined to cos and ottws with the Subjunctive (oc/>pa «e Epic). It adds little, if any, meaning Possibly av may refer to an implied condition, like our English so (in order that so). av is not found with the Subjunctive in Negative Final Sentences. "Iva av, when it occurs, is not final but indefinitely local r). 7rctTj0is yap lore- iracr' tv' av irpdrry tls ri?. AEIST. Plut. 1151. The fatherland is any land where'er a man is prospering. Examples of &>s av with Subjunctive. cos av add-Q's, avroLKOva-ov. XEN. An. ii. 5. Idsten in return, that you may know. \copei 8' evdairep KareKTaves irarepa rbv djxov, (is av kv ravrcji ddvrjv. SOPH. El. 1496. On to the spot ev'n where thou slew'st my father, That so on that same spot thou mmfst be slain. Cf. Aesch. P. V. 10 ; Soph. Phil. 825 ; Plat. Rep. 567 A, Symp. 189 A. Note 3. When av is found with cos or cm-cos and the Optative in a Final Sentence, cos and on-cos are Modal, and the Optative with av is an Apodosis. cos JU.6V av CMi-ocre SiKaiovs \6yovs aueivov QiXlwirov irap- etrKevacrOe, cos Se KioXvcran' av avrov djoycos e^£T6. Dem. Phil. ii. 66. As to the means by which you might express just sentiments you are better prepared than Philip, but as to means of checking him you are doing nothing. /3ov\eixr6ue6a ottcos av dpuna ayiavi^olaeda. XEN. Cyr. ii. 1. 4. Cf. Cvr. i. 2. 5. Plat. Symp. 187, d. Digitized by Microsoft® 256 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. In XEN. Hell. iv. 8. 16, o?ra>s av, ir\r]pa>6evTos vavriKov K.r.k., irposSloivTo, we must either explain that on-ws av wposSeoivi-o is the Apodosis (m order that they might want), and irXripwdkvTos the Protasis, =ei Trki)pdeiri (if the fleet were manned) : or we must consider that Xenophon is using an Epic construction (s with a Future Indicative is strictly final rather than modal And as the verb of striving, or taking precaution, does not precede in these passages, they are noticed here under Final Sentences. The Future Indica- tive may be regarded as a vivid form of the Subjunctive. ov8e 8t' 'iv d'AA.o T/oI<£ovt S^/x«y, DEM. 22. 11 (ANDEOT. 596, 17), i.e. the original intention of the law when first made was, etc. Cf. Xen. Cyr. iv. 2. 45 (tVa, e? ttotc Seoi, 8wa.ip.zQa, in Primary sequence). In the same way Cicero uses the Imperfect Subjunctive to recall the original intention : — Homines sunt hac lege generati qui tuerentur ilium globum . . . quae terra dicitur, Oic. Rep. vi. 15. Sic mihi perspicere videor ita natos esse nos ut inter omnes esset societas quaedam, Cic. Lael. 5. Of. de Off. i. § 152, ii. § 1. Cf. Eur. El. 58, and Eec. 1138 (Subjunctive followed by Optative in Primary sequence). § 230. Final Sentences with Past Tenses of the Indicative. A Final Sentence with ha (less commonly ois and 07nus) and a Past Tense of the Indicative expresses a purpose unful- filled either in the Present (Imperfect Indicative), or in the Past (Aorist Indicative). The Principal Sentence is either an unfulfilled Wish, or an unfulfilled Apodosis. et yap &cf>e\ov oloi re etvtu Tot peyL&Ta Ka«a epydfecrdai, iVa 0106 Te ^crav Kal dyada ra pkyuna. PLAT. Crito, iii. Would they had been able to do the greatest evil, in order that they might be able (or might have now been able) to do also the greatest good (which they are not able to do). icai piqv aj-wv y' tfv aKovcrai. ti Sr/ ; iv' rj/couonxs dvSptav ol crotpwTaTot, e«ru PLAT. Euthyd. 304 E. Well, I assure you it would have been worth hearing. Why so ? In order that you might have heard the ablest men. &£iov ijv of course =a£iov av fjv, similarly we should say, It was worth hearing. a>9 axpeXov Trdpoidev IkAhtciv fttov, k.t.A. orrtos davibv e/cewo T# rod' r/pepa. SOPH. El. 1134, Would God that I had first forsaken life, etc. That death had laid thee low on that far day. Other well-known examples are Aesch. P. V. 152 (after a "wish) : ib. 766 (after a question equivalent to a wish) : Soph. 0. T. 1387, 1391 ; Dem. Aph. ii. 837. 11 ; iii. 849. 24. Digitized by Microsoft® 358 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. § 231. FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE FUTURE PARTICIPLE. A Final Sentence is often expressed by a Future Participle : s irposfiaXovvTe'; ra> Tester pari. Thuo. They were making preparations for an attack on the fort (with the intention of attacking). Note. Such a Participle is especially common after a verb of motion. rjSij &pa rnnivai, l/xol fiikv airoda.vovp.ivif, ip.lv Se fiiaxrofie- vois. Plat. Apol. xxxii. It is high time to be going, for me that I may die, for you that you may live. § 232. RELATIVE FINAL SENTENCES. A Final Sentence is expressed by oo-Tt? (less frequently o?) with the Future Indicative. In Historic Sequence the Future Optative would strictly be used, but the Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is generally \etained. The negative is pj\. vpecrfieiav nre/VKere ^Tt? towt epel teat irdpecrTai rots irpar/paaiv. Dem. Send a deputation to tear this message, and to be present at the operations. Legatos mittite qui haec nuntient rebusque se immi3- ecant. Digitized by Microsoft® FINAL SENTENCES WITH THE INFINITIVE. 259 eSoge To 817/ip rpiaKovTa avhpas i\ea6ai, ol vo/m>vs ^vyiypayfrovai,. Xen. The assembly resolved to appoint thirty men who were to compile laws. Cf. Xen. Cyr. viii. 6. 3 ; An. ii. 3. 6. (oi agovcriv). In Thuc. vii. 25, the Subjunctive occurs, olmep cppaa-eoai (in Historic sequence). § 233- Final Sentences with the Infinitive. A Final Sentence is expressed by the Infinitive, chiefly after verbs of choosing, appointing, or assigning. ISlevo(f>(av to fjp.io'v tov o-rpaTev/MiTOs KarkXiirs v\dTT£tv rb o-rpaTOTreSov. XEN. Xenophon left half his force behind to guard the camp. ol apxpvTes ovs e'iXeo-de apxew p.ov. PLAT. Apol. xvii. The rulers whom you chose to rule me. Cf. THUC. vi. 50, TrXewral re, k.t.X. Note 1. As the Infinitive is, in its origin, a Verbal Dative, we have a natural explanation of this use of it : jtvXarr nv, for the guarding. We may, of course, say that the Infinitive is explanatory (epexegetical). Note 2. For tov with the Infinitive in a Final Sense, see Index. § 234. "Ottos, ottos pvr\, MODAL WITH THE FUTURE INDICATIVE, ETC. Ottos, 07T0)? pr) are used with the Future Indicative (usually the 2d person) after Verbs of taking means to an end {considering, striving, and contriving). In Primary Sequence the Future Indicative is used; in Historic Sequence the Future Optative may be used, but the Future Indicative (the vivid construction) is much com- moner. Digitized by Microsoft® 260 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. Such Verbs are : /3ovXevpovTi^(i) irpodvp.ovp.o.1 d>vovp.ai (I manage by bribery), Dem. de Cor. 236. 12. And periphrases such as trpovoiav e^m, fi^av-fi ean, etc. Cf. Latin euro, (curam, operam, negotium) do, studeo, id ago, enitor, efficio, impetro with ut (me) and Subjunctive. (ppovri^e 077(09 fiTjBev ava^Lov cravrov Trpatjei?. ISOC. See that thou do nothing unworthy of thyself. Vide ne quid te indignum agas. 6Tn/j,eXrjTeov oira><; t»? apiari] o~oi earai rj ifrvyn. Plat. You must strive that your soul may be as good as possible. Enitendum est ut tibi quam optimus sit animus tuus. eire/jbeXeiro 07ra>? firjTe aavroi fir^re aTroroi, eaotvro. Xen. He was taking precautions that they should be neither without food nor drink. eirpaa-crov 0Tra><; Tt? Boydeia tfjjei. THtTC. They were arranging for the arrival of reinforcements. Note 1. The 1st and 3d person are very rare. In Dem. Chers. 99. 14 (oVus id^X-qo-ovo-i) ; in Ar. Eccl. (ottuk KadeSov- p.e9a). Note 2. Instead of the Future Indicative the Subjunctive and Optative (Present and Aorist) less often occur, though not uncommonly. bpa oVcos prj irapo. 6o£av op.oXoyfjs. PLAT. Grit. See that you are not surprised into making an admission. kp,tpiXr)K€i aijTOts oirios o hnray pk-nys dSurj ovs Scot, Trepwciv. Xen. Hell, iii 3. 9. They had taken care that the Cavalry-Commissioner should knots who shovfflgkitSWtfy Microsoft® Omar, Sjray pi,, WITH FUTURE INDICATIVE. 261 In Lys. 12. 44 an Aorist Optative is followed by a Future Indicative (eTrefiovXevea-Oe ojnos pr^re rj/rj^ia-aicrde, iroWZv re evSeeis eaeo-de). Note 3. Variants, of rare occurrence for oVais with the Future Indicative are 6V17 (Thuo. i. 65, yevrjo-erai.) ; 6Y rpoinp (THUC. iv. 128, ^vfj./3-tja-eTai) ; eg otov rpoirov (DEM. Megal. 207). (is is found instead of fo-cos with a Subjunctive or Optative (Xen. Oec. xx. 8, Aesoh. P. K 203), but seldom with a Future Indicative (Xen. Cyr. iii. 2. 13). Note 4. ai/ is sometimes found with oVcos and the Subjunc- tive, cf. PLAT. Gorg. 481 A (prjxavrjreov oVcos av Siacpvyrj), but never with 6V«os and the Future Indicative. The Optative (Present or Aorist) with av in this construction is an Apodosis. Cf. XEN. Oec. ii. 9 (eTripeXeurOai 6V(os av yevoiTo). Note 5. M-q is found, instead of oVws pr,, with the Subjunc- tive (rarely with the Future Indicative) after o-kottu, 6pS>, evXa/3ovpai, v\aj-vXao-- crop.a.1. pr) iroielv, to pr, Troielv, I guard against doing, Dem. 773. 1, 313. 6. Note 7. o-kottZ is followed by el interrogative (Soph. Ant. 41). See similar construction with Verbs of Fearing, Note, p. 266. Note 8. In one or two places Sei precedes oVws with the Fut. Indicative, e.g. Soph. Ai. 556, Set o-e oVws 8et'£eis : Phil. 55, o-e SeT oVus eKKXexj/eis. Jebb (note to Soph. Ai. 556) quotes Ckatinus (apud Athenaeum), Set o-' 6Va>s dXeKrpvovo's pr,8ev 8io«ras tous Tpoirovs. There seems to be a confusion between two constructions ; Set with the Infinitive, and some verb like opa, a-Koitei with 6Vios and the Future Indicative. In Aeist. Eq. 926 we have o-irevarw o-e 6Vrjs, which however may be regarded simply as an instance of Antiptosis, i.e. o-e, the Subject to eyypafjs, is made the Object to anrevo-o>, which is a Verb just like on-ouSaftu or jrpaWu. Digitized by Microsoft® 362 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. § 235. ELLIPTICAL USE OF onus, 6Vws fiij, WITH THE FUTURE INDICATIVE. "Ottco<;, 07tepe hi) 6V(os /Jbe/J.vrja-6/j.eda ravra. PLAT. Gorg. 495 D. Well, then, let us be swre to remember this. 07T(l)S TCHJTOt, |«.)jS£tS dv6p(O7r0>V 7T£lJO"eT0U, LYS. i. 21. See that not a soul hears of this. Observe that this construction is generally introduced by a word, d\\d, oBv, Se, sometimes by aye vw (Ae. Nub. 490). Note. The Subjunctive occasionally is found : on-tos ye jui) e^om-oiTTjOTj ■qfia.'S. PLAT. Prot. 313 C. Mind he does not deceive us. §236. "O77-WS, oVtus fJLT] WITH VERBS OF COM- MANDING AND FORBIDDING. For this Construction, see Indirect Petition. It is, of course, the same as oVa? after Verbs of taking means to an end, although an extension of it. There is a natural connexion between, " Take care to do so," and " I bid you do so." But for the sake of convenience the rule and examples are given elsewhere. § 237. VERBS OF FEARING WITH ju/jy, AND jXTj OV. Verbs and phrases denoting fear are followed by /j,rj and /m) ov with the Subjunctive (in Primary Sequence), Digitized by Microsoft® VERBS OF FEARING WITH pij AND tf oi. 263 and the Optative (in Historic Sequence). The Subjunc- tive may, by the graphic construction, of course be sub- stituted for the Optative. Se'Souca fjuq ravra yevr/rai. I fear this will happen. Vereor ne haec fiant. SeSoiKa fir) ov ravra yevi)rai. I fear this will not happen. Vereor ut (ne non) haec fiant. e&eSoliceiv fvq (prj ov) ravra yevoiro or yevrjrai. Verebar ne (ut) haec fierent. Observe that yj\ does not negative, the verb ; it expresses a surmise that the result will occur. Ov on the other hand is privative and negatives the verb. Se&oiKa fvq ov% bcnov y. I fear it will not be righteous (i.e. unrighteous). For firj, fjuri ov and the Subjunctive, etc., without a principal verb see the Chapter on Negatives. Verbs of fearing are : — (f>o@odfiai, Seo? earl rrifypLica (mostly poet.) SeSotKa, Seivdv ecrri rpe'eo (mostly poet.) SeSouca fir) hnXadafieOa rr}<; o'Uahe 6Bov. Xen. I fear we shall forget the way home. omen eirerWevro $eSoiicore<; fir] arrorfM]6elr)o-av. Xen. They were no longer attacking from fear of being cut off. S&ifiev firi ov fiefiaioi r\re. ThUC. We fear you are not trustworthy. Digitized by Microsoft® 264 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. 6^>o/3etTO to a-Tparevfia fir) eiri ttjv avrov j^rnpav (TTparevTjTai. Xen. He was afraid that the army would march against his own country. ovSev Seivov pr) kv epol o-rr\. PLAT. Apol. xv. There is no fear (likelihood) of the rule breaking down in my case. Obs. In Xen. Mem. i. 2. 7, we have Wavpafc d tjs ofioLTo pr) 6 yevopevos /caAos Kayadbs pr) X™/ Hv *£°h instead of pr) ov Xapiv e£oi, an abnormal construction not found elsewhere. Note 1. As these Verbs of Fearing denote doubt and appre- hension as much as downright fear, their construction is followed by many Verbs which in other senses take other con- structions, but which when denoting apprehension, anxiety, suspicion lest or whether, are followed by pr\ and pr) ov. Such verbs are verbs of caution in the sense of anxiety ((f>povTc£a>, evvoio, 6pm, o~kott&, ev\af3ovp.a.i, v\d Trape^i) in the sense of suspecting rather than disbelieving, kivSwos lo-n. wroiTTevopev pr) ov koivoI airo[3rJTe. ThTJC. iii. 53. We suspect that you will not prove impartial. okvo) pr) pot 6 Awtas rajreivos 4" XV V- PLAT. Pol. 368. cfrpovTifo fir) KparuTTOv fj poi cnyav, XEN. Mem. iv. 2. 39. I am thinking that it may be best for me to say nothing. Cf. PLAT. Phaed. 70 A (aTria-Tiav 7rap£)(ei pi) ovSapov) ■ PLAT. Theaet. 183 E (alo-xwopevos pr), a very rare construction with this verb) ; SOPH. Tr. 1129 (evX.a/3eur6ai pr) (j>avfjv\.do-o-eo-6ai pr) ^vvrptipaxriv). Consult the Index for other meanings and constructions of these verbs. Note 2. Instead of the Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing the tenses of the Indicative are used. (1) The Future Indicative as a graphic substitute for the Subjunctive. (j>o/3ovpai, prj Ttvas ijSovas r)8ovais evprjaopev evavrt'as. Plat. Phileb. 13 a. I apprehend that we shall find some pleasures opposite to pleasures. Digitized by Microsoft® VERBS OF FEARING WITH pf, AND pi, ov. 265 Cf. PLAT. Rep. 451 A (cpofiepov re /cat o-s does not (like otts s, as on-cus is occasionally used in Indirect Discourse). When on follows a Verb of Fearing it seems to introduce an ordinary causal (or rather explanatory) sentence. OTi 8e ttoXXZv dpx ovo ~i py o[3r]8r)Te. Xen. Sell. iii. 5. 10. Do not be afraid because they rule many. Though we jnight translate, do not be afraid thinking that. Note 3. The Infinitive, Future, Present or Aorist is also used. ov tpofSovpeda eAao-owecrflcu. THUC. V. 105. We are not afraid that we shall be beaten. The Future Infinitive is here = the more usual p; with Subjunctive. (po/3ovp.of3ovfj,a.t. dSiKttv, I fear to do wrong ; aio-\vvoixai dSiKeiv, I am ashamed to do wrong ; KivSwevui dSinetv, I rim a risk of doing wrong ; v\do-trw /trjSlva dSiKeiv, I take care that no one does wrong. Cf. Latin, culpari metuit fides; penna metuente solvi, etc., in Hokace. Note 4. Observe the following distinctions : — 1. $ofSovjj.a.i, dSiKeiv. I fear to do wrong (and so refrain). 2. of3ovp.ai p/q olSlkZ. I fear I shall do wrong. 3. o/3ovp.ai aStKTjcreti'. I fear I shall do wrong (very rare for 2). 4. tA.nr7ros £y. Dem. Fals. Leg. 434. 6. I have no fear whether Philip is alive (i.e. I have no fear as to that question). Cf. Eur. Herac. 791, Xen. Hell. xi. 1. 4 (&roi). Note 6. av is not used with the Subjunctive after Verbs ol Fearing. When the Optative is found with av it is an Apodosis. § 238. Verbs of Fearing, etc., with the Indicative. When the result has actually occurred, or is occurring, the verb with /«j is in the Indicative. Thus : SeSoiKa fxr/ dpuxprdvys (or dp,dpTr)s). I fear you will make a mistake. But SeSoiKa pvr) afiaprdveis. I fear you (actually) are making a mistake. SeSoiKa /at] ^jxapTTr/Kas. I fear you have made a mistake. So SeSoiKa firj rjfidpTaves (you were making a mistake); /mj riuapTss, that you made a mistake. lr r ' 3 Digitized by Microsoft® VERBS OF FEARING, ETC., WITH INDICATIVE. 267 1. The Present Indicative : — o/3eiof3ovfiai fir) dfn,(f>OTGpo>v afia rjfiapTrJKafiev. ThUC. iii. 53. I fear that we have missed both objects at once. Cf. Plat. Lys. 218 r>, Dem. 19. 26 (Fate. Leg. 372. 1). 4. The Aorist Indicative does not appear to occur in Attic. See Hom. Od. v. 300. 5. The Future indicative may be regarded as a graphic substitute for the Subjunctive {supra). 1 § 239. Note on Dawes's Canon. Dawes laid down the rule that after mrws fir] and ov fit], the First Aorist Passive, and the Second Aorist Active, Middle, and Passive may be used, but not the First Aorist Active or Middle. Instead of the First Aorist Active and Middle, he said that the Future Indicative must be used. Subsequent 1 So at least in Attic. But if the original force of the Subjunctive was imperative (denoting will) rather than future (a point on which it is impossible to speak dogmatically), the Subjunctive in the oldest Greek would mean shall rather than will, and would be more direct and vivid than the Future. See Monro's Homeric Grammar, pp. 231 and 238. Digitized by Microsoft® 268 FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. critics extended Dawes's Canon to oVws (without /«j), and set about changing a First Aorist Active and Middle, wherever they were found in a text, to a Future Indicative. The sole ground for this arbitrary rule of Dawes is the resemblance in form between the First Aorist Active and Middle and the Future Indicative, e.g. KATOKNHCHIC (kch-okv^s, Soph. El. 956) and KATOKNHCEIC (kotokv^is) ; SYAAESHTAI l&XXkfrrai) and KYAAESETAI (£v\\%ertu). _ Naturally this resemblance of form might incline a Greek writer to avoid confusion by using a second Aorist (if it existed) rather than a First Aorist. Dawes made no objection to a First Aorist Subjunctive Passive, because it bears no resemblance in form to a Future Indicative. But Dawes's Canon rests on no solid foundation of grammar, and breaks down completely on examination. Instances of the First Aorist Subjunctive Active and Middle in which all the MSS. agree are oVcos /*i) iiriPor]6r)s /mj /3ov\6vo"r)v d/j,apr^/j.armv iKava ro2<; aaxppoai mare /j/r}Kert dfiapravetv. ANDOK. Examples of errors are sufficient for sensible people that they should no longer err, i.e. sufficient to keep them from 'erring. see Digitized by Microsoft® 270 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES. § 241. wcrre with Indicative and Infinitive. A. wore with the Indicative is parallel with 6'ti and the Indicative, that is to say, it introduces the Indicative as a statement almost, sometimes quite, independent of. the Principal Sentence. Thus : roaovrov i[iov iro^xoTepos «, (Sore Kas — eya) Se dyvoai. Pl. ^4po?. xiii. So much wiser are you than J, that (and so) you have discovered, while I am ignorant, etc. This introductory force of wo-te is best shown by its familiar usage at the beginning of a sentence where it is a synonym for oSv, roti/uv, and may be rendered and so, conse- quently, therefore. els rrjv vo-repaiav ovx fJKev 1 urcracfaepvrjs' &crd' ol EAA/qves ep6vTi£ov. Xen. An. ii. 3. 25. On the morrow Tissaphernes did not appear. Consequently the Greeks began to consider, etc. So with an Imperative. dvrjTos 8' 'O/oamjs' Sxrre p.rj Xtav oreve. SOPH. El. 1172. Orestes was but mortal Therefore grieve not too sore. Occasionally this introductory force of (Sore is seen even with an Infinitive. &t' e/te epavrbv dveptnTav (after a colon or full stop). Plat. Apol. viii. And so I was questioning myself. ' As wore, like on, is merely introductory, it can be followed by any construction which an independent sentence can take, e.g. Imperative (supra) : wore p-rj a.iroKap.-Q%, Plat. Crit. 45. wore av with Optative, wore av SiSdcrKoiTc, Xen. Cyr. iii. 3. 35. wore dv krokpiqo-ev, Lys. 7. 28. B. Stare with Infinitive. * Sxrre with the Infinitive is epexegetical, i.e. explanatory of the Principal Verb. It is doubly so, for Sio-re is an explanatory particle, and the Infinitive is in its own nature explanatory. Indeed wore with the Infinitive, as will be seen below, often takes the place of the simple Infinitive. The consecutive use of Stare with the Infinitive is only one among several of these explanatory usages. The result contemplated, i.e. the purpose. c J ° Digitized by Microsoft®? * r ' fl' $, «<£' $ Te). ^v/ifiaxiav iTroirjpovt,ji,WTtpoi wore p.a6dv rj avSpts ; Xen. Cyr. iv, 3. 11. Are boys more sensible at learning than mm ? Digitized by Microsoft® 272 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITATIVE SENTENCES. p,ei£ov rj (Sore epeiv. Too great to bear. Maius quam quod tolerari possit. ipvxpbv vStap (Sore kovcrcurdai. XEN. An. iii. 13. 3. The water is cold for bathing. p.rj)(aval 7rohXai t'uriv wore Siacfrevyew Odvarov. Plat. Apol. xxix. There are many shifts for escaping death. l Se kvkXovvto irdo~av vfjcrov, &(tt' dp.rj\aveiv envoi rpdwoLVTO. Aesch. Pers. 460. They round about Encircled the whole isle, so that the foe Knew not which way to turn them. Cf. Euk. Hec. 730. Note 2. wore with av and the Infinitive, wore with the Infinitive may be an (oblique) Apodosis, and therefore av will go with the Infinitive. kyio €7T4 tcwctSc iX(a acrre av dvayiutirOyjvai,, k.t.X. Xen. Cyr. i. 4. 20. For Sore ov with the Infinitive, see Negatives. Digitized by Microsoft® RELA TIVE CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 273 Note 3. d>s is sometimes used for &vre, generally with the Infinitive. o Trorapbi toowtos to /3a#os, a>s pijSk ra Sopara virepe)(eiv rov /3a0ovs. Xen. An. iii. 5. 7. TAe rimer is of so great a depth, that even the spears could not . reach the bottom. (Lit. rise above the depth). Cf. Xen. Gyr. i. 5. 11. More rarely, rf ever in Attic, with an Indicative. §242. Consecutive Sentences in Greek and Latin. The nearest approach in Latin to the distinction between the Infinitive and Indicative is to be found in the use of the Imperfect Subjunctive and Perfect (Aorist) Subjunctive, e.g. cectdit ut cms frangeret (wore narayvvvai), and ut cms fregerit (fore Kareage). But the Latin distinction, even supposing it is always observed, a distinction expressed by two tenses of the Subjunctive, is a very different thing from that expressed by two moods, the Infinitive and the Indicative. § 243. RELATIVE CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. Consecutive Sentences are also expressed by Eelative Pronouns, oios, 6'0-os with Infinitive. For toiowos coo-re are used toiovtos otos or ofos alone. „ toctoCtov (Sore „ toctovtov ocrov or OCTOV. The Negative is p.rj. toiovtos ei/M 010s fir]Sevt aXXfi) irei,dea8ai rj \6ya>. Plat. / am of such a character as to yield to nothing hit reason. Is (or eiusmodi) sum ut nulli alii rei nisi rationi paream. ovk rjv &pa 01a apSeiv to ireSlov. XEN. An. ii. 3. 13. It was not the season for irrigating the plain. vep.6pxvoi to. eavriHv eKacrTOL ocrov mroffiv. THUC. i. 2. Each tribe cultivating just enough of its land to obtain a sub- sistence from it. Cf THUC. iii. 49, too-ootov ocrov dveyvcaicevcu Digitized by Mcrosdft® 274 CONSECUTIVE AND LIMITA TIVE SENTENCES. TOiavra erarovres om koi toiis trapovTai a\ue a>, e are (jirj). On condition that, on the understanding that. ao-re (mo-re /*ij) with Infinitive. e a>, e mre with Infinitive (Negative /mj), or Future Indicative (Negative ov or firj). egrjp avTois ra>v aWcov ap%eiv EWyvav w one fiTjKen ei,v. Plat. We acquit you, on the understanding that you na longer pursue philosophy (ita ut philosophari desinas). 'BiVvefSriaav ecjb aire efyaatv etc Ue\.oTrovvr\aov inro- airovSoL (/cat n^heiroTe eTTi^Tja-ovrai avTr/i). Thuo. They surrendered on the condition that they should leave the Peloponnese under truce (and never again set foot on it). Observe that the Future Indicative is used in Historic Sequence. Note. The Nominative Attraction is observed : — us av oiStos kdkXoi tol dXXorpia ajroo-Teptlv i' $ KaKo8o£os thai,. Xen. Ag. 4. 1. Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTEE VII. §245. CAUSAL SENTENCES. * Causal sentences are expressed in a variety of ways. A. By Causal Particles and a Finite Mood. B. By Belative Sentences. C. By Participles. D. In various miscellaneous ways. A. Causal Particles. The common Causal Particles are also the Temporal Particles, e-rrel, eweihri, <»? (cf. Latin cum). The negative is ov, and the Indicative is the Mood. TidTjfii ere 6fj,o"KojovvTa eirebhr] ovk airoKpivei. Pl. Ap. I assume that you consent, since you do not answer. e-ireo ovk ehvvavro ~Xafi{3aveiv to %a>ptov airievat rjSrj eireyeipovv. Xen. Anab. v. 2. 5. As they were not able to take the place they were now trying to go away. Eor eVet&j with Imperfect, Thtjc. i. 102. For lirel, see Xen. An. v. 2. 5. For «?, Soph. Phil. 46, 914. Note 1. When, however, the sentence is explanatory of what has preceded, 6'rt, Si«7P?js fie a-^a-ayixkvi] a.vdpu>iru>v Sid rt aAAo o/3epov otti 7] on Taxy 7rA.ef; 81a Se Tt aAAo aXvTrot, dXX-jXoi'; ot cpirXeovTes tj Sloti kv ra£« KdOrjvTai ; XEN. Oec. viii. 8. For what other reason is a trireme full of men dangerous, except because it sails fast i And for what other reason do those who are on board occasion no alarm to one another, except because they sit still in their ranks ? 27a Digitized by Microsoft® CAUSAL SENTENCES. 27} Note 2. A Causal Sentence in Historic Sequence is found in the Optative when it expresses the indirect words or thoughts (virtual oratio obliqua). tov IleptK-Aia Ikixki^ov, oti (TTparqybepei<; yap 69 76 auTos oj(el ; Ae. Why how d'ye hear, when you're being carried yourself? OavfjLaaTov 7rotet9 09 rjfuv ovBev §(.oa>9. XEN. You are acting strangely in giving us nothing. = on ovSev 818009. Mirum facis qui nobis nihil des. 7r(0S 01J KaKKTTOS OOTtS 7T£pi ffAttOVOS 7T0t£l TOUS Ka/COUpyoUS J Jfwstf you not be a scoundrel since you are making much of evildoers? Dem. 24. 107. os ye, Soph. El. 911. 6'o-tis, Soph. 4wi!. 696. iVbte. Other relatives (pronouns and adverbs) are similarly used. •njv [irjrepa ipaKapi^ov, otW T6KV0)V eKvpr)(re. HDT. i. 31. They were counting the mother happy in having been blest with such children. — on TOiovTtav eKvpyarev. evSaipwv pot iffyaivero, (lis dSeus ereAeura. PLAT. Phaed. ii I deemed him happy, so fearlessly did he meet death. = oti oiVeos dSews, not an uncommon use of (is. C. Participles are frequently used in a Causal Sense. The Negative is ov. are (are Sij), olov, ofa 8rj often accompany the Participles in this use (also Sunt in Herodotus). 6 Kvpos, are ttcus &v, t^Seto tjj solute. CAUSAL SENTENCES. 279 D. Causal Sentences are also often expressed by tw and the Infinitive. ov irAeove£tas cVe/ca ravr' lirpa^ev dXXa T StKaiorepa d£iovv &r)f3aiovs tJ ij/ias. Dem. ii. 13. It was not for sake of greed that he did this, but because the Thebans made ajuster demand than we. Causal Sentences are also very often and very simply . expressed by a Preposition and its case, sometimes by a Preposition with the Infinitive, e.g. Sia to <£iA,ous avrovs elvai. Because they are friends. Cf. especially 810 and Kara. Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTER VIII. § 246. EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. I. A Wish that refers to the Future, and which there- fore may be fulfilled, is expressed — A. By the Simple Optative. B. By the Optative with elde, el yap (el and w?, 7tg>s av ; in poetry). The Negative is always p,r\. w iral, yevoio irarpo's evTV^ecrrepo<;, to, 8' a\X' o/ioto9, Kai yevoi av ov icaicos. SOPH. Boy, may si thou prove more fortunate than thy father, Like in all else, so shouldst thou prove not vile. Observe that yevoio alone expresses a wish, yevoi av is an Apodosis. /XT] £00971/ p,er afiovcrias. EUE. May I not live without culture ! el yap yevoiprjv, t&kvov, olvtI otv vovs yevoiro crwcjipoveiv. SOPH. Ai. 1264, Would that to you twain judgment were granted for discretion el poi ykvono oiTe TijVSe ttjv vocrov ; Soph. Phil. 794. Would that in my stead ye might hug this plague. prj 7rcos ey(a Tocravras SiKas vyoipi. PLAT. Apol. iii. May not I be indicted on charges so serious 1 289 Digitized by Microsoft® EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. , , H . 281 . ) ' J /' -*■ - "• j - "• - II. A Wish which refers to the Past, and which there- fore can no longer be fulfilled, is expressed — yjv < {Imperfect Indicative (of pre- sent time, continued or ha- bitual actions). Aorist Indicative (of single acts). B. me\ov, sometimes m in poetry. e'bd' et^e?, w reicovcra, /SeXTtous peva<;. EUK. El. 1061. Would that thou hadst, mother, better judgment (but thou hast not). e'ide (TO(,, m Hepi/ckeis, Tore crvvee\ov irdpoidev e/cKnrelv fiiov. SOPH. El. 1131. Ah, would that I had first forsaken life. effi &e\es roidSe ttjv yviapvqv warpos OvrjcrKOVTOs eivai. SOPH. El. 1021. Would thou hadst been thus mmded on the day thy father (irfTOT d>cj>e\eLV Xvmiv ttjv 2/cijpov. Soph. Phil. 969. Would that I ne'er had left My Scyros ! (09 irplv SiSa£cu y' (3<£eA.es fiea-os Siappayrjvai. Akist. Ban. 955. Pity, ere ymi taught 'em, that you didn't burst asunder m the midst. D j g j t/zed by Microsoft® 282 EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. Note 1. A wish may be made to depend on a condition which is expressed by ovtw. Instead of the sentence which logically should follow " so may I . . . as," an Indicative or an Impera- tive is substituted. ovrta viK-f)0-aip,i r' eyib kcu vop,i£oip.r]V cro<£6s, (is v/ias rjyovfiai etvai Oearas Serious. Ar. Nub. 520. So may I win and be considered wise, as I hold you to be a clever audience. oiircos ovalpvqv twv renviav, jxtsxm tov avSp' enelvov. Ar. Th. 469. So may I be blest in my children . . . I do hate that fellovj. ovto)<$ ovaia-de tovtuiv, firj TrepuSrjTe p*c. DEM. Aph. ii. 842. 9. So may you enjoy this . . . do not neglect me. Instead of saying — on this condition, namely, that you do not neglect me. This is exactly like the well-known Latin idiom :— Sic te diva potens Cypri Ventorumque regat pater Navis . . . Finibus Atticis Beddas incolumem precor. Hor. Od. 1. hi. 1. Sic venias hodierne . . . tibi dem turis honores. Tibull. 1. vii. 33. Note 2. Explanation of expressions of a wish. (1) Optatives and Indicatives with el, el ydp, effie are clearly Protases with suppressed Apodoses. el yap Tavra yevono (sc. koAws av eitj). el yap ravra eyevero (sc. »caX5s av 7jv). Latin is parallel — si haec ita fiant, fierent, facta essent. With cus compare ut, utinam in Wishes. (2) t&<£eXov (/ ought, or had ought), on the other hand, is an Apodosis with a suppressed Protasis; used like XPV V > «8« without an av. Digitized by Microsoft® EXPRESSIONS OF A WISH. 283 Latin again supplies a parallel — (Eum) si ulla in te pietas esset, colere debebas. Cic. Phil. ii. 38. Tunc ego debuercm capienda ad Pergama mitti : Tunc poteram magni, si non superare, morari Hectoris arma meis. Ov. Met. xii. 445. Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTER IX. § 247. EELATIVE SENTENCES. Eelative sentences are introduced by either (1) Relative Pronouns, or (2) Particles of Eelative origin, cos, ore, el, ocjjpa, etc. The chief distinction between Eelative Sentences is that of Definite and Indefinite, a distinction explained in §172. It applies to many Eelative Particles as well as Pronouns, e.g. A. Definite — to"Te O7TO06V o rj\io<> avia^ei, icai biroi Sverat. Xen. You knew where (lit. wlience) the sun rises, and where (lit. whither) it sets. m ycua Sefjai Oavacrifiov /m , 07rco9 e^ro. SOPH. Earth ! receive me, as I am, in death. Accipe me, ut sum. B. Indefinite — ottoi av a-Tparrjjov eK7re/ii|r^T6, ol e%6poi icara- (Ti. Dem. Wheresoever you send out a general, your enemies ridicule you. e^eari xprj&dai otto)? av fiovhunncu. Xen. You may make whatever use (of it) you please. 2g 4 Digitized by Microsoft® ' a * RELATIVE SENTENCES. 285 Definite Eelative sentences present no difficulty. In- definite Eelative sentences freely form Subordinate sen- tences of every kind, — Conditional, Temporal, Modal, Consecutive, etc., and will be found under these several heads. Some Eelative Particles denote Place (oiroi, 'tva, etc.), but a special chapter on Local Sentences is un- necessary. Other uses of the Eelative will be seen by reference to the Index. Especial attention should be paid to the syntax of the Negatives with Eelatives ; see chapter on the Negatives, Part IIL Digitized by Microsoft® PART TIL PREPOSITIONS, NEGATIVES, ORATIO OBLIQUA, AND FIGURES. CHAPTER I. §248. PREPOSITIONS. Prepositions in Attic are particles which have a double use. Either (1) they are joined in Composition with Verbs; or (2) they serve as links between the oblique case of Nouns or Pronouns and other words, especially Verbs, in the sentence. As such links they denote Place, Time, and various figurative relations, Agency, Cause, Means, etc., more distinctly than could be done by the oblique cases alone. Prepositions also help to form com- pound adjectives and substantives. Philology and Epic Poetry, however, enable us to trace the origin and usage of Prepositions further back than their Attic uses, and to account for those uses. § 249- Introductory Note to Prepositions. 1. Prepositions appear to have been originally case- forms. Thus wo (Ep. wrou) was Locative, meaning on the wider side ; inrep (Sanskrit upari), on the upper side ; Si<£ (Ep. and Poet. Stat), in the space between; dirt is Locative, ai/ra Accusative (cf. avTr/v, coram) ; irepi Locative ; wpos (trporl) Locative ; mxoa Itraoai) Locative ; vpo is Ablative. As cases 286 Digitized by Microsoft® INTRODUCTORY NOTE TO PREPOSITIONS. 287 they must all have been capable of taking a Genitive. 1 Thus viral x@°v°s, on the wnder side of the earth; nap 71-0805 (rrapai), Pindar, P. 10. 97, on the newr side of the foot; dvr\ epelo, II. xxi. 481, on the opposite side of me. This is con- firmed by the fact that all the quasi-prepositions, which are cases of nouns, are joined to a Genitive, e.g. dvpafa Euk. Bacch. 331. This stage, however, is previous to all written literature, and belongs to Philology rather than Syntax. 2. They were used as Adverbs 2 independently of Verb or Noun. Instances still occur frequently in Homer, e.g. /teXaves 8' avb. fioTpves fjo-av, black clusters were throughout, II. xviii. 512 : irepl Trpb yap eyx et Ovev, around in front he was raging with his spe&r, II. xi. 180 : d/z<£i 8e ol fipdxe Ttvx €a > on either side for him (or near him) clashedjiis arms : nepl rfpi faXeeo-Ke, exceeding much at heart he loved him. The Adverb qualifies the Verb, but stands apart from it. 3. A transitional period, that of the Homeric poems, suc- ceeds. Originally the Noun went straight with the Verb; the relation between the two might be more particularly defined by an Adverb. Thus ayaye.iv 86p,ov, to lead home; dyayetv So/iov, to lead from home (Genitive of separation or Ablative) : l Se x a ? ral w/iots dura-ovTai. In the first two of these last four examples the Adverbs ek and e/c further define the direction of the Verb, and form Compound Verbs which " govern " respec- tively theAccusative and Genitive. But in the last two the Adverb serves as a link between Noun and Verb, and becomes a Preposition. 4. Prepositions thus come to furnish new analytic cases, the old cases with their blunted and confused suffixes being 1 This is Curtius' view (Elucidations, Ch. xvii. ) It must apply to Prepositions only when they do not denote separation (in which case they would be joined to an Ablative). Such a connection between Prepositions and. the Genitive is said not to exist in Sanskrit, and on this ground Delbruck (Syntaktische Forschungen, iv. ch. ix. p. 134) only partially accepts Curtius' theory. 3 No distinction is here intended in speaking of Prepositions as case- forms and as Adverbs. All oblique cases are, of course, adverbial, except the true Genitive^hich^s jjjjjeog^ or attributive. 288 PREPOSITIONS. insufficient to express all the new relations between Noun and Verb which were suggested by the expansion of Greek thought and knowledge. When a Preposition links a case to any other word but a Verb, to an Adjective or Noun, a verbal meaning is readily understood. In determining the force of a Preposition we must carefully consider three points : the meaning (1.) of the Preposition, (2.) of the Case, (3.) of the Verb (or verbal word). In the stereotyped phrases with Prepositions which have practically become Adverbs or Adjec- tives, it will be easy enough to supply the verbal notion which the phrase requires to complete it logically. 5. A few instances may elucidate the foregoing remarks. a. The noun linked by a preposition to its case has a verbal meaning. SiaWayal irpos Tiva, reconciliation with any one, Isocr. 60 B, compared with SiaWaxQqvai irpos two., to be reconciled with any one. to^otjjs d' imrov, compare with ro^eieiv defy' Ittttov. b. The Preposition with its Case is a fuller expansion of the Simple Case. Thus we may say, xprjo-Tov irpbs dvo^os eori, or xpijorou avSpos Ion', it is the part of a good man. Lysias writes nvTjo-Oijvau twos : Thucydides, fivqo-Orjvai irepi twos : Demosthenes, p,vrjo-6rjvai bwip twos. So we may say, elprjo-eTai irpbs fyras, or vpXv, f/ aXrjdeia, the truth shall be told you; pa^eo-dai t$ Xipjf ko.1 tQ Stya, Xen., to fight with hunger and thirst; p.dxeo-6ai irpbs eiridvplas, Plat., to fight against desires. Similarly, rj irap' ep.ov evvoia=fj «vvoio p.ov, my goodwill (Subjective Gen.); to Trap' epMv dSUrjjxa=Tb dSiK7]p,d fwv, the wrong done by me (Objective). 6. Improper or Spurious Prepositions are those which can be joined with Cases, e.g. avev, eveKa with Genitive, <5>s with Accusative, but which are not compounded with Verbs. 7. Tmesis is a late Grammarians' term to denote the separation between Preposition and Verb. The term is unnecessary, for, as we have seen, in early Greek it is not the separation, but the combination, which has to be accounted for. Tmesis in Attic is but a survival of the earlier usage : it is practically confinejypj fyp&fcioswd a few colloquialisms, PREPOSITIONS AND THE THREE CASES. 289 e.g. 81' &p' oXmXafiev, Eur. I.T. 1371, dm' a-' dAu. It is seldom found except when a particle intervenes. Aesch. Sept. c. Theb. 672 forms an exception. 8. Dissyllabic Prepositions are oxytone. They become Paroxytone (i.e. Barytone) in certain cases : (1.) When they stand immediately after their Verb or Case, e.g. oXeo-as airo jravras eraipovs, /".ax^s irepi. This is called Anastwphe. 'Ap.i, dvri, dvd, Sid are not liable to Anastrophe. Mono- syllabic Prepositions take the acute accent by Anastrophe, but only when they come at the end of a line. (2.) When they are equivalent to a Compound Verb, generally a Sub- stantive Verb, dva=dvdo-T7j8i, /MTa=/i6Tecrn, similarly evt, art, irdpa, ivkpi, and perhaps viro. (3.) airo and irkpi when used as Adverbs. Oxytone Prepositions with elision lose their accent, e.g. Tap' vjp.kpav, en-' avrip. § 250. The Prepositions and the Three Cases. The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object of the Verb. This, however, implies direction to, or on, and thus Prepositions with the Accusative denote motion to, 1 extension along or over. The Genitive is the Case of Connexion and Separation. Prepositions with the Genitive denote connexion with, or separ ration from : in the former sense the true Genitive is used, in the latter the old Ablative use has been handed on to the Genitive. The Dative is connected with Prepositions chiefly in its locative sense. Prepositions with the Dative denote nearness to, or rest at, by, with, or near. §25l> Collected usages of Prepositions. 1. The Agent is expressed by the following Prepositions: — {nro with Gen. (the regular expression to denote the Agent ; the others which follow are special.) 1 But it must be remembered that the notion of motion must origin- ally have come from the combined signification of Verb, Preposition, and Case. Digitized by Microsoft® 290 PREPOSITIONS xpos (in poetry and Ionic prose) with Gen. 3 irapa, (the agent as the source) with Gen. d?ro (in some special prose uses) with Gen. Sid (the intermediate agent) with Gen. 2. Means by — Sod with Gen. (the regular expression to denote the Means; the others are special). euro. Ik with Gen. Iv with Dat. £vv with Dat. 3. The usages of certain Prepositions are closely parallel : — a/Ko — e/c 6.VTI — irpo £vv — p.erd dvd — Kara virep — Trept (in certain senses). ap,cj)i — TrepC «ri — wpos (in certain senses). 4. The usages of certain Prepositions are sharply con trasted : — €is — Ik — ev wrep — vtto dvd — Kara, etc. 5. Synonymous phrases are formed by different Preposi- tions with Cases, e.g. : — Ka6' ■q/iipav, p.kd' rjfi.epav, Trap' rjfxkpav. ol dp,l ITAaTtoVa, ol Trepl IIXaTtuva. 6._ Verbs of rest are used with Prepositions expressing motion. ^This is known as the Constructio Praegnans. See diro, i£, els, ev. 7. Prepositions are used, (1) in their literal sense denoting place, or time, (2) in a figurative sense denoting various moral relations. The Attic use of Prepositions is marked off from the Epic chiefly in two ways : (1) by the disuse of the adverbial senses (2) by the developm^Y&fe#gpj»tregoH®anings. PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 291 § 252. PREPOSITIONS AND THE CASES, I. Prepositions with one Case. a. Accusative : dvd, e« (Is), «? (d/ttfrt practically in prose). 6. Genitive : avrt, airo, etj (e«), irpd (avev, eveica, etcan, ywpLi, &XP l > P-eXP )' c. Dative : ev, aw {a/ia, 6fiov). II. Prepositions with two Cases. Accusative and Genitive : Sid, /card, virip, p,erd. III. Prepositions with all three Cases. a/icpi, eiri, irapa, irepi, wpos, vtto. I.— PREPOSITIONS WITH ONE CASE ONLY, (a.) WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. § 253. 'Avd. 'Avd, up to, through, opposed to Kara (compare the two throughout), Eng. on, Gothic ana, Germ. an. 'Avd related to evl (ev) as on and in. Lat. an-helo, I breathe up, CURT. Etymol. L 381. Up along : ra ifKola ava tov iroTafiov ov Svvavrai 7r\eeiv. Herod. The boats cannot sail up the stream (cf. Kara). Throughout or Among : dolSi/ios dvd rrjv 'EWaSa eyevero. HEROD. He became famous in song throughout all Greece. oiKciv dva to. opiftidSiEStL htf.'MiaiiAs&mlG, to live m the hills. 293 PREPOSITIONS. Distributively : eiropevQriaav ava irevre irapacadyyas rrj<; rj/j,epa<;. Xen. They marched at the rate of five parasangs a day. So ava eKarov, m bodies of a hundred, in centuries. Cf. S. Luke ix. 14, S. Matth. xx. 10. Phrases : dva. Kpdros (evyeiv), with all one's might (cf. Kara. (cpdVos : dva. XSyov (4>vop.eva SevSpa), Plat. Phaed. lix. trees growing) in proportion ; dva. crrd/aa e'xetv, to have in one's mouth, at the tip of the tongue. N.B. ava has the sense of dvda-rrjdi, up/ arise/ sursum! Cf. Soph. Ai. dXX' aW !£ eSpdvav, come, up from thy seat / Note, dvd is also used in Homer, in Lyric poetry (Pindar), and in Choruses of the Tragedians with the Dative (e.g. Eur. I. A. 754). In Composition : (1.) Up, dvaf3\iir, I recover sight. § 254. Eis or e*s. Eh or 6?, into, to, opposed to e'£ out of. Original form perhaps evs, from ivi-s. In Pindar iv means in and into. Cf. Latin in and inter with Accusative. (1) Of Place:— Motion to, into, for : SV/eeXot ef lTaXla<; Siefirjaav e? HiiceXiav. Thuc The Steels crossed over out of Italy into Sicily (or for Sicily). With verbs of rest : KaraicXeUiv h tjjv vrjvov. THUC. i. 109. To shut up in tbigMmehy Mt&owffluctio praegnans.) PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 293 {To speak) before : Xeyew eis to irXtjOos. To speak before the people. Of. elcrievcu, dTrjvat Is. Looking towards : . to Is Ua,XXrjvr]v T6ix°S- Thuc. i. 56. The wall facing Pallene. Phrases : els dicovTiov, els Soparos rrXrjyfjv (d, till dawn ; es efie, up to my time. At such a time, by such a date : els ecnrepav, els Tpivqv (with or without fjiikpav), Is rijv vtrrepaiav {fjKuv), to come at even, on the third day (or m three days), on the morrow. Phrases : Is Kaipov, in season ; els avpiov, on the morrow ; els etreira, henceforward ; els an-a£ (or e«raira£), once for all, etc. (3) With Numbers : — Denoting limit, up to, amounting to : vav<; e? ras TerpaKoaiw;. THUC. Ships to the number of four hundred. e? hpavfui]v BiaSovvat. THUC. To pay each man up to (i.e. as much as) a drachma. Phrases : els eva, els 8i5o, els reo-uapas. One, two,, four deep. els Svvafuv, to the extent of one's ability ; els mrep^oXrjv, in excess. Digitized by Microsoft® 294 PREPOSITIONS. (4) Of Belation to : — d/iapTciveiv els riva, to do wrong to any one. Purpose : Is rdSe 7]KOjj.ev, for this purpose we are come. eh KaAAos ffiv, Xen., to live for show. (5) Special Phrases : — «s avSpas ("EXXrjvas, etc.) rcAetv, to come to mom's estate (to be enrolled among, belong to Greeks). Of. lyypd(i>. ?s n (tv vto) TeXevTav, to end in a certain way. h wav dLKea-0ai, to come to everything, i.e. to try every means. as 'AttoXX.wvos, Ai6wv. PLAT. He does evil instead of good. So /ietfov, ir\eov, dvri, instead of Comparative and Simple Genitive, Soph. Ant. 182, Tr. 577. (3) In return for : Sel ra jiev avTt apyvpiov dXXa^aadat. PLAT. We must exchange some things for money, avd' &v, wherefore (also because, cf. Soph. Antig. 1068). Rarely like 717)05, for the sake of (lit. over against, in the presence of), with verbs of entreaty, see Soph. 0. C. 1326. In Composition : Many meanings, (1) Against, i.e. opposite or in opposition, avTifiaivw, I plant the foot against, also I resist. (2) Reciprocity, substitution, or equality, hnruiv ixd-^^Gai, to fight on board ship, on horseback. _. ... ..... „~ Digitized by Microsoft® 296 PREPOSITIONS. Phrases : dirb dko-Kov, Kaipov, wide of the mark (cf. diib yvu>pvq% Soph. Tr. 389); dwb rpoirov (Plat.), unsuitably, opposed to 7rpos rpoirov, Kara rpoirov. 6.T70 ShSpwv KaraSelv (Xen.), to tie to trees. (2) Of Time :— After, since : airo ra>v (titwv SiairovelaOai. Xen. To work after meals. Phrases : to dirb rovSe, henceforth ; d<£' oS, ex quo, since , dirb iraXaiov, dp^aCov, of old ; dcj> eo-7r£/oas (ThUC. vii. 29), at even. (3) Origin : — ol fJLev airo 6eav tyeyovores, ol & el; avrmv tcov 0ea>v Isoc. Some descended (remotely) from gods, others begotten (directly) by the gods themselves. Material : K/oao-ts & J»fefc rosoft@ PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY. 297 Agent, less direct than inrd : iirpdy^dt] air' clvtZv ovSev. THUC. i. 17. Nothing was achieved by them. See Poppo's note. diro with a case is often a periphrasis for a case alone, e.g. o mrb rwv Boporpopmv (jbd/Jos, fear of the body guard, Xen. Hier. x. 3; t<3v dirb tSjv &r)p.ov Tts, one of the people, Thuc. iv. 130. Thucydides's partiality for a free use of dn-6 is remarkable. (4) Pheases : — oi wiro TLvdayopov, JlXarwi/os, the school of Pythagoras, Plato. ol a7ro -njs 'Aiavovs, openly; diro yXuxra-rj's tnrilv, to state by word of mouth (Thuc. vii. 10), to repeat by heart (Xen. Symp. iii. 5), from hearsay (Aesch. Ag. 813); 6p.p.dn>v diro (Eue. Med. 216), with one's own eyes; dirb tov avTop-drov (Tavrofidrov), spontaneously, sponte, casu quodam ; dirb ? GtXkaTTeiV. Plat. To change city after city. With verbs of rest : £k SevSpoiv dirdyf^crOai. THUC. iii. 8.1. To hang themselves on trees. Phrases : Hence many phrases (observe that the first three or four are instances of Constructio Praegnans) : tows Ik tj/s vavfiaxta-s (ovk dveXo/*6vovs), Plat. Apol. xx., those in the sea- fight ; 06 Ik vrfTv, in accordance with the laws ; opObi !£ 6pQG>v Stypwv, Soph. El. 742, erect in chariot erect ; en rrjs ^vx'ijs (ex dvfiov, Hom.) with all one's heart ; Ik o-avrrjs (Alyeis), self -prompted, Soph. El. 344, cf. ora-d ; eK jtoAAoC, at a long distance, Xen. ; kn rogov pvp,a,Tos, Xen., at bow-shot ; tK x e P°s f-d-x^v TToUurdai, Xen., to fight hand to hand. (2) Of Time :— Since, after: ef °v (XP° V0V )> S4Mce > ex 1 u J e« tov apiarav, after breakfast. (So d-iro.) Ik toijtov, after this (£k tovtwv gen. in consequence of this). Ik tov Xoarov (t£v Aoinw) for the future, Xen. and Plat. After, denoting change : ex SaKpvmv yeXav. Xen. To laugh after tears (weeping). tdAos ck SeSo/DKOTOS Kai 7tto>xos dvrl irXovcriov. Soph. 0. T. 454. Blind after seeing, and poor instead of (being) rich. Ever since: U v kov,.U v^dlWbflMbhJM 1 childhood. PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY. 299 (3) Origin : — aya6ot icai elj aya&mv. Plat. (Of. Soph. Ant. 466.) Good, and born 0/ good parents. Material : to ayKtcrrpov kg a8d/j,a.VT0S. PLAT. Rep. 616. The hook is of adamant. Agent (Heeodot. and poetry, rare in Attic) : 6« tu>i/6" S.pxofj.ai. Soph. El. 264. By them am 1 ruled. Cf. Soph. Ant. 957. 973, Thuc. iii. 69, Xen. Hell. iii. 96. Cause, Consequence, or Means : €K iroXe/xov eiprjvrj f3ej3aiovTO.i. THUC. i. 120. Peace is secured by means of war. (Cf. Sta.) Dependence upon : Trapprjaria kg dXrjdelas r\pTi)Tai. DEM. 1397. 1. Plain speaking depends on truth (comes of). Cf. aTrayxs Ik t«3v irapovrtov, Thuc. iv. 17, so far as present circumstances allow ; kg uroiv (tov 10-ov) equally ; *k tou avrofidrov, by chance, or accident, Xejst. Jegs^monjum d*6). 366 PREPOSITIONS. Periphrasis for a case : at !£ 'AdrjvSv irapdivoi, the maids of Athens. In Composition : (1) Separation, removal, completion (cf. mro), Ik/3cuvo), i" go out ; iiar'epdm, I sack utterly, out and out. § 259. U P 6. JJpo, before, in front of. Cf. irpos. Lat. prod, pro. (1) Of Pla.ce :— Before, in front of: M.ivwa r\ vrjaos Keirat irpo Meyapoov. ThUC. The island of Minoa lies off {in front of) Megara. Hence in defence of, for the sake of. (Cf. virip) : ijOeXe Oavelv irpo Keivov. EUR. Ale. 18. She willed to die for him. Phrase. irpo 6Sov, forwards, onwards. (2) Of Time :— 01 irpo rjpbwv yeyovores. ISOC. Those who were born before us {our forefathers). 6 wpb tov xpovos, the former time, aforetime. (3) Of Eelation : — In preference to, cf. dvro, -rrepl : irpo twv fieXricTTav ra fipayyTepa alpeladai. PLAT. To choose more unimportant things in preference to the highest things. irpo iroXXov 7roi€icr#at {ripacrdai). To esteem highly, (lit. in preference to much). In Composition : (1) Forth, forward, in front, of place and so of pre-eminence, of substitution or defence, 7rpofid\\a>, I put forward; ■xpodvpov, front door; irpoeSpos, president; Trp6p.axos, champion. (2) Before, of time, Trpoaurdavop.o.1, I learn beforehand. Digitized by Microsofm PREPOSITIONS WITH GENITIVE ONLY. 301 § 260. "Avev. "Avev, without, opposed to aw. (1) Without the help of, or order of: ti fipoToU avev Aios teA- £tra6 ; Aesch. Ag. 1487, what comes to pass among men without the will of Zeus ? (miussu Iovis, love nolente). Cf. Thuc. viii. 52. In Plat. Gorg. 518 D, without reference to. (2) Except, besides (like x o, / HS ) : nav™ & vev XP vcr °v, Plat. Grit. 112 c, all things except gold, omnia praeter aurum. In Soph. 0. C. 502 avev comes after its case. § 26l. "EveKa, eveicev. "Eveica, eveicev (Ion. eiveica; eiveicev), Poet, o'vveita. Generally after its case, sometimes separated from its case (Ar. Ecc. 105-6). Lat. gratia, causa. (1) For the sake of: KoXaiceveiv eveica jjiia-dov, Xen. Hell. v. 1. 17, to flatter for the sake of {in order to get) a reward. (2) So far as concerns : epov ye eveica, so far as I am concerned ; eWa twv o^daXfimv, Plat., so far as depends on the eyes. Note. Sometimes pleonastically with other Prepositions: dm /Joijs eveKa, THUC. vii. 92 ; dp^l crov eveKa, SOPH. Phil. 534 ; rti/09 Sij x°-P tv « V£Ka > I" 1 ^ 1 - Le 9- 701 D - § 262. "E/cari. "Ekciti (Ep. with the help of). (1) Because of, on account of: dperrjs enan, Soph. Phil. 670, on account of (i.e. as a reward for) valour. (2) So far as concerns (like eveica) : irXrjOovs eWi, Aesch. Pers. 337, so far as num- § 263. Xw/HS. Xcopfc, without. (1) Without help of: irovov roi x">/hs oiSev evTVxe?, SOPH. El. 945 ; without toil nothing prospers. (2) Far from : x"V"s dvdpilnnov trriBov, Soph. Phil. 487, far from track of men. (3) Without considering, besides : x«V>''s s6 ^ MP ari f rom -reputation Plat. Apol. xxiv. (4) Different from, Plat. Lack 195 A Note, Y «v>fe is alsfi^ed^Ad^erbia^. 302 PREPOSITIONS. § 264. Besides the Prepositions, a greater number of old Cases, which have become Adverbial, are used like Prepositions with a Genitive. I. piyjti and axP l > as f ar as - (1) Of Place : ^XP 1 T ^ s ™\em, Thuc, as far as the city. (2) Of Time : ^XP L tovovtov, tovtov, so far, up to this time. (3) p.^xP l T0 ^ SiKatoi; (Swarov), so far as is right (possible). II. \api,v. (1) For the sake of : tov x&P lv i=T , ov evera; /or the sake of what, 01 wherefore? (2) Because of: x°-P LV x^" s== xAtSas ?KaTt, because of pride, Soph. 0. T. 888. (3) So far as concerns: 8a,Kpv f 01 " m y sa ke, thy sake, not x < ty >tv 1/ioC, o-ov, mea, fea cawsa, gratia. wpb's x<^P iv is also redundantly used, with reference to, for the sake of, Soph. Ant. 30, 908. III. Several old Accusatives adverbially used, meaning like, after the fashion of: Slktjv (lit. usage) ; rpoirov (way) ; Se/xas (Epic only, form or body). Of. Lat. instar. IV. oiA.is, 3.8tjv, enough/ Stx a > opart; \ddpa, Kpv^a, secretly. V. Many old local cases. lyytis, near (also takes Dative); eicr, Ivtos, within; €'£a>, Iktos, ivithout; fiira^v, between; Trpocrio, iroppui, airoOev, far from ; irpocrOev, ep.Trpocrdev, in front of ; OTriOTepoi6ev, eKaTepudev, 'ivdev Kai 'ivdev, on both sides of; 7repa, irkpav, beyond, across ; dvTLTnpas, KaravrtTrepas, dvriKpv, KaravTiKpv, opposite. (c.) WITH DATIVE ONLY. § 265. TSv. 'Ev (poet, eiv, evi, elvi), in, within, opposed to eh, into, and ef, out of. Lat. in, Eng. in, Germ. in. Cf. dvd. [The old Adverbial usage of ev still continues in the phrase iv 81, and among, and therein, and besides. Several instances occur in Sophocles.] Digitized by Microsoft® PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY. 303 (1) Of Place (see Dative of Place) : — At, near, by, on : Aemrv^iSrji; rjyelTo twv ev MvicaXr) 'EWrjvmv. ThuC. Leoty chides commanded the Greeks at Mycale. Tpaire&vs oucelrai ev t«5 Ev^etvm TrovTtp. Xen. Trapezus is built on the Euxine sea. Among : vofioi kv 7rao-tv evSoKi/ioi xois "EAAijcriv. PLAT Laws famous among all the Greeks. Elliptically (supply o'Um, or some such word), mostly with proper names in Attic. Cf. ety. iv M8ov, in Hades. h'Aoitppovo's, Plat. Trot. 320 a, in the house of Ariphron ; kv Aiovia-ov, m the temple of Dionysus, Dem. 21. 8. Iv TraiSorpifiov, kv KiOapurrov, at (the school) of the gym- nastic -master, the cithara-player. Also an Epic use (the complete construction sometimes occurs, e.g. elv AiSao So/holo-i, Od. iv. 834). With Verbs of Motion (Constructio Praegnans). Cf. el?, converse construction. 01 ev t£ 'Hpai(j> KaraTefavyoTes. XEN. Hell. iv. 5. 5. Those who had fled to (and were in) the chapel of Hera. (2) Of Time (see Dative of Time) :— Within a space of, during : ev rah (nrovSah, during the armistice, Xen. ev Tovjm, meanwhile ; ev a>, ev oata, whilst. (3) Of Eelation : — Occupation, Condition : oi ev T015 irparfjxaai, ol ev reXei. THUC. Those who are engaged in public affairs, those who are in office, i.e. ministers of state, the authorities, the govemmen^g^ by Microsofm 304 PREPOSITIONS. iv ^lAoo-oi^to;, iv Aoyots, iv Trj Te\vy.eivai. To be engaged in philosophy, in oratory, im, an art. €ivai iv 6/3 t° blame ; iv 15801/17 etvai ap^ovres, ThTJC. 1. 99, to give satisfaction as rulers; iv «aA etvai (= ko. A<2? 'ix eiv )> Eur. Heracl. 971, to be well; iv SUy SiKaiws, in justice ; ev Trapao-Kevfj etvai, to be in a state of preparation, Thtjc. ii. 80 ; iv 6VAois elvai, to be under arms (so iv rogois, equipped with arrows; iv <£o/DTtois Tpe\€iv, to run with burdens on the back, Xen.). Dependent on : ev Tais yvvai^tv ecrriv r\ awTr/pia. ARIST. The safety (of Greece) depends on the ladies. So, very often, ev 7' e/j,oi, ev croiye, etc., penes me, quantum in me est, so far as lies, depends on me, tJiee. iv T(p 0e(p to reAos rjv, ovk iv ip.01. DEM. 292. 21. The issue rested with God, not with me. Cf. Soph. 0. G. 1443, 0. T. 314. With respect to or at : ■yeAwr' iv croi ycAw. SOPH. Ant. 551. I laugh a laugh at thee. A rare use, but found with Compounds, iyyeXZ, ivv- fipl(<*>. Instrument, Means, Manner (a special use, originally denoting Place) : ev 6da\.p.ols (8/ifiacTiv) opav, Hom. and Attic. To see with the eye (in oculis). Sophocles is fond of this iv. Cf. Phil. 60, 102, 1293, Antig. 691. Cf. also Eur. Bacch. 277, Thuu. i. 77 (vo- /tots), vii. 11 (eVioroAats). In Composition : (1) In, at, near, ip,/3dXXa>, I throw in ; iyytXw, I laugh at. (2) Of inherent qualities, 'ip^wvos, endowed with voice, cf. eVvouos. Digitized by Microsoft® PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVE ONLY. 305 § 266. %vv. Svv (£w, old Attic form), with, together with, opposed to avev. Lat. cum. Compare throughout with fierd. Together with : eiraiSevero aw tw a$e\ ai length, Xen. Gyr. viii. 6. Old Adverbial use : /j/rj f-iiv Ka/caJs iroiew avTovs. ThUC. 1U. 13. Not jointly (i.e. together with the Athenians) to mjwe them. Cf. Soph. Ai. 960, Aesch. Ag. 586 (—fwthermore), Soph. Ant. 85 (moreover), El. 299. In Composition : (1.) Together with, awayopevw, I speak with another. (2o. Completely, avpirXrjpQ, I Jill completely, cf. complegr. With numerals, a distributive force is given, e.) avvrpets, thresj^kmifigtMmeim three apiece. 306 PREPOSITIONS. § 267. Note on crvv and pera. crvv, together with, denotes mere addition, juera, together with, m the midst of, in the company of, denotes participation with, community of action. Thus (in Homer) : /tei-a S/itocov itiv£ /cat fjcrdie. Od. x. 140. He was drinking and eating in the company of the slaves. rjkvde crvv Sio) M£veA.a, I hold together, comprise, contain. /*£T6xto, I have with others, partake, share, 'imo-dai fiera' nvtov, to follow in the midst of others, eireo-dai v iovtos. XEN. He heard a din passing all along the ranks. Distributively, intervals of space : hid Se/ca eirdx^etov Trvpyot rjaav. Thuc. At every ten battlements were towers. So Sia ttoXXov, 81a irXila-Tov, 8t' lAao-o-ovos, at a great dis- tance, greatest distance, short distance. Cf. Eur. Andr. 1251 (S.XXov Si' S,XXov). 2. Or Time : Throughout, cf. tvapd with Accusative : ravra 8t oXov tov aiu>vo<; /jbo^Oovai. THUC. Thus throughout their whole life they labour. So 8ict vuktos, St' rjnepas, etc., Sia Travrds, Sia reXovs, continually ; Si 1 oXiyov, for a little while. Of intervals after : eoace Bid ttoXXov ^pdvov a icopaicevai. AEIST. It seems that it is a long while since he has seen you. Cf. Soph. Phil. 285 {j(p6vo^ Bid ^povov, of succession in * me ) ■ Digitized by Microsoft® 308 PREPOSITIONS. Distributively : Sia Tj-e/xjrrou erovs, or Sid irivre erwv, every fifth year, quinto quoque anno ; Si' erovs, Si' iviavTov, every year, yew by year. 3. Causal : The notion is that of a coining between or intervening. The intermediate agent, through the medium of, by the agency of: e\ev\a.Krjs, oiktou %x elv ("vo, ti), to be angry with, keep in prison, feel pity for. Sia o-To/taTos «x € ' v > A""?/"'? 5 ) o"rkpvmv, to have on one's lips, in one's memory, in the breast. Si' opyfjs, angrily ; Sid ottovStjs, hastily ; Sid Ppa\kmv, shortly; Sid paKpmv, at length (e.g. toi>s Aoyous ■xoufaOai, io^^cf b ^%^mb i^okly, shortly. PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 309 B. With Accusative — generally denotes close con- tiguity. 1. Of Place and Time : Throughout, during : Epic and poetical only. Cf. Aesch. Swpp. 15, Soph. 0. T. 867. 2. Causal : Of the Antecedent, not the Final Cause. Of the person or thing whose intervention helps towards a result. Owing to, because of, on account of, with the help of (see note). 04 A07jvaioi 81 aperr/v, aW ov Bta tvyrfv evitcijaav. Isae. The Athenians conquered through valour, not through chance. Sia Tovs £$ p,a\op,evovs at p,d)^ai Kpivovrai. Xen. Cyr. v. 2. 35. Battles are decided by (owmg to the conduct of) those who fight well. Cf. Soph. 0. C 1129 (8id av. PLAT. Gorg. 516 E. Had it not been for the President he would have been thrown into prison. Cf. Thuc. ii. 18. Phrases : Si' ivSeiav, because of, owing to poverty (Xen. An. viii. 6) ; Si' a-yvoiav, Sia Kavpa, Sia x^'/""'"*, because of ignorance, heat, winter piiitk^tfyffipmxem «"<«, because they were 3io PREPOSITIONS. allies. Similarly the common expressions Sta ri, why 1 wherefore ? Sta ravra, on this account, because of this ; St' o, St' a, on which account. Note. For the sake of this, denoting a final cause or purpose, would be rovrov eVe/ca, not Sta ravra. For the sake of, in order to : A very rare use of St a with the Accusative. It occurs seemingly four times in Thucydides, iv. 40, St' dx0»j- 86va, in order to vex ; ii. 40, Sta rr/v crtfierepav 8o|ai>, for their own glory ; iv. 102, Sta. to irepiix^v avrrjv, im order to enclose the city; v. 103, Sta rov 6vp.aros rfv hnpa^iv, in order to exact the sacrifice. Note. It is difficult sometimes to distinguish between the causal uses of Sta with Genitive and Sta with Accusative. It is extremely difficult to account for the causal use of Sta with Accusative. Consult Riddell's Digest of Platonic Idioms for instances of Sta with Accusative in Plato and the Orators, meaning with the help of. In Composition : (1) Through, and so throughly or thoroughly, 8ta/3atvw, I go through ; Sta<£eify)s 6a\drrr)S Svcra rifavicrdrj. Plat. Tim. 25. The isle of Atlantis sank under the sea and disappeared. 2. FIGURATIVELY : Against : ol icaO' ri/jLtov Xoyoi, Dem. 15. 25, arguments against us. Cf. Soph. Phil. 65. Cf. Karriyoptt), Karayiyvma-KW twos, yjrevSofiat Kara TWOS. Concerning, with respect to : rovro eiprjTai KarairaoSiv rlov ttoXituZv. Ar. Pol. V. 7. 11. This has been asserted of all governments. So a-KOireiv, Xeyuv, fijTetv, Kara, twos, often in PLATO (see Eiddell, Digest, 163). Phrases : /car' a/cpas, utterly (Ep. /car' a/cpijs, a culmine) ; Kara te/cvcuv 6p.vvva.i, Dem., to swear by one's children; ko.6' 6'Aov (later KadoXov, see Lexicon), on the whole. B. With the Accusative, Kara denotes close proximity. 1. Oe Place : Motion down upon or after : ol 'Adyvaioi Kara, 7r68av AaKeSaifiovitov. Xen. The Athenians were sailing in the wake of the Lacedae- monians. icara. poov, down stream (cf. ava poov). r Digitized b? Microsoft® 312 PREPOSITIONS. After, in search of : ecrKe8acr/Mevoi icad' dpirayrfv. XEN. Scattered in quest of plunder. Over against, opposite : 61 'AOtjvaloi, Kara Aa/ceSaifioviovs eyevovro. XEN. The Athenians were posted opposite the Lacedae- monians. Extension throughout : rj evKafieia gkotov 'ij(ei Ka& 'EWaSa. EtTK. Discretion is under a cloud throughout Hellas. Kara yfjv /ecu Kara. ddXaao-av, by land and sea. In, connected with, belonging to : Kar' dyopdv, in the market ; cu KGtTot to p.a (rr)v ^X 1 ?") tTridv/iCai, bodily (menial) desires; rd Kara rijv iroXiv, public affairs, politics ; ia Kara tov iroX^ov, military matters. 2. Hence Figukatively : Of fitness, according to ; Kara vovv \evo-iv, agreeably to nature (opposed to irapd vcrt,v) ; Kara tov aKpifir) Xoyov, in strict state- ment ; Plat. Ap. i., ov Kara tovtovs pijTUjO, an orator of a different stamp from these men ; Kara £vp,p.aylav, by virtue of an alliance. Especially with Comparatives : eiBev veicpov fieo^a rj Kar avOpanrov. PLAT. He saw a corpse of superhuman size. Cf. ThUC. vii. 75, /ietfw r) Kara. Sdicpva TrexovdoTas. Digitized by Microsoft® PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 313 3. Of Time : Contemporary with : Bep,urroK\rjs 6 rZv Kad' eavrbv aTravroiv evSogoraros. Dem. 20. 73. Themistocles, the most illustrious man of all his con- temporaries. ol Kara. UXdrtDva, Plato and his age; /car' dpxqv, originally ; koit' elprjvrjv, in time of peace. 4. DlSTRIBUTIVELY : Of Place, Time, Money, etc., a common use : KaroiKovvTat ol MrjSoi Kara Kcofias. Heeod. The Medes live in separate villages. Kad' eva, one by One ; Kara piav ko.1 Kara. Svo Xa/Selv, DEM. 20. 77, to take (ships) one and two at a time; kwt 1 avSpa, man by man. ko.6' fjpkpav (in dies), day by day ; Kara. pr\va, Kar kviCLVTOV. Kara, raa>v. Xen. To turn a somersault over the swords. In the interior of a country : rjp^aro ei; AiBioiria, I go beyond, I transgress, omit, surpass. (2) For, m defence of, wrepaXyio, I grieve for (also exceedingly) as by (1) ; -^s^ffi^fo/ " " ' 316 PREPOSITIONS. § 272. Mera. Merd, With, among, between, after. Compare with avv. Cf. fiera-^v, between, fiera^e, afterwards. Sansk. mithas {alternately), mithu (together), German mit. CrjRTltrs (Etym. i. p. 258) denies the direct relationship between perd and /ieo-05. In Attic, fxerd is chiefly used with the Genitive. Compare with avv. A. With Genitive. With, among : 7} ifrvxri ael fiera twv Oewv Siayei. PLAT. The soul lives for ever with the gods (in their society). /heto. ^vfifidx^v KLvSvvevew, Thuo. viii. 23, to run risk in common with allies. On the side of: ovk eiKos to rfjs Tuxqi OL€(r6ai del /J.ed' vjxZv 'itrecrOai. Thtjc. iv. 18. It is not reasonable to suppose that the influence of fortime will ever be on your side. Cf. Plat. Apol. xxii., /ieto TOIJ VO/XOV. Joined to : to-^os tc Kal kciAAos /aero, vyieias. PLAT. Hep. 591 B. Strength and beauty joined to health. Modal, cf. avv, and Dative alone : i/cerewe toiis SiKacTTas /UEToi iroWQv SaKpvutv. Plat. Apol. xxiii. He besought the judges with many tears. Phrases : fiera twos eft/at, to be 0% one's side ; ol ^et<£ nvos, one's companions ; per 1 d\r]6das, truly. B. With Accusative (rare in Attic). Next in order to : (iera deovg ^rvxv Oeidrarov. Plat. Leg. 726. Next to the gofyfae^u^mo^divine. PREPOSITIONS WITH TWO CASES. 317 Other usages of fierd with the Accusative, going among, going in quest or search of, according to, are chiefly Epic. For them the Lexicon should be consulted. Note 1. With the Accusative /^era denotes either (1) motion to the midst of, or (2) extension- over the midst of. The idiomatic phrases with /jcto and Accusative will fall under one of these two heads. Thus (1) fiera ravra, next to, after this (lit. going into the midst of, and so succeeding, or coming next to); (2) fiW vmipav, interdiu, in the daytime {during, extending over the day); jiterci x"/°as ex etv > f° have *** hand. Note. 2. In Homer and in poetry perd is also used with the Dative to denote presence among, one among others, without the close connexion denoted by the Genitive. fitTa 8e Tpirdrouriv avacrcrev, II. i. 252, he was ruler among (in the presence of) the third generation. Cf. Eur. Erechth. 26. As an adverb : Among, amid, next, afterwards, often in Homer. In Herod, also afterwards, pera Se, &rX«re k.t.X., i. 128. In Composition : (1) Together with, /ueT«x* ) , I have together with or share. (2) Going- to, among, or extending over, or in the midst of: /teraix/ttov, the space between armies ; /j,e8ir)/ju, 1 let loose (among). (3) Of succession, alternation, change, juctuSo/o- 7rios, after dinner ; peTayiyvwo-KO), I change my mind; perdvota, repentance. N.B, Coming among implies following some, and so suc- cession and alternation. Thus if a bead is put among or between others in a necklace, it comes after, and alternates with, other beads. III.— PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. § 273. 'A/t#. 'Afi(j>l, on loth sides (about, around). Cf. a/icpca, dfupo- reoo?. Sansk. abhi, Lat. amb, (am-, an-), amb-o, amb-io. 'AfMpi related in form to dfii<: as e'/e to e'£. Compare throughout With ^itized by Microsoft® 318 PREPOSITIONS. Note. In Attic Prose dp.<$>L is practically used with the Accusative only. A. With Accusative. About the time of, cf. ire pi: 77S77 rjv dfMJH ayopav irXTjdovaav. XEN. It was now already about full market time {forenoon). dpcj>l TrevTrjKovTa 6x57, about 50 years. (Employed) about : aaKovai tcl afit tov irohepbov. XEN. They practise the arts of war. dpl ti (e.g. cttttovs, dppara, Sewrvov, etc.) ex e ' v > e ' Vl TLpuTayopav (IIAaTajva), the school of Protagoms (of Plato). The phrase (especially in later writers) is a periphrasis for Pythagoras himself. So 01 dpcju Sl Meyapeas kgu Xial ttoXlv, Aesch. Sept. c. Iheb. 843 (care about the city). B. With Genitive (the uses are very rare and wholly Epic, Ionic, and Poetic). Concerning, cf. irepi : dpl o-ijs Aeyw iratSds, Eur. Hec. 580 (7 tell thee of thy child). Cf. Soph. Phil. 554. Aesch. Ag. 67, dpl yvvaiKos (in the cause of). Round about : Hdt. viii. ISl^^te&^r"). PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 319 C. With Dative (wholly Epic, Ionic, and Poetic). Among : (dfKJil KXaSots efo/tera, Euk. Phoen. 1518 (seated among branches). Concerning : a/KJi 6/mh o-TEveis, Soph. El. 1180 (thou sighest for, about me). PHKASES, cf. vepi: dfil T), prae pavore, for fear. In poetry. As an adverb, on either side. Homeric use. § 274. 'Em. 'Eirl, on the surface of, upon, by, to. Cf. en-el, then. Sansk. api, further, after, Lat. ob. See anro. A. With Genitive. 1. Of Place = Upon, with verbs of rest : ira<{ o t €tti 777? icai vtto 777? ftpvcro?. PLAT. All the gold on earth and under the earth. So £(f>' i7r7rov, very often. With verbs of motion : eire/iyfrav avrovs em rpi^pov;. XeN. They sent them away on board a trireme. And in Gonstructio Praegnans, dvafirjvai em wvpymv, Xen., to climb up, and be on towers. Towards (a common use) : ol jjvfjL/Aa'Xpt, ave%a>pr}crav eir olkov. THUO. The allies returned homewards. Cf. i. 60, em Qpa/fvi- „„. ^ Digitized by Microsoft® 320 PREPOSITIONS. In, by, near, at : £7ri v-fja-ov, in the island ; 77/5 cti fays (Soph. 0. C), in a foreign land ; iv ayopq. «ri t!ov rpairetfUv, Plat. Ap. 1, m the market at (by) the tables of the banks; kin 81- Kcwrripiov, ISAE., in COwt. to eirt Bp$Kys, Thuc. (see Poppo and Kriiger) (the parts in) the neigh.be/wrhood or the district of Thrace or Thraoe- wards. So «u t^s AaKcovc/djs, v. 34. lirl rfj's auroJi' fiivnv, to remain in their own country, Thuc iv. 118. In presence of, coram. Cf. irapa. k^eXkyyea-Oai eirl wavrutv. DEM. 781. 4. To be convicted in presence of all. 2. Of Time (very common) : e7rt Kvpov fiacriXevovTO*;, in the reign of Cyrus ; eiri @'e/MaToicKeov<; apypvTos, in the archonship of Themistocles ; e-rri twv -Trare'pcov, in the time of our fathers ; eir e/xov, in my time ; to? eirt, kivBvvov, as in time of danger (Thuc. vi. 34). 3. Figuratively: Set over, engaged in : e/j,€vev ewi Trj<; ap^r)<;. XEN. He was continuing in command. Phrases : So peveiv eiri tivos, to abide by a thing ; liri tZv irpa.yp.6^ t(i>v (tov iroA.6/*ov) etvai, to be engaged in business, in war ; hn, yv&pvqs ytyvarOai, to come to an opinion, Dem. 42. 4. o e-irl raiv ojtAitcov (ottXwv), eirl rmv lirrrkw, the commander of the infantry, cavalry ; 6 iirl rrjs Skhktjo-ews, the con- troller of the treasury, paymaster-general. Resting, dependent upon, e' eavrov otVeiv Digitized by Microsoft® ' PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. yi\ Xen., to live apart, separately; ifi vp,!ov avr&v /3aA- \eo-6ai, Hdt., to consider by yourselves ; i' IwvtZv Sia- Xiyovrai, Hdt., they speak a language or dialect of their own, a distinct dialect; hr' dyKvpeaw, at anchor, Hdt. i. 188. In the case of : With \eyai, alo-ddvofiai, o-kottS) (I examine or consider), Kpivw, I decide or judge. a £ttI rav aXkatv Spare, ravr' e' vp.G>v avTW ayvoeire. Is. viii. 114. What you see in (the case of) others, that you are ignorant of in your own case. So or' ipov keyuv, Plat. Rep. 475, to speak in my own case, to take myself as an instance ; iirl iravToiv 6p.o'w>% in all cases i " Galled after : KCKAijcrflat, 6vop.a' ckcltov. Xen. Cyr. ii. 4. 2. The length of the line was four hundred, its depth one hundred. ity evds, m single file ; hr 6Xly' eKao-nov, Plat., on each occasion. fort TeXevrrjs, at last; «ri ' mi/. toxis OTrAtTas ore vavcrlv 6X.tya.is evdvs TrefXTvovcriv. Thug. ii. 80 (cf. iv. 10). They at once despatch the hoplites in (on board) a few ships. Against : ai vrjes £' ij^iv Terdxarai. ThUC. iii. 13 (cf. iv. 70). The ships are drawn up against us. Cf. Soph. Ai. 51, «r' Sfifiaa-t fidXXeiv (Constr. Praegn.). In, at, near, by : oi/ce'ovres eirl Hrpvpovi, Hdt., living on the shores of, or near, the Strymon. Digitized by Microsoft® PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 323 of twv dpitTTtav IIepcr<3v irafSes eVt rats fia(ri\eu>s Ovpais TraiSevovrai. XEN. An. i. 9. 3. The sons of the noblest Persians are brought up at (close by) the king's gate (at the " Sublime Porte "). Of. Soph. Tr. 1100, Phil. 353. Next after : to, em tovtok, the next step. Of. Hom. Od. vii. 216, ov yap ri arvyepr) eiri yaa-repi Kvvrepov aWo, naught more blatant next to (than) the belly. ot IttI irao-tV, the rear ; oAiyoi ™v hrl 7racriv vwb tSiv \pi\Qv airidavov, few of the rear were slain by the light- armed, Xen. Hell. i. 1. 34. 2. Of Time (rarely) : Generally of succession, after, or following : eKTfi hrl SeKary or rrj e/crg hrl 8h«x. Dem. 279. 18, 288. 29. On the lbth of the month (sixth after the tenth). Near, about (very rare in Attic) : fjv fjXios hrl Sw/ious. Xen. An. vii. 3. 34. It was near sunset (the sun was at his setting). 3. FIGURATIVELY : Set over and actively engaged in : Toils hrl rots trpa.ypjo.o-iv ovtos airilavTai. DEM. They accuse those who are engaged in public affairs. So oi hrl reus /i5jx ava ' s i *""' T0 ' s Ka A"7^-°'Sj XEN., thcte in guard of the engines, the camels, etc. Generally at, in, of circumstances ; hrl t<£> irapovn, Thxtc. ii. 36, on the present occasion (to speak) ; hrl t, Xen., at supper. With : (by no means an infrequent use). Of. Eur. Bacch., hr' evdo-pao-i, with joyous shouts (cf. 1368). Of. also Soph. Ant. 556, hr' app^ols Aoyois, with words unspoken, kir' kfyupyo.o-p.kv.01% when a deed is done and over, Aesch. Ag. 1379, Soph. Ai. 377, Eue. Bacch. 1039. Digitized by Microsoft® 324 PREPOSITIONS. In reference to, in case of, connected with : vd/tov ridkvai iirl tlvi, Plat., to make a law for, in the case of, a person (for or against him) ; so vo/j.os kcitm hri tlvi, DEM. to i-n-l t$ o-w/mTi kclXXo?, Plat., beauty of person. Upon, i.e. accumulated on, added to : •TrrjfiaTa em irrniaariv nrlirrovTO. SOPH. Ant. 595. Woes falling on woes. So itrl Tovroif, , thereupon, on. this, very frequently in Attic. Hence probably phrases connected with meals : «ri t as etvai. (Be named) after, on the ground of : eirl rrj e'xfyp o-rao-ts K£/cA?jTai, Plat. Bep. 470, see Stall- baum and references there, sedition is so called from (intestine) hatred. Causal, with words of emotion, at, for, because of: eiru tovi fiaXHTTa ayaWrj ; Xen. In what do you most take delight ? So with x a V") I rejoice ; o-e/H/wo/mt, I pride myself , oWxepcuvw, I am.mxed, etc., and corresponding adjec- tives, and substantives such as eiraivos, <£tAoTi/ua, etc. So fr/uofotfat %f g ^^ 6ro %Jfe fmed for a thing. PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 325 Condition : eirl rovTip irwefyorapai Trjs ap^ryi. HeeOD. On this condition I resign my command. So very often «ri tovtq, ihri toijtois, k(f> $ (tc), «r* ovSevt, kirl rots (ifyrjfitvoi's, on the conditions expressed. Motive : ifrevSerat re icah eiri tt} efirj SiafioXfj Xeyet. Plat. Apol. v. He is lying, and is speaking with a view to prejudice you against me. eirl KaKovpyiif, Thuc. i. 37, for knavish purposes ; ovk «ri vfipitjzcrOai aXX' eiri t£ rjyepoves elvai, THTJC. i. 38, not m order to be insulted, but m order to be rulers ; hrl t£ icepSei, Xen. for gain ; eirl vcxptq., to get wisdom, Plat. N.B. In Plat. Prot. 358 b, with Gen., IttI rov aAwws 0Jv, with a view to living a painless life ; Liddell and Scott. The reward or price : tvyyeve&dat L Opr)pZ «rt ir6' 00-ov So., so far as is necessary ; eirl v dBbeq/ui (the wrong done by me), Xen. Phrases : oi irapa twos, one's friends, dependants, messengers, etc., Thug, and Xen. ; to. irapa Ttvos, one's commands, purposes, opinions ; trap' iavrov SiSovai, to give of one's resources, or spontaneously; Trap' Zpov, Pl. Prot. 322 D, by my advice. 1 The Genitive with irapa appears to represent the Ablative ; thus irapax^pew tou fSrlfiaros would first have meant to move sideways from the tribune. „ „. „„ Digitized by Microsoft® PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 329 B. With Dative, by the side of, near, by, with. (Of persons, seldom of places, wapd aoi, at your side.) Among, with : trap vp.lv eTpd(f)7]v, AESCHIN., I was brought up among you. KardXveiv trapa nvi, Dem., to lodge with any one, chez quelqu'un. Belonging to : to p,ev xpvtriov Trapa tovtw, ot 8e kivSvvoi Trap' vp.tv. Aeschin. iii. 240. This man gets the gold, you the dangers. In presence of: eis Kpimv Kadta-rdvai riva Trapa, tivi. THUC, DEM. To bring any one to trial before another. In the judgment of: Trapa. rots (ppovovo-iv ei8oKipuv. Is. 9. 74. To be in good repute with sensible people. So Trap' ipot, me iudice. Trapa o-avT$, PLAT. Phrases : 01 Trap' Ipoi (rjptv), my own people; to. Trap' kp.01, my affairs. 1. Motion to (with per- sons, irapa ere, to your side), with verbs of motion. 2. Motion or extension alongside, with verbs of rest. 3. Parallelism and com- parison, side by side, figuratively. Digitized by Microsoft® c J C. With the Accusative : < 330 PREPOSITIONS. I. Of Place : 1. Motion to : ewefl^rav Trap' 'ABrjvalow; 7rpe«7/3et9. XHUC They sent envoys to the Athenians. ekriivai, oitoV napd rtva, to enter, go to any one's house. Cf. Genitive and Dative. 2. Extension along or beside : 7] Trapa daXacraav MaiceSovia. ThTJC. The seaboard of Macedonia. Cf. Xen. An. iii. 5. 1, Soph. El. 183. 3. Parallelism and Comparison : Side by side (with verbs of examining) : irap' aKkrfka ecrrai (paveparaTa. DEM. Set side by side they will be most conspicuous. Trap' oppa, before one's eyes, Eur. Supp. 484. Compared with (often implying superiority) : peyaXt) pOTrfj ij t v XV va P a ira.VTa to. twv avnpanrwv it pay para. DEM. 2. 22. Fortune is a mighty makeweight compared with all human influences. Cf. Xen. Apol. i. 4. 14 (so used especially with comparatives). Beyond and contrary to, opposed to /card : Many phrases : irapa. hvvapiv, beyond one's strength. Trapa to Sikoiiov, ras (nroi/Sas, tovs vopovs, vcriv, yvu>pr)v, S6£av (Adyov), contrary to, or in violation of ', justice, the treaty, the laws, nature, opinion, expectation (praeter opinionem, spem). Note. Several peculiar and much debated constructions occur with jrapa and the Accusative. Causal : Owing to, in consequence of, cf. Bid with Accusative. €Kaev io w ^ n a narrow 333 PREPOSITIONS. or a hollow victory. Similarly Trap' oiSev, pinpov, oXlyov iroieurOai, ayeiv, dicrdai, eTvai, to hold of no, little, account, be of little account. In Composition : (1) Alongside, Trapto-Tripi, / set alongside; irapa/3dXXop,ai, I expose or stake ; 7rapd\Xr]X.os, beside one another. Hence (2) of alternation, TrapaXXdo-o-o), I make alternate. (3) Aside, beside the mark, amiss, irapa/3aiva>, / transgress. § 276. Tlepi. Ilepi, round about, beyond, over, very (cf. adverbial use). Cf. nrept-^, round about; mpto-a-os, excessive ; — Trap, how- ever much. Sansk. pari, round about, Lat. per(magnus). See irapa. Compare throughout with dp.cf>L A. With Genitive. In prose the meanings are figurative : the local use is Epic and poetical (cf. Eur. Tro. 818). The Object for or about which : aytovi^eade iravres irept aperr}*;. Xen. Strive all of you after excellence. So o dywv (6 kivSvvos, etc.) rrepl foxV* ("" e P' tSv peyicmov) Zo-tl, the struggle is for life (for the highest objects). With verbs of caring, thinking, fearing, etc. : peXei poi, {SovXevofiai, 4>of3ovpat rrepl tivos, I care etc. for a thing. Also of saying and hearing . dyy£XXu>, Xeyw, aKOVto, pep.vrjp.ai rrept Ttvos. The use of these verbs with Trepj. should be compared with the use of the simple Genitive in Epic and in Poetry. Phrases : iprrdpm ?xav mpi tivos, Aeschin., to be experienced in a thing. (Cf. ^^vy^L^enitive without ™ P L) PREPOSniOtfS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 333 Periphrastically : at irepl 'HpaicXeovs irp&geis, Plat., the deeds of Heracles. iroieuroai, fiyeicrdai ri irepl ttoXXov ((r/juKpov, ovSevos, iravros), to esteem a thmg highly, etc. irepl here contains the old meaning beyond, cf. irepiyiyvopai, I get beyond, i.e. 1 1 B. With Dative. Comparatively rare in Prose : in a local sense the Dative denotes a closer connexion than the Genitive, cf. hri with Genitive and Dative. Close round, around and upon ; the literal meaning leads on to the figurative : elSe irepl rij X^P 1 T0 " venpov %pvcrovv SaicTvXiov. Plat. He saw round the finger of the corpse a golden ring. A good example in Xen. An. vii. 4. 4, irepl rots cn'epvois, etc. Keirai Be i/e/cpos irepl veKpui. SOPH. Ant. 1244. Be lieth dead, clasping close the dead. Transfixed by a weapon : Common in Homer (so dp,i, Od. xii. 395). ireTrrwra rQSe irepl veoppdvrtp £tei. SOPH. Ai. 828. Fallen upon this new-reeking sword. The Object about which, very rare in Prose (cf. Gen.) : irepl tq SifcsAip &TTai 6 dydv. THUG. VI. 34. The struggle will be for Sicily. See Poppo. irepl T X"¥"V ^eurav. THUC. i. 67. They feared for (about) the place. Cf. Plat. Prot. 314 a, wept rots faX-rdms -. Phaed. 114d,. irepl t$ crw/xcm. The cause (poetical). Cf . dfil : irepl 4>6fi(j>, irepl rap/Sei, irepl xa/ytart. (In Poetry.) F <»f m >f W %%£U%cro S om 334 PREPOSITIONS. C. With Accusative. [Motion round about, Epic] 1. Of Place, the literal meaning sometimes running into the Figurative : Rest round about, near, at, by, in : ol ecj>j]/3oi Koi/j,a>vrat irepi ra ap%e2a. Xen. The Ephebi sleep by (in the neighbourhood of) the town-hall. . KaX t»js Ke<£v. Ar. Aeh. 1180. And he fell on a stone and lias cracked his crown. Cf. DEM. 21. 4, irepi avrd Karappeiv. Fall in ruins (lit. about themselves). So THUC. vii. 23, irepi dAA.77A.as Tapa,\deura.L. Cf. the Dative, irepi, £i<£et, etc. rj irepi Aevjiov vavpa.\ia. XEN. Sell. iL 3. 22. The sea-fight off Lesbos. 2. Time: About or near, with numbers : rj&r) tjv Trepi irKr]dovcrav ar/opav. Xen. It was now near full-market hour. So irepc tovtovs toijs XP° V0V? - THUC. About this period, or time. irepi ej38ofi.riKovTa, Thuc. i. 54, about seventy. 3. Figuratively : Be busied aboiot, engaged in. Cf. d/j,l : With eTvcu, yiyvecrOai, Siarpifieiv, mrpt riva, or T6. trmtppoveiv ( r ' orrouSafetv W&A Adjectives : wourjpos, J ^ 6orf ) . dyaflds, > irepi ti , > m tfAe matter of. etc., j ^ J oya#ds 7rept riji/ 7rdAtv. (rood as regards the state, i.e. a patriotic citizen. With Substantives, Periphrasis for Genitive or Adjective : 01 vo/J.01 ot irept tous yap.ovs, Plat. Crito, 50 D, fe 2am wfeA. rgfofe fc> marriage, marriage laws ; ot wepl Awtav Myoi, Plat. Phaedr. 279 a, £Ae speeches of Lysias; fi wept <£tA,Mr7rov rupavvt's, Xen. iZeK. v. 4. 2, Philip's despotism ; ra irepl ras vaSs, Thuc. i. 3, waraZ affairs ; to. mpl Kvpov, Hdt. i. 95, the deeds or history of Cyrus. Phrases : oi TTcpi nva, a person's retinue or suite ; ot 7rept 'HpaKAetTov, Plat., the school of Seracleitus ; ot irepl 'Ap\tav ?roAep> apX°h Xen., Archdas and his fellow-polemarchs. 01 7rept ixovcriK-qv, (j>iX.ocro, I put around; irepuriwTio, I fall around, embrace, fall foul of, into; irtpi- yiyvo[mi, I get beyond, excel, survive, escape; ireptxapTjs, exceedingly glad. Digitized by Microsoft® 336 PREPOSITIONS. § 277. II/30S. U/30? (Ep. and Dor. 77730™, ttotl), towards, to, in front of, before, opposite, beside. Sansk. prati, towards, Eng. forth-with. IIpo-Ti is formed from 77700'. Cf. irp6cr-9ev, in front. A. With Genitive, 1 generally of direction towards, or with reference to, without implied motion. Towards : In presence or in sight of : o tl hUatov ea-rt km 77730? 6ewv ical 717309 avdpayrrcov Xen. Whatever is right in the sight of gods and men. to 777309 Hacv5)vo<; rel^ps e^erei^iaav. XEN. They completed the wall which faced Sicyon. A very common usage in prose and poetry (the verb, such as iivai or Kelo-dai, is readily understood). So in entreaties : V / II 19' 71730? vvv v elvai. Dem. Alcibiades is said to have been descended from the Alcmaeonidae on the father's side. 1 Observe that the Genitive with irp6s is a genuine Genitive and not a representative of the lost Ablative, — connection, not separation, being denoted. Digitized by Microsoft® PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 337 Cf. Soph. Ai. 1305, tovs npos ai^aro's, blood relations. Cf. Soph. El. 1125 and 1075 (ra irpos t£kvjs fyt£T6/)(Xs So'^ijg, Thuc. iii. 59, it does not accord with your reputation. In favour of: 7T/30S t&v ej(pvT(ov <5ot/3e TOV VOflOV Ttdrjv. Eur. Thou makest this law in favour of the rich, Phoebus. On the part of, at the hand of: hraivov rev^erai 717305 yovv e/iov. SOPH. He shall meet with praise at least from me. The agent with Verbs and Adjectives (very common in Ionic and in poetry) : KCpos ofi.oXoye.lTai irpos iravTiov KpaTto-ros yeveo~9ai. Xen. An. i. ix. 20. Cyrus is admitted by all to have been most excellent. Cf. Aesgh. P. V. 650, Soph. An. 919 (ep^/tos 71-pos 4>i\a>v). Cf. El. 562 (with a Substantive). In poetry also, rarely, of things. Soph. El. 1236. B. With Dative. Near or beside, in rest : ol Trora/Mol 7T/30? rats irrjr/al'; ov jj,etya\oi eiaiv. XEN Rivers near their sources are not big. Soph. 0. T. 1169, 7rpos t£> oWco, on the brink of horror. In presence of : In Demosthenes : -pds tois ;pdfciv, airoKpiveo-dai 71-pos nva. Soph. El. 640, irpbs <3s (to proclaim), publidy, in broad daylight, in luce. Xkyuv irpos nva, to speak in reply, advorsus aliquem. Aiyeiv Kara tivos, to speak against (in accusation of), in aliquem. Digitized by Microsoft® PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 339 With verbs of considering : "koylaaade 77730? vfia<; avrov Xen., to feel safe or comfortable about. Miscellaneous Phrases: With a purpose: ypr) 777309 to irapbv uet fiovkeveaOat,. Isoc. We should ever deliberate with an eye to the present. So eroi/jos, xPV 'Ka^s ""pos ts, ready, etc., for a purpose. According to : irpbs aXXov tfiv, Dem., to live according to the standard of another, wpos rrjv 5vva.jj.iv, according to one's ability (pro viribus). irpbs rets tux«s (Eur. Hipp. 701), suited to one's fortunes. In consequence of, on hearing : yakeiraiveiv 777309 ri. THUC. To be annoyed on hearing. a0vfia>6{3ov irpbs <$>6j3ov KO.Ta\\aTTe Eur. Med. 538 (laws not made) in support of violence; cf. Soph. Ant. 30, 7rpds x"/"" /&>/>&, /or rjSovr/s, vir' opyrjs, by, in consequence of, from, for, disease, pleasure, anger. virb KijpuKOS evicts eiroiovvTO. THUC. VI. 32. At the direction of a herald they were offering prayers, praeeunte praecone. Hence of accompanying circumstances : Frequently of music : ioTpareveTO virb (rvplyyiav. HdT. l. 17. He used to march to war to the sound of the pipe. Cf. Soph. El. 711. Eur. Baceh. 156. So irlveiv virb craAirryyos, Ar. Ach. 1001, to drink to the trumpet's sound. vir' ev<$>rjp.ov /Joijs dvcrai, SOPH. El. 630, to sacrifice with auspicious cry. virb tfxivov iropevecrdai, to march by torchlight. iVo jto/otjjs, in procession. Hdt. ii. 45. Note, vtto has this sense with the Dative in early and late Greek, e.g. Hesiod and Luctan (see Liddell and Scott) ; also rarely in Attic with the Accusative, Plat. Leg. 670 A, vir opxrjo-w k vp.(ov avrlov Kal p,f) virb rwv iro\ep.[u)v, Thuo. iv. 64, of your own free-will, and not compelled by the enemy. viro here denotes the Agent. Digitized by Microsoft® PREPOSITIONS WITH ALL THREE CASES. 343 B. With Dative. u7ro means under, in a local sense, less frequently in Prose than in Poetry. Under : evK\er]<; davel r]Xiq> /x,aicpw. Euk. Al. 150. Glorious thou wilt die, The noblest woman far beneath the sun. Cf. Xen. An. i. 2. 8, vwo Tr) aicpoiroXei etvai. Covered by : rt e'x"? virb t<£ IpariQ; Plat. Phaedr. 228 D. JFiW k« ^ow concealed under your cloak 2 Cf. AESCH. -<4, I accompany in song. (2) Under, wrei/M, I am under. (3) Secretly, slightly, gradually, v7ro(j>aivh>, I show or shine a little; virofZaWta, I suggest, suborn, substitute; vtripvdpos, reddish. Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTER II. THE NEGATIVES. Introductory Note. § 279- Ou negat, M77 infitiatur. ov contradicts or denies. 1 The following are typical instances of its use : ravra ovk kykvero, these things did not take place ; Tavra ovk av yivoifo, these things would not take place ; oil (p^fii, I do not assert, i.e. I deny. The statement may take an in- terrogative form, oi Tavra lyevero; did not these things take place? where an affirmative answer is expected, the person addressed being challenged or dared to say ovk iyevero. M?7 on the other hand deprecates or repudiates. The following instances taken from Homer are typical : /u.i) ifie Aa/Jot x°Aos, may not anger seize me ! ^ o-e Ki\euo, let me not meet thee ! ?j /tij sroTj ao-0e; what! say ye? {be it not that ye say!) a state- ment put deprecatingly or repudiated : Surely no ! you don't say, etc. —do you say ? Hence pj naturally expresses a prohibition, /x-q yJ epedifc provoke me not ! It also naturally expresses fear, apprehension, surmise : jj.rj pe o-Ti/3rj Safido-y, I fear (or perchance) the frost shall overpower me. The surmise may be expressed independently, as above, or it may be attached to a verb, and so pass into a Subordinate Sentence : Sel8u> /j.tj yivafiat, I fear that I may become. Again the surmise, or result deprecated, may prove true : Sd8fj o hepos rbv erepov 6p8&s Aeyeii/. PLAT. Gorg. 457 D. Note 3. Ov exerts this privative or contradictory force on any word to which it is prefixed. (a) Verbs : — u o-ripyw, 1 hate. ovk d£i<3, I consider that not ukIiS, 'u,. , , ,., (like ov SokZ), I require or ex- i K d e ^J Ihinder ^ orM ' pect that not (Thuc. ii. 89), ovk vTno-xvovp.a.1, I refuse. I disdain or refuse (Aesch. ov TrposTToiovp.0.1, dissimulo. P. V. 285). ov o-vp,povXe6(o, I advise one not to, etc. Thuc. and Hdt. ov ovk ecu ov Digitized by Microsoft 348 THE NEGATIVES. (b.) Other words : — ret ov KaXd, immorality. ov KaXcos, immorally ; ovk opOZs, wrongly. ov% els, ovk 6XiyoL=T7oX\oi, many. > ovk e\d)(i,o-TOS= fj.eyto~TOs, ovk TjKio-ra dAAa p,dX.LCTTa, HDT. iv. 170. tij9 Aeu/caSos 17 ov Trepirdxi-o-is, Thuc. iii. 95, the non-investment of Leucas. r) ovk k^ovo-U, Thuc. v. 50; r) ov 8tdX.vo-is, i. 137; r) ovk CMrdSocrss, V. 35. Iv ov Kaipii), unseasonably, Eur. Bacch. 1288. Note 4. In some of these cases the negative doubtless is due to the Greek reserve and abatement of positive assertion (litotes), e.g. ovx rj/ao-ra, not least, i.e. (by implication) most. § 28l. Ov AND fJL7] WITH ADJECTIVES, PARTI- CIPLES USED AS ADJECTIVES, ADVERBS, AND SUBSTANTIVES. (For Infinitives used as Substantives see § 283.) Ov. M17. When definite and known When the members of a individuals or members class are indefinite, so of a class are spoken of, that the expression is so that a fact is stated, virtually conditional : (or ov is used. when certain attributes are thought of, so that it is consecutive :) or when the expression is a mere vague conception, some- thing thought of rather than known, ^77 is used. Instances with /j,rj much outnumber those with oi. ot ovk aryado'i TroXirai. oi fir) icaOapol Tas %elpav. Plat. Oorg. He who is not a physician is inexperienced. beivov eaTiv r) fir] e/nretpia. Alt. Ecc. A sad thing is inexperience. Here no statement is made that any particular person is inexperienced, but the mere conception is spoken of. Note on Substantives. When oi is used with a Substantive, the expression is equivalent to a negative objective sentence. Thus 17 ovk e£ovo-la=quod non licet, the fact that it is not per- mitted. Whereas 17 /«} egovo-la simply means the not being able as an abstract conception, non licere. M-q however may be said to be the usual ^j^S^^mUm with Substantives. 35° THE NEGATIVES. § 282. Ou AND /XT] WITH PARTICIPLES. Ov. Ov is used when the Par- ticiple states a fact : the Participle is often Causal. ov irioTevwv. Since (as, when, etc.) he does not believe. aicrxyvo/icu ov troiwv ravra. I am ashamed because (that) I do not do this. Mr) is used when the An- tecedent to the Partici- ple is indefinite, so that the Participle is Condi- tional. fJbtj TTio-Tevcov. If he does not believe. aiaj^vvofiai, fiT) irouov rav- ra. I am ashamed if I do not do this. 8rj\wo-(o 011 •7rapayevofj,evo<;. Antiph. / will prove that I was not present. ko.v <3\e xiAias Spa.'XjjLa's ov fj,€Ta\a/3(bv to Tre/nrrov pepos •7(01/ xp-fjrfxov. Plat. Apol. xxv. He would even have been con- demned to pay a thousand drachmae, because he had not obtained a fifth of the votes. ovk evrv)(ovcro.i Sd^er' o^x' 8voTu\tiv. Eur. Bacch. 1263. Although not fortunate, ye shall seem not to be unfortunate. Cf. 270, vovv ovk e'x(ov (void as he is of sense). Digitized by Microsoft® ovk av Svvaio, fir) Ka/^mv, evhai/iovelv. EUK. Thou amidst not be happy, unless thou shouldst toil. 01 AND Uf, WITH THE INFINITIVE. 351 Note, ws (&o-!rep) oi is more usual with the Participle than <; airdKecrai. fieveiv. Xen. Antiph. He thought that they would An unjust sentence of death. not remain. o/McofioKev ov yapieiaQai. Plat. Apol. xxiv. 35 o. A striking instance; verbs of swearing usually are followed by pJ), see note 4 below. For other instances, of. Soph. Ant. 378, 755 ; Plat. Apol. xvii. 29 B. Note 1. When ov is exceptionally used with the Infinitive, it is generally due either to the order of or emphasis on a word or sentence. Sometimes ou is privative. A positive negation is always made. ovSevos a/iapreiv SsWds lo-rtv. ANTIPH. iv. Tetr. T. a. 6. There is nothing which he deserves to miss. = ovSiv k. Observe that ov is used although a Petition strictly requires /4 Cf. Thuc. i. 39. 2. Cf. Soph. Phil. 88, ?<£w ov8ev=ovi< 4'^>w. KtXevei ovk Iv ry eKKXrjaia dW ev tu) Oedrpw -rijv dvdp/jrjcm yiyvto-dai. AESCH. 3. 204. (The law) requires the proclamation to be made, not in the Assembly, but in the Theatre. Emphasis on the parenthesis. Digitized by Microsoft® Oi AND Mri WITH THE INFINITIVE. 353 Sokeis x al PW et v V °vk airo6aveur0ai ; ANDOK. i. 101. Do you expect to rejoice, or escape death ? ovk d.Tro6avei, Plat. Phaed. xlii. 98 D, o-wyx^P"' : °f- conviction, wumwo, Xen. An. i. 9. 8 ; ir'eKzwpai, Plat. ^poZ. xxvii. 37 A : of witnessing, swearing, 6'pvp, Ae. F«sj». 1047, 1281 (also an Epic usage), epai=6p.oviJ,ai, Xen. Cyr. vii 1. 18; kyyvwp.a.1, Plat. Pntf. 336 D. (For other constructions of 6/M/xyu, see Lexicon.) Verbs of Perception, kir'una.p,ai, are found with p.rj and the Infinitive in Soph. Eb$9&dW$'crosoft® z 354 THE NEGATIVES. § 284 DIRECT AND INDIRECT STATEMENT. Ov. M77'. The Direct Statement takes ov. ovk efzefirjv eic rov ifkobov. Antiph. I did not leave the ship. Indirect Statement with oTi or &>? takes ov. For the Indirect State- ment in the Infinitive, cf. supra. / / r J irape^ofiai fiaprvpas &)? ovk egefirjv e« rov ifKotov. Antiph. I produce witnesses (to prove) that I did not leave the ship = ovk efe'/S^. elirev on ovSev avra. fieXoi rov 0opvj3ov. Lys. He said he did not care about the disturbances ovSev fioi fxekei. § 285. INDIRECT STATEMENT WITH THE PARTICIPLE. rjyyeiXe ttjv ttoXiv ov iro- Note. But Verbs of Percep- XiopKi)8e2o-av. Xen. tion sometimes take /«?. See He reported that the city had g£J l^ 06 ^ ^" %' not been besieged. similarly after sLvv^, EvV. Uecta : ovk eiroXiopKridr). Tro. 970. Digitized by Microsoft® DIRECT QUESTIONS. 355 eyvoaaav ov irpayQ&laav ttjv ^vfifia^iav. Thuo. They discovered that the al- liance had not been con- cluded. Eecta : ovk eirpa^dTj. Ov in both cases is regular, going with an Oblique Statement. § 286. DIRECT QUESTIONS. Ov expects the answer " yes " (nonne ?). Mr\ expects the answer "no" (num?). They are often associated with other particles : ap ov ; apa /u/jj ; ovkow ; ficov (i.e. /irj ovv) ; fiwv ov ; /j,a>v fj,r] ; fia>v ovv ; rj ov ; rj /mj ; Tavr ovvl tcaK&i; \eyerai ; fuf\ aoi ZoKOVfiev ryhe \ei- ica~kS>s. Plat. Qdrjvai /Maxy ; AESCH. Is not this rightly said? Think' st thou we. were, in- Yes, rightly. ferior in this fight ? rf>«s 97 ov ; iravv 76. Plat. Note, p} in an oblique ques- 7^' j. j„ .„„. „„* tion, like num in Latin, loses Do i/ou assent, or do you not ",.', » ,. ' 9 . . ' —. J „ this force of expecting a ne- (assent) ? i.e. Yes or no ? gative answer . go Soph. Ant .Certainly (I do assent). 1253, Eur. Herac. 482. Ov interrogative with a Future Indicative is equi- valent to an Imperative. ovk a% e#' ppdaov, Soph. Phil 122. But ov in combination with ttov and 817 (ov srou ; ov ti ttov ; ov Sij ; ov 8^ 7tou ;) means surely it is not so ? Cf. Soph. Phil. 900 ; Ar. Ran. 522, 526; — the ques- tion here is really outside the words " surely not — eh ?" § 287. DELIBERATIVE' QUESTIONS. Mr) is used in Delibera- tive Questions. fir) (nrotepivcofiai, ; PLAT. Am I not to answer ? Xeyere, eurio) 77 firj ; PLAT SpeaJe, must I enter or no ? Cf. SOPH. Ai. 668, n /at, ; § 288. INDIRECT QUESTIONS. (a.) Indirect Single Ques- tion. The Negative is ov. rjpa>Tr)o~a, S«z rt ovk k\6oi. I asked him why he did not come. Digitized by Microsoft® INDIRECT PETITION 357 npcoTayopa? epmra ec ovk aio-yyvopai. PLAT. Protagoras asks me if I am not ashamed. Obs. el here is interroga- tive, not conditional. (6.) In Indirect Double Questions the usage varies, but ov is commoner than p,rj. There is generally a reason for yj\. crKoirwixev, ei irpeirei r\ ov. 6 veos ov% oto? re Kpwe.iv o PLAT. T4 re virovoia teat b pir\. Let us consider whether it is Plat. becoming or not. A child is incapable of de- oVtu? *&?s ddin 9 what is alle 9° r y v > v tj 1 > ' w s;' and what not. eir evoov eir ovk evoov. «««** i»v«- Soph. That thou may'st see Whether he be within or not within. Note. Ov rather than /mj seems to represent simply the original direct double question. Mr} seems to import a doubt into the question, or to represent it as a conception. Professor Jebb, in a note to Soph. Ai. 6, and Antiphon (Attic Orators, p. 161), draws a subtle distinction in every case. Thus, he says crKoirwfiev i\oaocpeov. Plat. We set you free on the under- standing that you no longer pursue, philosophy. Cf. Thuc. i. 103. 1. (Fut. Indie.) For the rule of i re, see p. 274. TEMPORAL, LOCAL, AND FINAL SENTENCES. 361 tional. But in all cases we may perhaps say that there is a negation of fact. § 294. TEMPORAL AND LOCAL SENTENCES. M17. When the Time or Place is indefinite firj is used (e.g. with brav, oirorav, eiretBav, hirov av, etc., with Subjunctive : or ore, etc., with Optative). ovkovv, brav §e fir) adevw, •ireiravcrofiai. SOPH. So, when I have no strength, I vnll give o'er, (orav denotes Indefinite Futurity.) 07TOT6 fjurj (palev cnrcvyovTes aTTe/CTelvav. THUC. Whenever they said "no," they led them off and exe- cuted them. Ov. When the Time or Place is definite ov is used. eireiori o avr/p ovk etyaivero wvofjbt}v ifKemv. Antiph. When the man was not forth- coming I went on my voyage. Obs. That ottot(. changes ov T)/JU. 6W? fiev ob av/jt.fia^oi ovk etvov ottol aTroaralev e/CpVTTTOV Tr)v 7T/30? ty-ia? lyQpav. Xen. Hell. So long as the allies did not know what side to revolt to, they concealed their dislike to you. § 295. FINAL SENTENCES, ETC. (a.) Final Sentences. (6.) 07T&)5 with Future Indicative, (c.) Verbs of Fearing. With these Constructions the regular Construction is Digitized by MidMbft® 362 THE NEGATIVES. §296. Ov and M17 with Relatives. Ov. The Eelative takes ov when the Antecedent is definite, so that a fact is spoken of. tyyrovaa apfia% evpov ov% a '/3ov\ofi7)v. EtJK. a ' (3ov\6/j,t)v, i.e. a efiov- Xofvqv. In seeking drugs I found not what I sought. Cf. Xen. An. ii. 2. 3. Note. ovSets Sorts ov, ovk eWtv octtis ov take oij. Thuc iii. 39; vii. 87; Hdt. v. 97. Plat. Prot. 323 c. In Thuc. iii. 81, ol Si 7ToWol TOV llV CHTOl OVK kiruo-6i)o-a.v, the actual fact is perhaps emphasised. With a negative preceding toioCtos, ov always follows (Madvig, § 203, note) : vojiov Tidefiev, oiktjo-cv /cat ra- lAieiov jirjSevl etVcu fj.7]8ev tolovtov, ets o ov :ras fiov- Ao/ievos eto"eto"tv. Plat. Bep. iii. 416 D. A treasury which not every one who wishes shall enter. Cf. S. Matt. vii. 21, ov ttoIs tlcreX.€vcreTai. M77. The Eelative takes fj\ when the Antecedent is indefinite. The use of /wj with Eelatives is the same as its use with el. a /j,rj 010a ouoe ocofiai ei- Se'vai. Plat. Whatever I know not I do not think that I know. Digitized by 61 efie fir) taaat. Plat. Any (all, such as) do not know me. octtk fir] avrapK7]<; eo~TU> ovtos ^a\67T09 <{>t\o<; ea- rl. Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 2. Whoever is not self-sufficient is a dangerous friend. Cf. Aesch. Eum. 618, 661, Soph. 0. T. 281 (with Subjunctive and Opta- tive with av). This indefinite or generic use of pj shades off into a Con- secutive or Final use. if'tj^lo-ao'de Totavra !£ 8>v art Seirdre vpZv /«TayiteA.7Jo-a. ANDOK 3. 41. Pass such a sentence that you will never repent of. Microsoft® Ol AND Mi) WITH RELA TIVES. 363 pkWovo-i yap o 1 ' evravOa Tre/i^eiv evda p/q irod' fiXlov ^>kyyo S' ojtcos &v fir) Xeyeis 6pdu>s T&8e ovt' av huvaljxrjv p.rjT eirKTTai/xijv Xeyeiv. SOPH. Ant. 685. But that these words thou speakest are not right I neither could nor may I learn to say. ovt av SvvaifjLijv is an Apo- dosis, and therefore ov is re- quired : /irjT iirio-Taifi,rjv is a wish ; the /mj with era-cos is far more difficult to explain, for it is an Indirect Statement. But observe that ottus /x^ depends on a verb of percep- tion, iirio-Tafiai (see note 4 [irj with Infin.). Also 6Vws /«? expresses doubt, and is much less positive than 6Vt ov. Moreover the wish /j.t)8' «r«r- Taifi,r)v may throw its shadow over the previous line. Digitized by Microsoft® MVi AND Mij oi WITH THE INFINITIVE. 36S § 298. M17 and firj ov with the Infinitive. A. After a Principal Sentence containing Verbs and expressions of denying, hindering, forbidding, and avoid- ing, fir) is used with the Infinitive where in English we use no negative. ) ov and the Infinitive follows a Principal Sentence which is not Negative in form. aXo-^pov ecrn croqbtav pit] ov^' iravTOiv KparurTOv avai. Plat. Prot. 352 d. It is immoral not to assert that wisdom is the highest of all In these cases the aurxpov is practically condemning, blaming, dissuading from a course. <5o-T£ ttSxtiv alo-xyvt]v eTvai firj o-vcnrov8a.£eiv. Xen. An. ii. 3. 11. So that all were ashamed not to co-operate heartily. Compare these two examples with Xen. Cyr. vii. 7. 16, Tiva aio-x^ov p) ikov t 8eio-ai). Variant Constructions of B. C. D. (pp. 336, 7). After a Negative Principal Sentence are used sometimes (1) the Infinitive alone ; (2) pr) alone instead of pr) ov with the Infinitive ; (3) to pr) ov ; (4) toij pr) ov. (1) TatJTCt ovk i^apvovvrai irpaTreiv. AESCHIN. iii. 250. They do not deny that they so act. #iAunrov TrapeXOeiv ovk r/SvvavTO KioXCcrai. Dem. de Pac. 62. 10. They were not able to prevent Philip advancing. (2) OV 7ToX.VV \p6vov p' i7reo~xov pr) pe vavo-roXelv raxy. SOPH. Phil. 348. Not long while they held me from quick setting sail. (Cf. Antig. 443.) Digitized by Microsoft® Mi, AND Mi, oi WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 369 (3) ovk ivavTidcroixai to /*•») ov yeyuiveiv nav. AESCH. P. V. 786. Til not refuse (lit. oppose thee) to 4eclare the whole. Xen. Symp. iii. 3. (4)- tis M^Siov o'ov aireXelcfrdr] tov fir) anoXovdeiv ; Xen. Gyr. v. 1. 25. W7io 0/ the Medes failed to follow you ? Instances of omission of pj and p) ov are said to be rare. There are however a good many. 1. Mr) omitted after an Affirmative Principal Sentence, Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 4. and 7. Thuo. iii. 39. 3. Soph. Ai. 70, 0. T. 129. Eurip. Or. 263. Arist. Aeh. 127. Xen. Hell. v. 21. Plat. Apol. xix. 31 d, xxxi. 39 e. 2. Mr) for /tij ou after a Negative Principal Sentence, Antiph. Tetr. b. b. 3. Soph. Phil. 34-9. Thuc. iii. 39. Isoce. Laud. Hel. 47. (Infin. alone after a Negative Sentence.) § 300. M77 and ju,^ ov with the Subjunctive. Mt; with the Subjunctive expresses anxiety, apprehen- sion, suspicion, surmise, and so may often be translated perhaps. 1X7) tovto a\r)6e<; f/. Perhaps this is true. pi) ceypoiKOTepov rj to a\r]devye2v. Plat. Apol. It looks as if this were not the real difficulty — to escape death. Cf. Grit. ix. 48 a. Phaed.xi 67 B. Digitized by Microsoft® 2 A 370 THE NEGATIVES. Note 1. Mi} ov is found graphically with the Indicative in questions. aAA' apa pfj ov)^ wroAa/j/?avas ', PLAT. Prot. 312 A. But perhaps then you do not suppose 2 Note 2. 6Vu>s /«j, oVws /iij o-u is similarly used with the Sub- junctive and Indicative (Pres. and Future), Plat. Crat. 430 D, Meno 77 A, Phaedo 77 B; Biddell's Digest, p. 140. Note 3. The same constructions of p.rj and /xi) ov occur even more commonly after a Principal Verb like , kwoov/xai, alo-^vvop-ai, okvw, klvSvvos Ictti, povTi!(o/3ovp.eda pvq ap,oTeptov fipn.pTqKap.tv. ThUC. iii 53. e. Aorist Indicative : Sei'Sa) prj TrdvTa vrjpepTea tTirev. HOM. Od. V. 300. Digitized by Microsoft® Oi rf WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 371 § 301. Ov fxr, WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE. "A. Ov fir] with the Subjunctive (generally the Aorist, but sometimes the Present) expresses an emphatic nega- tive future statement. ov firj iravatofiai. (j>i\.ocro^>a>v. PLAT. Apol. xvii. / will never give up philosophy. ovrob ; Euk. Hipp. 499. Set a seal upon thy lips, and let not fall again most shameful words. ov acy ave^ei, firjhe SeiXiav apels ; SOPH. Ai. 75. Keep silence, and awake not cowardice. (Lit. wilt thou not silently endure T) Some make these two separate questions, one with oil (nonne ?), the other with pr] (num ?), wilt thou not endure silently ? and wilt thou play the coward 1 § 302. Further Examples of ov ^17. A. ov ixrj with Subjunctive. ouk£ti fir) SvvrjraL f3ao-i\.€vs rjjj.a.'s KaTaAa/?av. Xen. An. ii. 2. 12. There is no longer any likelihood of the King overtaking us. Obs. The Present Subjunctive is here used. So also in Digitized by Microsoft® FURTHER EXAMPLES OF Oi ^. 373 Plat. Rep. 341 c. (ov ^ otds re $s) : and in Soph. 0. C. 1023, (£irevyv>vra.i, one MS. reads kirev^iovrai). to jxeyio-rov kolkov Ikiov oijSets fiTj 5tot£ \df3y. Plat. Zegr. 731 c. ^7b one is ever likely voluntarily to choose the greatest evil. ov fi/fi ere Kpvi//(a Trpbs ovriva ftov\op,a.L atpweo'dai. Xen. Cyr. vii. 3. 13. I will not conceal from you whom I wish to march against. See further Soph. 0. G. 408, 450, 649, 1024, 1702; Thug. v. 67 ; Xen. Hell. iv. 2. 3 ; Plat. Rep. 499 b ; Ae. Av. 461. oi3 /jt) (TKUi^s, jUijSe rrcurycnjs airep ot Tpvyo8a.ijji.oves ovroi, dXX' cvcprjpei. ARIST. JTm6. 299. Dom'i you flout, and don't behave like your poor comedy hacks, but, hold your peace. Elmsley changes o-K Trepio\pop,a.i direXOovra. AjRIST. Ran. 508. I'll not suffer you to depart. ov toi pvqTrore cr' Ik tSiv eSpaviav, & yepov, anovrd tis a£«. SOPH. 0. G. 178. No one, be sure, from these abodes, Old Sir, shall drag thee hence. 2d person in the same meaning as the above, i.e. denoting not a strong prohibition, but a negative statement. ovkovv ttot' £k tovtoiv ye p.rj o-Kiprrpoiv 'eri oSoiiroprjarus (Schneidewin, oSotTroprjcr^s.) SOPH. 0. G. 848. Never henceforth, on these props leaning, thou Shalt journey hence. rows yap irovrjpovs ov p.-q irore Troirjo-ere fieXriovi. Aeschin. in Gtes. 177. You will never make the bad better. Digitized by Microsoft® 374 THE NEGATIVES. The following example may denote either a prohibition or a statement. ov yiyvdxTKia o-e' ov p,rj etcret ets ttjv ot/ctav. lSABUS, Vlll. 24. J ^o woi faww you, you shall not enter the house ; or ov p.rj eio-ei ; C. ovk Is KopaKas ; ov pr) Trpocnrov ; ARIST. San. 609. 7o &« crows with you. Be off! Observe here that the 2d person dual is used. & piapunare, to 7roiels ; ov pr) KaTa/3ifo"€t ; ARIST. Vesp. 397. You scoundrel, what are you at ? don't come down. ov p-q '£eyep«s tov vttv<£ koto\ov Ka.KKLvrjo-ei's Kavao-Ttjo-ws (pondSa Seivrjv v6o-ov, S TtKvov ; Soph. Tr. 978. Observe that eKKivrjo-eis joined by /cat is prohibitive co-ordin- ately with egeyepets. ov p,}] KaXeis p.', fi>v9pwir', iKtTevu), pyjSe KaTe/seis rovvopa ; ARIST. Man. 298. Don't call me, Sirrah, I fray thee, nor blab out my name. ov pr) Svo-p.evrjs 4'crei <£iAots, 7ravcreL Se dvpov, kol irdkiv o~Tpiipeis K&pa . . Se£et Se Satpa kgu 7rapauTtjo-ei irarpos ; EUR. Med. 1151. Be not wroth with friends, Forbear displeasure, turn thy face again, Accept these offerings, and entreat thy father. ov pr] Trpoo-o[o-ti /SaK^e-utrcts 8'idv, prjS' k^opop^ei pwpiav T)jv o/3ov/J-evoi fi/ifirar acrefies firjBev firjSe avocriov firjre Troirjarjre jxryre. {3ov\r)o-r/Te. Xen. Cyr. viii. 7. 22. Fear the gods, and never do or intend anything either impious or unholy. § 304. OuSei's, M^Sei's, OvSev, M-qSeV, etc. A. OvSeis and pjSei's are used as declinable Substantives both in the Singular and Plural, with or without the Article, of persons. Much more rarely o, f/, ovSev, 6, ij, firjSev. B. O-uSev and fi-qEkv are used as indeclinable neuter predi- cates of persons. C. to /j.TjSev, an indeclinable substantive, is very freely used both of persons and things. All these constructions are chiefly poetical with the excep- tion of (B), which is also Platonic. Herodotus also uses (A) and (B). We may observe with regard to them : — (1.) That ovSeis, ovSiv denotes what is known or proved to be actually non-existent or worthless. (Of. 17 ovk e£owia under ov privative.) O-uSev is actually nothing. (2.) MijSei's, fj.7]8eu denotes an indefinite conception of what is anything non-existent or worthless. (Cf. 17 [xy igovo-la.) MrjSh is abstract nonentity, hence to furjSev. (3.) The two sets often seem to be used indifferently, but though ovStls is plainer and blunter, yet /^Sei's may be really more contemptuous, " as nothing," " no better than a mere cipher." (4.) The construction of the sentence (with et or an im- perative) may favour fnj rather than ov. (5.) Both sets of phrases are the reverse of tis (ti) eTvai, tc be a somebody. Digitized by Microsoft® Ot&ets, M^Sfir, Oi&cv, Mt)oVk, ETC. 377 Examples : o vvv [lev oijSet's, avpiov 8' iwipjieyas. ARIST. Eq. 158. Nobody now, exceeding great to-morrow. povovo~i Srjp.ov iLtitpv 6Vt€s OTjSeves. Eur. Androm. 700 ; cf. J. ^. 371. ayeTe p,' ckttoSwv tov ovk ovra /xaWov ?j p,r)Seva. SOPH. ^m^. 1326. igffid me hence Who am no more than him that is as nothing. ov yap rj£iov tov? /JTjSlvas. SOPH. Ai. 1114. tov? foivTas eS Spdv KarOavibv Se iras avrjp yrj Kal o"Ktd - to /Mj8ev €6S ouSev peirei. EUR. Meleager. i.e. wAai was believed to be nothing now proves to be actually nothing. For the sentiment compare the Epitaph on Gay : " Life is a jest, and all things show it ; I thought so once, but now I know it." (Scu/jcov) 17/xiv 8' aTroppei Kowrt jUTjSev epxerai. SOPH. El. 1000. Our future is at ebb, and comes to naught. Compare the prjSev here with oiSev in the Meleager. ai/Spes rjixirepoi eicrh oi8ev. PLAT. Rep. 556 D. ; cf. 562 D. eav 8ok£o-i Tt etVou pySev 6Ves. PLAT. Apol. xxxiii. 41 E. If they think they are something, when they are nothing. Here eav favours /mjSIi/ rather than oiSSev. 6V oiolv &v tov u?ySev dvTeo-Trjs virep. Soph. ^*. 1231 ; cf. 1275. v/iSs to p,r)8ev ovras ev Tpoirrj Sopos ippvo-aTo. Soph. .4i. 1274 ; cf. Eur. .K. 369. K€i to /AijSev e£e/><3 <£/oao-(o 8' o>a>s. SOPH, ^ml 234. roiyap o-i> Sc'^at /i' Is to o"dv toSe o-Te'yos tj/v p,rjSiv ets to /xijSe'v. SOPH. -E7. 1165. Examples in Herodotus occur in i. 32, vi. 137, ix. 58, 79. Note. ovSkv (p.r)8ev) Xiyeiv, to talk nonsense or idly. to oi8' oiSev, Plat. Theaet. 190 A, the absolute nothing. 6 firjSev &v yovato-i = 8vo-yevqs, SOPH. Ai. 1094. oiSev (ft'jSev) «vcu, fo 6« doomed to death, as good as dead, . Soph. El. U^k. Androrr, 1077. 378 THE NEGATIVES. § 305. M^ with Oaths and Assertions. Mtj is sometimes found with the Indicative after an oath or a strong assertion. /xa tt]v ' Apo8lTi}v . . . fj,rj 'yio it' acf>rjcrio-ao-6£ rbv iroXefwv, fir) oj3rj9evres rb avriKa Seivov. Thuc. i. 124. Vote the war without fearing the immediate danger. ravra 0"K07reiTe, on firj Trpovoicj. p,oi\.\.ov kylyveTO rj tvyti. Antiph. V. 21. Consider this, that it happened not so much designedly as by accident. A very exceptional use of pj, hardly explained by the pre- ceding Imperative. Cf. Xen. Cyr. iii. 1. 37, Soph. Ant. 546, Dem. 27. 59 Digitized by Microsoft® MISCELLANEOUS INSTANCES. 379 2. o irous eixep ecrnus avepo'i vpXv ko-ri /j,rj /3\r]6eis, SrjkovTai Sia ttjv avrov afiaprlav airoBav&v. Antiph. Tetr. B., c. 5. As to the child, if it is proved to you that he was not struck when he was standing still, it is evident that he was hilled by his own fault. 3. oTjiai .fx/q av StKatws tovtov tv\uv ewaivov tov p,rj eiSora ti io-Ti vop.o OavaTO). PLAT. Phaed. viii. 63 B. i.e. / should be acting wrongly in not grieving, as m reality I do grieve. In spite of the Conditional structure : Cf. SOPH. 0. T. 551, el vopifeis ovx vcpe^eiv. § 308. Note on prf, fir/ ov, with the Infinitive and Participle. 1. M17 with the Infinitive. This construction is perfectly natural and intelligible. Indeed the Infinitive without it, though allowable in Greek as in English, may be somewhat ambiguous. Thus ov davelv eppvo-dpijv would in itself mean whom I rescued for dying. The addition of p? makes it per- fectly clear that the net result is negative. The negative was thus used in our earlier English : Ton may deny that you were not the cause. Shakspere, Rich. III. 1. 3. First you denied you had in him no right. Comedy of Errors, iv. 2. Precisely parallel in Greek is the use of ov with 6V1 and the Indicative after verbs of denying : dvTeXeyov on ovk eyxpol.rj, XEN. Hell. ii. 3. 16 ; dpvrjdfjvai (Ls ovk d7re8coK£, Lys. XV. 1. 1 The double negative is uot unknown even in Ciceronian Latin Cf. Cic. De Ofic. in. 102, 118. Digitized by Microsoft® NOTE ON Mr;, Mr) ov WITH INFINITIVE, ETC. 381 2. Mr) ov with. Infinitive. Here it is much more difficult to see the force of each negative, especially as in translating the Greek into English we make no difference between p) and p) ov. Thus we translate 6'o-iov p) fiotjdeiv, it is pious not to help ; ov\ oViov p) ov fiorjdeiv, it is impious not to help. But we may be sure that the force of each negative was, originally at least, felt in Greek. Observe that the double negative is only used with the Infinitive when there is a negative, actual or virtual, in the principal clause. Thus there is an additional negative over and above that in the preceding construction (pj with Infinitive). Just as pj with the Infinitive repeats and sums up the net negative result of the principal verb, so when the principal clause is negative, this additional negative is repeated with the Infinitive, and sums up the effect of the principal clause. 1 That this was not always felt to be necessary is shown by the examples under B. 0. D. 3. Mrj ov with Participle must be explained in the same way. E.g. in Soph. 0. T. 12, (1) Affirmatively: I should be kmdly — (net result) — in refusing pity (p) KaroiKTupuiv). (2) Negatively : I should be unkindly — (net result) — in not refusing pity (p) ov Karoinrdpoiv). The Participial con- struction is required either because, as in the three instances from Sophocles, the Participle agrees with the subject of the principal sentence, or because (as in Herod, vii. 106) it is in the Genitive Absolute. The Participle denotes circumstance generally, and more specially condition, restriction, etc., which are only kinds of circumstance. Wiinder (Excursus to SoPH. 0. T. 12, 13), while _ pointing out the above reason for the Participle, denies that it is con- ditional, although in 0. T. 221 he translates p) ovk e'xwi', unless I had. In Soph. 0. T. 1 2, 1 3, he says that with an impersonal construction we might write Suvbv av ii-q or alo-xvvq av jxoi d-q p) o-u KaroiKrapeiv. It is true that we might thus give the sense of this one passage, but we could not so analyse the other passages, while the above explanation seems to suit this as well as the others. 1 Mr A. Sidgwick communicates the following note : Just as in KuiMu yu.7) Spav the negatived infinitive gives the total effect of hindrance, viz. ; the prevented act, so in 01) /cuXiiu 1^ oi) Spav the doubly negatived infinitive gives the total. effect, viz. the notprevented r-' B Digitized by Microsoft® ! act. 382 THE NEGATIVES. To this superfluous ju.tj after verbs of hindering, etc., the French offers an exact parallel : Emplchez qu'il ne se mile d'aucune affaire. Compare too the redundant ne after com- paratives :— Ces fruits sont meilleurs que je ne le croyais. With verbs of doubting, denying, etc., used positively, the French idiom follows the English: — je doute qu'il soit ainsi; but with such verbs used negatively the French ne corresponds to the Greek p.r\ ov : — je n'ai jamais ni6 qu'il ne soit ainsi. § 309. Note on /aij and ju/r) ov with the Subjunctive. The Attic construction is chiefly Platonic and Aristotelian (cf. Eth. N. x. 9. 6, Pol. iv. 4. 11, ii. 2. 8). But the construc- tion is as old as Homer, e.g. Od. v. 467, p.r\ pe u-rifi-q re /cot*?) koX 6ij\vs eepcrrj Sapido-y, Perchance cruel rime and soft dew shall blast me. We have here the original deprecatory force of p.rj, let it not. In a writer like Plato this pvq has become simply a suggestion put politely, and with a delicate irony. Closely allied to this is the interrogative use of pvq in the example quoted from the Protagoras (312 A). We need not call the construc- tion elliptical any more than p,rj yevono need be called ellip- tical. When a Principal Verb (such as 6pa>) is expressed, the thought is more logically and fully stated, and the clause with pj has become subordinate : but the two constructions are par- allel and synonymous. Mr] ov after a Principal Verb is also found in Homer, E. xv. 164, pa£ecr8 pr) p,' ovSe Kparepos Trep 4wv eirtovTa raXdo-o-rj p.eLvai, Let him look to it whether, stout though he be, he endure not to await my coming. Ov is strictly negative or privative here, as in the Attic examples. Thus in the construction of p.r) and pit) ov both particles exert their legitimate force. M77 ov with the Subjunctive occurs also in Herod, vi. 9. § 310. Note on ov fjut] with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative. Both constructions are post-Homeric. It is impossible to trace them with historical certainty, and therefore any explana- tion suggested must be theoretical. 1. cm pf) with the Subjunctive. This construction is found both in Prose (Herodotus, Xenophon, Isaeus, Plato, Demo- sthenes), and in Verse (Aeschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes). Digitized by Microsoft® NOTE ON Oi p{, WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 383 Both ov and /*/} appear to exert their proper force. The construction seems to be the negative of prj with the Subjunc- tive. (See note on that construction, § 309.) Thus /mj ttipijtcu would mean /ar &« *£ that lie obey ; ov negatives this apprehen- sion : it is not a case of such surmise, there is no likelihood of his obeymg, he will not obey. Such a construction in the second person is tantamount to a prohibition, as in the example from the Clouds of Aristophanes. If this view is correct, we need no more understand an ellipse of Seos or 6W6V between the ov and the ju.jj here than in (iq with the Subjunctive. ov Seos, ov SeivoV fully expressed occur often enough (Hdt. i. 84 ; Plat. Apol. ch. xvi. 28 b, Phaed. 84 B, Rep. 465 B • Xen. Mem. ii. 1. 25 ; Aeist. Ecc. 650). 2. ov pr) with the Future Indicative is far more difficult. In the first place the construction is almost wholly poetical. It occurs in Hdt. iii. 162, Plato, Aeschines, as a rare idiom in each. It is very common in Sophocles, Euripides, Aristophanes. (a) Is the phrase Interrogative ? x In favour of ov fi,rj with 2d person of the Future being interrogative are the following considerations : A positive command is commonly expressed by ov interrogative with the Future, e.g. Aeist. Lys. 459, ovx'^^t', oiirorfo-ei', k.t.X. ; fol- lowed by imperatives iraveo-de, k.t.X. Sometimes ov pj with the Future (expressing a negative command) appears side by side with ov and the Future (expressing a positive com- mand). The juxtaposition is very striking in Arist. Ran. 200-2, a passage which shows that in the time of Aristophanes the two idioms could be used as exact opposites. Professor Goodwin's objection to the Future being inter- rogative, derived from the single passage in the Clouds (296), where an Imperative and not a Future is joined by aAAa to ov [irj with a Subjunctive (v. I. a Future), is not convincing. The inference (supposing that the Future is the true reading) need only be that ov pj with the Future had become a stereo- typed Imperative. And in Arist. Lys. 459 (above), Soph. Ant. 885 we have the Imperative immediately following ov with the Future used interrogatively, though not joined by a conjunc- tion to it. 1 Mr. A. Sidgwick writes : " It is to me quite clear that ov y.i\ with the Future is usually interrogative ; when not, it is a form of 06 /4 with the Subjunctive. " Digitized by Microsoft® 384 THE NEGATIVES. Against the phrase being interrogative may be urged that such a theory assigns a different origin not only to ov pyq with the 2d person of the Future from ov prf with Subjunctive, but also from ov /xrj with the 1st and 3d persons of Future. This difficulty is increased by the fact that ov p,r\ with the 2d person of the Future may, though rarely, express a negative state- ment, like ov pri with Subjunctive. If, in spite of this, the Interrogative theory is maintained, we should have to assign a different origin to this special idiom ; doubtless a serious but not perhaps a fatal objection, for the evolution of popular idioms is as manifold as it is obscure. (b) Oij and ov //.iy followed by /cat, dXXd, ko.1 pvf], pvqSk : If ov prj is interrogative the explanation is simple. Ov throws its force over each connected clause which follows. The simplest case is Soph. Tr. 978, where ko.1 follows. The most complex is Eur. Bacch. 343, where the process would be oi fx.71 Trpoo-oLcrei'j ; — ov f3aK)(evo-eis ; (joined by Si) — ov pvfj e£o- fiop^ei ; Will you not avoid bringing near ? Will you not play the bacchanal ? and will you not avoid wiping off? If ov u.-q is not interrogative each subsequent clause will have to be differently explained. Eur. Bacch. 343 would run thus — Ov yu.77 irpoo-oLo-eis, you shall not bring near ; /Saic^evo-eis Se, but you shall play the bacchanal (like irpbs ravra irpdgeis, Soph. O.C. 956); ^ l^'o^opjfa could only be explained on the assumption of \x.y\ with the Future being prohibitive, a con- struction which has yet to be established. The interrogative theory of ov jx-q finds decided support here, not only from the extreme abruptness of each clause thus made independent, but from the grammatical difficulty thus occasioned. (c) Professor Goodwin (Moods and Tenses, §89) considers that in oi5 /*ij with the Future, oi is added (not interroga- tively) to p.-r\ with the Future Indicative used as a Prohibition. But (1) p4 with the Future Indicative thus used is a con- struction of extreme rarity, if it exists at all. Some of the instances quoted (Moods and Tenses, § 25, Note 5 (b) ), e.g. Soph. _Ai. 572, are probably not to the point, and in others, assuming the Future Indicative to be the correct reading, a different explanation seems possible. (2) Assuming the ex- istence of pf) with the Future Indicative as a Prohibition, it is Digitized by Microsoft® NOTE ON 04 p4 WITH SUBJUNCTIVE, ETC. 385 difficult to see how a Prohibition can be got out of oi juvf with the Future as a statement. An analysis of the phrase oi (you shall not) ju.17 iroiqo-ets (don't do) would land us in a meaning precisely opposite to that required. On the other hand, we get the right meaning if the phrase is interrogative, oi, won't you, pj 7row}cr£is ; abstain from doing ? In ov pj with the Subjunctive Professor Goodwin does not attempt to account for the pj. He considers the Subjunctive as "a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive used as a weak Future." (d) Mr. Riddell (Digest of Platonic Idioms, p. 177) explains the double use of the negative on the principle of " simul- taneity of force;" i.e. both particles, like a double-barrelled gun, concentrate their fire on one verb. It is quite true that in course of time the two particles formed one strong redup- licated negative, their origin being quite lost sight of. Such cases as Soph. Phil. 611, Eur. Phoen. 1590, clearly show this. Still the question remains, How is it that oi5 and pj, differing as they do, combine their force 1 (e) Can ov and pj be separately explained 1 It is pj which requires explanation, not ov. Ov on any theory exerts its simple contradictory force. If oi pj with the Future is interrogative, oi p) irowyo-eis ; must mean, Won't you abstain from or avoid doing 1 _ It is always objected that this explanation gives pj the privative force of oi. Not so, for pj n-onj'o-ets need not represent a privative oi ttoiw, but rather a deprecated future act. The use of pj with the Future Indicative would help us to un- derstand how the idiom might arise. Now the independent use of p? with the Future is extremely uncommon. ^It occurs, rarely, in questions (e.g. Plat. Bep. 405 A., apa pj ™ pufcv e£eis \af3eiv Te«pjpov). M)j interrogative is simply p; denoting an apprehension. It occurs after oaths and similar assertions (II. x. 330, Arist. Ecc. 991). But the Future Indicative, graphically substituted for the Subjunctive, is fairly common (<^oJ3ovjj.o.i p) evprjo-opev, Plat. Phileb. 13, and the Future Indicative is joined co-ordinately to the Sub- junctive in several places (e.g. Aesch. Pers. 124; Soph. El. 43; cf. Arist. Ecc. 495). . If oi pj is not interrogative then it will be a more vivid and graphic substitution oj oi u.^ for the Subjunctive. The 386 THE NEGA TIVES. process would be ov p) jtomjo-^s, it is not the case (ov) p,y\ -ironqa-ys (of apprehending that you may do), or ov /j,rj won/jo-eis (that you really mil do). This readily passes into a command (cf. Eur. Med. 1320, x"P' 8* ov favo-wi 7roT ^ ^ m s ^ ia ^ mo ^ touch, i.e. touch not). A list of passages in which ov pj occurs with the Future is given for reference. Hdt. iii. 162 (ov p? ava/JAacmjo-ei). Aeschin. de Cor. 79. 12. Xen. Hell. i. 6. 32. Isaeus, viii. 24 Plat. Symp. 175 A. (ovkow ko.1 py). Soph, (a.) ov pj, 1st or 3d person : El. 1052; 0. C. 177; Phil. 611 (Optative in Obliqua). (6.) ov pj, 2d person: 0. T. 637 (ou . . . ko.1 pj) ; 0. (7. 847 (not a prohibition) ; Ai. 75 (ov . . . p;Se); TracA. 978 (ov p? . . . kcu); 1183 (ov . . . pjSe). Euripid. a>p. 213; /J. 496 (ov X ' . . . kcu pi}); lb. 1601 (oi pj . , . pSI) ; Androm. 797 ; «%£>. 1066 ; Bacch. 342 (ou pj . . . Se . . . pSe). Aristoph. Ban. 202 (ov pj . . . d\X.d) ; lb. 298 (ov pj . . . p/Se); lb. 462 (ou p) . . . dAAa); ^c/i. 166; Vesp. 397; JV«6. 296, 367, 505 (the subjunctive of the MSS. in these passages has been changed by editors to the future indicative). Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTER III. OEATIO OBLIQUA. Introductory. § 311' By Oratio Recta is meant the words or thoughts of a person given at first-hand, as from his own lips, e.g. — 8t6o"a> a e'xo). I will give what I have. By Oratio Obliqua is meant the words or thoughts of a person given at second-hand by some one else, e.g. — etj>rj S&creiv a *X 01 " or eXeyev on (us) 8clxroi a «X '' He said he would give what he had. If the words are reported in the following way : — eXeyev on ((is) 8dj(rw a e'xco. He said, " I will give what I have," we have no Obliqua at all : eXeyev on introduces the original words just as in English we put them in inverted commas, as a quotation in fact. e.g. irpocreXdovTes Se pot ry vo-repaio: MeXrjTos /cat EicjiiXrjTos eXeyov on, yeyevrjTai, S> 'AvSokiStj, koI irkirpaKTai rjfuv ravra. ANDOK. de Mijst. 63. Next day Meletus and Euphiletus came to me and said, "It has taken place, AndoJcides, we have done it." But the reporter may give the words thus : — 'i(f>r) S&o-eiv a e X el - eXeyev on (s) Swrei a e)( 6 '- Here we have a kind of Obliqua extremely common in Greek, and often alternating in the same paragraph with Digitized by Microsoft® 3S7 388 O RATIO OBLIQUA. the Obliqua given above. From a love of what is graphic and vivid the Greeks keep the original mood while only changing the person. Or we may say that they keep the mood which would be used if the Obliqua were in Primary Sequence : e.g., Xeyu oti SaStrei a e'x £l - Observe then that in Oratio Obliqua— 1. The person, whatever it was in the Eecta, becomes the 3d in the Obliqua. 1 2. The tense of the Recta never changes. If it did, the Obliqua would not represent faithfully the time and act of the Eecta. 3. The Mood may either (a.) be changed to the Optative in the Obliqua (of Historic Sequence), (5.) be retained as it was in the Eecta, or in Primary Sequence. By Oratio Obliqua is here meant reported speech in Historic Sequence. Oratio Obliqua in Primary Sequence involves (in Greek) no change of Mood in the Adverbial and Eelative Sentences, and therefore can at once be dismissed with one brief example by way of illustration. Oratio Eecta : Siafievco ecus 8-v eiraveXdacriv oiis irefi/KW. I will remain until they return whom I am sending. Oratio Obliqua : tbntri } Siaueveiv „ „ , ,. n „ , \, ,, / . \ > « ' - es) ) oia/iEvei ~ He says that he will remain, until they return, whom he is sending. vo/ii'fa), civ toCt' aK/oi/JaJs fidd-qre, fj.S.XXov v/j,a$ toijtois /u.ev V ypds drj. Strict Sequence. 4. „ kfj.dvBa.vt. 5. „ e/tejuaftj/cet. 6. „ e/j.ade. Graphic. fiddoL. Strict Sequence. Note. The Aorist Indicative is preferable to the Optative whenever it avoids ambiguity. Thus ovk u\ov 6'ti 8pdo-eiav might mean either they did not know what to do (Recta, Tt Spdcr(i)fj.ev ; a deliberative Subjunctive), or, they did not know what they had done (Eecta, Tt iSpdo-afiev ; ). Almost always the first construction is intended. Digitized by Microsoft® 392 O RATIO OB LI QUA. C. Similarly with &™s, Hirtos prj (a much rarer construction after verbs of commanding, etc., than the Infinitive). Recta : 6'inos /«.») ecrecrde dvagioi kXevdepiai. See that you he not unworthy of freedom. „, „ v otovtcu ) Graphic. D. With Deliberative Questions. Recta, Trot vyta • Obliqua, -qiropet, ttoi (airoi) epoipev &Tpvvev epeiv. Obliqua after rjv eXO-g — ^ovXerai. — Graphic, £Xe£e on el eXdoi — fiovXono. ei rl pr\ epoiev — tinpvvev. e<£ij rjv eXdy — ovSeva f3ovXeo-0cu — Graphics el eXOoi — ovSeva (3ovXeo-dcu. ei Tt p.i] epoiev — orpvvew epeiv. He said that, if they were not fetching anything, he was ordering them to fetch it. § 316. Types of Oratio Obliqua, showing Sub-direct and Sub-oblique Clauses in the Obliqua. The Protasis is the Sub-oblique, the Apo- dosis the Sub-direct Clause. If you do this you are doing wrong becomes, when reported by another person, He said that if he did it he was doing wrong. I. With Xeyrn on, and a finite mood : 1. Primary Sequence : Sub-oblique (the Protasia). (el ravTO. ■woiei ire-iroirjKe el TaCra eiroiev eiroi,r)0~e lav (rjv) Tamo iroiy TTOirjo-g el ravTO. iroiolrj or Troi7)0-eie el Tavra. TrotrjO-ei el ravTO. ewoiei. Xeyei on (us) Vet raiiTa «rotryt)fit and an Infinitive : 1. Primary Sequence : f A. PRESENT ei ravra TTOicis eiroleis hrotrjcras a-e \ 0. FUTURE a. edv ravra < 7r0 '^ s ( iroi-qo-ys , ~ f TTOLOim ei ravra < , ' [ TroirjO-eias el ravra Trovqcrei's el ravra hroleis ei ravra eironjcras Note. An Imperative in Apodosis would of course depend on a Verb of commanding (Indirect Petition), e.g. K&irre rrjv dvpav, knock at the door ; etite K&wreiv rrjv dvpav, he told him to knock at the door. ^>-qfx.i or oifiai B. Past ( eiroieis f { eiroLri dSiKetv av S.oiKrjiTai av d8lKrjO~etV dSiKeiv av dSiKrjaai av Strict Historic Sequence : t A. PRESENT el ravra 7ro«Hj)s Past el i i. 4c/>tiv or (jijUlJV B. €77 eiroieis IWoiijcras TTOLOLTji Troi-qcreias 7TOtOt77S v Tronjcreias \C.Jel ravra Troiijcrots Digitized by Microsoft® ere -j 0. FUTURE a. el ravra 0. el ravra i dBiKelv dSiKeiv d8iKrjo-ai dSiK-qo-eiv dSiKeiv av dSt/djcrat av d8iKrj " " v «X»< « *X°'> but the Apodosis is in each case sufficient to prevent ambiguity. If, however, a efx e ^ Sov were cnan g ed to a ^'x ' 8{8o "7 the ambiguity would bea7§abed by Microsoft® 396 0RAT10 OBLIQUA. «£ OTt (is) a e^ot a et^e or a ex 01 n v a e\oi a e£ot a ux €v a «r^£V «j"XK£ (or, instead of eScuKE, Soirj) Swo-ot (more commonly Swa-et) 8i8o[r) av Sdxroi (Sucret) iSiSov av ?8a>KeV av Note. Observe the retention of the Aorist Indicative, which is not changed to the Optative. If we were to write ZXcge on Sda-ot (Stotret) a. kdfiot, or 'l$7\ Sdcrecv o ti Aa/3oi, we should rightly take this to mean, he said that he would give whatever he took; a Adfioi would represent a Recta a av \d/3a), and not a e'Aa/2ov, what I actually took. § 319. Some real Examples analysed. Principal. Sub-direct. Sub-oblique. 1. ec&T) XriirTeov elvai ) irapa- ! » , « , ./T „ /( > ■.' , > \;> ', lei ti uavijs oencrot. cAeyev on (ws) Arjirreov eori^ J crraras | 1 /w / Adapted from Xen. Cyr. viii. 1.10. He said that he must get comrades ; if there should be I need of a battle. Recta : \f)ivrkov itrrl irapaarrdTas ei Tt /ja^S SeTj'o-et. I must get comrades if there shall be need of a battle. The Obliqua is partly Graphic, partly strict Historic. 2. erj ! ov8ev airy jieXeiv ) eVeiSr) eiSeirj. e'Aeyev 6V1 ( when they came to sidering \ the river. Recta : 71-uis tw/itv, ZireiSav -vevdueOa ; a Deliberative Question. Digitized by Microsoft® REAL EXAMPLES ANALYSED. 397 Principal. 4. icrKoirti He was consi- dering. Eecta : 5. "Avdtos ttyf) Anytus said that Eecta : Observe that changed to 6. Xiyovo-i Se Sub-Direct. TTOS OHJTlji £0"OtTO how he should find one ttojs fx.oi eorat Sub-oblique. OCTTtS Q&IJJOI. ISAE. ii. 10. to bury him. otrrts Odipu ; ov% otoi> T£ eii/ou to fir) I eireiftr) t'urrjXdov Sev- aTTOKTetvai p,e \ po. Plat. Apol. xvii. 29 c. it was impossible for you not to sentence me to death when once I had been brought into this court. I oi)( olov re earn* to pA) | eireiSrj e'urrjXOe S(vpo. I d/!roKTeivai 2(DK|0aT?j I the Aorist Indicative of the Eecta is not the Obliqua. o)S eV Tij yy a.7rida.vev 6 ! os ou/c e^ej3rjv to dvrjp, Kciyoi Xidov avrio I irapdrrav Ik toC eve/JaA.oj' as tijv Kt(£a- I TrAot'oi;. Aijv, | Antiph. cfe (7astf\ .Her. 26. 2%^ say though as a matter of fact I never left the ship at all. that the deceased was murdered ashore, and that I struck him on the head with a stone, Observe here that the Aorist Indicative is kept in the Sub- direct Clauses, and also (of course) in the Sub-oblique Clause. 7. ifa He said yueXP' tovtov 8eiv fiav- ddvuv etus iKavos tis ye- voito, curare Setfcrete, K.T.X. Xen. Mem. iv. 7. 2. until one became cap- able, if ever it should be necessary, etc. that it was necessary to go on learning for so long a time Eecta : p-eXP L tovtov Set {/.avOdvetv, ecus av yevi]Ta.i, edv irore Seno-n. ' " Digitized by Microsoft® 398 ORATIO 0BL1QUA. § 320. The Infinitive, and on (ws) with Finite Moods in the Sub-direct Sentences. Both these Constructions occur in the Sub-direct Sentence, i.e. in the Principal Sentence of the Original Recta. But the Infinitive is unquestionably the most common, as it is the most natural, simple, and easy mode of expression. Greek writers seem unconsciously to slide into it, even after an Obliqua has been introduced in the first instance by on or u>s. In consequence of this love for the Infinitive, one or two peculiarities should be observed. 1. An Obliqua (indirect words or thoughts) is often suddenly introduced without any introductory Principal Verb. A Particle is the only warning given, said he, he thought, it was said, or some such expression was in the writer's mind and can be easily supplied. And in such a case it should be noticed that the Predicate in the Nomina- tive accompanies the Infinitive when referring to the Subject of the Infinitive and of the chief Verb. Latin and English have the same free and natural usage. (a.) *Ayis tous ?r/Decr/3e<,s h AaKc8aip.ova eKeX.evv Tip.rjcrao-do.1, avrol 8' eyyvaadai. Plat. Apol. xxviii. 38 b. Plato here, and Crito, and Critobulus, and Apollodorus, wish me to propose thirty minae (desiring me to say that) they themselves are the securities. Svoiv Xprjcrip.0LV ov Stapj/DTijcrea-flai ttjv ttoXiv 'qyovp.rjv 7rAeu- cravTcov fj/xlov rj yap QiXanrov, a fiev €?Ar/c/>ei rf}s TroAeios cHroSaSo-en', twv Se Aomiw ak£ecrdai, rj, p,rj itoiovvtos ravra, aTrayyeAeiv rjfi.a's tvQeas Sevpo. k.t. A. DEM. 388. 15. One of two useful ends I considered the state would not lose. Either Philip would restore the possessions of the state i English expresses this just as neatly, with still less warning • ' ' Agis recommended the envoys to go to Lacedaemon. He himself was not competent, etc. " Digitized by Microsoft® INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB-DIRECT SENTENCES. 399 which he had taken, and would hold his hand from the remainder, or, if he were not to do this, we should at once Iring back word here, etc. 2. In the same way, but not nearly so often as an Infini- tive, an Optative may be introduced by an explanatory yap. (a.) cA.£yov on TraVTOs a£ia Aeyet 2ei50ijs" x«fi(uv yap sty, k.t.X. Xen. An. vii. 313. They said that what Seuthes said was quite right : for it was winter, etc. The whole paragraph 1 3 is very instructive, and should be carefully read. Observe that the Obliqua ends with a direct indicative of the writer, !8oKa. (6.) Or the Optative continues the Obliqua after a preceding Optative with on or u>v Kal yvvaiKes Trap' intivois eir/auv SeSievai Se nai, k.t.X. ThUC. ii. 72. Obs. That after the Optative the writer slides naturally into the Infinitive SeSievai. They answered him that it was impossible for them to comply with their proposals without consulting the Athenians, for their wives and children were with them; moreover they . were afraid, etc. (c.) In Soph. Phil. 615, an Optative is still more abruptly introduced. evOeaiS vireo-)(eTO toi' avSp 'Ax^'ofs TovSe 8rjkuiv\. Straightway he promised To bring and show this man to the Achaeans. _ Most like with his consent he thought to take him. Should he refuse, then in his spite, etc. Out of vireo-xero is to be supplied (ekegev (us) before oiono. And observe, as in the preceding passage of Xenophon, the Direct Indicative icpdro is resorted to, relieving the artificial strain of the Optative. Cf. also Plat. Phaed. 95 D, &»? . . . olttoWvoito : Rep. 420 C, evaXt) Xipfievoi, eUv. With the last Digitized by Microsoft® 4 oo 0RAT10 OBLIQUA. instance compare Soph. 0. T. 1245, v &v ddvoc , . . XCiroi. Here, although in a Relative Sentence, the Optative crops up; it is equal to eXegev on inrb rovrtav Bdvoi, SO that the clause is virtually Sub-direct rather than Sub-oblique, being introduced by /wjj/mjv e-^ovo-'. The passage is discussed in Madvig's Syntax, p. 116, note 2, and Goodwin, Moods and Tenses, § 77, 1 (e). 3. The Infinitive and on (ws) with a Finite Mood alternate in the same Obliqua. ol AaKeSai/idvtoi ehrov, on o-uri [lev SoKotev aSiKetv oi 'Adrjvaioi, fBovXecrdai 8e Kal tovs jrai/ras ^vfi[id)(s ep,ol SokeT, on, &o-7rep ovSe yeu>pyov dpyov ovSev o(j>e\os, ovrws oijSe o-rpar-qyov dpyov oiSev 6'<£eAos thai. Xen. Cyr. i. 6. 18. You say, father, as I understand you, that, just as an idle husbandman is of no use, so an idle soldier is of no me. Observe that the verb ko-n is omitted in the sentence introduced by Sxjirep, and the finite construction with on is not carried out at all. 4. And this is the greatest peculiarity. Such is the natural Greek yearning for the Infinitive, that Sub-oblique clauses, both Adverbial and Relative, instead of taking a Finite Mood, are actually followed by an Infinitive. In some cases the writer, after beginning with if, since, when, which, etc., seems mentally to throw in a "said he," "it was said," "it was agreed or thought," and passes to an Infinitive : in others the preceding Infinitive seems to exercise an assimilating influence over the Sub-oblique Verb. (a.) £<£?? 8e. eireiSri ov eKfirjvai ri)v i/^X 1 ?", Tropevecrdo.1 /nera ■jroA.Xaii'. Plat. Bep. 614 b. He said that when his soul had gone out of him (i.e. his body), he was journeying with many. Several similar instances occur from 614 to end of the book after kv <$, o#s, ore, els o, o®, (us. Digitized by Microsoft® INFINITIVE, ETC., IN SUB-DIRECT SENTENCES. 401 (J.) Aiyercu k.o.1 'AAk/Wcoi/i t 'Ap.o.lveo-6a.i, pelfro 7) Kar' avdpuyirov tovtov Se aAAo p.ev %x elv ovSev, Trepl Se TJ7 X 61 / 3 ' XP vcr0 ^ v SaKTvXwv, ov rrepieXopevov eK^iJvat. Plat. Sep. ii. 359 d. Gyges, the story runs, seemg the abyss and marvelling at it, descended and saw, among many other marvellous things, a hollow brazen horse, fitted with windows, through which he peeped and saw inside a corpse, so it seemed, of more than human stature. It had nothing but a golden ring on its finger, which Gyges took off, and so made his way out. ko.6' as eiSev — atveTO — aAAo plv tt)(e — ov 7repi.eX6p.ivoi Though Latin has the same construction of the Eelative with the Infinitive, yet Cicero in translating this does not avail himself of the identity of idiom (see De Offic. iii. 38). Note. Latin has, though very rarely, this idiom of the Eelative with the Infinitive : the often quoted instance from Liv. xxiv. 3 appears to rest on an incorrect reading, but in Liv. xxx. 42 an undoubted example occurs. Quorum oratio varia fuit, partim purgantium, quae questi erant missi ad regem legati, partim ultro accusantium socios populi Eomani, sed multo infestius M. Aurelium, quern ex tribus ad se missis legatis, dilectu habito, substitisse et se bello lacessisse contra foedus, et saepe cum praef ectis suis signis conlatis pugnasse. They spoke on a variety of topics. A t one time they endeavoured to clear themselves of the charges brought by the commis- sioners sent to faejikmg $y time they were bringing 402 ORATIO OBLIQUA. countercharges against the allies of the Roman people, with much greater rancowr however against M. Aurelius, who (they said), out of the three commissioners sent to them, had levied troops, stayed behind, and had commenced hostilities against them contrary to treaty, and had fought several down/right battles with their officers. § 321. Assimilation of Optatives. A. After an Optative in a Principal Sentence it is usual for another Optative to follow in an Adverbial or a Relative Sentence as if in Historic Sequence. As the Optative is not in itself past, but on the contrary almost invariably refers to future time, we can only explain this on the principle of assimilation. (a.) TeOvai-qv ore fioi urjKeri ravra fxi\oi. MlMNERMUS, i. 2. Then might I die whensoe'er this is no longer my care. For oTttv piXy. (p.) 7r<3s av Tts, a ye p,fj iirlo-Ta.no, cro<£os av eirj ■ Xen. Mem. iv. 6, 7. How could one be wise in what he does not know for certain ? Instead of a hriararai, or a av fifj eVtcrnjTCH. (c.) el a.TrodvrjO'KOi jj.lv irdvra ocra tov £fjv peraXdBoi, iiruSr] Se dwodavot,, p.ivoi iv toi5t 'icj>v. SOPH. Phil. 324. For ha, yvwa-i. It is generally stated that a Final Sentence is never assimilated. See Soph. Phil. 961, an often quoted instance. See also Soph. Track 955 ; Eur. Bacch. 1252 (and consult the note in Sandys' edition). In Eue. Bacch. 1384, we get both constructions, Assimila- tion and non- Assimilation combined : ekOoijll 8' 07TOV p/qn K.i8aip!liv piapooTv pJodos eKp,d8y o-a<£<3s ; Eur. Eer.. 179. irplv av eKfiddy, and not irplv eKfidOoi. Of. Eel. 176, Ion 672, Plat. Bep. ii. 359 c (0 T6 av /3ovXrjrai). (J.) KD/OOS irpoo-KaXwv toiis tXovs eanrovSaioXoyetro, &s SrjXoirj, ovs Tijua. Xen. An. i. 9. 28. ous rt/ja, arid not rip,(oy. 2. An Indirect Statement with 6'ti or s, an Indirect Ques- tion, or a Sentence with &™s when following an Optative, is not so assimilated, nor usually a Final Sentence. (a ) ov S' av eis dvTeiVoi ws ov trvficpcpei rfj 7roA«. Dem. 202. 23. Not even one would reply that it is not expedient to the Here av dvretVot is a Principal Sentence in Primary Time. Digitized by Microsoft® 404 ORATTU OBLIQUA. (b.) e'l Tts Aeyot avOpwrov IcmjKOTa, Kivovvra Se ras \etpas re /cat rfjv KecJMXrjv, on 6 auros eo-rrjKe re /cat Kiveirai, ovk av d^ioipev ovtw Aeyetv Setv. Plat. Rep. iv. 436 d. If one should say of a man who is standing still, but is moving his hands and his head, that the same man is both stationary and in motion, we should not allow this to be a correct mode of expression. (c.) 6 irpwpevs -rijs vea>s . . . «ai dirmv av enrol, birov CKacrra Ketxat koI oirocra ecrriv. XEN. Oec. vili. 14. (d.) okvoitjv av £ts Ta jrAota ep/3aiveiv, a K{!/50s rjp.LV Soirj, pvrj rjpas awats Tats Tpirjpeo-i KaraSvo-g. Xen. An. i. 3. 17. § 323. Examples of Mixed Graphic and Strict Obliqua. (a.) irpoeiTtov vpiv on el pr) ■jrapeo-op.eda o-vo-rpao-evcropevoi, eKeivoi erf> r)pas loiev. XEN. Hell. V. 2. 13. / told you beforehand that if we should (shall) not be present to join them, they would march against us. (b.) e(f>oj3eiTO p,r) ol KaKeSaipovioi (refill's, oirore (ra^jais aKoiareiav, ovKeTi dcjiSio-iv. ThUC. i. 91. He was afraid that the Lacedaemonians would no longer let them go, whenever they heard of it. (c.) eurov tij fiovXfj on eiSeir/v toiis ironjcravTas, nal e£rj\ey£a tiA)jT0S, dvTeiirov Se eyto, /cat Tore piev ov y'evovro Si' epe. Andok. de Myst. 61. I told the Council that I knew who had committed the act, and I established the facts that Euphileius had suggested this scheme, and that I had opposed it, and that on that occasion it was not executed owing to my opposition. . . . eio-ijyqo- aro Euc^tAijTOS, dvreiTrov Se lyw, ovk eyevero. § 324. Virtual Oratio Obliqua. Virtual Oratio Obliqua occurs when the words, thoughts, and motives, not of the writer, but of the subject of the sentence, are given rather by implication or allusion than directly introduced. Digitized by Microsoft® PAST TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 405 (a.) tov ILepiKXea eKaKifav on crrpaTijyos &v ovk erre^dyoi. Thuc. ii. 21. (The Athenians, oi ttoXXol, grumbled thus : ;-y6s &v ovk eire^dyei rjpas). (6.) ot 8' Qicreipov, el aXuxroivro. XEN. An. i. 4. 7. Others were pitying them if they were to be captured (felt pity at the thought). The thought was o'lKTpol eo-ovrai el aXucrovTai. (c.) oio~da eiraivecravTa "Oprjpov tov 'Ayapepvova ws fiao-iXevs eli] ayados. XEN. Symp. iv. 6. You know that Homer praises Agamemnon as being a good king. Cf. laudat Africanum Panaetius quod fuerit abstinens. Cic. De Offic. ii. 76. (d.) raXXa, rjv en vavpayeiv el 'AOrjvaioL roXprjvuxri, wap- eo-Keva£ovTO. THUC. vii. 59. They were making all other preparations in case the Athenians should venture cm a battle. Here, observe, the graphic tjv ToApjo-wo-t is used instead of el ToXprjcreiav. («.) Compare jrpbs rrjv iroXiv, el eirifioijOoiev, exiapovv. THUC. vii. 100. They were advancing on the city in case the citizens should march out against them. El and edv often allude in this way to a thought. See Soph. 0. 0. 1770, edv 7TUS SiaKwXvo-wpev : SOPH. Ai. 313, el pi] cpavofyv. § 3 2 5- Past Tenses of the Indicative in Oratio Obliqua. I. For instances of the Imperfect and Pluperfect Indicative in Sub-direct Clauses, see Xen. An. i. 2. 21, Hell. vii. 1. 34. II. For instances of the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist Indicative in Sub-oblique Clauses, see Xen. Mem. ii. 6. 13; THUC. vii. 80 (oi)s pereirepxpav) ; DEM. 869. 9 (&v direSoerav) ; Xen. An. i. 9. 10 (wwk&S9l' ijpis ZStSagav. Isoc. Panegyr. 19. Here irplv 8i8d£eiav would represent irplv dv SiSd^taa-i. (b.) ijSews av KaXXiKXel en 8ieXey6p,rjv, e'ws atrip -rqv tov ' A pifrlovos direStOKa prjcriv dvrt Trjs tov Ztjoov. Plat. Gorg. 506 b. i'ais aireSwKa and not ews d,Tro8oi7jv, which would represent etas av diroSw. § 326. Apparently Abnormal Obliqua. Sometimes, but rarely, instead of either the Graphic or the real Obliqua , we get an Indicative. An , examination of passages seems to show that the writer throws in the mood and tense from his own point of view instead of giving the mood which would be required if he were quoting words 01 thoughts. (a.) K.vpos vir'eo-yero tois MiAijo-tois fyvyacriv, el ~ks «ara- npd£eiev, e' a IcrrpaTeveTO, pvrj irpocrdev iraveo~6ai, irplv avrovs Karaydyoi oiKa.Se. XEN. An. i. 2. 2. The Recta would be rjv KaraTrpdgu), efi a o-rparevopai ov iravo-ojxai irplv av KaTaydyo). e<$> a eo~TpareveTO is really a bit of the writer's narrative. (b.) Aiyercu 8' avrbv (Tlavcraviav) pieXXovra £vXXr)tf>drjo-eo-6ai . . . yvuvai. e' la ey^tapei. TlIUC. i. 134. It is said that Pausanias, when on the point of being arrested, knew for what purpose he (the ephor) icas coming, etp,' $ xwpoirj or xcopet would be the usual construction ; ixwpei is the mood and tense of the writer rather than of the subject Pausanias. (c.) eXeyov ov KaXGis rrjv 'EXXdSa eXevOepovv avrbv, el avSpas Siecpdetpev, k.t.X. ThTJC. iii. 32. They told him that he was not liberating Greece in the right way, if he was destroying men, etc. Obliqua would require d SiacpOeipei, or 8ia4>6eipot. Of. Thuc. vi. 29, eipyao-To (taking Siecfrdeipev as Imperfect. It may be Aorist). Digitized by Microsoft® LONG SPEECHES IN OBLIQUA. 407 Precisely in the same way it is open in Latin for the writer to employ an Indicative or a Subjunctive. Thus we might say, legati, mirante consule, quod morabantur, venerimt (or quod morarentur) ; morabantur would give the writer's statement (morarentur would express the consul's feelings). (d.) The most peculiar instance perhaps is in Arist. Vesp. 283, Xeymv tos iXaOrfvaios fjv kou Karetiroi, where the Xeyiav (is seems to necessitate a quotation of words (ais iu-rt or d-rj). § 327. LONG SPEECHES IN OBLIQUA. Long Speeches in the Oratio Obliqua, such as we find in Livy, are rare in Greek. Greek is too lively, too anxious constantly to recur to the present, and cannot bind itself to the formal regularity which characterises a Eoman Obliqua. The introductory verb ?<£ij, eXege, tfpero, elnev, is repeated, or the writer breaks away suddenly into the Eecta. For longer specimens of the Obliqua see Plat. Symp. 189, Rep. 614 b, Thuc. vi. 49, Xbn. Cyr. viii. 1. 10, 11. A very instructive example occurs in Andokides de Mysteriis, 38, etc., which is here given at length : — e<£ij yap AtoKAeiSijs e'lvai f£v Diokleides stated that he avSpdn-oSov 01 eirl Aavp[, Seiv had a slave at Laurium, and Se Ko/ucrao-dai aTrocfiopdv. dva- that he had occasion to fetch eras Se 7r/ouj \peva-6eh t^s &pas a payment due. Rising early /JaSifeiv elvai Se irava-kXrjvov. he mistook the time and eiret Se Trapa to irpoirvXaiov tov started : there was a full moon. Aiovvo-ov f)v, opav dv6 punrovs When he was by the gateway 7roAAovs euro tov d>8eCov Kara- of Dionysus, he saw several /Baivovras els rfjv opx^o-rpav persons coming down from Seuras Se clvtovs, elo-eXdiav v7rb the Odeum into the Orchestra. rty a-Kiav Ka6e£eo-6ai peragu Afraid of them, he withdrew rov Kiovos Kal rfjs 0-TiyA.^s ec£' into the shade and crouched 27 o aTparrjyoi eo-nv 6 \aXKovs. down between the column and opav Se dvdp&Trovs rbv (iev the pedestal on which stands dpidfibv p,d\itTTa rpiaKcxriovs, the Bronze General. He saw eo-rdvat, Se kvk\w dva irevTe Kal some three hundred men Se/ca avSpas, rovs Se dva. standing round about in eiKoa-iv op&v Se awrav wpbs groups of fifteen and twenty -i)v o-eX^i/Tjv Ta vp&BlfflfkeSW Mffi^&mfi* he looked he reco S" 408 RAT 10 OB LI QUA. wXuo~to>v yiyvuxrKCiv. Kai wpG- tov piv, & avSpes, rovd' -uire^cTO Seivorarov irpaypa, oipai, birois ev eKeivip eh) ovtivo. jiovXoiro 'A6rjv(uavai t£>v dvSpwv tovtwv etvai, ovtivo. Se fir) /3ovXoito, Xeyeiv on ovk rjv. tSuiv Se TavT eov ev tijj XaA.Ket Ka,6r)pevov, dvayayuiv avrbv ets to 'H^>aio-T£tov Xeyeiv direp ip.LV lya> ei'pr)Ka } 'Aow. eiiretv oSv tov Eii<£?jp,ov on KaAfis 7ronjo"eiei' eiTrcfiv, kc« vw i)Kuv KeXevcrai ol el's tijv Aew- yopov o'lKiav, iV licet £vyyevg per' epov 'Av5o/aSiy kgu eTepois oT'S Set. ij/cetv £<£)} Tij vcrTepaia., koX Si) KoiTTe.iv Trjv dvpav, tov Se ira/repa. tov Ijuov txixeiv e£tdvTa, (cat ei7reiv aiJToV" apa •ye o-£ ot'Se Keptpevovcri ; XP'? Digitized by nised most of their faces by the moonlight. Now in the first place, gentlemen, this story on which he bases his evidence is a most extraordin- ary thing; his object, I take it, being that it might rest with him to include in this list any Athenian he wished, or to exclude any he did not wish. After seeing this he stated that he went on to Lauri ■■m, and next day heard of the mutilation of the Hermae. So he knew it was the work of these persons. Returning to town he found the com- missioners of inquiry chosen and a reward of a hundred minae offered for information. Seeing Euphemus the son of Kallias and brother of Telekles sitting in his forge, he brought him up to the Hephaesteum, and told him exactly what I have said to you, how he had seen us that night. Now he did not (so he said) desire to receive money from the state more than from us, if we would be his friends. Euphemus then told him that he had acted rightly in telling him, and now he asked him to come to the house of Leogoras, to meet me there, said he, with one Andokides and other needful persons. He said that he went next day, and just as he was knocking at the door my father hap- Microsoft® r LONG SPEECHES IN OBLFQUA. 409 fievTOi, fir) a7ro)0eKrdaL toiovtovs (j>[\oi's' ihrovTa 8e avrbv Tavra oi'xcer^at. KCU TOUT(f> fl€V T Tp07T(ff TOV irarepa p,ov d7r(oA.Aue, crwetSdVa a.Trov. ewretv 8e ijjtias 6V1 SeSoyfievov r)p,iv ei'rj Si5o /J6> rdXavra dpyvptov SiSdvcu ot avri twv Ikgitov /xvcov t<3v ck tov Srjfiocriov, eav 8c KaT- /xev ij/aeis a [3ovX6fie6a, hia. avTov r)fiiav e6vcu, ttlo-tlv 8e Tovrui' fiovvat re Kai Se£acr#GH. (hroKplvacrdai Se avrbs irpbs ravra 0T6 /3ovXtvcroiTO. 17/ias 8e KeAtijetJ' a-urov t/k«v as KaAAtov rod T17A.eKA.60us, tva Kcuceivos wapdrj. rbv 8 ati KijSeo-Tijv /iot) o{!tms aTrdtWvev, riKiiv i^rj £19 Ka.AA.tou, kcu KaOop.oXoyqa-a.'S Tjfilv ttmttiv Sovvai kv aKpowoXei, (cm, ij/tas crw0e/*eVotJS ol to dpyvpwv as tov ciriovTa ju-ijva Sdkrciv Sia- \ptv8eo-9ai kcu oi5 StSdvar r/Ketv oSv fir/vvo-wv tu. yevofieva. pened to be going out, and said, " Oh, is it you these people are expecting 1 Well, one ought not to reject such friends." So saying, he was off. In this way he tried to ruin my father by denouncing him as an accomplice. (According to him) we said that we pro- posed to give him two talents of silver instead of the hun- dred minae offered by the Treasury, and that if we gained our object he was (should be) one of our num- ber, and that we exchanged pledges of this. His own reply to this was that he would think it over : we, how- ever, told him to come to the house of Kallias son of Telekles whose presence we desired. Again in this he tried to ruin my relation. He came, so he said, to the house of Kallias, and accord- ing to agreement he gave us pledges on the Akropolis, and we, after stipulating to give him the money by the next month, break our promise and refuse to give it. Conse- quently he is present to in- form of the facts. Digitized by Microsoft® CHAPTEE IV. FIGUEES OF EHETOEIO, Etc. § 328. Alliteration. Alliteration, or the repetition of the same letter. e.g. Who shall decide when doctors disagree ? Subdola cum ridet placidi pellacia ponti. Luc. ii. 559. Tympana tenta tonant palmis et cymbala circum Concava, raucisonoque minantur cornua cantu. Id. ii. 618, 6o.v6.tov 6S.ttov 6el Plat. Apol. xxix. 39 A. It (wickedness) fleeth faster than fate. rj t<5> TravcoAti iraTpl tu>v fi.lv k^ k[iov iraiSiov irdflos irapuro ; SOPH. El. 544. Or by thy felon father, for the family I lore him, was all fondness flung away 1 rbv S' ayplois oo~o~outi Tra.TTT'fjVa.'s 6 7ra?s 7rn5cras Trpocranrip. SOPH. Ant. 1231. Of. Soph. Ant. 50, where an initial a occurs seven times. Instances may easily be collected. Ours is the most alli- terative of languages. Shakspere abounds with natural and beautiful examples. As is well known, Early English alliterative poetry consisted of couplets, in which each section contained two or more accented words beginning with the same letter. In a somer seson, whan soft was the sonne, I shope me in shroudes, as I a shepe were, In habite as an heremite, unholy of workes, Went wyde in pis world, wondres to here. r,- •*• -,<.»,.• «^ Piers the Plowman 4 10 Digitized by Microsoft® ANAKOLUTHIA. 41 1 Shakspere ridicules the abuse of Alliteration : Whereat, with blade, with bloody blameful blame, He bravely broached his boiling bloody breast. " Hortatur me frater, ut meos malis miser mandarem natos " of Accius (Cic. fuse. iv. 77) is little better. § 329. Anakoluthia. Anakoluthia or Anakoluthon is the term used where the structure of the sentence is not grammatically followed out. It is either natural and unstudied, or artificial and rhetorical. It is natural and unstudied in Herodotus, whose irregular constructions arise from his writing just as if he were talking. It is natural and unstudied again in Aeschylus, whose thoughts and emotions are too big for his words, and in Thucydides, who thinks more of matter than manner. It is rhetorical in Plato, who purposely imitates the easy freedom of ordinary conversation. Sometimes Anakoluthia arises from mere slovenliness, as in Andokides. During the progress of a sentence a new idea strikes the writer ; a new expression is thus introduced and becomes a disturbing influence. Or an explanation may be necessary ; and a parenthesis, more or less long, is inserted. The sentence thus may wander far away from its original con- struction. Generally the writer is aware that he has gone astray, and goes back, not to the grammar, but to the sense of the passage, resuming often in a different construction with a particle Se, 817, ovv, so, then, as I was saying. There are many kinds of Anakoluthia, and the figure is constantly recurring. One or two specimens are given just to show what is meant : dvSpoTv 8' bjxa.iii.ow ddva.ro'S SS' ciutoktovos, — ovk &tti yrjpa.'S rovSe rov fjU(Wjj,aros. Aesch. S. c. Theb. 681. Here ddvaTos, the subject, has no verb (yrjpao-Kei). Instead of the verb the writer solemnly pauses, adding a second sentence nearly complete in itself. But blood of brothers shed by fellowly hands — There is no age fm such voUutwn. 412 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. tci izdvTa yap tis ey^eas dv8' afyiaros eras, [idrrfv o fiof(do0Tepa, t»Js re &pas tov iviavTOv rairnjs oi'cr^s, iv fj a.i\ov, epr)p.ov, dwoXiv, Iv faio-iv veKpov. SOPH. Phil. 1018. Friendless, lone, citiless, midst the living dead. The use of the figure is to set forth each idea separately, and pointedly. It is so common that further instances are unnecessary. § 332. Binary Structure. One conception is stated twice over, so that two aspects of it are given. This double presentment enables the reader to obtain a fuller view of the conception as a whole. Mr. Eiddell aptly describes this artifice as giving a rhetorical "binocular vision." It is commonly employed in Similes. av 8' 'Aya/j.ejj,v(i}V icrraTO 8a.Kpv)(ev ore" Apyeioicri fieTrjvSa. II. ix. 13. Cf. Soph. Ai. 840, 0. 0. 1239. Digitized by Microsoft® 414 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. ravra Jya> Sokw aKoveiv, wcrjrep ot Kopv^avTiCivTes T debv etvai ; Plat. Apol. xiv. 26 e. Binary Structure in giving two descriptions of the same object differs from Apposition, which gives hut one descrip- tion, though in certain forms there is a resemblance between the figures. Asyndeta and Anakoluthia often occur in this structure. The artifice is used by all Greek writers, but it is employed in an almost endless variety of subtle forms by Plato. See Eiddell, pp. 196-209, whence the above examples are taken. Antiptosis is a form of Binary Structure. § 333- Brachylogy or Abbreviated Construction. (Including Zeugma, Constructio Praegnans, Brachylogy of Comparison.) Brachylogy is a kind of Ellipse ; but where Ellipse actually suppresses a word or sentence altogether, Brachylogy leaves them to be supplied from some corresponding expression in the context. Brachylogy is thus more essentially artificial than Ellipse. £^>pacras viriprepav rrji tote x°-P lr °s ( s( 5. iiriprepav X°-P w > the X°-P l v supplied from x«/°'tos). Soph. El. 1265. A Substantive, an Adjective, a Pronoun, a Conjunction, or a Verb may thus be supplied from the context. rot p,ev aXXa, bo-airep Kal iravres vp,eis liroutre. Xen. Gyr. iv. 1. 3. i.e. to, p.lv aXXa (sc. iiroUi, supplied from eTroieiTe). In the common phrases ovSev aAAo 17, rt aAAo 17, 6IAA0 ™ rj, a different verb of more general meaning is supplied from a special verb in the context. of. Aaiopiovcri rg ^KvdiKfj 6[M>ir)v, ykHcrcrav 8e iSirjv. HDT. iv. 106. They wear a dress like the Scythian, but (speak) a language of their own. Cf. the old Tyne ballad : " He wears a blue bonnet, wi' a dimple on his chin." 7rpo0ii/u'a xpw/ievoi /cat 7rapaKeXevcr/j.§. ThUC. iv. 11. With energy and with mutual exhortation. X/HU/J6VOI goes with both nouns not quite in the same sense. This sort of Zeugma is sometimes distinguished as Syllepsis. 1 Cok. iii. 2, ydXa i/iSs eiroTura ov (3pwp,a, is a stock instance from the New Testament, In-oncra suiting ydXa only. Cf. L. i. 64. § 335- Constructio Praegnans. Constructs Praegnans is a form of Brachylogy. Two Sentences are compressed into one. oS «5ei KaKoiradeTv rS> crco/xaTt ivravOoi ovSev p,e h>(j>eX.rjO-tv 17 epTreipia. Antiph. de Coed. Her. 2. Where I ought to have endured personal ill-treatment hither (i.e. here, whither they have brought me), my experience proved no help to me. ■ It is common with certain Prepositions (eis, Iv, «£) and with Relative Adverbs. e.g. rals iv Trj yrj KaTairefevyviais (sc. vavcri). The ships which had fled to the shore, and were on the shore. Digitized by Microsoft® 416 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. neivos 8' oirov /3e[3r)Kev, ovSels otSe. SOPH. Tr. 10. Where (for whither) he is gone none hnoweth. Swov for Snot. Cf. Phil 256. Constractio Praegnans is very common in the New Testa- ment. A stock instance is "3?jAi7nros evpedij els 'A^cotov, ' Act. Ap. viii. 40. See 2 Tim. iv. 18, Matt. v. 22, evoxos els tt)v ykevvav. § 336. Brachylogy of Comparison. Brachylogy of Comparison, or Comparatio Compendiaria. The stock example is from H. xvii. 51, Kofiai x a P^ T£(ra " bV 5p,oiai, i.e. Kojxai 6/j.oTai ^apiTtav Ko/xauri, hair like the (hair of) the Graces. 'H(j>a[va>s u>s (6po\.oy£>), I decidedly do (assent) ; a/Mjxav<3s ye &s o-68pa, most decidedly. See Eiddell, Digest, p. 240. § 338. Ellipse and Aposiopesis. The suppression of a word or sentence. e.g. 17 avpiov (sc. rjjj.epa). Is Kopai), are common instances of unconscious Ellipse. Instances of unconscious Ellipse of Sentences occur in the phrases ov-^ on, pvq on, o^x ows, etc., and more or less so in the suppression of a Protasis, or of an Apodosis. . Aposiopesis is a form of Ellipse. 1 In animated and excited expressions the speaker breaks off abruptly, leaving the lest of the sentence to be understood. p,r)8ev wpos opyrjv -irpos dtSiv (sc. Spao-fls). SOPH. El. 369. By Heaven 1 naught in anger. pj\ rpifias It (sc. iropi^n or some such verb). Antig. 577. No longer tarrying t pj) p.01 irp6 /iij jj.01 PefirJKr). SOPH. Phil. 494. Where Philoktetes fears that his father may no longer be alive. § 340- Hypallage. • A change of case, so that a word does not agree with the case which logically it qualifies. In such constructions the word agrees with a compound expression, so that the figure is a form of Synesis rather than Hyperbaton. The stock instance is from Horace — Nee purpurarum sidere clarior Delenit usus, where the adjective clarior, instead of agreeing with pur- purarwm (purple robes) agrees with the compound substantive usus purpurarum. & irarpwov Icrn'as ftdOpov. SOPH. Ai. 860. Seat of my father's hearth. For 5rar/oi})as ecrnas jSddpov. So Antig. 794, veiKos dvSpwv £vvaip.ov, where vei/cos dvSpwv forms one word : Track 817, SyKov dvd/xaros pvqrp^ov. tov 8' dSAiws OavovTa THoXwcCkovs vkuvv. SOPH. Ant. 26. For davovTos TloXvveiKows. In' Lucretius, i. 474, we have an instance of true Hypal- lage : Ignis Alexandri Phrygio sub pectore gliscens. Mr. Munro, in his note on the line, collects some striking parallels from other writers. § 341. Hyperbaton, Chiasmus, Hysteron-Proteron. The displacement of the natural order of words. Its chief use is to give emphasis to a word. It also enables language to represent the rapidity of thought, one word instantly catching up another word. Digitized by Microsoft® LITOTES. 419 Easy and familiar instances are — etVe, & n-pbs Aids, MeAijre. Plat. Apol. xiii. 25 c. Like the Latin Per te Deos oro. Certain words in particular are thus displaced, especially ye, fievroi, av, 'in, tcrios, ovk in ov <£»j/x<, etc. dp' ofiv av /(te oiecrdt rocravra err/ 8iayeveJv ev rj fjun.rTOjj.i6a p.evroi ra\cf>i.ra ; ARIST. Nub. 788. Ta^' civ opOtas i'crios p.ip.oiro. PLAT. £«(/. 640 D. Chiasmus is a form of Hyperbaton. Chiasmus is the In- verse Parallelism of Clauses and Sentences : ttom p,h> epyov irav 8' eVos Ae'yovTas re Kal irpdrrovTai, — where the outside epyov belongs to the outside Trpdrrovra's, and the inside eVos to the inside AeyovTas. ovr dSiKet, ovr' dSiKeirai, ovO' mrb deov, ovre deov. Hysteron Proteron (yo-repov Trporepov) reverses the order in which events occur, e.g. rp6.<[>ev -qS 1 kykvovro. EXetS rl Kelpd£etv. PLAT. Apol. iii. 19 D. aio-^ai'd^evos p.ev Kal \v7rovp.evos Kal SeSiaig on djnjX" 6avop,t]v. Plat. J^oZ. vi. 21 e. On the Hyperbaton and its forms see Riddell, p. 228. § 342. Litotes. Litotes or Meiosis, smoothing or diminishing a stronger conception by a weaker statement. A common enough figure in all languages, but especially suited to Greek taste, e.g. ov X §0-0-0 v, not less, i.e. more; ov p.S.X\ov, not so much. el fiev yap rovro Xeyovcnv, op.o\oyo'ii}v av eytoye ov Kara. tovtovs eTvat p-qroip. PLAT. Apol. 1. 17 B. If this is what they mean, I must admit that I am an orator, not as they are orators (i.e. an orator of a far higher order Hum they). Digitized by Microsoft® 420 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. \alpov(TLV e£eTa£o/xero<.s tois oio/ievots elvai (robots, ovo~i o ov- 'ia-Ti yap ovk djySes. PLAT. Apol. xxii. 33 C. They enjoy the cross-examination of those who think they are wise, without really being so. It really is not disagreeable (i.e. it is extremely amusing). KeiTcu 6avwv SeiXaios, ov fi&A.' evTV)(£is. AJESCH. Pers. 327. Lies low in death unhappy, not all fortunately (i.e. all in- gloriously, because unburied : an euphemism also). § 343. Oxymoron. Oxymoron is the contrast by juxtaposition of opposite conceptions, e.g. from the Paradise Lost : Our final hope is fiat despair. Dishonest shame Of Nature's works, honour dishonourable. A universe of death . . . Where all life dies, death lives. In King John the despairing and passionate Constance cries : Death, death ; amiable, lovely death ! Thou odoriferous stench ! sound rottenness ! i^Opwv aSiopa SZpa. SOPH. Ai. 665. Giftless the gifts of foes. fiaiverai 6" vcf>' ijSoi'tJs p-qTrip dp.r)Tb,p. ' Soph. El. 1154. She is mad for joy, A mother, yet no mother. oo-ia wavovpyrjo-ao-a. SOPH. Ant. 74. Daring a holy crime. e^G(f>0tv0' at TpiO~KaXfwi vaeg avaes ava«. AESCH. Pers. 680. They are destroyed those three-banked ships, ships no more, ships no more. Cf. Catullus : funera ne funera. Of. Aesch. P. V. 545, x«/°'s ax a /"s- Soph. 0. T. 1214 yau.os ayauos. Digitized by Microsoft® PERIPHRASIS AND PLEONASM. 421 Oxymoron is well caricatured by Shakspere : A tedious brief scene of young Pyramus And his love Thisbe, very tragical mirth. Merry and tragical, tedious and brief ! That is, hot ice, and wonderous strange snow. How shall we find the concord of this discord ? § 344- Periphrasis. Periphrasis or Circumlocution is a roundabout way of using two or more words instead of one, e.g. 'Ict/m^s napa, head of Ismene, for 'Ict/mjj^ ; dpi^ara NelXov (Plat. Leg. 953), children of the Nile,ie. Egyptians (cf. the Hebrew, children of Israel, sons of Belial, son of peace, etc.). The word xPW a occurs in one or two phrases : vbs jiiya XP^Jf ,a i Hdt. ; to xPVt ia ™" wktZv, Ar. Nub. 2. Very often the Substantive is used for an Adjective or an apposition, e.g. HoareiSSvo's k/xitos, the might of Poseidon, for the mighty Poseidon (Aesch. Eum. 27); vapQevla 'lovs, the virgin Io (Aesch. P. V. 898); fiypbs o-e/3a TOirpruv, fjteWai redvavat (Plat. Apol. xviii. 30 c and xix. 32 a), drifida-as e'x", periturus sum, fore or futurum esse with a Subjunctive mood. Very often, again, both in Greek and Latin, a periphrasis is used, for a simple verb, especially with 4'xw, e.g. kv v$ Ix * = Zia.voovp.a.1 : <£povi/i£s ex"* = 4>p°v& '■ OappaXews e'xi> = Ba.ppm (all in Plat. Apol.): \vrn)pm Zx>» = AwroC/tat (Soph. El. 766): rjSovrjV $£/>av = rep/ruv (SOPH. El. 286) : (ovrjv \aj3elv = (fxoveZv, etc. In fact these periphrastic verbs are of constant use both ir- prose and poetry. § 345. Pleonasm. Pleonasm or Eedundancy is the employment of words apparently superfluous. Apparently, for a second expression may often define or amplify a previous expression, e.g. 6 rrrpaTrj-ybs Trjs crTparia.'s, fiovov Ka6' avrbv KovSev' aAAov. Digitized by Microsoft® 422 FIGURES OF RHETORIC, ETC. A cognate accusative is a sort of pleonasm, ^x r l v /*«x ecr ^ a ' : or an adverb with its adjective, //.eyas //.eyaXwo-ri (kclto). II. xvi. 776, (he lay outstretched) huge with his huge length. Adverbs are often thus combined : d)s aX-qBCis t<5 ovti : iraXiv aWis, aS TraXiv adOis : eVeira p.erh. ravra. The repeti- tion of the negative and of av are cases of Pleonasm. ti Srj keyovT£r]p.ov, S T&Xatva, KOtfiTjcrov crro/ta. AESCH. Ag. 1258. i.e. &p6v. yovktav Ikti/aovs 'i(T\ovcra irrkpyyai dfurdviov yoiav. SOPH. El. 242. Restraining the wings of shrill-voiced waitings So that they honour not a parent. Cf. Antig. 1200 Cf. Eur. Bacch. 70, 183. § 347- Puns. (Paronomasia, Annominatio.) Occasionally Greek writers indulge in them. dXXa. yap, & MeAijrc . . . cra^cos aVo^ai'veis rfjv travrox, dpeXeiav, on oxJSei' (rot /tejueArjxe irepi $>v ip,e eiVayeis. Plat. Apol. xii. 25 c (See xiv. where the ^ieW^^oft® PUNS. 423 Riddell, p. 242, collects many instances from Plato. aTreo-repijKas rbv /?m>v to, to£' eX' eavrov, etc., would be familiar instances. Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft® ENGLISH INDEX. Reference is only made to subjects which are not easily found in the Table of Contents. The numbers refer to the pages of the book. Ablative represented by Genitive, 78-9. Accusative, see Table of Contents, 66-78. Absolute, 95. with. Infinitive,! i 3] 158, 179. with Infinitive instead of Nominative, 180. in Apposition to Sen- tence, 25, 74. with. Prepositions, 289. Active Voice, 120. Adjectives which take a Genitive, 100. which take a Dative, Article, for Possessive, 30. with words used ma- teria/iter, 35. not repeated with a second noun, 35. Asyndeton, 24. Attraction, 58. Attributive or Epithet, 5 ; Peculiarities in Construc- tion, 23-4. Cases, Preliminary Note on, 64. Causal Sentences, see Table of Contents, 276-9. Causative Active Voice, 125 ; do. Middle, 127. Collective Noun with Plural Predicate, 19. Comparative and Super- lative, 120-3. denoting too great a degree, 97, 120, 121. Concessive Sentences, see Table of Contents, 249- 251. Conditional Sentences, see Table of Contents, 193- 231. > Sentences, examples of, 209-231. Consecutive Sentences, see Table of Contents, 269- 275. Co-ordinate Sentences, 7. Copula, 1 ; Verbs used as, 12 ; omitted, 13. Construction koto, ovvecrw, 24. D Dative, see Table of Con- I tents, 104-119. Dative of interest in Par- ticipial phrases, 107. of circumstance used adverbially (e.g. ciyfj), 114. with Infinitive, 13, 158. as an Oblique Pre- dicate, 45. Dawes' Canon, note on, 267. Deliberative or Dubitative, see Questions. Definite and Indefinite Sentences, 194-5. Demonstrative Pronouns as Subjects and Predicates, 18. Pronouns preceding a sentence in Apposition, 25. Deponent Verbs, 131. Dual Number, 19, 20. 119. Adverbs which take a Genitive, 100. — which take a Dative, 119. Adverbial sentences, 9. Agent, how denoted, 131. denoted by Preposi- tions, 289-90. Genitive of, 101 ; Dative of, in. Anastrophe, 289. Aorist, uses of, 145-9. Sometimes the equival- ent of the English, Present, Perfect, or Pluperfect, 147. Apodosis, meaning of the term, 195, footnote. without av, 217-9. Apposition, 5 ; Peculiarities of, 24-26. Article, 2 see Table of Con- tents, ch. ii., 27-46. as Personal, Demon- strative, and Relative in Attic, 28. 1 For an explanation of this construction, see Monro's Homeric Grammar^ p. 158. 2 See Monro's Homeric Grammar, where the uses of the Article are arranged under three heads. Digitized by Microsoft® 425 Emotion, Verbs of, with Participles, 170. Verbs of, with et foi on, 186. Epithet, see Attributive. Fearing, Verbs of, with /*)}, /xif ov, 262-8. (i)WithSubj. or Opt, 262. (2) With Fut. Indie, 264. (3) With o7ro)9, o7ra)5, and Subj. or Opt., 253-. (2) With, us, ottos av and Subj. (not Opt.), 255. (3) Rarely with Fut. Indie, j 256. Frequentative, see Itera- tive. Future Middle as Passive, 1 3-5. ■ Perfect, 150. Indicative, with otros Final, 256, n. 4 ; Fut. Opt., as Obliqua of above, 256. Genitive, see Table of Con- tents, 78-104. Absolute, 1 96, 165-7. with Infinitive, 13, 158. as Oblique Predicate, 45-. in Apposition to an- other Genitive supplied in the Possessive, 26, 49. Gnomic Tenses, 151. Graphic (or Vivid) con- struction, i.e. the Sub- stitution, in a Subordinate Clause in Historic Se- quence of the Mood used in the Primary Sequence, 138, 182, etc. see also Oratio Obliqua passim, esp. 386, 404. H Hoping and Promising, Verbs of, with Pres. and Aor, Infin., 180-1. Imperative Mood, 136-7. Imperfect Tense, uses of, 143-4- Indicative Mood — states facts or asks questions, 132. in the Indirect State- ment, 181, etc. Indicative Mood— in the Indirect Ques- tion, 188. in the Indirect Petition (Fut. Indie), 192. in Definite Sentences, 194-5. in Conditional Sen- tences, see Part II. ch. ii. (a) Present Conditions. (b) Future Conditions. (c) Past Conditions. (d) Unfulfilled Past or Present Conditions. in Temporal Sentences to denote Definite Time, see Part II. ch. iii. in Concessive Sen- tences, see Part II. ch. iv. in Final Sentences of Past Purpose, 257. in Relative Final Sen- tences, 238. with SVws Modal (Fut. j Indie), 259, etc., 262. with Verbs of Fearing, 263. — — with Consecutive Sen- tences, see Part II. ch. vi. with Limitative or Re- strictive Sentences, 274. with Causal Sentences, see Part II. ch. vli. with Expressions of Wishes, see Part II. ch. viii. with Relative Sen- tences, see Part II. ch. ix. substituted for the Optative by the Graphic or_ Vivid Construction in Historic Sequence where- ever the Recta or the Primary Sequence took an Indicative. Infinitive, see Table of Contents, 153-162. Epexegetical, 155-6. compared with Latin Supine, 155. after a Comparative with 77 or wsTe, 156. with (is, ws ye, Limi- tative, 156. for Imperative, 2 159. denoting surprise, 160. personal and im- personal passive con- struction, 159. Infinitive, with tou denot- ing a purpose, 162. in Indirect Statement, 178, etc. in Indirect ' Petition, 191. with Verbs of Fearing, 265. with tw, used caus- ally, 279. in Oratio Obliqua, introduced without a Principal Verb, 398. and Finite Mood alternating in Orat. Obliqua, 400. with Adverbial and Relative Sentences in Orat. Obliqua, 400. in Latin Orat. Obliqua, 401. Indefinite Tenses, see Definite. Time, three kinds of, 232. Iterative (Frequentative) Tenses, 151. See Temporal Sen- tences. Limitative or Restrictive Sentences, 274-5. Locative Case, 64-5, 116. M Middle Voice, 8 125-130. (and Active) Verbs. Alphabetical List, 127' 130. Modal Sentences with oirws, ottus jlwJ, 259-262. (1) Fut. Indie, or Fut. Opt., 260. (2) Subj. or Opt., 260. (3) ofj» otw rpdiroj, ef OTto TpOTTQ) for OTTtoS, 261. (4) oirws with av and Subj., 261. (5) With JX17 for ottws jLiij, 261. Moods, see Table of Con- tents, 132, 137. N. Negatives, see Part ILL. Ch. ii., Table of Contents' 1 See Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 167. 2 On the Infinitive as an Imperative see Monro's Homeric Grammar^ p 162. The whole of the chapter (see especially the Infin. as Subject, 157, Accus. with Infin ic8 Origin and History of Infinitive, 163), is worth careful perusal. "' ' 3 For the Middle and its uses, see Monro's Homeric Grammar, p. 7. The Passive has grown out of the Middle, in fact was originally one of the uses of the Middle Digitized by Microsoft® ENGLISH INDEX: 427 Neuter Plural, with Verb Singular, 15. Plural, with Verb Plu- ral, 15. Singular Predicate, with Plural Subject, 15. Pronoun, (Adj. or Adv.) with Gen. (like Lat. paul- lum sapientiae), 85. Nominative Case, 65. with Infinitive, 13, 158, 179. with Participle, 187. Object, Direct and Remote, 5- Sentence, 252, foot- note. Optative Mood — Introductory Note, 132. in Independent Sen- tences, 135, etc. A. Denoting a Wish (an Exhortation, Command, or Pro- hibition). B. Deliberative Ques- tions. in the Indirect State- ment, 181. in the Indirect Ques- tion, 188. in Deliberative In- direct Questions, 190. in the Indirect Peti- tion (Fut. Opt.), 191, 262. in Conditional Sen- tences, see Part II. ch. ii. (a.) In Future Condi- tions. (£.) In General or Fre- quentative Past Con- ditions. in Temporal Sentences, denoting Indefinite Time (which is of three kinds), see Part II. ch..iii. in Concessive Sen- tences with et k tive, 164. - with Verbs of Percep^ tion, Emotion, etc., 170. etc. in Indirect Statement, 187, etc. Conditional Protasis. 224. Conditional Apodosis. 227. Temporal, 247-8. Concessive, 249. Final, 258. Causal, 278. Passive Voice, 130-1. Voice, in Greek and Latin, 130. Perception, Verbs of, with Participle, 186. ( Verbs with on, or m t 187. Verbs with Ace. and Gen., 88. Verbs with Preposi- tion, 89. Verbs with Adjectives and Adverbs denoting Perception in Gen., 100. Verbs with fiij, and Infin., 353. Verbs with /«j, and Particip., 354- See 3&4- Perfect Tense, uses of, 144. Person, 2d pers. sing., used impersonally, 22. Petition Indirect, 191-2. Plural for Singular, 21-2. Wish, 280. used in Primary Se- quence, 256. 1 On Relative Sentence^, see Momo'sHoffi eric Grammar, Predicate, 1, 13^ contrasted with Attributive, and Ap- position, 5. Supplemen- tary, 2, 22 ; Oblique or Dependent, 43-5. agreement of, with several Subjects, 16-18, with Article, 37. Prepositions, see Table of Contents, Part III., 286, etc. Quasi Prepositions, 288, 301-2, 306. Present Tense, uses of, 142. Principal and Subordinate, see Sentence. Promising, see Hoping. Pronouns, see Table of Con- tents, Part I. ch. iii. , 47-63- Personal, for Reflex- ive, 48. - Possessive, for a Geni- tive Subjective, or Objec- tive, 49. in Gen., agreeing with a Personal Pronoun im- plied in the Possessive, 49. Reflexive, for Recipro- cal, 50. as antecedent to the Relative, 52, n. 4, 55, n. 1. Protasis and Apodosis, meanings of, 195, footnote. Q- Questions, Indirect, 188. — — Indirect, Deliberative, 190-1. Deliberative, in Subj. and Opt. , 134-6. R. Recta and Obliqua, 10. Relative Sentences,9,284-5. 1 Restrictive, see Limitative. S. Schema Pindaricum, 16. Sentence, parts of, 1. Simple and Compound, 5- Principal and Sub- ordinate, 6. Co-ordinate, 7. Subordinate classified, 7-10. Sequence of Moods, 138. Singular for Plural, 18. Statement, Indirect, see Table of Contents, 178, 187. "bW^W^oiZm 428 GREEK INDEX. denoting Indefinite Time (which is of three kinds), (see Part II. ch. iii.). Subjunctive, in Concessive Sentences with edv /cat, /cat edV, 250. in Final Sentences of Primary Sequence (see Part II. ch. v.) in Modal Sentences with on-us, etc., as a rarer and variant construction, 260. with Verbs of Fearing, etc., 263, etc. ■ alternating with Opta- tive, 182-184 (see Com- pound Sentence and Oratio Obliqua passim, and 254, «. 1). Substituted, ^ by the Graphic or Vivid Construc- tion, for the Optative in Historic Sequence where- ever the Recta or the Pri- mary Sequence took a Sub- junctive, see Graphic. Subdirect and Suboblique, 11, 389 (and Orat. Obi., passim). Subjunctive J — ■ Introductory Note,i32. in Independent Sen- tences, 134, 135. A. In Exhortations. B. In Prohibitions. C. In Deliberative Questions. D. Denoting a future possibility (a very rare Attic construc- tion). in Deliberative Indirect Questions, 190. in Indefinite Sentences with av, 194. in Conditional Ques- tions (see Part II. ch. ii.). (a.) In Future Condi- tions. (&.) In General or Fre- quentative Present Conditions. — in Temporal Sentences 1 1 On the Subjunctive and Optative see Monro's Homeric Grammar (Subjunctive in Principal Clauses, 196 ; in Subordinate Clauses, 201 ; Optative in Simple Sentences, 215 ; in Subordinate, 219 ; History of Subjunctive and Optative, 229, etc.). Substantive used as Adjec- tive or Attributive, 23. Superlative and Compara- tive, 120-123. Swearing and Witnessing, Verbs of, take /xij, 353, ». 4, (see 352). T. Temporal Sentences, see Table of Contents, Part II., ch. iii., 232-248. Tenses, see Table of Con- tents, Part I. ch. vii., 138-152. Time in the Moods, 139. Tmesis, 288. Transitive Verbs become Intransitive, 124. V. Vocative, 80. Voices, see Table of Con- tents, 124-131. W. Wish, expressions of. 280-3. GREEK INDEX. The numbers refer to the pages of the book. A privative, Adjectives compounded with, take a Gen., e.g. afxvrjfj.mv, avrJKOos, 98, 103. ayaBov (e5, kclkov, etc.), Aiyw, 8p5>, etc., with double Ace, 72 (for Pas- sive forms, see 73, n. 2). iydWofxai, with Dat., 112. dyafiat., with Gen., 94. ayai'aKTto, with Dat., 117. dyetv X €l p°S> 87. a.yvo<>, with Gen. , 103. aSektpos, with Gen. or Dat., , IIQ> afiiKw, with double Ace, , 72- „ Adip/wi/ ttoKk;, 81. dflujLLw, with Dat., 112. aiSovfiai, with Ace, 75. oupu, with Gen. of Charge, ,95- tx.iaxvvofi.ai,, with Ace, 75. — with Dat., 112. — with Infin., 155, 172. — with fxri, 264. alvSavofMLi, with Gen., 86. — with Particip., 169, 175, , l8 „ 6 ' alriSifxaL, with Gen. of Charge, g5. ^ amokovOos, with Gen. or Dat., 119. aKoKov8Si, with Dat., 118, a-K.ovto, 6.Kp0ti>iuxi> with w Gen., 86. 0A1?, with Gen., 82. aAwTKo/Aai, with Gen. of charge, 95. aAAos, oAAotos, with Gen., 103. aAAos, meaning &esidvs, 62. Digitized by Microsoft® 6 aAAoj, meaning in general, . 6 3" ., aAAos bo-os, aAAos etns, 60. aAAdrpios, Dat. or Gen., 79, "9- . Ajua, quasi-Prep., 306. a/xa, with Dat., 119. afxaprdvoi, with Gen., 86. dfxeCfSofiat, with Gen., 93. d/xeXci, with Gen., 87. afxvva, with Dat., 116. ajuvi/ojuat, with Ace, 76. afxvvto and afJ.vvofJ.ai, 129. afitftt, Prep., 317-319. afj.tfn4vwfu, with double Ace, 72. a.fiLo-{3r}Ttti, with Gen and Dat., 117, 118. — withfiij, fiy) ov, 365. *Av, see Part II., ch. ii., Table of Contents, 193- 231. GREEK INDEX. 429 "&.v 7 with Impen. and Aor. Indie, denoting a re- peated act, 151. — with. Aor. Infin., after Verbs of hoping, etc., 181. — with Infin.; in Indirect Statement, 181. — with Optat. , in Indirect Statement, 185. — with Particip., in In- direct Statement, 187. — with Aor. Indie, not denoting an unfulfilled condition, 216. — omitted with the Subj. , in Subordinate Sentences, 245- — retained with the Optat. in Subordinate Sentences, 246. — with Final Sentences, 2S5- „ - with o7rai9 Modal, 261, — with wore Consecutive 272, «. 2. 'Avd, Prep., 291, 292. avayKa^bj, with double Ace. , . 73- „ . eti/ayKatos, construction of, , *&• , , , avap.Lp.vyjO'Kfo Tiva tl ana nva twos, 73, n. 3. Avev, 301. avrjp=Ti$, with Gen., 83. avTexfo, with Dat., 118. awTevojuaL, with Gen., 86. 'Am, Prep., 294. avTi\4y(o p.r\ and p.r) ov, 365- avmroLSt, with double Ace, 72. ai*Ticrrpo(pos, with Gen. or Dat., 119. avvrta, with Particip., 172. a£ios, construction of, 159. afiw, with Gen., 93, 103. airayopevb) (aireiirov) prf, fir) ov, 365. airaWdtra-oi, -Ofiai, with Gen., 99. airai/Tto, with Dat., 118. airei6S>, with Dat., 116. airexOovofLai, with Dat., 117. aTre'xw, with Gen., 99. aTre'xo/xat 1*1), M ov, 363. aviirrSt, with Dat., 116. — (airtarttaf irapexeu) pA, fir} ov, 264, 365- Atto, Prep., 295-297. diroSexofJ-ai. tclvto. twos, 88. ctTroSiSpacTKCo, with Ace, 75. diroSC&op.a.L, with Gen., §3. a'u-oKft/ii'w, with Particip., 172. aTTOtcpvirTOfxat p.y), p.-/} ov, airo\avtii tl twos, 85, 86. aVoAuojiuu p;yj, fiT) ov, 365. aVopia, with Gen., 82. oi7ro(rrepw, with double Ace, 72. a7TOCTTpe0CO fMJ, jLLTJ OV, 365. aTroTpe'ww, with Gen., 100. dLTroTuvyai'ft), with Gen., t 86. a7ro^ev7u, with Gen. (of charge), 95. a.itTop.a.1, with Gen., 86. dpjj-yw, (poet.), with Dat., , II6 - apKw, dpKel, construction, apfov/xat jinj and p-ij ou, 365. apTi, with Present, 143, apxt, constructions, 172, 174. > Set, constructions, 117. Set oirtt)?, 261, «. 8. fievVepos, Sevrepaios, with Gen. ,97. Atdi, Prep., 307-310. Bia/3aAAw, with double Ace. , 72. 8taAAdo"o"fti Tiva. tlvl, 105. oi.aAt'yo/jiat, with Dat., 109, Il8. Bta.vip.bi, with Ace and Dat., 105. SiairAeto, with Ace, 75. Sicupepta, with Gen., 97. Sieuf.epop.ai, with Dat., 98, 109. ot«(/>epoi'Tw5 e'xw, with Gen. , 97. 103. ^ 5ta, with Gen., 87. StuKu), with Gen. of charge (6 SititKoiv), 95. Soieei, SokS), construction of, 117, 159- Svoti' Bdrepov, etc., 26. 6v(7e'pa)5, with Gen., 103. Sugtvovs, with Dat., 119. eaV, jtf^ Conditional and Concessive Sentences. — never Interrogative, 191, footnote, 207. eavrov, for 1st and 2d pers., 50. _ — Reciprocal, 50. eyyus, with Gen and Dat., , "9- G.yyybip.a.1, with p.r} and Infin., 353. 43° GREEK INDEX. eyw (otJ) for avTo?, as Sub- ject of Infin., 180. eyKokdi, with Dat , 117. eyKparrjs, with Gen., 103. efiet, without av, 144, 218. el. See Conditional and Concessive Sentences. — Interrogative. See In- direct Question. — Interrogative, with Subj. , 291. — Interrogative, with Verbs of Fearing, 266. — for em with Verbs of Emotion, 186. — with Subj., 245. et (edv) K.aC, /cat et (ear), ei t elydp, eit?e, with Wishes, 280-283. el Se ju.7), 208. el (edv )=si forte, 208. et edv, in Virtual Obliqua, , 40S- et ou, 347, 358, 359. earep (edvirep), quasi con- cessive, 250. elkos %v (without av), see J&tt, _ eiKWj with Gen., 99, Gen. or ^ Dat., xo6. etp.t, with Gen., go. elpytti, with Gen., 99. — /«?> M °"j 365* Ets, Prep. 292. et? StSaovcdAou, AtSou, etc., *?*: , et? dVijp, with Superlative, * I2 3* etcreiju-i, with Ace, 75. 'Ek, 'E£, Prep., 297. cieari, 301. e/cStSpdovcw, with Ace. , 75. CK/Stupo), with Gen., 100. cKecVo?, uses of, 52. e/CTTA?j(rcrop.at, etc., with Ace, 75. eXarrw, eAdTTOV/Ltai, with _ Gen., 98. ^ eAeuflepos, 6Aeu0epcT>, with Gen., 98, 99, 103. eAAHnfc, with Gen., 113. eAKoy ouracrat, etc., 69. 1 ep.p.oi/os(ep.p.eVw), with Dat., eju,TrA.eco?, with Gen., 82. ep.7retpos (diretpos), with Gen., 103. ep.TroSi£oiJi.ai(ep.iTcSu>v elvai), Dat. 116. — p.»j, p.)) ou, 365. ep.(/>vTO?, with Dat., 119. 'Ei>, Prep., 302. eV, when used with Dat. of Time, 115. eWi/nos, with Gen. or Dat. , , *°3- evSvio (e/e5vw), with double Ace, 72. eveKa, eW/eei', 301. ivvoS) jLi], ju.i] oi', 264. cvTpeirOfiai, with Gen., 87. evTvyxdvoi, with Dat., 109, 118. e£ OTOV TpOTTOV, 26l. e^t, with Gen., 87. — with p-ij and Infin., 353. epioTti (■qpop-jjp), with double Ace, 72. etrOtw, with Gen., 84. eo"Tti> oi, eitTLV oil, eVtoi., 60. eVepos, with Gen. ,97, 103. euSatjxoi>i without dr, 144, 21S. exp.ai, with Gen., 97-98; with Dat, in. Oappia, with Ace, 75. (9av/j.d£u), with Gen., 94. (?aup.apovS) } with Gen., 87. Ketpevdai, with Dat., 107. Ke\euo>, with Ace. and Dat. also with Ace. and Inf., 116. k€v6$, with Gen., 82. KGiftakjcuov (denique t ad summam\ 26. kCv8vv6$ eori /jtij, juif 'ov, 264. Ktxorco, with Ace, 86. kXvco TauTa crou, 88. Kotvds, with Gen. or Dat, 79, 119. -Ko?, Adjectives ending in, with Gen.j 113. KQLviavS>, with Gen. and Dat. 84. KparS), with Ace. and Gen., 87, 97, 98. K(*u7TTto, with double Ace, 72. Kvptos, with Gen., 103. KvpSt. with Gen., 86, 87 ; with Particip. (poet.), 173- KQ}kv(o, with double Ace, — fuii w ov, 36s. Xayx* Vft) > with Gen., with Ace, 85 n. 1 ; with Ace and Dat, 116. kap.pdvw, with Gen. and Ace, 87. kap.pdvap.at., with Gen., 86. kav9avofX.au, (and Compds.)i with Gen., 86. kavddvw, with Ace!, 76. kav8av(o } kadiav construc- tions, 173, 174* karpeHbif with Dat., 116. keCtrofiat, with Gen., 98. Aijyw, with Gen.. 99. \oi5opw, with Ace, 73, n. 3. koiSopovp.at, with Dat. 73, «. 3, and 117. A.va-tTeA.ei ( with Dat., 117. M jLtd, and similar words, with Ace, 77- . , _ . - jLta/capt^w, with Gen. (and Ace), §4' itaAXof ■»?, with Compar. and Positive, 121. p-axofiai, .with Dat., 109, ju,etoveKT(o, with Gen., 98. pJket JU.01 tovtov, 87. p.4kei, p,eTap.4kei, Construc- tions of, 89, 117. p.4kei p,ot t jaeAeTW, with OTrtus Modal, 260, 261. jxe'Wco, forming Periphras- tic Future, 140. — 7tws (ti) 011 jU.e'AAa> ; 150. — /mJ, fiij ov, 365. p.ep., with Ace, 117. (i.vrip.(tiv {ap.vrip. TpOTTW for OTTOJS, 261. Oil, oi/K, ovyt, see Part III. ch. ii. (Table of Con- tents), 345, etc. 011 ju.d, with Ace. , 70. ov ft.7}, with Fut. Opt. and Infin., 375. ovb" ei. (eav), Concessive, 230. ovSd (7rep), Concessive, 249. ov, 01, e, Reflexives, 50. oufieis b'sTt? ot>, 59. ovk 016" av el, 203. ofiv, as a Suffix, 58. ovvsko. for on, 185. oSto's, ovrotTL, Relatives, 57- ofiroff, A^ms tu ! 66. outw, in Wishes (sic — ut), 282. opa (Epic and Lyric), final, 253. oi//tju.a0v]s, with Gen., 103. n Ttako.1, with Present, 143. ito.v=quidlibet, 63. ttovto. etvai, 16. Ilapa, Prep. 318-332. — Verbs compounded with, take Dat., 118. jrapafidWbi, Constructions of, 118. irapairAiJo-tos, with Dat., 119 ; Constructions of, no. 7rapacTKevatrTtK6s,withGen. , 103. Trapao-Kevajjw oirws, etc., 260, 261. TrctpaTao-o'oju.ac, with Dat., 118. irapaxcopw, with Gen., gg. iravta (Ace), and Gen., 99 ; iravoju.ai, Gen., 99 ; Travto and iravofiat, with Par- ticip., 163, 170. Tre'irjs, withGen., 82, 103. 7ret0O|U.£U, with Dat., 116. ireCBov and iridov (jxot), 116. 7rep, as a Suffix, 57. Ilepi, Prep., 332-335. — Verbs compounded with, take a Dat. of reference, 7repi/3aAA.o/AA.w, with Gen., 93. ff«9 -yap. aj/ ; 209. Digitized by Microsoft® ■rrias av; in Wishes, 215, 280, etc. a"rj/xetoi> fie, 26. o-tco7r«, with Ace, 76. o-KOTTw el, Interrog., 261 ; ottu?, etc. 260, 261 ; [ty, p.7j ov, 264. a-TTOvSd^ia bntas, etc., 260, 261. o-Tao-ta£w, with Dat., 117. ore pCa-Ko fiat, with Gen., gg. OTetpapovjuai, with Dat., "7; irrox^ofJi.aL, with Gen., 86. o-TparriyS), with Gen., 98. Q-vyyiyvuHTKa}, with Dat. and Gen., 95. o-vyyvoi fx.(av, with Gen., 103. cruyxwpui, with /at} and In- fin- » 353_- o-uKoepov, o-i;/x<£opos (dorip;- (popos), with Dat., 119. o-up-^ovw, with Dat., 117. Su^, Prep., 305. — with Dat. of Circum- stance, 114. o~vv Oeio eiTrelv, 157. Suceo-t?, see Construction kolto. o-i$veo-iv (English Index). — Verbs compounded with, take a Dat., 118. avv^Sto (S«jSw), with Dat., 117. 0-ueaA.A.aWw, with Ace and Dat., 117. wjs oo-o?, etc., 59. vvevQvvos, with Gen. and Dat., 103: umjpeTw, with Dat., 116. vtrtev'yCtjTCLfxai, with Ace, 75. eO, with Gen., 94. evyw SCkvjv, 81 ; with Gen. of charge, 95 ; 6 fyevymv, 95- _ , 0a.vot t with Ace, 76 ; with Particip., 171. 4>QovS) t with Gen., 94 ; with Dat., 117. <|)iAtK(I»s Sidjceijbuu, etc., with Dat. f/jtA66u)pos, with Gen., 103. LAofj.aftris, with Gen., 113. (jjofiovft-a-i, with Ace, 76: with Infin., 153; with/x^, p.rj ou and variant con- structions, 266, etc. $pitF(na t with Ace, 75. ^povTi^io ottos, etc., 260, 261 ; ju.1), jllv] ou, 264. j, |UJ7 ov, 264, 365. (/iuAaf/CTO/xa(, with Ace. 76 ; /xij, fti| ou, 365. 4>vvcu r with Gen., 8c X with Particip., 17a XakenaCvaif x^^TTUff (pe'pw, withDat., 112-117. ;\a/ji^"ojU.at, with Dat., 116. Xapu', quasi- Prep., 302. Xopeva Gcav, 72. XP*J (xpf *i «XpV)i with fii? and ov , 353. XPW, see exprjv. Xpiio-tpof, xwvfo (o-XPW tos)» with Dat, 119. Xpw/i,s eVo? ftrrfii/, and similar phrases, 157. 52, 257 689, 423 49. 16 165, 243 788, 77 100, 82 248, 365 813. 297 112, . 265 285, 347 930. 206 124, . 385 419. 3x8 1030, 343 Z62, 26 481, 242 X067, 244 164, X02 627, 367 1258, 422 182, 92 650, 337 1379. 327 =97. 251 786, 369 1400, 3 2 S 319. XIX 830, 318 1438, 40 327, 420 865, 154 1439, . 21 331, 74 898, 421 1487, 301 337. 301 904. 74 Digitized by Microsoft® TABLE OF REFERENCES. 435 LINE 987, i°47i PAGE 93 136 Septem ad Thebas. 4S1, 5»3. 553, 672, 68i, 821, 843. '5, 594, 62 ■ 206 ■ 778 289 411 note 341 . 318 Supplies*. 309 74 ANDOCIDES. 1. De Mysteriis. 30, 180 38, 43, 50, 54, 57, 58, 59, 61, 63, 101, • 5°, 4°7 244, 256 41 223 . 224 218 404 387 353 II. De Reditu. IO, 4' 12, . 223 41, ill. De Pace. 362 ANTIPHON. H. Teiral. B. 0. I, > 63 2, 41. 48 4, 6, . 369 5, • 225 5, > 379 6, 214 10, 11, 45 IV. Tetral. T. a. 4, 223 6, 352 y. De Caede Herodis. 1 and passing, . 45 2, 415 7, 122 11, 50 13, 217 , 219 14, 357 15, 205 16, 223 LINE 17, 19, 21, =4, 25, 26, 90, 91, 92, PAGE 122, 225 225 • 378 2l8 244, 250 397 213 225 225 VI. De Choreuta. M. 15. 29, 209 214 206 ARISTOPHANES. Ackartiians. 57. 94, 106, 166, 196, 364, 384, 418, 466, 474, 562, 675, 761, 959, 99i> 1000, 1 001, 1048, 1055, 1078, 1180, 54, 195, 461, 964, 105, "5. 236, 493i 495, 650, 99i, 999, 112, 158, Aves. Ecclesiazusae. 41 41 250 56 386 88 58 123 56 225 58 219 120 213 56 215 160 ,342 52 214 122 334 137 378 373 244 301 349 16 265 256 383 385 378 Equites. 265, L vistr. h'ubes. 459, 917, 5. 77i 118, 153, 296, =99, 34i, 345, 367, 490, 505, 520, 692, 698, 788, 792, 819, 876, 1037, 1301, 1368, 438, "33, "5i. 456, 462, 5°4, 522, 526, 609, 636, 643, 830, 866, 955, M59, 469, 283, 397, 774, "79, « DEMOSTHENES. Olynthiac I. 15, 25, . . . 311 Pluttts. Ranae. Thesm. Vespae. * The references are to the pages of Reiske's edition, 1770. The numbers in brackets are the references as given in the text of this Grammar, in compiling which different editions of Demosthenes have been used. Some of the examples, about eighteen, bor- rowed from other books, have not been verified in Reiske. They are omitted m this list, but not in the text, as they are evidently authentic, and useful. Digitized by Microsoft® 436 TABLE OF REFERENCES. LINE PAGE LINE PAGE LINE PAGE Olyntkiac II. 24, 14 [2, 22], 330 381. S. • 381, IO, . 143 160 EURIPIDES. 388,15, . . . 398 Alcestis. Olynthiac ill. 391, 9 [n], 219 18, 300 343 29, 22 [same construction 395. 8 [§ 190], . 206 I50, as in text], Philippic I. 40, 1 [PhiL i. 1], . 70 239 418, 13, . 434. 6, . . . In Lepiinem. 75 266 346, 662, 671, 690, 341 172 221 314 42, 4, . 44, 12 [Phil. i. 44], 320 224 460, 2 [20, 10], 470, 26, . 75 380 741. 755. 94 22Z 45, 1 [Phil. i. 18], . 206 478, 25 [20, 73], 313 45, 11 [iv. 19], 49, 14 [Phil. 1. 9], . 108 43 In Midiam. 134. 168, 220, Andromache. AQ 51, 27 [Phil. i. 10], 54, 20 [Phil. i. 54], 90 150 527. 3. • • ■ 528, 16, . 530, 21 [21, 51], 321 339 209 l8, 52 416 De Pace. 582, 25, . 206 441. 341 61, 17 [de Pace iv.] 76 In Androtionem. 700, 797. 377 386 Philippic II. 596, 17, . 257 946, 1077, 114 377 66, 12 [Phil. ii. 66], 255 In Aristocratem. 1251, 307 De Chersonese. 660, 7 [23, 120], 16 Bacchae. 107, 8 (viii. 70), 331 In Timocratem. 1, 7> Philippic in. 734. 2 [24, 107], 734. 5 [37. 28], 278 34 5. =9. 71 74 112, 7, . 219 763. '5 b4. 203], . 76 70, 422 119. 8 [9, 31], . . 23 124, 19 [same construction In Arisiogit. 1. 142, 156, 415 34 2 as in text], 314 773. '. • 261 183, 422 129, 19 [129, 72], 130, 14, . 17 265 In Aphobum 1. 250, 270, 74 35o Philippic iv. 815, 11, . 816, 12, . 313 325 =77. 331. 304 287 "4i. 3 tii I4i]> 265 822, 8, . . . 325 34=. 386 De Rhod. Libertat. 834, 23, . 229 343. 757. 847. 374 322 71 197, 8, . . . 359 In Aphobum 11. Pro Megalop. 837. 13 tnj, . 841, 17, . 57 2 230 1039, "34. 323 114 202, 23, . 403 842, 9, 282 1263, 350 207, 4, . . . 261 Pro Phano in Aphob. 1288, 1312, 1353. 348 218 71 De Corona. {Aphob. in.) 229, 16 [21, 26], 331 849, 24, . 257 1368, 3 2 3 236, 10 [12], 260 242, 10 [242], . 224 In Onetor. A. Cyclops. =43. 17, • "5 865, 24, . 246 I20, 375 246, 10, . 41 869, 9, . ; . 405 13*. J 37 268, 28 [18, 124], . I3S 870, 24, . 388 595. 262 269, 19 [18, 127] 23 274, 28, . 207 In Siephanum. Electra. 278, 15 [21, 117], 24 1113, 4 [45, 38], 164 231. z 5 279, 18, . 288, 29, . 3=3 323 In Polyclem. 369, 939. 377 62 292, 21, . 304 1206, 12 [Meid.], 206 io 35, 16 30I, I, . . . 77 In Cononem. 1061, 281 30I, 27 [l8, 220] 313, 6, . . . 39 261 1266,2, . 3S9 1 165, 377 De Pais. Legal. In Neaeram. 580, 73°. Hecuba. 343, 19 l>9> 8], 106 1360, 20 [viii. 70], . 331 318 272 372, 1, . 267 Epitaphiutn. 836. 280 379. 7. 368 "397. 1, • . 299 1085, in Digitized by Microsoft® TABLE OF REFERENCES. 437 LINE PAGE MNE PAGE "38, • 218 257 Orestes. "54. . 344 263, 369 1=75, 147 380, . . 54 Helena. 418, 497, 18 101 107, 360 529, , 23 176, 4°3 622, t t 341 8=5, 206 680, 249 885, 93 93 6 , 172 1358, . 16 1098, 25 37, 13^, Heracleidae. 306 24 1320, 1593, 149 211, 228 Phoenissai 179. 243 403 9 2 , 267, 370 248, . 265 518, 3 J 9 482, • 355 710, 169 699, ... 23 838, 23 800, 23 1215, 211 97i. . 304 12x6, 228 Hercules Furens. 1357, 360 159°, 375 1054, 205 1621, 212 1435. Hippolyttts. 250 1624, Rhesus. 249 213. 386 5, 131 407. 280 4'5> 25 49 s . 386 499, . 372 Supplices fob, 372 484, . 33o 6 59, . . . 13 897, . 836 701, • 339 1066, , 37i> 386 1 103, 22 1410, • 280 Troades I4=S, 107 178, . 370 1601, ■ 386 214, . 254 Ion. 662, . 55 347, 359 73S, 818, • 24 332 672, • . 4°3 905, . • 176 1074, 1523, : : : 75 267 970, • 3S4 Iphigenia in Aul ISAEUS 436, . 171 III. De Pyrrhi Hered. 489, 754, . ■ * 244 292 32, ■ ■ 107 1025, . 55 v. De Dicaeog. Hered. J047, 77 26, 74 Iphigenia in Taur. VI. De Philoct. Hered. 534, 71 6, 20 1203, 137 1371, 2S9 VII . De Ciron. Hered. Medea. 9, , 357 — £g^_ 347 297 24, 374 216, 233, 334, 627, 753, 93 82 315 58 1 15, 1S0CRATES. A d Demonicum. 60 1018, 1151, 1271, 112 374 135 19, IV. Pancgyricus. 242, 406 v. Philippus. vi. Archidamus. 13, 269 24, 122 25 [120], . . 206 26, 242 89, 26 107 [138 a], . . 212 vii, Areopagiticus. 64 [152 d], . . 315 viii. De Pace. xi4j ... 321 ix. Evagoras. 74, 3 2 9 x. Helenas Laud. 28, . . 99 47, ■ • 368 xii. Panathenaicus. 97, 20 xv. A ntid. s. ve de Permu- tations. LYSIAS. vn. 27, xii. 44, 4S, 73. 74, xiii. 83, xix. 39, .. 49, xxii. 4, 18, xxv. 27, xxvii. 16, f 262 380 270 261 250 396 88 97 59 245 180 30 351 62 PLATO. Apology. i. 17 A, . . 184 17 B, 62, 222, 312, 419 17 c, ^20 17 D, 2l6 320 11. 18 A, 95, 159 18 B, 74 18 C, 37 18 D, •44 210 111. 19 B, 422 I9C, 2«0 ig D, 210, 414 419 IV 19 E, 20 A, * 22 IO9 2e2 Digitized by Microsoft® 438 TABLE OF REFERENCES. LINE PAGE LINE PAGE LINE PAGE 20 B, • 29. 215, 22 3 xxxii. 40 d, . 204 835 D, '7 20 C, 216 40 E, 209 895 B, . 277 V. 20 E, 44, 250. 3 2 5 41 A, . .3 2 5 948C, . 19 21 A, 68 xxxiii. 42 a (in text xxxii. )j 942C, 135 VI. 21 B, 187, 412 258 Lysis. 21 D, 21 E, 225, 249 419 Cratylus. 212 D, 368 Vil. 22 A, 68 393C, 370 216 C, 267 22 B(in text viii.), 151 43° D, 37° 2l8 D, 267 22 c (in viii. 22D, 22 E, ix. 23 A, 23 B, xii. 25 B, text vi.), 13 . . 187 270 209 221 2°3> 25°, 347 iii. 44 iv. 44 45 45 v. 45 Crita. D, E, A, B, D, 257 417 159 191, 270 129 70 A, 70 C, 73 B , 90 E, Meno. 370 59 70 34' 2 5 c> 422 ix. 46 c, 208, 369 Phaedo. xiii. 25 c, . . 419 25 D, . . 270 xiv. 26 D, . 360 26 E, . 414 XV. 27 D, . . 214 xvi. 28 b (in text xv.), 264, 383 xi. 50 B, xii. 50 c, 50 D, 51 A, xv. 53 d, xvi. 54 B, 379 21T, 228 335 174 205 120 58 E, 60 C, 61 B, 62 B, 68 B, 69 A, 278 148 369 416 211 340 28 c, 236 Eulhydemtts. 70 A, 264, 370 xvii. 28 d, 28 E, . 212, 224 234, 259 299 B, 302 C, 304 E, 3°7 B, 228 16 72 C, 77 b( in text 77 6), 402 242 29 A, 29 B, 29 C, 100 413 165, 352 205, 2ij ■ 257 3S0 84 B, 84 C, 251, 370 383 338 29 d (in text xviii.), 2 6 Euthyphrc 84 E, 267 3°b, 35' 12 D, 216 85 A, 91, 100 30 c, 30 c (in text 205 xxix.), 25 14 C, 217 87 E, 88 A, 136 38, 242 xviii. 30 a, 251 Gorgias. 93 B (Phaedr. in 3° c, 421 textj, 25 30 D, i°5. 156 457 D, 274, 347 265 95 A, 399 3 r A i 204, 210 457 E, 98 A, 414 xix. 31 D, 369 459 D. 349 26 98 D, 353 32 A, 251 , 278, 421 477, I02 D, 278 XX. 32 A, 68 479C, 271 108 E, 366 32 b (in text xxiiiA 479 D, 91 2g8j 316 489, 90 Phaedrus. xxi. 32 D, 203 495 D, 262 227 B, 205 33 A i 210 499, 25 228 D, 343 33 b, 221 506 B, 406 229 A, 40 xxii. 33 c, 420 514 A, 48 239 D, 75 33 d, 219 5t6 E, 309 242 C Phaedo], 16 33 E > 40 Laches. 260 B, 23 34 A > ... 34 D > xxill. 34 C, 219 422 250. 316 180 C, 180 E, 251 24 279 A, Pliilebus. 335 34 D, 203 195 A, 301 13 A, 264, 370 35 A, 236 196, 37° 27 E, 42 xxiv. 35 b, 35 c, 301 352 Leges. Politicits. XXV. 36 A, 3So 64O D, 419 276C xal et], . 251 xxvi. 36 c, 243 679C, 21 303 A, 103 xxvii. 37 u, 83 698 C, »3 303 D, 32 xxviii. 38 a, 205 701 D, 301 33 B, ■ 39? 7!5E, 122 Protagoras 39 A, 22J ,272, 410 719 E, 205 309 D, 70 39C( e KO.L in text 721 A, 81 3'3 c. 262 Kal ei), 251 726 A, 316 320 A, 303 \xxi. 39 e, 237, 369 73i c, 373 321 A, 261 40 B, 234 737 E, 71 322 D, 328 41 E, 377 809 E, 335 323C, 362 Digitized by Microsoft® TABLE OF REFERENCES. 439 LINE PAGE LINE PAGE LINE 326 D, 24 615 D, 205 586, 329 B, 206 616 C, 299 593, 336 D, 353 632, 352 D, 367 Sophistes. 659, 358 B, . 325 235 A, 267 665, 254 A, 38 674, Republic. 680, 32g B, 100 Symposium. 690, 337 E, 192 175 A, 374 692, 338 D, . 24 179 B, 328 715, 339 E . • 192 185 E, . 251 7^5, 344 D . • 45 186 B, . 22 728, 345 E, . 177 187 D, . 255 767, 348 E, 186 189, 407 803, 352 c, 136 213 D, 261 807, 354 a and B, 32 222 A, 205 816, 358 B, 208 828, 359 c > 213. 403 Tkeaetetus. 840, 360 B, 274 145. 37° 960, 360 D, 121 145 B. 267 1094, 362 D, 55 155 A, 238 1114, 362 d (0 in tex 0, 136 169 B, 21 1121, 393 e, 256 183 E, 264 "3 1 , 398 a, 3" I90 A, 377 1231, 404 B, 250 1242, 405 A, • 3S5 Ti'maeus. 1264, 406 C, 25 25 D, 3 11 1268, 408 C, 211 31 B, 145 1274, 412 A, 150 86 D, 23 1275, 416 D, 424 D, 362 1340, 86 S03 ■■•',■: ' : 1418, 427 E, 363 Azizs. A 428 C, 25 434 B, 112 6, 357 9, 436 D, 404 27, 114 23, . 451 A. 265, 37° 42, 49 25, 26, 28, 3D, 459 K > 101 44, 71 461 B, 463 D, 75 102 Si. 70, 322 369 465 B, . 470 A, 470 B, 383 75, 372 41, 101 122, 249 42, 324 123, 277 43, 48, • 50, 69, . 472 b and c, 475 «. ■ 478 11, . 494 E, • 499 ». • 5" A, 5'7 A, 518 c, 539 A, 545 A (in text 549 E, • 562 c, . 367 A, 574 E, 579 B , 579 B , • 590 A, 591 B, 606 B, 607 c, 6lO A, 38 321 21 153, 263, 271, 112, 277 226 237 229 102, 373 343 272, 275, 285, 234 42 92 74, 85, 91, 229, 230 313, 4°5 97, 180 318, 89 100, 261 535),. 38 359, 367, 3 6 3 94 115, 152. 192 377, 323 I 7°, . . 89 255 343 4°3, 434> 47°, 135 250 363 172, 182, 212, 82 . - 85 474, 475, 113, "71 331 223, 234, 314 49 6 , .245 239, 316 25 20 229 53 6 , 54°, 557, 560, 204 367 189 371 242, 244, 260, 263, 265, 6l2 B, 213, 228 564, • 9 1 , 251 614 B, 615 B, 400 407 S67, S72, 192 384 323, 378, PAGE 147, 148 356 415 85 420 151 418 4i3 H7 277 59 367 114, 306 TOO IOI J06 335 4 T 3 3°5 377 337 44 347 277, 377 347 280 347 377 377 123 244 419 171 xo6 418 82 302, 341 261 85 40, 52 154 410 204 420 305 235 271 122 114 71 277 305 120, 295 77 1S5 251, 377 172 356 177 366 155 245 352 Digitized by Microsoft® 44° TABLE OF REFERENCES. LINE PAGE LINE PAGE LINE •PAGE 400, . • 411, 415, 443, 444> 460, . 466, 470, 484, 159 25 238 368 214 176 1 9, 14, 18, 24, =3, lUct "a. 160 422 422 173 250 627, 630, 64O, 668, 676, 677, . 94, 23< 33S . 89, 14; 14. 14' 204, 209 32, 89, 234 679, i8< 106 38, . 277 682, • 1°* 213 43, 184, 385 690, 9 492, 9° 49, "5 705, ix 538, . ■ 546, 73 58, . 257 707, 37 s 66, 106 711, 736, 34 347, 55 1 , 173 72, 4*5 23 298, 42 3°4 84, . 104 742, %i ■ • 43, 323 85, • 104 749, 7 66, . . 23 589, 113 121, etc., 77 42 S9Si 605, 3 2 4 123, 6g, 101 77 1 , 24 . 136 141, 87 782, 360, 3 6 618, IOD 174, "5 8xx, • 9x» xo 619, . 246 183, . 330 817, 9 633, . I02 1 88, 100 875, • 10 675, T>9 193, "5 908, 35 680, . 22, 204 223, 245 920, • 9 68s, 185 244, 347 945, 3° 691, 3°4 248, 147 950, 1 696, 710, ■ 278 264, 299 955, 25 245 267, 236 956, 26 718, 7S 1 , • xoo 269, no 974, x8 62 272, 108 977, 2 755, 35 2 285, 339 979, xo 789, ■ 794, 74 286, 421 996, 7 . 418 293, 236 xooo, 37 877, 413 299, 3°5 X022, 20 884, 204 305, 62 I038, 23 885, 355, 383 3'7, 102, 177 XO52, 37 904, 106 337, 63 1054, 8 908, 302 338, 80 I059, 24 919, 337 344i xoi, 298 I06l, 32 932, 314 3 60 , 250 XO92, 35 957, 299 364, 156 I°9S, xc 973, . 69, 299 369, 4'7 III7, S 994, • • 7° 372, X04 XX22, 2f 997, . . 73 380, 3 6 3 II3I, 2E 1025, 245 381, . . 268 1134, 2J '°33, . . 87 384, 99 1X54, 41 1063, 354 386, 236 XX65, 35 1065, 88 39°, 85 Il66, 3'/ 1068, =93 399, 22 II72, 2; 1080, . . . 160 4°4, 85 Xl80, 3 1084, • • 8 7 413, 67 "95, c X152, 77 423, 234 X2XO, c 1156, 306 424, 88 1214, . • It 1 169, 24 435, 415 I236, 3 «78, 45 447, 99 X262, < 1182, 102 478, 92 I265, 4 1190, 189 479, 99 1274, 1199, 29 496, . 106 1308, X 1200, > . 422 547, 251 1309, 2 1206, 81 549, ■ 1X2 1334, . 12x2, 122 535, 246 1343, 1 1229, . . 85 556, 77 1348, 1 1231, 410 562, 337 1433, 3 1244, 333 571, 93 I4S', 1253, 267, 355, 37° 580, 267 I460, X 1293, 44 604, 215 I476, 1 1326. 377 6X2, 83 1496, 2 Digitized by Microsoft® TABLE OF REFERENCES. 441 Oed. Col. PAGE 79 354 261 373 62 162 63 368 373 373 301 245 .171 36S 2 45 373 36S 62 322 227 356 373 49. 384 271 73 372 373 351 413 245 304 331 39 373 Oed. Tyr. 26, 46, 60, Pkiloctetes. 368, 38! 366, 369 245 368 144 362 251 3°4 154 208 410 380 298 309 302 309 420 207 29S 123 257 257 101 405 44 276 304 LINE 6s, 88, 102, 122, 169, 197. 244, 285, 289, 348. 349. 353. 377. 408, 409. 427. 444. 487. 494. 523. 534. 554. 588, 611, 674. 764, 825, 900, 914. 9'7. 931. 961, 969. 975, 1030, 1079, 1171, 1224, 1289, l=93> 1314. 1363. 1441 389, 545, 577, 631, 687, 817, 978, 1 100, IT22, XI29, "83, J342, Trachiniae. PAGE 311 352 304 356 185 94 71 3°7 151 36S 369 323 359 363 274 277 274 301 418 68 3°i 318 363 375, 385 164 246 255 356 276 245 423 243 281 356 107 19 122 70 147 304 147 353 34° 296 154 295 256, 299 246 418 374. 384 323 102 264 374 211 THUCYDIDES. Book 1. 36, 85, 327 • 85, 273 3. 335 4, 94, 162 293 Digitized by Microsoft® 23. 24, 36, 37. 38, 39. 41, 44. 45, 54. 56, 58, 60, 62, 64, 65, 67, 68, 7°, 7i. 73, 74. 76, 77. 78. 86, 87. 89, 91. 95, 96, 97, 99. TOO, I02, T 03, 104, 107, 109, 112, ' Il6, Il8, I20, 121, 123, 124, 125, 126, 128, J3 1 . 132, 134. 137. "4°, : *i, 3, 4, 5. 15, Book PAGE 31. 34° * I,S 290, 297 326 120 107 101 325 244> 325 , 352 161, 315 "5 120 334 293 15 319 366 298 261 333 244 221 >45 268 166 354. 366 304 35i 339 400 < 59 290, 404 112 60, gi 45 236 276 360 29 170 238, 292 68 166 85, 244 299 121, 347 23 373. 380 168 131, 168 "5, 365 99 242 406 246, 348 . ' 91 314. 330 107 • 85, 191 23 ■ 19. 321 343. 354 442 TABLE OF REFERENCES. LINE PAGE LINE PAGE LINE PAGE 18, . 309 38, . . . 83 50, . . 123,244 20, 115 40, 310 57, 306 21, 277, 4°5 41, 246 59, 405 32. ■ . l62 47, 92 64, 343 36. • 323 60, 92 7°. 255 38, . > . Ill 64, 342 7i, 151, 222, 244 4°i 3IO 66, 268 74, 55 41, 18 7°, 322 75. X2I, 312 49. • IO7, 366 90, 237 77, 52 52, • . 226 102, 310 80, 396, 405 S3. 365 106, 331 81, 34 60, 277 118, 320 87. 362 61, 121 125, 168 92, 3°x 72, 399 128, 261 100, 405 76, . 45 13°, 85. 207 80, 304, 322 Book VIII. 89, . 347 Book v. 1, 37 92, 147 g, x6o 23. 316 93. 256 10, 244 36. 39 95. 105 '7. 76 40, 237 97, 326 32, 175 66, 196, 221 102, 401 33, 92 70, 360 Book III. 34. 35, 320 348 72, 74. 34 326 1, 366 37. 131 85, ■ 3? 10, 237, 322 40, 360 86, • 34, 5 12, 121 46, 90 89, . '3. 305, 322 50, 348 108, 365. ?& 14. 271 55, 109 15, 31 67, 373 XENOPHON. 22, 254 74, 20 29, 107, 244 103, 310 Anabasis. 32, 406 105, 265 i. 1, 1, . . . 20 37, 120 in, 76 1, 3. ■ 147, 184 39, 362, 369 1, 10, 227 40, 224 Book VI. 2, 2, . 406 41, 246 4, 245 2, 5, ■ 255 46, 123 5. 306 2, 8, . 343 49, 273 21, 245 2, 15, 321 S3, 264, 267, 370 32, 342 2, 21, 186, 405 S4, . 51, 210 34, 160, 320, 333 2, 23, 15 55, 209 37. 331 2, 31, 21 59. 64, . . 69, • 337 39. 58, 105 3. 17, 404 in 49. 407 4, 7. • 405 299 50. 259 4, 20, 226, 272 74. 219 54. 261 5. 5, • 62 75, 366 58, 245 5, 13, 272 81, 298, 362 62, 114, 238 6, 2, . 366 88, 184 76, 75 6, 10, 87 95. 96, ■ • • 348 77, 18 7, 18, 347 299 82, 351 8, 12, 150 103, 271 100, 208 9. 3. • 323 105, 326 Book vil. 9. 10 , ■ 405 Book IV. 9, 20, ■ 337 2, . 331 ii. 1, 4, . 217 1, . 76, 104 10, 297 1, 6, . 19 4, 238 11, 3°4 x, 15. 25 5. 351 17, 255 1, 16, 17 11, 264, 359. 415 21, 60 2, 3, • 362 14, 16, 414 242 22, 23, 76 334 3. «. 3. X3. 367 273 17, • 36 18, 28, 43. 245, 299 • 316 2 9, 296 3. 25, 270 3i, 334 | 4, 22, 163 327 34, 91 ... 5, 13. 20s 29. 39 42, 227 J 111. I, 19, 237 33, 192 47, 412 ' 2, 6,. 259 Digitized by Microsoft® TABLE OF REFERENCES. 443 LINE PAGE LINE PAGE LINE PAGE 2, 29, 242 3,9.- ■ • 74 V. I, 17, • • 301 3, 18, 240 3,18, 240 2, 13, • . 404 4,9,. 81 3,35, 206, 270 . 4, 2, . . . 335 5, 1,. 33° . . 3, 5i, 121 Vl. 4, 12, . . 34 5,7.. 273 IV. 1, 3, . 414 Vll. 1, 8, . . . 251 5, 11, 366 1, 18, 261 1, 34, • 277, 405 S, 16, ■ 291 1, 21, 180 S, 18, 247 2, 25, 257 Memorabilia. . !3, 3, • iv. 2, 6, . 272 40 3, 11, 4, 21, . 271 59 {Apomneitmala). 4, IS, 3Si 5,15, 272 i. 1, 4, . . . 277 4, 23, 75' 5,37, 239 1, 5, . . . 216 4,24, 24 6,8,. 93 2, 6, . . . 246 8, 2,. 379 v. 1, 25, 369 2, 7, . . • 264 8,4.. 18 2, 12, 265 2, 35, • . 121 8,5,- 96 2,35, 3 l6 ' 367 7, 11, • . 104 3, 20, 177 Vlll. X, IO, 396 7, 13, ■ • 363 3, 26, 24 I, IO, II, 407 9, 8,. . . 109 vii. 1, 4, . 248 1,48, 22 iii. 1, 6, . . . 177 3, 13, 399 3,4°. 113 5, 1, • ■ • 37 3, 34, 323 4, 16, 191 5, I7l • 121, 156 6,4,. 76 6,3,- 258 11,1,. . 97 *8, 6, . 309 6, 13, 48 13, 3, . . 121, f272 8, 22, 54 7, 19, 152 IV. 1, 3, . . . 38 Cyropaedia 7, 22, 376 2, 36, . . 17 2, 39, • • 37° 4, 12, . . 207 i. 2, 1, ■ 80 HelUnica. 2, 5, ■ 255 i. 1, 16, 166 6, 7, . . . 402 2, 11, 20 1, 28, 306 7, 2, . . . 397 3, 3.- 278 1, 34, 323 3,9,- 29 6, 32, 371 Agesilaus. 4, 14, 243 .. 7' 5, ■ 390 ii. 15, . . . 107 4, 18, 166 11. 1, 2, . 254 iv. 1, . . . 275 4, 2 °> 272 1, 25, 75 4, 25, 254 2, 7, • 305 Hiero. 5, ", 6,4,- 273 94 2, 13, 3, 11, 398 353 *■ 3, ■ • • 297 .. 6 > l8 > 400 3, 16, 380 Oeconomicus. 11. 1, 4, . . 255 ... 3, 22, 334 1, 21, * 256 111. 1, 28, 306 ii. 9, . . . 261 2, 9, . 114, 405 2, 31, 353 .". 23, . . . 13 2, 22, 83 3, 9, • 260 111. 5, • • ■ 59 3, 13, 339 3, 19, 168 Vll. 3, • • . 71 4, 2, . 321 . 5, 10, 265 viii. 8, . . . 276 4, 7, ■ 147 ■v. 1, 33, 207 x. 1, . . . 41 . 4, 23, 366 1, 41, 58 m. 1, 15, 305 2, 3, • 373 Symposium. 1, 37, 378 4, 5, • 353 .;;■ 3, • • • 367 1, 41, 214 5, 5, • 303 in. 5, . . . 297 2, 3, ■ 85 8, 4, . 13 iv. 5, ■ . . 353 2, 37, • ■ 136 8, 16, . . 256 6, . 277 405 * Misprint, viii. 6. t On 272, r ead Ap. for An. EDINBURGH : T. AND A. CONSTABLE, PRINTERS TO HER MAJESTY. Digitized by Microsoft® BY THE SAME AUTHOR. AN ELEMENTARY GREEK SYNTAX. Crown 8vo, 2s. HOMERIC GRAMMAR. For the use of Upper Forms in Schools. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. LONDON, NEW YORK, AND BOMBAY Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft® Digitized by Microsoft®